Initial revision

113 files changed, 19774 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/win/README b/win/README
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..17a488c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/README
@@ -0,0 +1,124 @@
+Tk 8.0p2 for Windows
+
+by Scott Stanton
+Sun Microsystems Laboratories
+scott.stanton@eng.sun.com
+
+SCCS: @(#) README 1.20 97/11/21 15:17:54
+
+1. Introduction
+---------------
+
+This is the directory where you configure and compile the Windows
+version of Tk.  This directory also contains source files for Tk
+that are specific to Microsoft Windows.  The rest of this file
+contains information specific to the Windows version of Tk.
+
+2. Distribution notes
+---------------------
+
+Tk 8.0 for Windows is distributed in binary form in addition to the
+common source release.  The binary distribution is a self-extracting
+archive with a built-in installation script.
+
+Look for the binary release in the same location as the source release
+(ftp.smli.com:/pub/tcl or any of the mirror sites).  For most users,
+the binary release will be much easier to install and use.  You only
+need the source release if you plan to modify the core of Tcl, or if
+you need to compile with a different compiler.  With the addition of
+the dynamic loading interface, it is no longer necessary to have the
+source distribution in order to build and use extensions.
+
+3. Compiling Tk
+----------------
+
+In order to compile Tk for Windows, you need the following items:
+
+	Tcl 8.0 Source Distribution (plus any patches)
+	Tk 8.0 Source Distribution (plus any patches)
+
+	The latest Win32 SDK header files
+
+	Borland C++ 4.5 or later (32-bit compiler)
+	  or
+	Visual C++ 2.x or later
+	
+
+In the "win" subdirectory of the source release, you will find two
+files called "makefile.bc" and "makefile.vc".  These are the makefiles
+for the Borland and Visual C++ compilers respectively.  You should
+copy the appropriate one to "makefile" and update the paths at the top
+of the file to reflect your system configuration.  Now you can use
+"make" (or "nmake" for VC++) to build the tk libraries and the wish
+executable.
+
+In order to use the binaries generated by these makefiles, you will
+need to place the Tk script library files someplace where Tk can
+find them.  Tk looks in one of two places for the library files:
+
+	1) The environment variable "TK_LIBRARY".
+
+	2) In the lib\tk8.0 directory under the Tcl installation directory
+	   as specified in the registry:
+
+		For Windows NT & 95:
+		    HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Sun\Tcl\8.0
+			Value Name is "Root"
+
+		For Win32s:
+		    HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\SOFTWARE\Sun\Tcl\8.0\
+
+	2) Relative to the directory containing the current .exe.
+	    Tk will look for a directory "..\lib\tk8.0" relative to the
+	    directory containing the currently running .exe.
+
+Note that in order to run wish80.exe, you must ensure that tcl80.dll,
+tclpip80.dll (plus tcl1680.dll under Win32s), and tk80.dll are on your
+path, in the system directory, or in the directory containing
+wish80.exe.
+
+4. Test suite
+-------------
+
+The Windows version of Tk does not pass many of the tests in the test
+suite.  This is primarily due to dependencies in the test suite on the
+size of particular X fonts, and other X related features as well as
+problems with "exec".  We will be working to develop a more general
+test suite for Tk under Windows, but for now, you will not be able to
+pass many of the tests.
+
+5. Known Bugs
+-------------
+
+Here is the current list of known bugs/missing features for the
+Windows beta version of Tk:
+
+- There is no support for custom cursors/application icons.  The core
+  set of X cursors is supported, although you cannot change their color.
+- Stippling of arcs isn't implemented yet.
+- Some "wm" functions don't map to Windows and aren't implemented;
+  others should map, but just aren't implemented.  The worst offenders
+  are the icon manipulation routines.
+- Under Win32s, you can only start one instance of Wish at a time.
+- Color management on some displays doesn't work properly resulting in
+  Tk switching to monochrome mode.
+- Tk seems to fail to draw anything on some Matrox Millenium cards.
+- Send and winfo interps are not currently supported
+- Printing does not work for images (e.g. GIF) on a canvas.
+- Tk_dialog appears in the upper left corner.  This is a symptom of a
+  larger problem with "wm geometry" when applied to unmapped or
+  iconified windows.
+- Some keys don't work on international keyboards.
+- Grabs do not affect native menus or the title bar.
+- PPM images are using the wrong translation mode for writing to
+  files, resulting in CR/LF terminated PPM files.
+- Tk crashes if the display depth changes while it is running.  Tk
+  also doesn't consistently track changes in the system colors.
+
+If you have comments or bug reports for the Windows version of Tk,
+please direct them to:
+
+Scott Stanton
+scott.stanton@eng.sun.com
+
+or post them to the newsgroup comp.lang.tcl.
diff --git a/win/makefile.bc b/win/makefile.bc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a77c0ed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/makefile.bc
@@ -0,0 +1,341 @@
+# Borland C++ 4.5 makefile for Tk
+#
+# Copyright (c) 1995-1996 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+#
+# See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+# of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+#
+# SCCS: @(#) makefile.bc 1.73 97/11/05 16:12:27
+
+
+#
+# Project directories
+#
+# ROOT = top of source tree
+# TMPDIR = location where .obj files should be stored during build
+# TCLDIR = location of top of Tcl source heirarchy
+#
+
+ROOT	= ..
+TMPDIR	= .
+TOOLS	= c:\bc45
+TCLDIR	= ..\..\tcl8.0
+
+# uncomment the following line to compile with symbols
+#DEBUG=1
+
+# uncomment the following line to compile with TCL_MEM_DEBUG
+#DEBUGDEFINES	=TCL_MEM_DEBUG
+
+#
+# Borland C++ tools
+#
+
+BORLAND = $(TOOLS)
+IMPLIB  = $(BORLAND)\bin\Implib
+BCC32   = $(BORLAND)\bin\Bcc32
+TLINK32 = $(BORLAND)\bin\tlink32
+RC	= $(BORLAND)\bin\brcc32
+CP      = copy
+RM      = del
+
+INCLUDES =	$(BORLAND)\include;$(ROOT)\generic;$(ROOT)\bitmaps;$(ROOT)\xlib;$(ROOT)\win;$(TCLDIR)\generic
+LIBDIRS =	$(BORLAND)\lib;$(ROOT)\win
+TCLLIBDIR =	$(TCLDIR)\win
+
+
+!ifndef DEBUG
+
+# these macros cause maximum optimization and no symbols
+DEBUGLDFLAGS = 
+DEBUGCCFLAGS = -v- -vi- -O2
+
+!else
+
+# these macros enable debugging
+DEBUGLDFLAGS = -v
+DEBUGCCFLAGS = -k -Od -v
+
+!endif
+
+DEFINES = MT;_RTLDLL;STRICT;$(DEBUGDEFINES)
+PROJECTCCFLAGS= $(DEBUGCCFLAGS) -w-par -w-stu
+
+LNFLAGS_exe = -Tpe -aa -c $(DEBUGLDFLAGS) $(BORLAND)\lib\c0w32
+LNFLAGS_dll = -Tpd -aa -c $(DEBUGLDFLAGS) $(BORLAND)\lib\c0d32
+
+LNLIBS_exe =	$(TKLIB) $(TCLLIBDIR)\$(TCLLIB) import32 cw32mti
+LNLIBS_dll =	$(TCLLIBDIR)\$(TCLLIB) import32 cw32mti
+
+# 
+# Global makefile settings
+#
+
+.AUTODEPEND
+.CACHEAUTODEPEND
+
+.suffixes: .c .dll .lib .obj .exe
+
+.path.c=$(ROOT)\win;$(ROOT)\generic;$(ROOT)\xlib;$(ROOT)\unix
+.path.obj=$(TMPDIR)
+
+WISHOBJS = \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkConsole.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\winMain.obj
+
+TKTESTOBJS = \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkConsole.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkTest.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkSquare.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\testMain.obj
+
+XLIBOBJS = \
+	$(TMPDIR)\xcolors.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\xdraw.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\xgc.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\ximage.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\xutil.obj
+
+TKOBJS = \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkUnixMenubu.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkUnixScale.obj \
+	$(XLIBOBJS) \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWin3d.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWin32Dll.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinButton.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinClipboard.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinColor.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinCursor.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinDialog.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinDraw.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinEmbed.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinFont.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinImage.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinInit.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinKey.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinMenu.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinPixmap.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinPointer.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinRegion.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinScrlbr.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinSend.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinWindow.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinWm.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinX.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\stubs.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tk3d.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkArgv.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkAtom.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkBind.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkBitmap.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkButton.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkCanvArc.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkCanvBmap.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkCanvImg.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkCanvLine.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkCanvPoly.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkCanvPs.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkCanvText.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkCanvUtil.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkCanvWind.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkCanvas.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkClipboard.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkCmds.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkColor.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkConfig.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkCursor.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkEntry.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkError.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkEvent.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkFileFilter.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkFocus.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkFont.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkFrame.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkGC.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkGeometry.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkGet.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkGrab.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkGrid.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkImage.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkImgBmap.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkImgGIF.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkImgPPM.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkImgPhoto.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkImgUtil.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkListbox.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkMacWinMenu.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkMain.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkMenu.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkMenubutton.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkMenuDraw.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkMessage.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkOption.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkPack.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkPlace.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkPointer.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkRectOval.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkScale.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkScrollbar.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkSelect.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkText.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkTextBTree.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkTextDisp.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkTextImage.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkTextIndex.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkTextMark.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkTextTag.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkTextWind.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkTrig.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkUtil.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkVisual.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWindow.obj
+
+TCLDLL = tcl80.dll
+TCLLIB = tcl80.lib
+TKDLL = tk80.dll
+TKLIB = tk80.lib
+WISH = wish80.exe
+TKTEST = tktest.exe
+
+#
+# Targets
+#
+
+all: cfgdll $(TKDLL) cfgexe $(WISH) cfgcln
+tktest: cfgdll $(TKDLL) cfgtest $(TKTEST) cfgcln
+
+test: tktest
+	$(TKTEST) &&|
+		cd ../tests
+		console show
+		update
+		source all
+|
+
+# Implicit Targets
+
+.c.obj:
+	@$(BCC32) {$< }
+
+.dll.lib:
+	$(IMPLIB) -c $@ $<
+
+.rc.res:
+	$(RC) -i$(INCLUDES) $<
+
+#
+# Special case object file targets
+#
+
+$(TMPDIR)\testMain.obj : $(ROOT)\win\winMain.c
+	$(BCC32) -c -o$@ $(ROOT)\win\winMain.c
+
+#
+# Configuration file targets - these files are implicitly used by the compiler
+#
+
+cfgdll:
+	@$(CP) &&|
+		-n$(TMPDIR) -I$(INCLUDES) -c -WM
+		-D$(DEFINES) -3 -d $(PROJECTCCFLAGS)
+| bcc32.cfg >NUL
+
+cfgexe:
+	@$(CP) &&|
+		-n$(TMPDIR) -I$(INCLUDES) -c -W
+		-D$(DEFINES) -3 -d $(PROJECTCCFLAGS)
+| bcc32.cfg >NUL
+
+cfgtest:
+	@$(CP) &&|
+		-n$(TMPDIR) -I$(INCLUDES) -c -W
+		-D$(DEFINES);TK_TEST -3 -d $(PROJECTCCFLAGS)
+| bcc32.cfg >NUL
+
+cfgcln:
+	@$(RM) bcc32.cfg
+
+#
+# Executable targets
+#
+
+$(TKDLL): $(TKOBJS) tk.def rc\tk.res
+	$(TLINK32) @&&|
+$(LNFLAGS_dll) $(TKOBJS)
+$@
+-x
+$(LNLIBS_dll)
+tk.def
+rc\tk.res
+|
+
+$(WISH): $(WISHOBJS) $(TKLIB) rc\wish.res
+	$(TLINK32) @&&|
+$(LNFLAGS_exe) $(WISHOBJS)
+$@
+-x
+$(LNLIBS_exe)
+|, &&|
+EXETYPE WINDOWS
+CODE PRELOAD MOVEABLE DISCARDABLE
+DATA PRELOAD MOVEABLE MULTIPLE
+|, rc\wish.res
+
+$(TKTEST): $(TKTESTOBJS) $(TKLIB)
+	$(TLINK32) $(LNFLAGS_exe) @&&|
+$(TKTESTOBJS)
+$@
+-x
+$(LNLIBS_exe)
+|, &&|
+EXETYPE WINDOWS
+CODE PRELOAD MOVEABLE DISCARDABLE
+DATA PRELOAD MOVEABLE MULTIPLE
+|, 
+
+# 
+# Other dependencies
+#
+
+rc\wish.res: rc\wish.ico
+rc\tk.res: rc\tk.ico rc\*.cur
+
+# The following rule automatically generates a tk.def file containing
+# an export entry for every public symbol in the $(TKDLL) library.
+
+tk.def: $(TKOBJS)
+	$(TCLLIBDIR)\dumpexts.exe -o $@ $(TKDLL) @&&|
+		$(TKOBJS)
+|
+
+# rule to build library object files
+
+# debugging rules, the .dll and .exe files must be in the same
+# directory as the object files for debugging purposes
+
+$(TMPDIR)\$(TKDLL): $(TKDLL)
+	$(CP) $(TKDLL) $(TMPDIR)
+
+$(TMPDIR)\$(TCLDLL): $(TCLLIBDIR)\$(TCLDLL)
+	$(CP) $(TCLLIBDIR)\$(TCLDLL) $(TMPDIR)
+
+$(TMPDIR)\$(WISH): $(WISH)
+	$(CP) $(WISH) $(TMPDIR)
+
+$(TMPDIR)\$(TKTEST): $(TKTEST)
+	$(CP) $(TKTEST) $(TMPDIR)
+
+debug: $(TMPDIR)\$(TKDLL) $(TMPDIR)\$(TCLDLL) $(TMPDIR)\$(TKTEST)
+
+
+# remove all generated files
+
+clean:
+	$(RM) $(WISH)
+	$(RM) $(TKTEST)
+	$(RM) $(TKLIB) 
+	$(RM) $(TKDLL)  
+	$(RM) rc\*.res  
+	$(RM) tk.def
+	$(RM) $(TMPDIR)\*.obj
+	$(RM) *.cfg
diff --git a/win/makefile.vc b/win/makefile.vc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7312db0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/makefile.vc
@@ -0,0 +1,397 @@
+# Visual C++ 2.x and 4.0 makefile
+#
+# See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+# of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+# 
+# Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+# SCCS: @(#) makefile.vc 1.64 97/10/27 17:27:20
+
+# Does not depend on the presence of any environment variables in
+# order to compile tcl; all needed information is derived from 
+# location of the compiler directories.
+
+#
+# Project directories
+#
+# ROOT    = top of source tree
+#
+# TMPDIR  = location where .obj files should be stored during build
+#
+# TOOLS32 = location of VC++ 32-bit development tools. Note that the
+#	    VC++ 2.0 header files are broken, so you need to use the
+#	    ones that come with the developer network CD's, or later
+#	    versions of VC++.
+#
+# TCLDIR = location of top of Tcl source heirarchy
+#
+
+ROOT	= ..
+TMPDIR	= .
+TOOLS32	= c:\msdev
+TCLDIR	= ..\..\tcl8.0
+
+# Set this to the appropriate value of /MACHINE: for your platform
+MACHINE	= IX86
+
+# Comment the following line to compile with symbols
+NODEBUG=1
+
+# uncomment the following two lines to compile with TCL_MEM_DEBUG
+#DEBUGDEFINES	=-DTCL_MEM_DEBUG
+
+######################################################################
+# Do not modify below this line
+######################################################################
+
+VERSION = 80
+
+TCLDLL = tcl$(VERSION).dll
+TCLLIB = tcl$(VERSION).lib
+TCLPLUGINDLL = tcl$(VERSION)p.dll
+TCLPLUGINLIB = tcl$(VERSION)p.lib
+TKDLL = tk$(VERSION).dll
+TKLIB = tk$(VERSION).lib
+TKPLUGINDLL = tk$(VERSION)p.dll
+TKPLUGINLIB = tk$(VERSION)p.lib
+
+WISH = wish$(VERSION).exe
+WISHP = wishp$(VERSION).exe
+TKTEST = tktest.exe
+DUMPEXTS = $(TMPDIR)\dumpexts.exe
+
+WISHOBJS = \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkConsole.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\winMain.obj
+
+TKTESTOBJS = \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkConsole.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkTest.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkSquare.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\testMain.obj
+
+XLIBOBJS = \
+	$(TMPDIR)\xcolors.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\xdraw.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\xgc.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\ximage.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\xutil.obj
+
+TKOBJS = \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkUnixMenubu.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkUnixScale.obj \
+	$(XLIBOBJS) \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWin3d.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWin32Dll.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinButton.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinClipboard.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinColor.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinCursor.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinDialog.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinDraw.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinEmbed.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinFont.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinImage.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinInit.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinKey.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinMenu.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinPixmap.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinPointer.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinRegion.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinScrlbr.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinSend.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinWindow.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinWm.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWinX.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\stubs.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tk3d.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkArgv.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkAtom.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkBind.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkBitmap.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkButton.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkCanvArc.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkCanvBmap.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkCanvImg.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkCanvLine.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkCanvPoly.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkCanvPs.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkCanvText.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkCanvUtil.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkCanvWind.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkCanvas.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkClipboard.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkCmds.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkColor.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkConfig.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkCursor.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkEntry.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkError.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkEvent.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkFileFilter.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkFocus.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkFont.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkFrame.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkGC.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkGeometry.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkGet.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkGrab.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkGrid.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkImage.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkImgBmap.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkImgGIF.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkImgPPM.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkImgPhoto.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkImgUtil.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkListbox.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkMacWinMenu.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkMain.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkMenu.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkMenubutton.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkMenuDraw.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkMessage.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkOption.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkPack.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkPlace.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkPointer.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkRectOval.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkScale.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkScrollbar.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkSelect.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkText.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkTextBTree.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkTextDisp.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkTextImage.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkTextIndex.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkTextMark.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkTextTag.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkTextWind.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkTrig.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkUtil.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkVisual.obj \
+	$(TMPDIR)\tkWindow.obj
+
+cc32		= $(TOOLS32)\bin\cl.exe
+link32		= $(TOOLS32)\bin\link.exe
+rc32		= $(TOOLS32)\bin\rc.exe
+include32	= -I$(TOOLS32)\include
+
+WINDIR          = $(ROOT)\win
+GENERICDIR	= $(ROOT)\generic
+XLIBDIR		= $(ROOT)\xlib
+BITMAPDIR	= $(ROOT)\bitmaps
+TCLLIBDIR       = $(TCLDIR)\win
+RCDIR		= $(WINDIR)\rc
+
+TK_INCLUDES	= -I$(WINDIR) -I$(GENERICDIR) -I$(BITMAPDIR) -I$(XLIBDIR) \
+			-I$(TCLDIR)\generic
+TK_DEFINES	= $(DEBUGDEFINES)
+
+TK_CFLAGS	= $(cdebug) $(cflags) $(cvarsdll) $(include32) \
+			$(TK_INCLUDES) $(TK_DEFINES) 
+
+######################################################################
+# Link flags
+######################################################################
+
+!IFDEF NODEBUG
+ldebug = /RELEASE
+!ELSE
+ldebug = -debug:full -debugtype:cv
+!ENDIF
+
+# declarations common to all linker options
+lcommon = /NODEFAULTLIB /RELEASE /NOLOGO
+
+# declarations for use on Intel i386, i486, and Pentium systems
+!IF "$(MACHINE)" == "IX86"
+DLLENTRY = @12
+lflags   = $(lcommon) -align:0x1000 /MACHINE:$(MACHINE)
+!ELSE
+lflags   = $(lcommon) /MACHINE:$(MACHINE)
+!ENDIF
+
+conlflags = $(lflags) -subsystem:console -entry:mainCRTStartup
+guilflags = $(lflags) -subsystem:windows -entry:WinMainCRTStartup
+dlllflags = $(lflags) -entry:_DllMainCRTStartup$(DLLENTRY) -dll
+
+!IF "$(MACHINE)" == "PPC"
+libc = libc.lib
+libcdll = crtdll.lib
+!ELSE
+libc = libc.lib oldnames.lib
+libcdll = msvcrt.lib oldnames.lib
+!ENDIF
+
+baselibs   = kernel32.lib $(optlibs) advapi32.lib
+winlibs    = $(baselibs) user32.lib gdi32.lib comdlg32.lib winspool.lib
+guilibs	   = $(libc) $(winlibs)
+
+guilibsdll = $(libcdll) $(winlibs)
+
+######################################################################
+# Compile flags
+######################################################################
+
+!IFDEF NODEBUG
+cdebug = -Oti -Gs -GD
+!ELSE
+cdebug = -Z7 -Od -WX
+!ENDIF
+
+# declarations common to all compiler options
+ccommon = -c -W3 -nologo -YX
+
+!IF "$(MACHINE)" == "IX86"
+cflags = $(ccommon) -D_X86_=1
+!ELSE
+!IF "$(MACHINE)" == "MIPS"
+cflags = $(ccommon) -D_MIPS_=1
+!ELSE
+!IF "$(MACHINE)" == "PPC"
+cflags = $(ccommon) -D_PPC_=1
+!ELSE
+!IF "$(MACHINE)" == "ALPHA"
+cflags = $(ccommon) -D_ALPHA_=1
+!ENDIF
+!ENDIF
+!ENDIF
+!ENDIF
+
+cvars      = -DWIN32 -D_WIN32
+cvarsmt    = $(cvars) -D_MT
+cvarsdll   = $(cvarsmt) -D_DLL
+
+CON_CFLAGS	= $(cdebug) $(cflags) $(cvars) $(include32) -DCONSOLE
+
+######################################################################
+# Project specific targets
+######################################################################
+
+all:    $(WISH)
+test:	$(TKTEST)
+plugin:	$(TKPLUGINDLL) $(WISHP)
+
+$(TKLIB): $(TKDLL)
+
+$(TKDLL): $(TKOBJS) $(TMPDIR)\tk.res $(TMPDIR)\tk.def
+	set LIB=$(TOOLS32)\lib
+        $(link32) $(ldebug) $(dlllflags) -def:$(TMPDIR)\tk.def \
+		-out:$@ $(TMPDIR)\tk.res $(TCLLIBDIR)\$(TCLLIB) \
+		$(guilibsdll) @<<
+			$(TKOBJS)
+<<
+
+$(TKPLUGINLIB): $(TKPLUGINDLL)
+
+$(TKPLUGINDLL): $(TKOBJS) $(TMPDIR)\tk.res $(TMPDIR)\plugin.def
+	set LIB=$(TOOLS32)\lib
+        $(link32) $(ldebug) $(dlllflags) -def:$(TMPDIR)\plugin.def \
+		-out:$@ $(TMPDIR)\tk.res $(TCLLIBDIR)\$(TCLPLUGINLIB) \
+		$(guilibsdll) @<<
+			$(TKOBJS)
+<<
+
+$(WISH): $(WISHOBJS) $(TKLIB) $(TMPDIR)\wish.res
+	set LIB=$(TOOLS32)\lib
+	$(link32) $(ldebug) $(guilflags) $(TMPDIR)\wish.res -out:$@ \
+		$(guilibsdll) $(TCLLIBDIR)\$(TCLLIB) $(TKLIB) $(WISHOBJS) 
+
+$(WISHP): $(WISHOBJS) $(TKPLUGINLIB) $(TMPDIR)\wish.res
+	set LIB=$(TOOLS32)\lib
+	$(link32) $(ldebug) $(guilflags) $(TMPDIR)\wish.res -out:$@ \
+		$(guilibsdll) $(TCLLIBDIR)\$(TCLPLUGINLIB) \
+		$(TKPLUGINLIB) $(WISHOBJS) 
+
+$(TKTEST): $(TKTESTOBJS) $(TKLIB) $(TMPDIR)\wish.res
+	set LIB=$(TOOLS32)\lib
+	$(link32) $(ldebug) $(guilflags) $(TMPDIR)\wish.res -out:$@ \
+		$(guilibsdll) $(TCLLIBDIR)\$(TCLLIB) $(TKLIB) $(TKTESTOBJS)
+
+$(TMPDIR)\tk.def: $(DUMPEXTS) $(TKOBJS)
+	$(DUMPEXTS) -o $@ $(TKDLL) @<<
+		$(TKOBJS)
+<<
+
+$(TMPDIR)\plugin.def: $(DUMPEXTS) $(TKOBJS)
+	$(DUMPEXTS) -o $@ $(TKPLUGINDLL) @<<
+		$(TKOBJS)
+<<
+
+$(DUMPEXTS): $(TCLDIR)\win\winDumpExts.c
+	$(cc32) $(CON_CFLAGS) -Fo$(TMPDIR)\ $?
+	set LIB=$(TOOLS32)\lib
+	$(link32) $(ldebug) $(conlflags) $(guilibs) -out:$@ \
+		$(TMPDIR)\winDumpExts.obj 
+
+#
+# Special case object file targets
+#
+
+$(TMPDIR)\testMain.obj: $(ROOT)\win\winMain.c
+	$(cc32) $(TK_CFLAGS) -DTK_TEST -Fo$@ $?
+
+#
+# Implicit rules
+#
+
+{$(XLIBDIR)}.c{$(TMPDIR)}.obj:
+	$(cc32) $(TK_CFLAGS) -Fo$(TMPDIR)\ $<
+
+{$(GENERICDIR)}.c{$(TMPDIR)}.obj:
+	$(cc32) $(TK_CFLAGS) -Fo$(TMPDIR)\ $<
+
+{$(WINDIR)}.c{$(TMPDIR)}.obj:
+	$(cc32) $(TK_CFLAGS) -Fo$(TMPDIR)\ $<
+
+{$(ROOT)\unix}.c{$(TMPDIR)}.obj:
+	$(cc32) $(TK_CFLAGS) -Fo$(TMPDIR)\ $<
+
+{$(RCDIR)}.rc{$(TMPDIR)}.res:
+	$(rc32) -fo $@ -r -i $(GENERICDIR) $<
+
+clean:
+	-@del *.exp
+	-@del *.lib
+	-@del *.dll
+	-@del *.exe
+        -@del $(TMPDIR)\*.obj 
+        -@del $(TMPDIR)\*.res
+        -@del $(TMPDIR)\*.def
+
+# dependencies
+
+$(TMPDIR)\tk.res: \
+    $(RCDIR)\buttons.bmp \
+    $(RCDIR)\cursor*.cur \
+    $(RCDIR)\tk.ico
+
+$(GENERICDIR)/default.h: $(WINDIR)/tkWinDefault.h
+$(GENERICDIR)/tkButton.c: $(GENERICDIR)/default.h
+$(GENERICDIR)/tkCanvas.c: $(GENERICDIR)/default.h
+$(GENERICDIR)/tkEntry.c: $(GENERICDIR)/default.h
+$(GENERICDIR)/tkFrame.c: $(GENERICDIR)/default.h
+$(GENERICDIR)/tkListbox.c: $(GENERICDIR)/default.h
+$(GENERICDIR)/tkMenu.c: $(GENERICDIR)/default.h
+$(GENERICDIR)/tkMenubutton.c: $(GENERICDIR)/default.h
+$(GENERICDIR)/tkMessage.c: $(GENERICDIR)/default.h
+$(GENERICDIR)/tkScale.c: $(GENERICDIR)/default.h
+$(GENERICDIR)/tkScrollbar.c: $(GENERICDIR)/default.h
+$(GENERICDIR)/tkText.c: $(GENERICDIR)/default.h
+$(GENERICDIR)/tkTextIndex.c: $(GENERICDIR)/default.h
+$(GENERICDIR)/tkTextTag.c: $(GENERICDIR)/default.h
+
+$(GENERICDIR)/tkText.c: $(GENERICDIR)/tkText.h
+$(GENERICDIR)/tkTextBTree.c: $(GENERICDIR)/tkText.h
+$(GENERICDIR)/tkTextDisp.c: $(GENERICDIR)/tkText.h
+$(GENERICDIR)/tkTextDisp.c: $(GENERICDIR)/tkText.h
+$(GENERICDIR)/tkTextImage.c: $(GENERICDIR)/tkText.h
+$(GENERICDIR)/tkTextIndex.c: $(GENERICDIR)/tkText.h
+$(GENERICDIR)/tkTextMark.c: $(GENERICDIR)/tkText.h
+$(GENERICDIR)/tkTextTag.c: $(GENERICDIR)/tkText.h
+$(GENERICDIR)/tkTextWind.c: $(GENERICDIR)/tkText.h
+
+$(GENERICDIR)/tkMacWinMenu.c: $(GENERICDIR)/tkMenu.h
+$(GENERICDIR)/tkMenu.c: $(GENERICDIR)/tkMenu.h
+$(GENERICDIR)/tkMenuDraw.c: $(GENERICDIR)/tkMenu.h
+$(WINDIR)/tkWinMenu.c: $(GENERICDIR)/tkMenu.h
+
diff --git a/win/rc/buttons.bmp b/win/rc/buttons.bmp
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/buttons.bmp
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor00.cur b/win/rc/cursor00.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor00.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor02.cur b/win/rc/cursor02.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor02.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor04.cur b/win/rc/cursor04.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor04.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor06.cur b/win/rc/cursor06.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor06.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor08.cur b/win/rc/cursor08.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor08.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor0a.cur b/win/rc/cursor0a.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor0a.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor0c.cur b/win/rc/cursor0c.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor0c.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor0e.cur b/win/rc/cursor0e.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor0e.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor10.cur b/win/rc/cursor10.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor10.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor12.cur b/win/rc/cursor12.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor12.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor14.cur b/win/rc/cursor14.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor14.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor16.cur b/win/rc/cursor16.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor16.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor18.cur b/win/rc/cursor18.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor18.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor1a.cur b/win/rc/cursor1a.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor1a.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor1c.cur b/win/rc/cursor1c.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor1c.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor1e.cur b/win/rc/cursor1e.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor1e.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor20.cur b/win/rc/cursor20.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..95c4dc1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor20.cur
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+
  0
( @

ÿÿÿB„¢ŠR”*¨Ð
+ ü~ü~
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor22.cur b/win/rc/cursor22.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor22.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor24.cur b/win/rc/cursor24.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c971b66
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor24.cur
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+
  0
( @


ÿÿÿ€À
+ �"ˆB„þþþþB„"ˆ�
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor26.cur b/win/rc/cursor26.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor26.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor28.cur b/win/rc/cursor28.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor28.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor2a.cur b/win/rc/cursor2a.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor2a.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor2c.cur b/win/rc/cursor2c.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor2c.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor2e.cur b/win/rc/cursor2e.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor2e.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor30.cur b/win/rc/cursor30.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor30.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor32.cur b/win/rc/cursor32.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor32.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor34.cur b/win/rc/cursor34.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor34.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor36.cur b/win/rc/cursor36.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor36.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor38.cur b/win/rc/cursor38.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor38.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor3a.cur b/win/rc/cursor3a.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor3a.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor3c.cur b/win/rc/cursor3c.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor3c.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor3e.cur b/win/rc/cursor3e.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor3e.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor40.cur b/win/rc/cursor40.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor40.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor42.cur b/win/rc/cursor42.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor42.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor44.cur b/win/rc/cursor44.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor44.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor46.cur b/win/rc/cursor46.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor46.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor48.cur b/win/rc/cursor48.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor48.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor4a.cur b/win/rc/cursor4a.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor4a.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor4c.cur b/win/rc/cursor4c.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor4c.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor4e.cur b/win/rc/cursor4e.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor4e.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor50.cur b/win/rc/cursor50.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor50.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor52.cur b/win/rc/cursor52.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor52.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor54.cur b/win/rc/cursor54.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor54.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor56.cur b/win/rc/cursor56.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor56.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor58.cur b/win/rc/cursor58.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor58.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor5a.cur b/win/rc/cursor5a.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor5a.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor5c.cur b/win/rc/cursor5c.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor5c.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor5e.cur b/win/rc/cursor5e.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9141887
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor5e.cur
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+
  
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor60.cur b/win/rc/cursor60.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor60.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor62.cur b/win/rc/cursor62.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor62.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor64.cur b/win/rc/cursor64.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor64.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor66.cur b/win/rc/cursor66.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor66.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor68.cur b/win/rc/cursor68.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor68.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor6a.cur b/win/rc/cursor6a.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor6a.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor6c.cur b/win/rc/cursor6c.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor6c.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor6e.cur b/win/rc/cursor6e.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor6e.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor70.cur b/win/rc/cursor70.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor70.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor72.cur b/win/rc/cursor72.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor72.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor74.cur b/win/rc/cursor74.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor74.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor76.cur b/win/rc/cursor76.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor76.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor78.cur b/win/rc/cursor78.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..53ab3d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor78.cur
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+
  0
( @

ÿÿÿ
þ
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor7a.cur b/win/rc/cursor7a.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor7a.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor7c.cur b/win/rc/cursor7c.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor7c.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor7e.cur b/win/rc/cursor7e.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor7e.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor80.cur b/win/rc/cursor80.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor80.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor82.cur b/win/rc/cursor82.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor82.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor84.cur b/win/rc/cursor84.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor84.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor86.cur b/win/rc/cursor86.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor86.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor88.cur b/win/rc/cursor88.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor88.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor8a.cur b/win/rc/cursor8a.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor8a.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor8c.cur b/win/rc/cursor8c.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor8c.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor8e.cur b/win/rc/cursor8e.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor8e.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor90.cur b/win/rc/cursor90.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor90.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor92.cur b/win/rc/cursor92.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor92.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor94.cur b/win/rc/cursor94.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor94.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor96.cur b/win/rc/cursor96.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor96.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/cursor98.cur b/win/rc/cursor98.cur
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/cursor98.cur
diff --git a/win/rc/tk.ico b/win/rc/tk.ico
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/tk.ico
diff --git a/win/rc/tk.rc b/win/rc/tk.rc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0d74ec3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/tk.rc
@@ -0,0 +1,132 @@
+// SCCS: @(#) tk.rc 1.22 97/03/21 18:35:14
+//
+// Version
+//
+
+#define RESOURCE_INCLUDED
+#include <tk.h>
+
+#define STRINGIFY1(x)       #x
+#define STRINGIFY(x)        STRINGIFY1(x) 
+ 
+VS_VERSION_INFO VERSIONINFO
+ FILEVERSION    TK_MAJOR_VERSION,TK_MINOR_VERSION,TK_RELEASE_LEVEL,TK_RELEASE_SERIAL
+ PRODUCTVERSION TK_MAJOR_VERSION,TK_MINOR_VERSION,TK_RELEASE_LEVEL,TK_RELEASE_SERIAL
+ FILEFLAGSMASK	0x3fL
+ FILEFLAGS	0x0L
+ FILEOS		0x4L
+ FILETYPE	0x2L
+ FILESUBTYPE	0x0L
+BEGIN
+    BLOCK "StringFileInfo"
+    BEGIN
+        BLOCK "040904b0"
+        BEGIN
+            VALUE "FileDescription", "Tk DLL\0"
+            VALUE "OriginalFilename", "tk" STRINGIFY(TK_MAJOR_VERSION) STRINGIFY(TK_MINOR_VERSION) ".dll\0"
+            VALUE "CompanyName", "Sun Microsystems, Inc.\0"
+            VALUE "FileVersion", TK_PATCH_LEVEL
+            VALUE "LegalCopyright", "Copyright \251 1995-1996\0"
+            VALUE "ProductName", "Tk " TK_VERSION " for Windows\0"
+            VALUE "ProductVersion", TK_PATCH_LEVEL
+        END
+    END
+    BLOCK "VarFileInfo"
+    BEGIN
+        VALUE "Translation", 0x409, 1200
+    END
+END
+
+//
+// Icons
+//
+
+tk                      ICON    DISCARDABLE     "tk.ico"
+
+//
+// Bitmaps
+//
+
+buttons			BITMAP  DISCARDABLE	"buttons.bmp"
+
+//
+// Cursors
+//
+
+X_cursor                CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor00.cur"
+arrow                   CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor02.cur"
+based_arrow_down        CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor04.cur"
+based_arrow_up          CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor06.cur"
+boat                    CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor08.cur"
+bogosity                CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor0a.cur"
+bottom_left_corner      CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor0c.cur"
+bottom_right_corner     CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor0e.cur"
+bottom_side             CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor10.cur"
+bottom_tee              CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor12.cur"
+box_spiral              CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor14.cur"
+center_ptr              CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor16.cur"
+circle                  CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor18.cur"
+clock                   CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor1a.cur"
+coffee_mug              CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor1c.cur"
+cross                   CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor1e.cur"
+cross_reverse           CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor20.cur"
+crosshair               CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor22.cur"
+diamond_cross           CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor24.cur"
+dot                     CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor26.cur"
+dotbox                  CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor28.cur"
+double_arrow            CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor2a.cur"
+draft_large             CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor2c.cur"
+draft_small             CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor2e.cur"
+draped_box              CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor30.cur"
+exchange                CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor32.cur"
+fleur                   CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor34.cur"
+gobbler                 CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor36.cur"
+gumby                   CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor38.cur"
+hand1                   CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor3a.cur"
+hand2                   CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor3c.cur"
+heart                   CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor3e.cur"
+icon                    CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor40.cur"
+iron_cross              CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor42.cur"
+left_ptr                CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor44.cur"
+left_side               CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor46.cur"
+left_tee                CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor48.cur"
+leftbutton              CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor4a.cur"
+ll_angle                CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor4c.cur"
+lr_angle                CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor4e.cur"
+man                     CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor50.cur"
+middlebutton            CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor52.cur"
+mouse                   CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor54.cur"
+pencil                  CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor56.cur"
+pirate                  CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor58.cur"
+plus                    CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor5a.cur"
+question_arrow          CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor5c.cur"
+right_ptr               CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor5e.cur"
+right_side              CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor60.cur"
+right_tee               CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor62.cur"
+rightbutton             CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor64.cur"
+rtl_logo                CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor66.cur"
+sailboat                CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor68.cur"
+sb_down_arrow           CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor6a.cur"
+sb_h_double_arrow       CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor6c.cur"
+sb_left_arrow           CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor6e.cur"
+sb_right_arrow          CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor70.cur"
+sb_up_arrow             CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor72.cur"
+sb_v_double_arrow       CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor74.cur"
+shuttle                 CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor76.cur"
+sizing                  CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor78.cur"
+spider                  CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor7a.cur"
+spraycan                CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor7c.cur"
+star                    CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor7e.cur"
+target                  CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor80.cur"
+tcross                  CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor82.cur"
+top_left_arrow          CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor84.cur"
+top_left_corner         CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor86.cur"
+top_right_corner        CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor88.cur"
+top_side                CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor8a.cur"
+top_tee                 CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor8c.cur"
+trek                    CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor8e.cur"
+ul_angle                CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor90.cur"
+umbrella                CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor92.cur"
+ur_angle                CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor94.cur"
+watch                   CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor96.cur"
+xterm                   CURSOR  DISCARDABLE     "cursor98.cur"
diff --git a/win/rc/wish.ico b/win/rc/wish.ico
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/wish.ico
diff --git a/win/rc/wish.rc b/win/rc/wish.rc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..76cf124
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/rc/wish.rc
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+// SCCS: @(#) wish.rc 1.15 96/09/17 13:24:11
+//
+// Version
+//
+
+#define RESOURCE_INCLUDED
+#include <tk.h>
+
+#define STRINGIFY1(x)       #x
+#define STRINGIFY(x)        STRINGIFY1(x) 
+ 
+VS_VERSION_INFO VERSIONINFO
+ FILEVERSION    TK_MAJOR_VERSION,TK_MINOR_VERSION,TK_RELEASE_LEVEL,TK_RELEASE_SERIAL
+ PRODUCTVERSION TK_MAJOR_VERSION,TK_MINOR_VERSION,TK_RELEASE_LEVEL,TK_RELEASE_SERIAL
+ FILEFLAGSMASK	0x3fL
+ FILEFLAGS	0x0L
+ FILEOS		0x4L
+ FILETYPE	0x1L
+ FILESUBTYPE	0x0L
+BEGIN
+    BLOCK "StringFileInfo"
+    BEGIN
+        BLOCK "040904b0"
+        BEGIN
+            VALUE "FileDescription", "Wish Application\0"
+            VALUE "OriginalFilename", "wish" STRINGIFY(TK_MAJOR_VERSION) STRINGIFY(TK_MINOR_VERSION) ".exe\0"
+            VALUE "CompanyName", "Sun Microsystems, Inc.\0"
+            VALUE "FileVersion", TK_PATCH_LEVEL
+            VALUE "LegalCopyright", "Copyright \251 1995-1996\0"
+            VALUE "ProductName", "Tk " TK_VERSION " for Windows\0"
+            VALUE "ProductVersion", TK_PATCH_LEVEL
+        END
+    END
+    BLOCK "VarFileInfo"
+    BEGIN
+        VALUE "Translation", 0x409, 1200
+    END
+END
+
+//
+// Icon
+//
+
+wish                      ICON    DISCARDABLE     "wish.ico"
diff --git a/win/stubs.c b/win/stubs.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c9b97f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/stubs.c
@@ -0,0 +1,397 @@
+#include <X11/X.h>
+#include <X11/Xlib.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <tkInt.h>
+#include <tkPort.h>
+
+/*
+ * Undocumented Xlib internal function
+ */
+
+_XInitImageFuncPtrs(XImage *image)
+{
+    return 0;
+}
+
+/*
+ * From Xutil.h
+ */
+
+void
+XSetWMClientMachine(display, w, text_prop)
+    Display* display;
+    Window w;
+    XTextProperty* text_prop;
+{
+}
+
+Status
+XStringListToTextProperty(list, count, text_prop_return)
+    char** list;
+    int count;
+    XTextProperty* text_prop_return;
+{
+    return (Status) NULL;
+}
+
+/*
+ * From Xlib.h
+ */
+
+void
+XChangeProperty(display, w, property, type, format, mode, data, nelements)
+    Display* display;
+    Window w;
+    Atom property;
+    Atom type;
+    int format;
+    int mode;
+    _Xconst unsigned char* data;
+    int nelements;
+{
+}
+
+Cursor
+XCreateGlyphCursor(display, source_font, mask_font, source_char, mask_char,
+	foreground_color, background_color)
+    Display* display;
+    Font source_font;
+    Font mask_font;
+    unsigned int source_char;
+    unsigned int mask_char;
+    XColor* foreground_color;
+    XColor* background_color;
+{
+    return 1;
+}
+
+XIC
+XCreateIC()
+{
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+Cursor
+XCreatePixmapCursor(display, source, mask, foreground_color,
+	background_color, x, y)
+    Display* display;
+    Pixmap source;
+    Pixmap mask;
+    XColor* foreground_color;
+    XColor* background_color;
+    unsigned int x;
+    unsigned int y;
+{
+    return (Cursor) NULL;
+}
+
+void
+XDeleteProperty(display, w, property)
+    Display* display;
+    Window w;
+    Atom property;
+{
+}
+
+void
+XDestroyIC(ic)
+    XIC ic;
+{
+}
+
+Bool
+XFilterEvent(event, window)
+    XEvent* event;
+    Window window;
+{
+    return 0;
+}
+
+extern void XForceScreenSaver(display, mode)
+    Display* display;
+    int mode;
+{
+}
+
+void
+XFreeCursor(display, cursor)
+    Display* display;
+    Cursor cursor;
+{
+}
+
+GContext
+XGContextFromGC(gc)
+    GC gc;
+{
+    return (GContext) NULL;
+}
+
+char *
+XGetAtomName(display, atom)
+    Display* display;
+    Atom atom;
+{
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+int
+XGetWindowAttributes(display, w, window_attributes_return)
+    Display* display;
+    Window w;
+    XWindowAttributes* window_attributes_return;
+{
+    return 0;
+}
+
+Status
+XGetWMColormapWindows(display, w, windows_return, count_return)
+    Display* display;
+    Window w;
+    Window** windows_return;
+    int* count_return;
+{
+    return (Status) NULL;
+}
+
+int
+XIconifyWindow(display, w, screen_number)
+    Display* display;
+    Window w;
+    int screen_number;
+{
+    return 0;
+}
+
+XHostAddress *
+XListHosts(display, nhosts_return, state_return)
+    Display* display;
+    int* nhosts_return;
+    Bool* state_return;
+{
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+int
+XLookupColor(display, colormap, color_name, exact_def_return,
+	screen_def_return)
+    Display* display;
+    Colormap colormap;
+    _Xconst char* color_name;
+    XColor* exact_def_return;
+    XColor* screen_def_return;
+{
+    return 0;
+}
+
+void
+XNextEvent(display, event_return)
+    Display* display;
+    XEvent* event_return;
+{
+}
+
+void
+XPutBackEvent(display, event)
+    Display* display;
+    XEvent* event;
+{
+}
+
+void
+XQueryColors(display, colormap, defs_in_out, ncolors)
+    Display* display;
+    Colormap colormap;
+    XColor* defs_in_out;
+    int ncolors;
+{
+}
+
+int
+XQueryTree(display, w, root_return, parent_return, children_return,
+	nchildren_return)
+    Display* display;
+    Window w;
+    Window* root_return;
+    Window* parent_return;
+    Window** children_return;
+    unsigned int* nchildren_return;
+{
+    return 0;
+}
+
+void
+XRefreshKeyboardMapping(event_map)
+    XMappingEvent* event_map;
+{
+}
+
+Window
+XRootWindow(display, screen_number)
+    Display* display;
+    int screen_number;
+{
+    return (Window) NULL;
+}
+
+void
+XSelectInput(display, w, event_mask)
+    Display* display;
+    Window w;
+    long event_mask;
+{
+}
+
+int
+XSendEvent(display, w, propagate, event_mask, event_send)
+    Display* display;
+    Window w;
+    Bool propagate;
+    long event_mask;
+    XEvent* event_send;
+{
+    return 0;
+}
+
+void
+XSetCommand(display, w, argv, argc)
+    Display* display;
+    Window w;
+    char** argv;
+    int argc;
+{
+}
+
+XErrorHandler
+XSetErrorHandler (handler)
+    XErrorHandler handler;
+{
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+void
+XSetIconName(display, w, icon_name)
+    Display* display;
+    Window w;
+    _Xconst char* icon_name;
+{
+}
+
+void
+XSetWindowBackground(display, w, background_pixel)
+    Display* display;
+    Window w;
+    unsigned long background_pixel;
+{
+}
+
+void
+XSetWindowBackgroundPixmap(display, w, background_pixmap)
+    Display* display;
+    Window w;
+    Pixmap background_pixmap;
+{
+}
+
+void
+XSetWindowBorder(display, w, border_pixel)
+    Display* display;
+    Window w;
+    unsigned long border_pixel;
+{
+}
+
+void
+XSetWindowBorderPixmap(display, w, border_pixmap)
+    Display* display;
+    Window w;
+    Pixmap border_pixmap;
+{
+}
+
+void
+XSetWindowBorderWidth(display, w, width)
+    Display* display;
+    Window w;
+    unsigned int width;
+{
+}
+
+void
+XSetWindowColormap(display, w, colormap)
+    Display* display;
+    Window w;
+    Colormap colormap;
+{
+}
+
+Bool
+XTranslateCoordinates(display, src_w, dest_w, src_x, src_y, dest_x_return,
+	dest_y_return, child_return)
+    Display* display;
+    Window src_w;
+    Window dest_w;
+    int src_x;
+    int src_y;
+    int* dest_x_return;
+    int* dest_y_return;
+    Window* child_return;
+{
+    return 0;
+}
+
+void
+XWindowEvent(display, w, event_mask, event_return)
+    Display* display;
+    Window w;
+    long event_mask;
+    XEvent* event_return;
+{
+}
+
+int
+XWithdrawWindow(display, w, screen_number)
+    Display* display;
+    Window w;
+    int screen_number;
+{
+    return 0;
+}
+
+int
+XmbLookupString(ic, event, buffer_return, bytes_buffer, keysym_return,
+	status_return)
+    XIC ic;
+    XKeyPressedEvent* event;
+    char* buffer_return;
+    int bytes_buffer;
+    KeySym* keysym_return;
+    Status* status_return;
+{
+    return 0;
+}
+
+int
+XGetWindowProperty(display, w, property, long_offset, long_length, delete,
+	req_type, actual_type_return, actual_format_return, nitems_return,
+	bytes_after_return, prop_return)
+    Display* display;
+    Window w;
+    Atom property;
+    long long_offset;
+    long long_length;
+    Bool delete;
+    Atom req_type;
+    Atom* actual_type_return;
+    int* actual_format_return;
+    unsigned long* nitems_return;
+    unsigned long* bytes_after_return;
+    unsigned char** prop_return;
+{
+    *actual_type_return = None;
+    *actual_format_return = 0;
+    *nitems_return = 0;
+    *bytes_after_return = 0;
+    *prop_return = NULL;
+    return BadValue;
+}
diff --git a/win/tkWin.h b/win/tkWin.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c9d9360
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/tkWin.h
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+/*
+ * tkWin.h --
+ *
+ *	Declarations of public types and interfaces that are only
+ *	available under Windows.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1996 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkWin.h 1.6 96/08/15 13:19:41
+ */
+
+#ifndef _TKWIN
+#define _TKWIN
+
+#ifndef _TK
+#include <tk.h>
+#endif
+
+#define WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN
+#include <windows.h>
+#undef WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN
+
+/*
+ * The following messages are use to communicate between a Tk toplevel
+ * and its container window.
+ */
+
+#define TK_CLAIMFOCUS	(WM_USER)
+#define TK_GEOMETRYREQ	(WM_USER+1)
+#define TK_ATTACHWINDOW	(WM_USER+2)
+#define TK_DETACHWINDOW	(WM_USER+3)
+
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Exported procedures defined for the Windows platform only.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+EXTERN Window		Tk_AttachHWND _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    HWND hwnd));
+EXTERN HINSTANCE 	Tk_GetHINSTANCE _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+EXTERN HWND		Tk_GetHWND _ANSI_ARGS_((Window window));
+EXTERN Tk_Window	Tk_HWNDToWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd));
+EXTERN void		Tk_PointerEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd,
+			    int x, int y));
+EXTERN int		Tk_TranslateWinEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd,
+			    UINT message, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam,
+			    LRESULT *result));
+
+#endif /* _TKWIN */
diff --git a/win/tkWin32Dll.c b/win/tkWin32Dll.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..969e687
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/tkWin32Dll.c
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+/* 
+ * tkWin32Dll.c --
+ *
+ *	This file contains a stub dll entry point.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkWin32Dll.c 1.9 96/08/06 15:59:08
+ */
+
+#include "tkPort.h"
+#include "tkWinInt.h"
+
+/*
+ * The following declaration is for the VC++ DLL entry point.
+ */
+
+BOOL APIENTRY		DllMain _ANSI_ARGS_((HINSTANCE hInst,
+			    DWORD reason, LPVOID reserved));
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * DllEntryPoint --
+ *
+ *	This wrapper function is used by Borland to invoke the
+ *	initialization code for Tk.  It simply calls the DllMain
+ *	routine.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	See DllMain.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	See DllMain.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+BOOL APIENTRY
+DllEntryPoint(hInst, reason, reserved)
+    HINSTANCE hInst;		/* Library instance handle. */
+    DWORD reason;		/* Reason this function is being called. */
+    LPVOID reserved;		/* Not used. */
+{
+    return DllMain(hInst, reason, reserved);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * DllMain --
+ *
+ *	DLL entry point.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	TRUE on sucess, FALSE on failure.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+BOOL APIENTRY
+DllMain(hInstance, reason, reserved)
+    HINSTANCE hInstance;
+    DWORD reason;
+    LPVOID reserved;
+{
+    /*
+     * If we are attaching to the DLL from a new process, tell Tk about
+     * the hInstance to use. If we are detaching then clean up any
+     * data structures related to this DLL.
+     */
+    
+    if (reason == DLL_PROCESS_ATTACH) {
+        TkWinXInit(hInstance);
+    } else if (reason == DLL_PROCESS_DETACH) {
+        TkWinXCleanup(hInstance);
+    }
+    return(TRUE);
+}
diff --git a/win/tkWin3d.c b/win/tkWin3d.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3ee9907
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/tkWin3d.c
@@ -0,0 +1,535 @@
+/* 
+ * tkWin3d.c --
+ *
+ *	This file contains the platform specific routines for
+ *	drawing 3d borders in the Windows 95 style.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1996 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkWin3d.c 1.6 97/08/12 14:28:54
+ */
+
+#include <tk3d.h>
+#include <tkWinInt.h>
+
+/*
+ * This structure is used to keep track of the extra colors used by
+ * Windows 3d borders.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    TkBorder info;
+    XColor *light2ColorPtr; /* System3dLight */
+    XColor *dark2ColorPtr;  /* System3dDarkShadow */
+} WinBorder;
+
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpGetBorder --
+ *
+ *	This function allocates a new TkBorder structure.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns a newly allocated TkBorder.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+TkBorder *
+TkpGetBorder()
+{
+    WinBorder *borderPtr = (WinBorder *) ckalloc(sizeof(WinBorder));
+    borderPtr->light2ColorPtr = NULL;
+    borderPtr->dark2ColorPtr = NULL;
+    return (TkBorder *) borderPtr;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpFreeBorder --
+ *
+ *	This function frees any colors allocated by the platform
+ *	specific part of this module.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	May deallocate some colors.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpFreeBorder(borderPtr)
+    TkBorder *borderPtr;
+{
+    WinBorder *winBorderPtr = (WinBorder *) borderPtr;
+    if (winBorderPtr->light2ColorPtr) {
+	Tk_FreeColor(winBorderPtr->light2ColorPtr);
+    }
+    if (winBorderPtr->dark2ColorPtr) {
+	Tk_FreeColor(winBorderPtr->dark2ColorPtr);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_3DVerticalBevel --
+ *
+ *	This procedure draws a vertical bevel along one side of
+ *	an object.  The bevel is always rectangular in shape:
+ *			|||
+ *			|||
+ *			|||
+ *			|||
+ *			|||
+ *			|||
+ *	An appropriate shadow color is chosen for the bevel based
+ *	on the leftBevel and relief arguments.  Normally this
+ *	procedure is called first, then Tk_3DHorizontalBevel is
+ *	called next to draw neat corners.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Graphics are drawn in drawable.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+Tk_3DVerticalBevel(tkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width, height,
+	leftBevel, relief)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window for which border was allocated. */
+    Drawable drawable;		/* X window or pixmap in which to draw. */
+    Tk_3DBorder border;		/* Token for border to draw. */
+    int x, y, width, height;	/* Area of vertical bevel. */
+    int leftBevel;		/* Non-zero means this bevel forms the
+				 * left side of the object;  0 means it
+				 * forms the right side. */
+    int relief;			/* Kind of bevel to draw.  For example,
+				 * TK_RELIEF_RAISED means interior of
+				 * object should appear higher than
+				 * exterior. */
+{
+    TkBorder *borderPtr = (TkBorder *) border;
+    int left, right;
+    Display *display = Tk_Display(tkwin);
+    TkWinDCState state;
+    HDC dc = TkWinGetDrawableDC(display, drawable, &state);
+    int half;
+
+    if ((borderPtr->lightGC == None) && (relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT)) {
+	TkpGetShadows(borderPtr, tkwin);
+    }
+
+    switch (relief) {
+	case TK_RELIEF_RAISED:
+	    left = (leftBevel)
+		? borderPtr->lightGC->foreground
+		: borderPtr->darkGC->foreground;
+	    right = (leftBevel)
+		? ((WinBorder *)borderPtr)->light2ColorPtr->pixel
+		: ((WinBorder *)borderPtr)->dark2ColorPtr->pixel;
+	    break;
+	case TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN:
+	    left = (leftBevel)
+		? ((WinBorder *)borderPtr)->dark2ColorPtr->pixel
+		: ((WinBorder *)borderPtr)->light2ColorPtr->pixel;
+	    right = (leftBevel)
+		? borderPtr->darkGC->foreground
+		: borderPtr->lightGC->foreground;
+	    break;
+	case TK_RELIEF_RIDGE:
+	    left = borderPtr->lightGC->foreground;
+	    right = borderPtr->darkGC->foreground;
+	    break;
+	case TK_RELIEF_GROOVE:
+	    left = borderPtr->darkGC->foreground;
+	    right = borderPtr->lightGC->foreground;
+	    break;
+	case TK_RELIEF_FLAT:
+	    left = right = borderPtr->bgGC->foreground;
+	    break;
+	case TK_RELIEF_SOLID:
+	    left = right = RGB(0,0,0);
+	    break;
+    }
+    half = width/2;
+    if (leftBevel && (width & 1)) {
+	half++;
+    }
+    TkWinFillRect(dc, x, y, half, height, left);
+    TkWinFillRect(dc, x+half, y, width-half, height, right);
+    TkWinReleaseDrawableDC(drawable, dc, &state);
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_3DHorizontalBevel --
+ *
+ *	This procedure draws a horizontal bevel along one side of
+ *	an object.  The bevel has mitered corners (depending on
+ *	leftIn and rightIn arguments).
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+Tk_3DHorizontalBevel(tkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width, height,
+	leftIn, rightIn, topBevel, relief)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window for which border was allocated. */
+    Drawable drawable;		/* X window or pixmap in which to draw. */
+    Tk_3DBorder border;		/* Token for border to draw. */
+    int x, y, width, height;	/* Bounding box of area of bevel.  Height
+				 * gives width of border. */
+    int leftIn, rightIn;	/* Describes whether the left and right
+				 * edges of the bevel angle in or out as
+				 * they go down.  For example, if "leftIn"
+				 * is true, the left side of the bevel
+				 * looks like this:
+				 *	___________
+				 *	 __________
+				 *	  _________
+				 *	   ________
+				 */
+    int topBevel;		/* Non-zero means this bevel forms the
+				 * top side of the object;  0 means it
+				 * forms the bottom side. */
+    int relief;			/* Kind of bevel to draw.  For example,
+				 * TK_RELIEF_RAISED means interior of
+				 * object should appear higher than
+				 * exterior. */
+{
+    TkBorder *borderPtr = (TkBorder *) border;
+    Display *display = Tk_Display(tkwin);
+    int bottom, halfway, x1, x2, x1Delta, x2Delta;
+    TkWinDCState state;
+    HDC dc = TkWinGetDrawableDC(display, drawable, &state);
+    int topColor, bottomColor;
+
+    if ((borderPtr->lightGC == None) && (relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT)) {
+	TkpGetShadows(borderPtr, tkwin);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Compute a GC for the top half of the bevel and a GC for the
+     * bottom half (they're the same in many cases).
+     */
+
+    switch (relief) {
+	case TK_RELIEF_RAISED:
+	    topColor = (topBevel)
+		? borderPtr->lightGC->foreground
+		: borderPtr->darkGC->foreground;
+	    bottomColor = (topBevel)
+		? ((WinBorder *)borderPtr)->light2ColorPtr->pixel
+		: ((WinBorder *)borderPtr)->dark2ColorPtr->pixel;
+	    break;
+	case TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN:
+	    topColor = (topBevel)
+		? ((WinBorder *)borderPtr)->dark2ColorPtr->pixel
+		: ((WinBorder *)borderPtr)->light2ColorPtr->pixel;
+	    bottomColor = (topBevel)
+		? borderPtr->darkGC->foreground
+		: borderPtr->lightGC->foreground;
+	    break;
+	case TK_RELIEF_RIDGE:
+	    topColor = borderPtr->lightGC->foreground;
+	    bottomColor = borderPtr->darkGC->foreground;
+	    break;
+	case TK_RELIEF_GROOVE:
+	    topColor = borderPtr->darkGC->foreground;
+	    bottomColor = borderPtr->lightGC->foreground;
+	    break;
+	case TK_RELIEF_FLAT:
+	    topColor = bottomColor = borderPtr->bgGC->foreground;
+	    break;
+	case TK_RELIEF_SOLID:
+	    topColor = bottomColor = RGB(0,0,0);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Compute various other geometry-related stuff.
+     */
+
+    if (leftIn) {
+	x1 = x+1;
+    } else {
+	x1 = x+height-1;
+    }
+    x2 = x+width;
+    if (rightIn) {
+	x2--;
+    } else {
+	x2 -= height;
+    }
+    x1Delta = (leftIn) ? 1 : -1;
+    x2Delta = (rightIn) ? -1 : 1;
+    halfway = y + height/2;
+    if (topBevel && (height & 1)) {
+	halfway++;
+    }
+    bottom = y + height;
+
+    /*
+     * Draw one line for each y-coordinate covered by the bevel.
+     */
+
+    for ( ; y < bottom; y++) {
+	/*
+	 * In some weird cases (such as large border widths for skinny
+	 * rectangles) x1 can be >= x2.  Don't draw the lines
+	 * in these cases.
+	 */
+
+	if (x1 < x2) {
+	    TkWinFillRect(dc, x1, y, x2-x1, 1,
+		(y < halfway) ? topColor : bottomColor);
+	}
+	x1 += x1Delta;
+	x2 += x2Delta;
+    }
+    TkWinReleaseDrawableDC(drawable, dc, &state);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpGetShadows --
+ *
+ *	This procedure computes the shadow colors for a 3-D border
+ *	and fills in the corresponding fields of the Border structure.
+ *	It's called lazily, so that the colors aren't allocated until
+ *	something is actually drawn with them.  That way, if a border
+ *	is only used for flat backgrounds the shadow colors will
+ *	never be allocated.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The lightGC and darkGC fields in borderPtr get filled in,
+ *	if they weren't already.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpGetShadows(borderPtr, tkwin)
+    TkBorder *borderPtr;	/* Information about border. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window where border will be used for
+				 * drawing. */
+{
+    XColor lightColor, darkColor;
+    int tmp1, tmp2;
+    XGCValues gcValues;
+
+    if (borderPtr->lightGC != None) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Handle the special case of the default system colors.
+     */
+
+    if ((TkWinIndexOfColor(borderPtr->bgColorPtr) == COLOR_3DFACE)
+	|| (TkWinIndexOfColor(borderPtr->bgColorPtr) == COLOR_WINDOW)) {
+	borderPtr->darkColorPtr = Tk_GetColor(NULL, tkwin,
+	    Tk_GetUid("SystemButtonShadow"));
+	gcValues.foreground = borderPtr->darkColorPtr->pixel;
+	borderPtr->darkGC = Tk_GetGC(tkwin, GCForeground, &gcValues);
+	borderPtr->lightColorPtr = Tk_GetColor(NULL, tkwin,
+	    Tk_GetUid("SystemButtonHighlight"));
+	gcValues.foreground = borderPtr->lightColorPtr->pixel;
+	borderPtr->lightGC = Tk_GetGC(tkwin, GCForeground, &gcValues);
+	((WinBorder*)borderPtr)->dark2ColorPtr = Tk_GetColor(NULL, tkwin,
+		Tk_GetUid("System3dDarkShadow"));
+	((WinBorder*)borderPtr)->light2ColorPtr = Tk_GetColor(NULL, tkwin,
+		Tk_GetUid("System3dLight"));
+	return;
+    } else {
+	darkColor.red = 0;
+	darkColor.green = 0;
+	darkColor.blue = 0;
+	((WinBorder*)borderPtr)->dark2ColorPtr = Tk_GetColorByValue(tkwin,
+	    &darkColor);
+	lightColor = *(borderPtr->bgColorPtr);
+	((WinBorder*)borderPtr)->light2ColorPtr = Tk_GetColorByValue(tkwin, 
+	    &lightColor);
+    }
+    
+    /*
+     * First, handle the case of a color display with lots of colors.
+     * The shadow colors get computed using whichever formula results
+     * in the greatest change in color:
+     * 1. Lighter shadow is half-way to white, darker shadow is half
+     *    way to dark.
+     * 2. Lighter shadow is 40% brighter than background, darker shadow
+     *    is 40% darker than background.
+     */
+
+    if (Tk_Depth(tkwin) >= 6) {
+	/*
+	 * This is a color display with lots of colors.  For the dark
+	 * shadow, cut 40% from each of the background color components.
+	 * For the light shadow, boost each component by 40% or half-way
+	 * to white, whichever is greater (the first approach works
+	 * better for unsaturated colors, the second for saturated ones).
+	 */
+
+	darkColor.red = (60 * (int) borderPtr->bgColorPtr->red)/100;
+	darkColor.green = (60 * (int) borderPtr->bgColorPtr->green)/100;
+	darkColor.blue = (60 * (int) borderPtr->bgColorPtr->blue)/100;
+	borderPtr->darkColorPtr = Tk_GetColorByValue(tkwin, &darkColor);
+	gcValues.foreground = borderPtr->darkColorPtr->pixel;
+	borderPtr->darkGC = Tk_GetGC(tkwin, GCForeground, &gcValues);
+
+	/*
+	 * Compute the colors using integers, not using lightColor.red
+	 * etc.: these are shorts and may have problems with integer
+	 * overflow.
+	 */
+
+	tmp1 = (14 * (int) borderPtr->bgColorPtr->red)/10;
+	if (tmp1 > MAX_INTENSITY) {
+	    tmp1 = MAX_INTENSITY;
+	}
+	tmp2 = (MAX_INTENSITY + (int) borderPtr->bgColorPtr->red)/2;
+	lightColor.red = (tmp1 > tmp2) ? tmp1 : tmp2;
+	tmp1 = (14 * (int) borderPtr->bgColorPtr->green)/10;
+	if (tmp1 > MAX_INTENSITY) {
+	    tmp1 = MAX_INTENSITY;
+	}
+	tmp2 = (MAX_INTENSITY + (int) borderPtr->bgColorPtr->green)/2;
+	lightColor.green = (tmp1 > tmp2) ? tmp1 : tmp2;
+	tmp1 = (14 * (int) borderPtr->bgColorPtr->blue)/10;
+	if (tmp1 > MAX_INTENSITY) {
+	    tmp1 = MAX_INTENSITY;
+	}
+	tmp2 = (MAX_INTENSITY + (int) borderPtr->bgColorPtr->blue)/2;
+	lightColor.blue = (tmp1 > tmp2) ? tmp1 : tmp2;
+	borderPtr->lightColorPtr = Tk_GetColorByValue(tkwin, &lightColor);
+	gcValues.foreground = borderPtr->lightColorPtr->pixel;
+	borderPtr->lightGC = Tk_GetGC(tkwin, GCForeground, &gcValues);
+	return;
+    }
+
+    if (borderPtr->shadow == None) {
+	borderPtr->shadow = Tk_GetBitmap((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, tkwin,
+		Tk_GetUid("gray50"));
+	if (borderPtr->shadow == None) {
+	    panic("TkpGetShadows couldn't allocate bitmap for border");
+	}
+    }
+    if (borderPtr->visual->map_entries > 2) {
+	/*
+	 * This isn't a monochrome display, but the colormap either
+	 * ran out of entries or didn't have very many to begin with.
+	 * Generate the light shadows with a white stipple and the
+	 * dark shadows with a black stipple.
+	 */
+
+	gcValues.foreground = borderPtr->bgColorPtr->pixel;
+	gcValues.background = BlackPixelOfScreen(borderPtr->screen);
+	gcValues.stipple = borderPtr->shadow;
+	gcValues.fill_style = FillOpaqueStippled;
+	borderPtr->darkGC = Tk_GetGC(tkwin,
+		GCForeground|GCBackground|GCStipple|GCFillStyle, &gcValues);
+	gcValues.foreground = WhitePixelOfScreen(borderPtr->screen);
+	gcValues.background = borderPtr->bgColorPtr->pixel;
+	borderPtr->lightGC = Tk_GetGC(tkwin,
+		GCForeground|GCBackground|GCStipple|GCFillStyle, &gcValues);
+	return;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * This is just a measly monochrome display, hardly even worth its
+     * existence on this earth.  Make one shadow a 50% stipple and the
+     * other the opposite of the background.
+     */
+
+    gcValues.foreground = WhitePixelOfScreen(borderPtr->screen);
+    gcValues.background = BlackPixelOfScreen(borderPtr->screen);
+    gcValues.stipple = borderPtr->shadow;
+    gcValues.fill_style = FillOpaqueStippled;
+    borderPtr->lightGC = Tk_GetGC(tkwin,
+	    GCForeground|GCBackground|GCStipple|GCFillStyle, &gcValues);
+    if (borderPtr->bgColorPtr->pixel
+	    == WhitePixelOfScreen(borderPtr->screen)) {
+	gcValues.foreground = BlackPixelOfScreen(borderPtr->screen);
+	borderPtr->darkGC = Tk_GetGC(tkwin, GCForeground, &gcValues);
+    } else {
+	borderPtr->darkGC = borderPtr->lightGC;
+	borderPtr->lightGC = Tk_GetGC(tkwin, GCForeground, &gcValues);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWinGetBorderPixels --
+ *
+ *	This routine returns the 5 COLORREFs used to draw a given
+ *	3d border.  
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns the colors in the specified array.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	May cause the remaining colors to be allocated.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+COLORREF
+TkWinGetBorderPixels(tkwin, border, which)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;
+    Tk_3DBorder border;
+    int which;			/* One of TK_3D_FLAT_GC, TK_3D_LIGHT_GC,
+				 * TK_3D_DARK_GC, TK_3D_LIGHT2, TK_3D_DARK2 */
+{
+    WinBorder *borderPtr = (WinBorder *) border;
+    
+    if (borderPtr->info.lightGC == None) {
+	TkpGetShadows(&borderPtr->info, tkwin);
+    }
+    switch (which) {
+	case TK_3D_FLAT_GC:
+	    return borderPtr->info.bgColorPtr->pixel;
+	case TK_3D_LIGHT_GC:
+	    if (borderPtr->info.lightColorPtr == NULL) {
+		return WhitePixelOfScreen(borderPtr->info.screen);
+	    }
+	    return borderPtr->info.lightColorPtr->pixel;
+	case TK_3D_DARK_GC:
+	    if (borderPtr->info.darkColorPtr == NULL) {
+		return BlackPixelOfScreen(borderPtr->info.screen);
+	    }
+	    return borderPtr->info.darkColorPtr->pixel;
+	case TK_3D_LIGHT2:
+	    return borderPtr->light2ColorPtr->pixel;
+	case TK_3D_DARK2:
+	    return borderPtr->dark2ColorPtr->pixel;
+    }
+    return 0;
+}
diff --git a/win/tkWinButton.c b/win/tkWinButton.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..47a74e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/tkWinButton.c
@@ -0,0 +1,811 @@
+/* 
+ * tkWinButton.c --
+ *
+ *	This file implements the Windows specific portion of the button
+ *	widgets.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1996 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkWinButton.c 1.12 97/09/02 13:18:27
+ */
+
+#define OEMRESOURCE
+#include "tkWinInt.h"
+#include "tkButton.h"
+
+/*
+ * These macros define the base style flags for the different button types.
+ */
+
+#define LABEL_STYLE (BS_OWNERDRAW | WS_CHILD | WS_VISIBLE | WS_CLIPSIBLINGS)
+#define PUSH_STYLE (BS_OWNERDRAW | BS_PUSHBUTTON | WS_CHILD | WS_VISIBLE | WS_CLIPSIBLINGS)
+#define CHECK_STYLE (BS_OWNERDRAW | BS_CHECKBOX | WS_CHILD | WS_VISIBLE | WS_CLIPSIBLINGS)
+#define RADIO_STYLE (BS_OWNERDRAW | BS_RADIOBUTTON | WS_CHILD | WS_VISIBLE | WS_CLIPSIBLINGS)
+
+static DWORD buttonStyles[] = {
+    LABEL_STYLE, PUSH_STYLE, CHECK_STYLE, RADIO_STYLE
+};
+
+/*
+ * Declaration of Windows specific button structure.
+ */
+
+typedef struct WinButton {
+    TkButton info;		/* Generic button info. */
+    WNDPROC oldProc;		/* Old window procedure. */
+    HWND hwnd;			/* Current window handle. */
+    Pixmap pixmap;		/* Bitmap for rendering the button. */
+    DWORD style;		/* Window style flags. */
+} WinButton;
+
+
+/*
+ * The following macro reverses the order of RGB bytes to convert
+ * between RGBQUAD and COLORREF values.
+ */
+
+#define FlipColor(rgb) (RGB(GetBValue(rgb),GetGValue(rgb),GetRValue(rgb)))
+
+/*
+ * The following enumeration defines the meaning of the palette entries
+ * in the "buttons" image used to draw checkbox and radiobutton indicators.
+ */
+
+enum {
+    PAL_CHECK = 0,
+    PAL_TOP_OUTER = 1,
+    PAL_BOTTOM_OUTER = 2,
+    PAL_BOTTOM_INNER = 3,
+    PAL_INTERIOR = 4,
+    PAL_TOP_INNER = 5,
+    PAL_BACKGROUND = 6
+};
+
+/*
+ * Set to non-zero if this module is initialized.
+ */
+
+static int initialized = 0;
+
+/*
+ * Variables for the cached information about the boxes bitmap.
+ */
+
+static BITMAPINFOHEADER *boxesPtr = NULL;   /* Information about the bitmap. */
+static DWORD *boxesPalette = NULL;	    /* Pointer to color palette. */
+static LPSTR boxesBits = NULL;		    /* Pointer to bitmap data. */
+static DWORD boxHeight = 0, boxWidth = 0;    /* Size of each sub-image. */
+
+/*
+ * This variable holds the default border width for a button in string
+ * form for use in a Tk_ConfigSpec.
+ */
+
+static char defWidth[8];
+
+/*
+ * Declarations for functions defined in this file.
+ */
+
+static int		ButtonBindProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, XEvent *eventPtr,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin, KeySym keySym));
+static LRESULT CALLBACK	ButtonProc _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd, UINT message,
+			    WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam));
+static DWORD		ComputeStyle _ANSI_ARGS_((WinButton* butPtr));
+static Window		CreateProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Window parent, ClientData instanceData));
+static void		InitBoxes _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+static void		UpdateButtonDefaults _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+
+/*
+ * The class procedure table for the button widgets.
+ */
+
+TkClassProcs tkpButtonProcs = { 
+    CreateProc,			/* createProc. */
+    TkButtonWorldChanged,	/* geometryProc. */
+    NULL			/* modalProc. */ 
+};
+
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * InitBoxes --
+ *
+ *	This function load the Tk 3d button bitmap.  "buttons" is a 16 
+ *	color bitmap that is laid out such that the top row contains 
+ *	the 4 checkbox images, and the bottom row contains the radio 
+ *	button images. Note that the bitmap is stored in bottom-up 
+ *	format.  Also, the first seven palette entries are used to 
+ *	identify the different parts of the bitmaps so we can do the 
+ *	appropriate color mappings based on the current button colors.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Loads the "buttons" resource.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+InitBoxes()
+{
+    /*
+     * For DLLs like Tk, the HINSTANCE is the same as the HMODULE.
+     */
+
+    HMODULE module = (HINSTANCE) Tk_GetHINSTANCE();
+    HRSRC hrsrc;
+    HGLOBAL hblk;
+    LPBITMAPINFOHEADER newBitmap;
+    DWORD size;
+
+    hrsrc = FindResource(module, "buttons", RT_BITMAP);
+    if (hrsrc) {
+	hblk = LoadResource(module, hrsrc);
+	boxesPtr = (LPBITMAPINFOHEADER)LockResource(hblk);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Copy the DIBitmap into writable memory.
+     */
+
+    if (boxesPtr != NULL && !(boxesPtr->biWidth % 4)
+	    && !(boxesPtr->biHeight % 2)) {
+	size = boxesPtr->biSize + (1 << boxesPtr->biBitCount) * sizeof(RGBQUAD)
+	    + boxesPtr->biSizeImage;
+	newBitmap = (LPBITMAPINFOHEADER) ckalloc(size);
+	memcpy(newBitmap, boxesPtr, size);
+	boxesPtr = newBitmap;
+	boxWidth = boxesPtr->biWidth / 4;
+	boxHeight = boxesPtr->biHeight / 2;
+	boxesPalette = (DWORD*) (((LPSTR)boxesPtr) + boxesPtr->biSize);
+	boxesBits = ((LPSTR)boxesPalette)
+	    + ((1 << boxesPtr->biBitCount) * sizeof(RGBQUAD));
+    } else {
+	boxesPtr = NULL;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * UpdateButtonDefaults --
+ *
+ *	This function retrieves the current system defaults for
+ *	the button widgets.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Updates the configuration defaults for buttons.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+UpdateButtonDefaults()
+{
+    Tk_ConfigSpec *specPtr;
+    int width = GetSystemMetrics(SM_CXEDGE);
+
+    if (width == 0) {
+	width = 1;
+    }
+    sprintf(defWidth, "%d", width);
+    for (specPtr = tkpButtonConfigSpecs; specPtr->type != TK_CONFIG_END;
+	    specPtr++) {
+	if (specPtr->offset == Tk_Offset(TkButton, borderWidth)) {
+	    specPtr->defValue = defWidth;
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpCreateButton --
+ *
+ *	Allocate a new TkButton structure.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns a newly allocated TkButton structure.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Registers an event handler for the widget.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+TkButton *
+TkpCreateButton(tkwin)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;
+{
+    WinButton *butPtr;
+
+    if (!initialized) {
+	UpdateButtonDefaults();
+	initialized = 1;
+    }
+
+    butPtr = (WinButton *)ckalloc(sizeof(WinButton));
+    butPtr->hwnd = NULL;
+    return (TkButton *) butPtr;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * CreateProc --
+ *
+ *	This function creates a new Button control, subclasses
+ *	the instance, and generates a new Window object.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns the newly allocated Window object, or None on failure.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Causes a new Button control to come into existence.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static Window
+CreateProc(tkwin, parentWin, instanceData)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window. */
+    Window parentWin;		/* Parent of new window. */
+    ClientData instanceData;	/* Button instance data. */
+{
+    Window window;
+    HWND parent;
+    char *class;
+    WinButton *butPtr = (WinButton *)instanceData;
+
+    parent = Tk_GetHWND(parentWin);
+    if (butPtr->info.type == TYPE_LABEL) {
+	class = "STATIC";
+	butPtr->style = SS_OWNERDRAW | WS_CHILD | WS_VISIBLE | WS_CLIPSIBLINGS;
+    } else {
+	class = "BUTTON";
+	butPtr->style = BS_OWNERDRAW | WS_CHILD | WS_VISIBLE | WS_CLIPSIBLINGS;
+    }
+    butPtr->hwnd = CreateWindow(class, NULL, butPtr->style,
+	    Tk_X(tkwin), Tk_Y(tkwin), Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin),
+	    parent, NULL, Tk_GetHINSTANCE(), NULL);
+    SetWindowPos(butPtr->hwnd, HWND_TOP, 0, 0, 0, 0,
+		    SWP_NOACTIVATE | SWP_NOMOVE | SWP_NOSIZE);
+    butPtr->oldProc = (WNDPROC)SetWindowLong(butPtr->hwnd, GWL_WNDPROC,
+	    (DWORD) ButtonProc);
+
+    window = Tk_AttachHWND(tkwin, butPtr->hwnd);
+    return window;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpDestroyButton --
+ *
+ *	Free data structures associated with the button control.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Restores the default control state.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpDestroyButton(butPtr)
+    TkButton *butPtr;
+{
+    WinButton *winButPtr = (WinButton *)butPtr;
+    HWND hwnd = winButPtr->hwnd;
+    if (hwnd) {
+	SetWindowLong(hwnd, GWL_WNDPROC, (DWORD) winButPtr->oldProc);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpDisplayButton --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked to display a button widget.  It is
+ *	normally invoked as an idle handler.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Information appears on the screen.  The REDRAW_PENDING flag
+ *	is cleared.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpDisplayButton(clientData)
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about widget. */
+{
+    TkWinDCState state;
+    HDC dc;
+    register TkButton *butPtr = (TkButton *) clientData;
+    GC gc;
+    Tk_3DBorder border;
+    Pixmap pixmap;
+    int x = 0;			/* Initialization only needed to stop
+				 * compiler warning. */
+    int y, relief;
+    register Tk_Window tkwin = butPtr->tkwin;
+    int width, height;
+    int defaultWidth;		/* Width of default ring. */
+    int offset;			/* 0 means this is a label widget.  1 means
+				 * it is a flavor of button, so we offset
+				 * the text to make the button appear to
+				 * move up and down as the relief changes. */
+
+    butPtr->flags &= ~REDRAW_PENDING;
+    if ((butPtr->tkwin == NULL) || !Tk_IsMapped(tkwin)) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    border = butPtr->normalBorder;
+    if ((butPtr->state == tkDisabledUid) && (butPtr->disabledFg != NULL)) {
+	gc = butPtr->disabledGC;
+    } else if ((butPtr->state == tkActiveUid)
+	    && !Tk_StrictMotif(butPtr->tkwin)) {
+	gc = butPtr->activeTextGC;
+	border = butPtr->activeBorder;
+    } else {
+	gc = butPtr->normalTextGC;
+    }
+    if ((butPtr->flags & SELECTED) && (butPtr->state != tkActiveUid)
+	    && (butPtr->selectBorder != NULL) && !butPtr->indicatorOn) {
+	border = butPtr->selectBorder;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Override the relief specified for the button if this is a
+     * checkbutton or radiobutton and there's no indicator.
+     */
+
+    relief = butPtr->relief;
+    if ((butPtr->type >= TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON) && !butPtr->indicatorOn) {
+	relief = (butPtr->flags & SELECTED) ? TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN
+		: TK_RELIEF_RAISED;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Compute width of default ring and offset for pushed buttons.
+     */
+
+    if (butPtr->type == TYPE_BUTTON) {
+	defaultWidth = ((butPtr->defaultState == tkActiveUid)
+		? butPtr->highlightWidth : 0);
+	offset = 1;
+    } else {
+	defaultWidth = 0;
+	if ((butPtr->type >= TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON) && !butPtr->indicatorOn) {
+	    offset = 1;
+	} else {
+	    offset = 0;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * In order to avoid screen flashes, this procedure redraws
+     * the button in a pixmap, then copies the pixmap to the
+     * screen in a single operation.  This means that there's no
+     * point in time where the on-sreen image has been cleared.
+     */
+
+    pixmap = Tk_GetPixmap(butPtr->display, Tk_WindowId(tkwin),
+	    Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin), Tk_Depth(tkwin));
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, border, 0, 0, Tk_Width(tkwin),
+	    Tk_Height(tkwin), 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+
+    /*
+     * Display image or bitmap or text for button.
+     */
+
+    if (butPtr->image != None) {
+	Tk_SizeOfImage(butPtr->image, &width, &height);
+
+	imageOrBitmap:
+	TkComputeAnchor(butPtr->anchor, tkwin, 0, 0,
+		butPtr->indicatorSpace + width, height, &x, &y);
+	x += butPtr->indicatorSpace;
+
+	if (relief == TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN) {
+	    x += offset;
+	    y += offset;
+	}
+	if (butPtr->image != NULL) {
+	    if ((butPtr->selectImage != NULL) && (butPtr->flags & SELECTED)) {
+		Tk_RedrawImage(butPtr->selectImage, 0, 0, width, height,
+			pixmap, x, y);
+	    } else {
+		Tk_RedrawImage(butPtr->image, 0, 0, width, height, pixmap,
+			x, y);
+	    }
+	} else {
+	    XSetClipOrigin(butPtr->display, gc, x, y);
+	    XCopyPlane(butPtr->display, butPtr->bitmap, pixmap, gc, 0, 0,
+		    (unsigned int) width, (unsigned int) height, x, y, 1);
+	    XSetClipOrigin(butPtr->display, gc, 0, 0);
+	}
+	y += height/2;
+    } else if (butPtr->bitmap != None) {
+	Tk_SizeOfBitmap(butPtr->display, butPtr->bitmap, &width, &height);
+	goto imageOrBitmap;
+    } else {
+	RECT rect;
+	TkComputeAnchor(butPtr->anchor, tkwin, butPtr->padX, butPtr->padY,
+		butPtr->indicatorSpace + butPtr->textWidth, butPtr->textHeight,
+		&x, &y);
+
+	x += butPtr->indicatorSpace;
+
+	if (relief == TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN) {
+	    x += offset;
+	    y += offset;
+	}
+	Tk_DrawTextLayout(butPtr->display, pixmap, gc, butPtr->textLayout,
+		x, y, 0, -1);
+	Tk_UnderlineTextLayout(butPtr->display, pixmap, gc,
+		butPtr->textLayout, x, y, butPtr->underline);
+
+	/*
+	 * Draw the focus ring.  If this is a push button then we need to put
+	 * it around the inner edge of the border, otherwise we put it around
+	 * the text.
+	 */
+
+	if (butPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS && butPtr->type != TYPE_LABEL) {
+	    dc = TkWinGetDrawableDC(butPtr->display, pixmap, &state);
+	    if (butPtr->type == TYPE_BUTTON || !butPtr->indicatorOn) {
+		rect.top = butPtr->borderWidth + 1 + defaultWidth;
+		rect.left = rect.top;
+		rect.right = Tk_Width(tkwin) - rect.left;
+		rect.bottom = Tk_Height(tkwin) - rect.top;
+	    } else {
+		rect.top = y-2;
+		rect.left = x-2;
+		rect.right = x+butPtr->textWidth + 1;
+		rect.bottom = y+butPtr->textHeight + 1;
+	    }
+	    SetTextColor(dc, gc->foreground);
+	    SetBkColor(dc, gc->background);
+	    DrawFocusRect(dc, &rect);
+	    TkWinReleaseDrawableDC(pixmap, dc, &state);
+	}
+	y += butPtr->textHeight/2;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Draw the indicator for check buttons and radio buttons.  At this
+     * point x and y refer to the top-left corner of the text or image
+     * or bitmap.
+     */
+
+    if ((butPtr->type >= TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON) && butPtr->indicatorOn
+	    && boxesPtr) {
+	int xSrc, ySrc;
+
+	x -= butPtr->indicatorSpace;
+	y -= butPtr->indicatorDiameter / 2;
+
+	xSrc = (butPtr->flags & SELECTED) ? boxWidth : 0;
+	if (butPtr->state == tkActiveUid) {
+	    xSrc += boxWidth*2;
+	}
+	ySrc = (butPtr->type == TYPE_RADIO_BUTTON) ? 0 : boxHeight;
+		
+	/*
+	 * Update the palette in the boxes bitmap to reflect the current
+	 * button colors.  Note that this code relies on the layout of the
+	 * bitmap's palette.  Also, all of the colors used to draw the
+	 * bitmap must be in the palette that is selected into the DC of
+	 * the offscreen pixmap.  This requires that the static colors
+	 * be placed into the palette.
+	 */
+
+	boxesPalette[PAL_CHECK] = FlipColor(gc->foreground);
+	boxesPalette[PAL_TOP_OUTER] = FlipColor(TkWinGetBorderPixels(tkwin,
+		border, TK_3D_DARK_GC));
+	boxesPalette[PAL_TOP_INNER] = FlipColor(TkWinGetBorderPixels(tkwin,
+		border, TK_3D_DARK2));
+	boxesPalette[PAL_BOTTOM_INNER] = FlipColor(TkWinGetBorderPixels(tkwin,
+		border, TK_3D_LIGHT2));
+	boxesPalette[PAL_BOTTOM_OUTER] = FlipColor(TkWinGetBorderPixels(tkwin,
+		border, TK_3D_LIGHT_GC));
+	if (butPtr->state == tkDisabledUid) {
+	    boxesPalette[PAL_INTERIOR] = FlipColor(TkWinGetBorderPixels(tkwin,
+		border, TK_3D_LIGHT2));
+	} else if (butPtr->selectBorder != NULL) {
+	    boxesPalette[PAL_INTERIOR] = FlipColor(TkWinGetBorderPixels(tkwin,
+		    butPtr->selectBorder, TK_3D_FLAT_GC));
+	} else {
+	    boxesPalette[PAL_INTERIOR] = FlipColor(GetSysColor(COLOR_WINDOW));
+	}
+	boxesPalette[PAL_BACKGROUND] = FlipColor(TkWinGetBorderPixels(tkwin,
+		border, TK_3D_FLAT_GC));
+
+	dc = TkWinGetDrawableDC(butPtr->display, pixmap, &state);
+	StretchDIBits(dc, x, y, boxWidth, boxHeight, xSrc, ySrc, 
+		boxWidth, boxHeight, boxesBits, (LPBITMAPINFO)boxesPtr, 
+		DIB_RGB_COLORS, SRCCOPY);
+	TkWinReleaseDrawableDC(pixmap, dc, &state);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * If the button is disabled with a stipple rather than a special
+     * foreground color, generate the stippled effect.  If the widget
+     * is selected and we use a different background color when selected,
+     * must temporarily modify the GC.
+     */
+
+    if ((butPtr->state == tkDisabledUid)
+	    && ((butPtr->disabledFg == NULL) || (butPtr->image != NULL))) {
+	if ((butPtr->flags & SELECTED) && !butPtr->indicatorOn
+		&& (butPtr->selectBorder != NULL)) {
+	    XSetForeground(butPtr->display, butPtr->disabledGC,
+		    Tk_3DBorderColor(butPtr->selectBorder)->pixel);
+	}
+	XFillRectangle(butPtr->display, pixmap, butPtr->disabledGC,
+		butPtr->inset, butPtr->inset,
+		(unsigned) (Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2*butPtr->inset),
+		(unsigned) (Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2*butPtr->inset));
+	if ((butPtr->flags & SELECTED) && !butPtr->indicatorOn
+		&& (butPtr->selectBorder != NULL)) {
+	    XSetForeground(butPtr->display, butPtr->disabledGC,
+		    Tk_3DBorderColor(butPtr->normalBorder)->pixel);
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Draw the border and traversal highlight last.  This way, if the
+     * button's contents overflow they'll be covered up by the border.
+     */
+
+    if (relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT) {
+	Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, border,
+		defaultWidth, defaultWidth,
+		Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2*defaultWidth,
+		Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2*defaultWidth,
+		butPtr->borderWidth, relief);
+    }
+    if (defaultWidth != 0) {
+	dc = TkWinGetDrawableDC(butPtr->display, pixmap, &state);
+	TkWinFillRect(dc, 0, 0, Tk_Width(tkwin), defaultWidth,
+		butPtr->highlightColorPtr->pixel);
+	TkWinFillRect(dc, 0, 0, defaultWidth, Tk_Height(tkwin),
+		butPtr->highlightColorPtr->pixel);
+	TkWinFillRect(dc, 0, Tk_Height(tkwin) - defaultWidth,
+		Tk_Width(tkwin), defaultWidth,
+		butPtr->highlightColorPtr->pixel);
+	TkWinFillRect(dc, Tk_Width(tkwin) - defaultWidth, 0,
+		defaultWidth, Tk_Height(tkwin),
+		butPtr->highlightColorPtr->pixel);
+	TkWinReleaseDrawableDC(pixmap, dc, &state);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Copy the information from the off-screen pixmap onto the screen,
+     * then delete the pixmap.
+     */
+
+    XCopyArea(butPtr->display, pixmap, Tk_WindowId(tkwin),
+	    butPtr->copyGC, 0, 0, (unsigned) Tk_Width(tkwin),
+	    (unsigned) Tk_Height(tkwin), 0, 0);
+    Tk_FreePixmap(butPtr->display, pixmap);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpComputeButtonGeometry --
+ *
+ *	After changes in a button's text or bitmap, this procedure
+ *	recomputes the button's geometry and passes this information
+ *	along to the geometry manager for the window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The button's window may change size.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpComputeButtonGeometry(butPtr)
+    register TkButton *butPtr;	/* Button whose geometry may have changed. */
+{
+    int width, height, avgWidth;
+    Tk_FontMetrics fm;
+
+    if (butPtr->highlightWidth < 0) {
+	butPtr->highlightWidth = 0;
+    }
+    butPtr->inset = butPtr->highlightWidth + butPtr->borderWidth;
+    butPtr->indicatorSpace = 0;
+
+    if (!boxesPtr) {
+	InitBoxes();
+    }
+
+    if (butPtr->image != NULL) {
+	Tk_SizeOfImage(butPtr->image, &width, &height);
+	imageOrBitmap:
+	if (butPtr->width > 0) {
+	    width = butPtr->width;
+	}
+	if (butPtr->height > 0) {
+	    height = butPtr->height;
+	}
+	if ((butPtr->type >= TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON) && butPtr->indicatorOn) {
+	    butPtr->indicatorSpace = boxWidth * 2;
+	    butPtr->indicatorDiameter = boxHeight;
+	}
+    } else if (butPtr->bitmap != None) {
+	Tk_SizeOfBitmap(butPtr->display, butPtr->bitmap, &width, &height);
+	goto imageOrBitmap;
+    } else {
+	Tk_FreeTextLayout(butPtr->textLayout);
+	butPtr->textLayout = Tk_ComputeTextLayout(butPtr->tkfont,
+		butPtr->text, -1, butPtr->wrapLength, butPtr->justify, 0,
+		&butPtr->textWidth, &butPtr->textHeight);
+
+	width = butPtr->textWidth;
+	height = butPtr->textHeight;
+	avgWidth = Tk_TextWidth(butPtr->tkfont, "0", 1);
+	Tk_GetFontMetrics(butPtr->tkfont, &fm);
+
+	if (butPtr->width > 0) {
+	    width = butPtr->width * avgWidth;
+	}
+	if (butPtr->height > 0) {
+	    height = butPtr->height * fm.linespace;
+	}
+
+	if ((butPtr->type >= TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON) && butPtr->indicatorOn) {
+	    butPtr->indicatorDiameter = boxHeight;
+	    butPtr->indicatorSpace = butPtr->indicatorDiameter + avgWidth;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Increase the inset to allow for the focus ring.
+	 */
+
+	if (butPtr->type != TYPE_LABEL) {
+	    butPtr->inset += 3;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * When issuing the geometry request, add extra space for the indicator,
+     * if any, and for the border and padding, plus an extra pixel so the
+     * display can be offset by 1 pixel in either direction for the raised
+     * or lowered effect.
+     */
+
+    if ((butPtr->image == NULL) && (butPtr->bitmap == None)) {
+	width += 2*butPtr->padX;
+	height += 2*butPtr->padY;
+    }
+    if ((butPtr->type == TYPE_BUTTON)
+	    || ((butPtr->type >= TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON) && !butPtr->indicatorOn)) {
+	width += 1;
+	height += 1;
+    }
+    Tk_GeometryRequest(butPtr->tkwin, (int) (width + butPtr->indicatorSpace
+	    + 2*butPtr->inset), (int) (height + 2*butPtr->inset));
+    Tk_SetInternalBorder(butPtr->tkwin, butPtr->inset);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * ButtonProc --
+ *
+ *	This function is call by Windows whenever an event occurs on
+ *	a button control created by Tk.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Standard Windows return value.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	May generate events.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static LRESULT CALLBACK
+ButtonProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
+    HWND hwnd;
+    UINT message;
+    WPARAM wParam;
+    LPARAM lParam;
+{
+    LRESULT result;
+    WinButton *butPtr;
+    Tk_Window tkwin = Tk_HWNDToWindow(hwnd);
+
+    if (tkwin == NULL) {
+	panic("ButtonProc called on an invalid HWND");
+    }
+    butPtr = (WinButton *)((TkWindow*)tkwin)->instanceData;
+
+    switch(message) {
+	case WM_ERASEBKGND:
+	    return 0;
+
+	case BM_GETCHECK:
+	    if (((butPtr->info.type == TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON)
+		    || (butPtr->info.type == TYPE_RADIO_BUTTON))
+		    && butPtr->info.indicatorOn) {
+		return (butPtr->info.flags & SELECTED)
+		    ? BST_CHECKED : BST_UNCHECKED;
+	    }
+	    return 0;
+
+	case BM_GETSTATE: {
+	    DWORD state = 0;
+	    if (((butPtr->info.type == TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON)
+		    || (butPtr->info.type == TYPE_RADIO_BUTTON))
+		    && butPtr->info.indicatorOn) {
+		state = (butPtr->info.flags & SELECTED)
+		    ? BST_CHECKED : BST_UNCHECKED;
+	    }
+	    if (butPtr->info.flags & GOT_FOCUS) {
+		state |= BST_FOCUS;
+	    }
+	    return state;
+	}
+	case WM_ENABLE:
+	    break;
+
+	case WM_PAINT: {
+	    PAINTSTRUCT ps;
+	    BeginPaint(hwnd, &ps);
+	    EndPaint(hwnd, &ps);
+	    TkpDisplayButton((ClientData)butPtr);
+	    return 0;
+	}
+	case BN_CLICKED: {
+	    int code;
+	    Tcl_Interp *interp = butPtr->info.interp;
+	    if (butPtr->info.state != tkDisabledUid) {
+		Tcl_Preserve((ClientData)interp);
+		code = TkInvokeButton((TkButton*)butPtr);
+		if (code != TCL_OK && code != TCL_CONTINUE
+			&& code != TCL_BREAK) {
+		    Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, "\n    (button invoke)");
+		    Tcl_BackgroundError(interp);
+		}
+		Tcl_Release((ClientData)interp);
+	    }
+	    Tcl_ServiceAll();
+	    return 0;
+	}
+
+	default:
+	    if (Tk_TranslateWinEvent(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam, &result)) {
+		return result;
+	    }
+    }
+    return DefWindowProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam);
+}
diff --git a/win/tkWinClipboard.c b/win/tkWinClipboard.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9d4237a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/tkWinClipboard.c
@@ -0,0 +1,291 @@
+/* 
+ * tkWinClipboard.c --
+ *
+ *	This file contains functions for managing the clipboard.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkWinClipboard.c 1.8 97/05/20 17:01:13
+ */
+
+#include "tkWinInt.h"
+#include "tkSelect.h"
+
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkSelGetSelection --
+ *
+ *	Retrieve the specified selection from another process.  For
+ *	now, only fetching XA_STRING from CLIPBOARD is supported.
+ *	Eventually other types should be allowed.
+ * 
+ * Results:
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl return value.
+ *	If an error occurs (such as no selection exists)
+ *	then an error message is left in interp->result.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkSelGetSelection(interp, tkwin, selection, target, proc, clientData)
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for reporting
+				 * errors. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window on whose behalf to retrieve
+				 * the selection (determines display
+				 * from which to retrieve). */
+    Atom selection;		/* Selection to retrieve. */
+    Atom target;		/* Desired form in which selection
+				 * is to be returned. */
+    Tk_GetSelProc *proc;	/* Procedure to call to process the
+				 * selection, once it has been retrieved. */
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Arbitrary value to pass to proc. */
+{
+    char *data, *buffer, *destPtr;
+    HGLOBAL handle;
+    int result, length;
+
+    if ((selection == Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, "CLIPBOARD"))
+	    && (target == XA_STRING)) {
+	if (OpenClipboard(NULL)) {
+	    handle = GetClipboardData(CF_TEXT);
+	    if (handle != NULL) {
+		data = GlobalLock(handle);
+		length = strlen(data);
+		buffer = ckalloc(length+1);
+		destPtr = buffer;
+		while (*data != '\0') {
+		    if (*data != '\r') {
+			*destPtr = *data;
+			destPtr++;
+		    }
+		    data++;
+		}
+		*destPtr = '\0';
+		GlobalUnlock(handle);
+		CloseClipboard();
+		result = (*proc)(clientData, interp, buffer);
+		ckfree(buffer);
+		return result;
+	    }
+	    CloseClipboard();
+	}
+    }
+
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, Tk_GetAtomName(tkwin, selection),
+	" selection doesn't exist or form \"", Tk_GetAtomName(tkwin, target),
+	"\" not defined", (char *) NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkSetSelectionOwner --
+ *
+ *	This function claims ownership of the specified selection.
+ *	If the selection is CLIPBOARD, then we empty the system
+ *	clipboard.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Empties the system clipboard, and claims ownership.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+XSetSelectionOwner(display, selection, owner, time)
+    Display* display;
+    Atom selection;
+    Window owner;
+    Time time;
+{
+    HWND hwnd = owner ? TkWinGetHWND(owner) : NULL;
+    Tk_Window tkwin;
+
+    /*
+     * This is a gross hack because the Tk_InternAtom interface is broken.
+     * It expects a Tk_Window, even though it only needs a Tk_Display.
+     */
+
+    tkwin = (Tk_Window)tkMainWindowList->winPtr;
+
+    if (selection == Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, "CLIPBOARD")) {
+
+	/*
+	 * Only claim and empty the clipboard if we aren't already the
+	 * owner of the clipboard.
+	 */
+
+	if (GetClipboardOwner() != hwnd) {
+	    OpenClipboard(hwnd);
+	    EmptyClipboard();
+	    SetClipboardData(CF_TEXT, NULL);
+	    CloseClipboard();
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWinClipboardRender --
+ *
+ *	This function supplies the contents of the clipboard in
+ *	response to a WM_RENDERFORMAT message.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Sets the contents of the clipboard.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkWinClipboardRender(dispPtr, format)
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr;
+    UINT format;
+{
+    TkClipboardTarget *targetPtr;
+    TkClipboardBuffer *cbPtr;
+    HGLOBAL handle;
+    char *buffer, *p, *endPtr;
+    int length;
+
+    for (targetPtr = dispPtr->clipTargetPtr; targetPtr != NULL;
+	    targetPtr = targetPtr->nextPtr) {
+	if (targetPtr->type == XA_STRING)
+	    break;
+    }
+    length = 0;
+    if (targetPtr != NULL) {
+	for (cbPtr = targetPtr->firstBufferPtr; cbPtr != NULL;
+		cbPtr = cbPtr->nextPtr) {
+	    length += cbPtr->length;
+	    for (p = cbPtr->buffer, endPtr = p + cbPtr->length;
+		    p < endPtr; p++) {
+		if (*p == '\n') {
+		    length++;
+		}
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+    handle = GlobalAlloc(GMEM_MOVEABLE|GMEM_DDESHARE, length+1);
+    if (!handle) {
+	return;
+    }
+    buffer = GlobalLock(handle);
+    if (targetPtr != NULL) {
+	for (cbPtr = targetPtr->firstBufferPtr; cbPtr != NULL;
+		cbPtr = cbPtr->nextPtr) {
+	    for (p = cbPtr->buffer, endPtr = p + cbPtr->length;
+		    p < endPtr; p++) {
+		if (*p == '\n') {
+		    *buffer++ = '\r';
+		}
+		*buffer++ = *p;
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+    *buffer = '\0';
+    GlobalUnlock(handle);
+    SetClipboardData(CF_TEXT, handle);
+    return;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkSelUpdateClipboard --
+ *
+ *	This function is called to force the clipboard to be updated
+ *	after new data is added.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Clears the current contents of the clipboard.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkSelUpdateClipboard(winPtr, targetPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;
+    TkClipboardTarget *targetPtr;
+{
+    HWND hwnd = TkWinGetHWND(winPtr->window);
+
+    OpenClipboard(hwnd);
+    EmptyClipboard();
+    SetClipboardData(CF_TEXT, NULL);
+    CloseClipboard();
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkSelEventProc --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked whenever a selection-related
+ *	event occurs. 
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Lots:  depends on the type of event.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkSelEventProc(tkwin, eventPtr)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window for which event was
+				 * targeted. */
+    register XEvent *eventPtr;	/* X event:  either SelectionClear,
+				 * SelectionRequest, or
+				 * SelectionNotify. */
+{
+    if (eventPtr->type == SelectionClear) {
+	TkSelClearSelection(tkwin, eventPtr);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkSelPropProc --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked when property-change events
+ *	occur on windows not known to the toolkit.  This is a stub
+ *	function under Windows.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkSelPropProc(eventPtr)
+    register XEvent *eventPtr;		/* X PropertyChange event. */
+{
+}
diff --git a/win/tkWinColor.c b/win/tkWinColor.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2cc3d09
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/tkWinColor.c
@@ -0,0 +1,615 @@
+/* 
+ * tkWinColor.c --
+ *
+ *	Functions to map color names to system color values.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ * Copyright (c) 1994 Software Research Associates, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkWinColor.c 1.20 97/10/27 16:39:23
+ */
+
+#include <tkColor.h>
+#include <tkWinInt.h>
+
+/*
+ * The following structure is used to keep track of each color that is
+ * allocated by this module.
+ */
+
+typedef struct WinColor {
+    TkColor info;		/* Generic color information. */
+    int index;			/* Index for GetSysColor(), -1 if color
+				 * is not a "live" system color. */
+} WinColor;
+
+/*
+ * colorTable is a hash table used to look up X colors by name.
+ */
+
+static Tcl_HashTable colorTable;
+
+/*
+ * The sysColors array contains the names and index values for the
+ * Windows indirect system color names.  In use, all of the names
+ * will have the string "System" prepended, but we omit it in the table
+ * to save space.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    char *name;
+    int index;
+} SystemColorEntry;
+
+
+static SystemColorEntry sysColors[] = {
+    "3dDarkShadow",		COLOR_3DDKSHADOW,
+    "3dLight",			COLOR_3DLIGHT,
+    "ActiveBorder",		COLOR_ACTIVEBORDER,
+    "ActiveCaption",		COLOR_ACTIVECAPTION,
+    "AppWorkspace",		COLOR_APPWORKSPACE,
+    "Background",		COLOR_BACKGROUND,
+    "ButtonFace",		COLOR_BTNFACE,
+    "ButtonHighlight",		COLOR_BTNHIGHLIGHT,
+    "ButtonShadow",		COLOR_BTNSHADOW,
+    "ButtonText",		COLOR_BTNTEXT,
+    "CaptionText",		COLOR_CAPTIONTEXT,
+    "DisabledText",		COLOR_GRAYTEXT,
+    "GrayText",			COLOR_GRAYTEXT,
+    "Highlight",		COLOR_HIGHLIGHT,
+    "HighlightText",		COLOR_HIGHLIGHTTEXT,
+    "InactiveBorder",		COLOR_INACTIVEBORDER,
+    "InactiveCaption",		COLOR_INACTIVECAPTION,
+    "InactiveCaptionText",	COLOR_INACTIVECAPTIONTEXT,
+    "InfoBackground",		COLOR_INFOBK,
+    "InfoText",			COLOR_INFOTEXT,
+    "Menu",			COLOR_MENU,
+    "MenuText",			COLOR_MENUTEXT,
+    "Scrollbar",		COLOR_SCROLLBAR,
+    "Window",			COLOR_WINDOW,
+    "WindowFrame",		COLOR_WINDOWFRAME,
+    "WindowText",		COLOR_WINDOWTEXT,
+    NULL,			0
+};
+
+static int ncolors = 0;
+
+/*
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file.
+ */
+
+static int	FindSystemColor _ANSI_ARGS_((const char *name,
+		    XColor *colorPtr, int *indexPtr));
+static int	GetColorByName _ANSI_ARGS_((char *name, XColor *color));
+static int	GetColorByValue _ANSI_ARGS_((char *value, XColor *color));
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * FindSystemColor --
+ *
+ *	This routine finds the color entry that corresponds to the
+ *	specified color.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns non-zero on success.  The RGB values of the XColor
+ *	will be initialized to the proper values on success.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+FindSystemColor(name, colorPtr, indexPtr)
+    const char *name;		/* Color name. */
+    XColor *colorPtr;		/* Where to store results. */
+    int *indexPtr;		/* Out parameter to store color index. */
+{
+    int l, u, r, i;
+
+    /*
+     * Count the number of elements in the color array if we haven't
+     * done so yet.
+     */
+
+    if (ncolors == 0) {
+	SystemColorEntry *ePtr;
+	int version;
+
+	version = LOBYTE(LOWORD(GetVersion()));
+	for (ePtr = sysColors; ePtr->name != NULL; ePtr++) {
+	    if (version < 4) {
+		if (ePtr->index == COLOR_3DDKSHADOW) {
+		    ePtr->index = COLOR_BTNSHADOW;
+		} else if (ePtr->index == COLOR_3DLIGHT) {
+		    ePtr->index = COLOR_BTNHIGHLIGHT;
+		}
+	    }
+	    ncolors++;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Perform a binary search on the sorted array of colors.
+     */
+
+    l = 0;
+    u = ncolors - 1;
+    while (l <= u) {
+	i = (l + u) / 2;
+	r = strcasecmp(name, sysColors[i].name);
+	if (r == 0) {
+	    break;
+	} else if (r < 0) {
+	    u = i-1;
+	} else {
+	    l = i+1;
+	}
+    }
+    if (l > u) {
+	return 0;
+    }
+
+    *indexPtr = sysColors[i].index;
+    colorPtr->pixel = GetSysColor(sysColors[i].index);
+    colorPtr->red = GetRValue(colorPtr->pixel) << 8;
+    colorPtr->green = GetGValue(colorPtr->pixel) << 8;
+    colorPtr->blue = GetBValue(colorPtr->pixel) << 8;
+    colorPtr->flags = DoRed|DoGreen|DoBlue;
+    colorPtr->pad = 0;
+    return 1;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpGetColor --
+ *
+ *	Allocate a new TkColor for the color with the given name.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns a newly allocated TkColor, or NULL on failure.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	May invalidate the colormap cache associated with tkwin upon
+ *	allocating a new colormap entry.  Allocates a new TkColor
+ *	structure.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+TkColor *
+TkpGetColor(tkwin, name)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window in which color will be used. */
+    Tk_Uid name;		/* Name of color to allocated (in form
+				 * suitable for passing to XParseColor). */
+{
+    WinColor *winColPtr;
+    XColor color;
+    int index = -1;		/* -1 indicates that this is not an indirect
+				 * sytem color. */
+
+    /*
+     * Check to see if it is a system color or an X color string.  If the
+     * color is found, allocate a new WinColor and store the XColor and the
+     * system color index.
+     */
+
+    if (((strncasecmp(name, "system", 6) == 0)
+	    && FindSystemColor(name+6, &color, &index))
+	    || XParseColor(Tk_Display(tkwin), Tk_Colormap(tkwin), name,
+		    &color)) {
+	winColPtr = (WinColor *) ckalloc(sizeof(WinColor));
+	winColPtr->info.color = color;
+	winColPtr->index = index;
+
+	XAllocColor(Tk_Display(tkwin), Tk_Colormap(tkwin),
+		&winColPtr->info.color);
+ 	return (TkColor *) winColPtr; 
+    }
+    return (TkColor *) NULL;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpGetColorByValue --
+ *
+ *	Given a desired set of red-green-blue intensities for a color,
+ *	locate a pixel value to use to draw that color in a given
+ *	window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The return value is a pointer to an TkColor structure that
+ *	indicates the closest red, blue, and green intensities available
+ *	to those specified in colorPtr, and also specifies a pixel
+ *	value to use to draw in that color.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	May invalidate the colormap cache for the specified window.
+ *	Allocates a new TkColor structure.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+TkColor *
+TkpGetColorByValue(tkwin, colorPtr)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window in which color will be used. */
+    XColor *colorPtr;		/* Red, green, and blue fields indicate
+				 * desired color. */
+{
+    WinColor *tkColPtr = (WinColor *) ckalloc(sizeof(WinColor));
+
+    tkColPtr->info.color.red = colorPtr->red;
+    tkColPtr->info.color.green = colorPtr->green;
+    tkColPtr->info.color.blue = colorPtr->blue;
+    tkColPtr->info.color.pixel = 0;
+    tkColPtr->index = -1;
+    XAllocColor(Tk_Display(tkwin), Tk_Colormap(tkwin), &tkColPtr->info.color);
+    return (TkColor *) tkColPtr;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpFreeColor --
+ *
+ *	Release the specified color back to the system.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Invalidates the colormap cache for the colormap associated with
+ *	the given color.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpFreeColor(tkColPtr)
+    TkColor *tkColPtr;		/* Color to be released.  Must have been
+				 * allocated by TkpGetColor or
+				 * TkpGetColorByValue. */
+{
+    Screen *screen = tkColPtr->screen;
+
+    XFreeColors(DisplayOfScreen(screen), tkColPtr->colormap,
+	    &tkColPtr->color.pixel, 1, 0L);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWinIndexOfColor --
+ *
+ *	Given a color, return the system color index that was used
+ *	to create the color.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	If the color was allocated using a system indirect color name,
+ *	then the corresponding GetSysColor() index is returned.
+ *	Otherwise, -1 is returned.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkWinIndexOfColor(colorPtr)
+    XColor *colorPtr;
+{
+    register WinColor *winColPtr = (WinColor *) colorPtr;
+    if (winColPtr->info.magic == COLOR_MAGIC) {
+	return winColPtr->index;
+    }    
+    return -1;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XAllocColor --
+ *
+ *	Find the closest available color to the specified XColor.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Updates the color argument and returns 1 on success.  Otherwise
+ *	returns 0.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Allocates a new color in the palette.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+XAllocColor(display, colormap, color)
+    Display* display;
+    Colormap colormap;
+    XColor* color;
+{
+    TkWinColormap *cmap = (TkWinColormap *) colormap;
+    PALETTEENTRY entry, closeEntry;
+    HDC dc = GetDC(NULL);
+    
+    entry.peRed = (color->red) >> 8;
+    entry.peGreen = (color->green) >> 8;
+    entry.peBlue = (color->blue) >> 8;
+    entry.peFlags = 0;
+
+    if (GetDeviceCaps(dc, RASTERCAPS) & RC_PALETTE) {
+	unsigned long sizePalette = GetDeviceCaps(dc, SIZEPALETTE);
+	UINT newPixel, closePixel;
+	int new, refCount;
+	Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+	UINT index;
+
+	/*
+	 * Find the nearest existing palette entry.
+	 */
+	
+	newPixel = RGB(entry.peRed, entry.peGreen, entry.peBlue);
+	index = GetNearestPaletteIndex(cmap->palette, newPixel);
+	GetPaletteEntries(cmap->palette, index, 1, &closeEntry);
+	closePixel = RGB(closeEntry.peRed, closeEntry.peGreen,
+		closeEntry.peBlue);
+
+	/*
+	 * If this is not a duplicate, allocate a new entry.  Note that
+	 * we may get values for index that are above the current size
+	 * of the palette.  This happens because we don't shrink the size of
+	 * the palette object when we deallocate colors so there may be
+	 * stale values that match in the upper slots.  We should ignore
+	 * those values and just put the new color in as if the colors
+	 * had not matched.
+	 */
+	
+	if ((index >= cmap->size) || (newPixel != closePixel)) {
+	    if (cmap->size == sizePalette) {
+		color->red = closeEntry.peRed << 8;
+		color->green = closeEntry.peGreen << 8;
+		color->blue = closeEntry.peBlue << 8;
+		entry = closeEntry;
+		if (index >= cmap->size) {
+		    OutputDebugString("XAllocColor: Colormap is bigger than we thought");
+		}
+	    } else {
+		cmap->size++;
+		ResizePalette(cmap->palette, cmap->size);
+		SetPaletteEntries(cmap->palette, cmap->size - 1, 1, &entry);
+	    }
+	}
+
+	color->pixel = PALETTERGB(entry.peRed, entry.peGreen, entry.peBlue);
+	entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&cmap->refCounts,
+		(char *) color->pixel, &new);
+	if (new) {
+	    refCount = 1;
+	} else {
+	    refCount = ((int) Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr)) + 1;
+	}
+	Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, (ClientData)refCount);
+    } else {
+	
+	/*
+	 * Determine what color will actually be used on non-colormap systems.
+	 */
+	
+	color->pixel = GetNearestColor(dc,
+		RGB(entry.peRed, entry.peGreen, entry.peBlue));
+	color->red = (GetRValue(color->pixel) << 8);
+	color->green = (GetGValue(color->pixel) << 8);
+	color->blue = (GetBValue(color->pixel) << 8);
+    }
+
+    ReleaseDC(NULL, dc);
+    return 1;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XFreeColors --
+ *
+ *	Deallocate a block of colors.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Removes entries for the current palette and compacts the
+ *	remaining set.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+XFreeColors(display, colormap, pixels, npixels, planes)
+    Display* display;
+    Colormap colormap;
+    unsigned long* pixels;
+    int npixels;
+    unsigned long planes;
+{
+    TkWinColormap *cmap = (TkWinColormap *) colormap;
+    COLORREF cref;
+    UINT count, index, refCount;
+    int i;
+    PALETTEENTRY entry, *entries;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+    HDC dc = GetDC(NULL);
+
+    /*
+     * We don't have to do anything for non-palette devices.
+     */
+    
+    if (GetDeviceCaps(dc, RASTERCAPS) & RC_PALETTE) {
+
+	/*
+	 * This is really slow for large values of npixels.
+	 */
+
+	for (i = 0; i < npixels; i++) {
+	    entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&cmap->refCounts,
+		    (char *) pixels[i]);
+	    if (!entryPtr) {
+		panic("Tried to free a color that isn't allocated.");
+	    }
+	    refCount = (int) Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr) - 1;
+	    if (refCount == 0) {
+		cref = pixels[i] & 0x00ffffff;
+		index = GetNearestPaletteIndex(cmap->palette, cref);
+		GetPaletteEntries(cmap->palette, index, 1, &entry);
+		if (cref == RGB(entry.peRed, entry.peGreen, entry.peBlue)) {
+		    count = cmap->size - index;
+		    entries = (PALETTEENTRY *) ckalloc(sizeof(PALETTEENTRY)
+			    * count);
+		    GetPaletteEntries(cmap->palette, index+1, count, entries);
+		    SetPaletteEntries(cmap->palette, index, count, entries);
+		    ckfree((char *) entries);
+		    cmap->size--;
+		} else {
+		    panic("Tried to free a color that isn't allocated.");
+		}
+		Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(entryPtr);
+	    } else {
+		Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, (ClientData)refCount);
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+    ReleaseDC(NULL, dc);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XCreateColormap --
+ *
+ *	Allocate a new colormap.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns a newly allocated colormap.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Allocates an empty palette and color list.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+Colormap
+XCreateColormap(display, w, visual, alloc)
+    Display* display;
+    Window w;
+    Visual* visual;
+    int alloc;
+{
+    char logPalBuf[sizeof(LOGPALETTE) + 256 * sizeof(PALETTEENTRY)];
+    LOGPALETTE *logPalettePtr;
+    PALETTEENTRY *entryPtr;
+    TkWinColormap *cmap;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *hashPtr;
+    int new;
+    UINT i;
+    HPALETTE sysPal;
+
+    /*
+     * Allocate a starting palette with all of the reserved colors.
+     */
+
+    logPalettePtr = (LOGPALETTE *) logPalBuf;
+    logPalettePtr->palVersion = 0x300;
+    sysPal = (HPALETTE) GetStockObject(DEFAULT_PALETTE);
+    logPalettePtr->palNumEntries = GetPaletteEntries(sysPal, 0, 256,
+	    logPalettePtr->palPalEntry);
+
+    cmap = (TkWinColormap *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkWinColormap));
+    cmap->size = logPalettePtr->palNumEntries;
+    cmap->stale = 0;
+    cmap->palette = CreatePalette(logPalettePtr);
+
+    /*
+     * Add hash entries for each of the static colors.
+     */
+
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&cmap->refCounts, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS);
+    for (i = 0; i < logPalettePtr->palNumEntries; i++) {
+	entryPtr = logPalettePtr->palPalEntry + i;
+	hashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&cmap->refCounts, (char*) PALETTERGB(
+	    entryPtr->peRed, entryPtr->peGreen, entryPtr->peBlue), &new);
+	Tcl_SetHashValue(hashPtr, (ClientData)1);
+    }
+
+    return (Colormap)cmap;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XFreeColormap --
+ *
+ *	Frees the resources associated with the given colormap.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Deletes the palette associated with the colormap.  Note that
+ *	the palette must not be selected into a device context when
+ *	this occurs.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+XFreeColormap(display, colormap)
+    Display* display;
+    Colormap colormap;
+{
+    TkWinColormap *cmap = (TkWinColormap *) colormap;
+    if (!DeleteObject(cmap->palette)) {
+	panic("Unable to free colormap, palette is still selected.");
+    }
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&cmap->refCounts);
+    ckfree((char *) cmap);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWinSelectPalette --
+ *
+ *	This function sets up the specified device context with a
+ *	given palette.  If the palette is stale, it realizes it in
+ *	the background unless the palette is the current global
+ *	palette.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns the previous palette selected into the device context.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	May change the system palette.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+HPALETTE
+TkWinSelectPalette(dc, colormap)
+    HDC dc;
+    Colormap colormap;
+{
+    TkWinColormap *cmap = (TkWinColormap *) colormap;
+    HPALETTE oldPalette;
+
+    oldPalette = SelectPalette(dc, cmap->palette,
+	    (cmap->palette == TkWinGetSystemPalette()) ? FALSE : TRUE);
+    RealizePalette(dc);
+    return oldPalette;
+}
diff --git a/win/tkWinCursor.c b/win/tkWinCursor.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bf81d8f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/tkWinCursor.c
@@ -0,0 +1,210 @@
+/* 
+ * tkWinCursor.c --
+ *
+ *	This file contains Win32 specific cursor related routines.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkWinCursor.c 1.10 97/09/02 13:21:01
+ */
+
+#include "tkWinInt.h"
+
+/*
+ * The following data structure contains the system specific data
+ * necessary to control Windows cursors.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    TkCursor info;		/* Generic cursor info used by tkCursor.c */
+    HCURSOR winCursor;		/* Win32 cursor handle. */
+    int system;			/* 1 if cursor is a system cursor, else 0. */
+} TkWinCursor;
+
+/*
+ * The table below is used to map from the name of a predefined cursor
+ * to its resource identifier.
+ */
+
+static struct CursorName {
+    char *name;
+    LPCTSTR id;
+} cursorNames[] = {
+    {"starting",		IDC_APPSTARTING},
+    {"arrow",			IDC_ARROW},
+    {"ibeam",			IDC_IBEAM},
+    {"icon",			IDC_ICON},
+    {"no",			IDC_NO},
+    {"size",			IDC_SIZE},
+    {"size_ne_sw",		IDC_SIZENESW},
+    {"size_ns",			IDC_SIZENS},
+    {"size_nw_se",		IDC_SIZENWSE},
+    {"size_we",			IDC_SIZEWE},
+    {"uparrow",			IDC_UPARROW},
+    {"wait",			IDC_WAIT},
+    {"crosshair",		IDC_CROSS},
+    {"fleur",			IDC_SIZE},
+    {"sb_v_double_arrow",	IDC_SIZENS},
+    {"sb_h_double_arrow",	IDC_SIZEWE},
+    {"center_ptr",		IDC_UPARROW},
+    {"watch",			IDC_WAIT},
+    {"xterm",			IDC_IBEAM},
+    {NULL,			0}
+};
+
+/*
+ * The default cursor is used whenever no other cursor has been specified.
+ */
+
+#define TK_DEFAULT_CURSOR	IDC_ARROW
+
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkGetCursorByName --
+ *
+ *	Retrieve a system cursor by name.  
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns a new cursor, or NULL on errors.  
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Allocates a new cursor.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+TkCursor *
+TkGetCursorByName(interp, tkwin, string)
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window in which cursor will be used. */
+    Tk_Uid string;		/* Description of cursor.  See manual entry
+				 * for details on legal syntax. */
+{
+    struct CursorName *namePtr;
+    TkWinCursor *cursorPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * Check for the cursor in the system cursor set.
+     */
+
+    for (namePtr = cursorNames; namePtr->name != NULL; namePtr++) {
+	if (strcmp(namePtr->name, string) == 0) {
+	    break;
+	}
+    }
+
+    cursorPtr = (TkWinCursor *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkWinCursor));
+    cursorPtr->info.cursor = (Tk_Cursor) cursorPtr;
+    cursorPtr->winCursor = NULL;
+    if (namePtr->name != NULL) {
+	cursorPtr->winCursor = LoadCursor(NULL, namePtr->id);
+	cursorPtr->system = 1;
+    }
+    if (cursorPtr->winCursor == NULL) {
+	cursorPtr->winCursor = LoadCursor(Tk_GetHINSTANCE(), string);
+	cursorPtr->system = 0;
+    }
+    if (cursorPtr->winCursor == NULL) {
+	ckfree((char *)cursorPtr);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad cursor spec \"", string, "\"",
+		(char *) NULL);
+	return NULL;
+    } else {
+	return (TkCursor *) cursorPtr;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkCreateCursorFromData --
+ *
+ *	Creates a cursor from the source and mask bits.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns a new cursor, or NULL on errors.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Allocates a new cursor.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+TkCursor *
+TkCreateCursorFromData(tkwin, source, mask, width, height, xHot, yHot,
+	fgColor, bgColor)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window in which cursor will be used. */
+    char *source;		/* Bitmap data for cursor shape. */
+    char *mask;			/* Bitmap data for cursor mask. */
+    int width, height;		/* Dimensions of cursor. */
+    int xHot, yHot;		/* Location of hot-spot in cursor. */
+    XColor fgColor;		/* Foreground color for cursor. */
+    XColor bgColor;		/* Background color for cursor. */
+{
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkFreeCursor --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is called to release a cursor allocated by
+ *	TkGetCursorByName.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The cursor data structure is deallocated.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkFreeCursor(cursorPtr)
+    TkCursor *cursorPtr;
+{
+    TkWinCursor *winCursorPtr = (TkWinCursor *) cursorPtr;
+    ckfree((char *) winCursorPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpSetCursor --
+ *
+ *	Set the global cursor.  If the cursor is None, then use the
+ *	default Tk cursor.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Changes the mouse cursor.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpSetCursor(cursor)
+    TkpCursor cursor;
+{
+    HCURSOR hcursor;
+    TkWinCursor *winCursor = (TkWinCursor *) cursor;
+
+    if (winCursor == NULL || winCursor->winCursor == NULL) {
+	hcursor = LoadCursor(NULL, TK_DEFAULT_CURSOR);
+    } else {
+	hcursor = winCursor->winCursor;
+    }
+
+    if (hcursor != NULL) {
+	SetCursor(hcursor);
+    }
+}
diff --git a/win/tkWinDefault.h b/win/tkWinDefault.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c82f3c8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/tkWinDefault.h
@@ -0,0 +1,456 @@
+/*
+ * tkWinDefault.h --
+ *
+ *	This file defines the defaults for all options for all of
+ *	the Tk widgets.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1995-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkWinDefault.h 1.34 97/10/09 17:45:20
+ */
+
+#ifndef _TKWINDEFAULT
+#define _TKWINDEFAULT
+
+/*
+ * The definitions below provide symbolic names for the default colors.
+ * NORMAL_BG -		Normal background color.
+ * ACTIVE_BG -		Background color when widget is active.
+ * SELECT_BG -		Background color for selected text.
+ * TROUGH -		Background color for troughs in scales and scrollbars.
+ * INDICATOR -		Color for indicator when button is selected.
+ * DISABLED -		Foreground color when widget is disabled.
+ */
+
+#define BLACK		"Black"
+#define WHITE		"White"
+
+#define CTL_FONT	"{MS Sans Serif} 8"
+#define NORMAL_BG	"SystemButtonFace"
+#define NORMAL_FG	"SystemButtonText"
+#define ACTIVE_BG	NORMAL_BG
+#define TEXT_FG	"SystemWindowText"
+#define SELECT_BG	"SystemHighlight"
+#define SELECT_FG	"SystemHighlightText"
+#define TROUGH		"SystemScrollbar"
+#define INDICATOR	"SystemWindow"
+#define DISABLED	"SystemDisabledText"
+#define MENU_BG	"SystemMenu"
+#define MENU_FG	"SystemMenuText"
+#define HIGHLIGHT	"SystemWindowFrame"
+
+/*
+ * Defaults for labels, buttons, checkbuttons, and radiobuttons:
+ */
+
+#define DEF_BUTTON_ANCHOR		"center"
+#define DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_COLOR	NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_MONO	BLACK
+#define DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_FG_COLOR	NORMAL_FG
+#define DEF_CHKRAD_ACTIVE_FG_COLOR	TEXT_FG
+#define DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_FG_MONO	WHITE
+#define DEF_BUTTON_BG_COLOR		NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_BUTTON_BG_MONO		WHITE
+#define DEF_BUTTON_BITMAP		""
+#define DEF_BUTTON_BORDER_WIDTH	"2"
+#define DEF_BUTTON_CURSOR		""
+#define DEF_BUTTON_COMMAND		""
+#define DEF_BUTTON_DEFAULT		"disabled"
+#define DEF_BUTTON_DISABLED_FG_COLOR	DISABLED
+#define DEF_BUTTON_DISABLED_FG_MONO	""
+#define DEF_BUTTON_FG			NORMAL_FG
+#define DEF_CHKRAD_FG			TEXT_FG
+#define DEF_BUTTON_FONT		CTL_FONT
+#define DEF_BUTTON_HEIGHT		"0"
+#define DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_BG	NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT		HIGHLIGHT
+#define DEF_LABEL_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH	"0"
+#define DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH	"1"
+#define DEF_BUTTON_IMAGE		(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_BUTTON_INDICATOR		"1"
+#define DEF_BUTTON_JUSTIFY		"center"
+#define DEF_BUTTON_OFF_VALUE		"0"
+#define DEF_BUTTON_ON_VALUE		"1"
+#define DEF_BUTTON_PADX		"1"
+#define DEF_LABCHKRAD_PADX		"1"
+#define DEF_BUTTON_PADY		"1"
+#define DEF_LABCHKRAD_PADY		"1"
+#define DEF_BUTTON_RELIEF		"raised"
+#define DEF_LABCHKRAD_RELIEF		"flat"
+#define DEF_BUTTON_SELECT_COLOR	INDICATOR
+#define DEF_BUTTON_SELECT_MONO		BLACK
+#define DEF_BUTTON_SELECT_IMAGE		(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_BUTTON_STATE		"normal"
+#define DEF_LABEL_TAKE_FOCUS		"0"
+#define DEF_BUTTON_TAKE_FOCUS		(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_BUTTON_TEXT			""
+#define DEF_BUTTON_TEXT_VARIABLE	""
+#define DEF_BUTTON_UNDERLINE		"-1"
+#define DEF_BUTTON_VALUE		""
+#define DEF_BUTTON_WIDTH		"0"
+#define DEF_BUTTON_WRAP_LENGTH		"0"
+#define DEF_RADIOBUTTON_VARIABLE	"selectedButton"
+#define DEF_CHECKBUTTON_VARIABLE	""
+
+/*
+ * Defaults for canvases:
+ */
+
+#define DEF_CANVAS_BG_COLOR		NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_CANVAS_BG_MONO		WHITE
+#define DEF_CANVAS_BORDER_WIDTH		"0"
+#define DEF_CANVAS_CLOSE_ENOUGH		"1"
+#define DEF_CANVAS_CONFINE		"1"
+#define DEF_CANVAS_CURSOR		""
+#define DEF_CANVAS_HEIGHT		"7c"
+#define DEF_CANVAS_HIGHLIGHT_BG		NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_CANVAS_HIGHLIGHT		HIGHLIGHT
+#define DEF_CANVAS_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH	"2"
+#define DEF_CANVAS_INSERT_BG		NORMAL_FG
+#define DEF_CANVAS_INSERT_BD_COLOR	"0"
+#define DEF_CANVAS_INSERT_BD_MONO	"0"
+#define DEF_CANVAS_INSERT_OFF_TIME	"300"
+#define DEF_CANVAS_INSERT_ON_TIME	"600"
+#define DEF_CANVAS_INSERT_WIDTH		"2"
+#define DEF_CANVAS_RELIEF		"flat"
+#define DEF_CANVAS_SCROLL_REGION	""
+#define DEF_CANVAS_SELECT_COLOR		SELECT_BG
+#define DEF_CANVAS_SELECT_MONO		BLACK
+#define DEF_CANVAS_SELECT_BD_COLOR	"1"
+#define DEF_CANVAS_SELECT_BD_MONO	"0"
+#define DEF_CANVAS_SELECT_FG_COLOR	SELECT_FG
+#define DEF_CANVAS_SELECT_FG_MONO	WHITE
+#define DEF_CANVAS_TAKE_FOCUS		(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_CANVAS_WIDTH		"10c"
+#define DEF_CANVAS_X_SCROLL_CMD		""
+#define DEF_CANVAS_X_SCROLL_INCREMENT	"0"
+#define DEF_CANVAS_Y_SCROLL_CMD		""
+#define DEF_CANVAS_Y_SCROLL_INCREMENT	"0"
+
+/*
+ * Defaults for entries:
+ */
+
+#define DEF_ENTRY_BG_COLOR		"SystemWindow"
+#define DEF_ENTRY_BG_MONO		WHITE
+#define DEF_ENTRY_BORDER_WIDTH		"2"
+#define DEF_ENTRY_CURSOR		"xterm"
+#define DEF_ENTRY_EXPORT_SELECTION	"1"
+#define DEF_ENTRY_FONT			CTL_FONT
+#define DEF_ENTRY_FG			TEXT_FG
+#define DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT_BG		NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT		HIGHLIGHT
+#define DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH	"0"
+#define DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BG		TEXT_FG
+#define DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BD_COLOR	"0"
+#define DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BD_MONO	"0"
+#define DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_OFF_TIME	"300"
+#define DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_ON_TIME	"600"
+#define DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_WIDTH		"2"
+#define DEF_ENTRY_JUSTIFY		"left"
+#define DEF_ENTRY_RELIEF		"sunken"
+#define DEF_ENTRY_SCROLL_COMMAND	""
+#define DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_COLOR		SELECT_BG
+#define DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_MONO		BLACK
+#define DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_BD_COLOR	"0"
+#define DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_BD_MONO	"0"
+#define DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_FG_COLOR	SELECT_FG
+#define DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_FG_MONO	WHITE
+#define DEF_ENTRY_SHOW			(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_ENTRY_STATE			"normal"
+#define DEF_ENTRY_TAKE_FOCUS		(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_ENTRY_TEXT_VARIABLE		""
+#define DEF_ENTRY_WIDTH			"20"
+
+/*
+ * Defaults for frames:
+ */
+
+#define DEF_FRAME_BG_COLOR		NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_FRAME_BG_MONO		WHITE
+#define DEF_FRAME_BORDER_WIDTH		"0"
+#define DEF_FRAME_CLASS			"Frame"
+#define DEF_FRAME_COLORMAP		""
+#define DEF_FRAME_CONTAINER		"0"
+#define DEF_FRAME_CURSOR		""
+#define DEF_FRAME_HEIGHT		"0"
+#define DEF_FRAME_HIGHLIGHT_BG		NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_FRAME_HIGHLIGHT		HIGHLIGHT
+#define DEF_FRAME_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH	"0"
+#define DEF_FRAME_RELIEF		"flat"
+#define DEF_FRAME_TAKE_FOCUS		"0"
+#define DEF_FRAME_USE			""
+#define DEF_FRAME_VISUAL		""
+#define DEF_FRAME_WIDTH			"0"
+
+/*
+ * Defaults for listboxes:
+ */
+
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_BG_COLOR		NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_BG_MONO		WHITE
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_BORDER_WIDTH	"2"
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_CURSOR		""
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_EXPORT_SELECTION	"1"
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_FONT		CTL_FONT
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_FG			NORMAL_FG
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_HEIGHT		"10"
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_HIGHLIGHT_BG	NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_HIGHLIGHT		HIGHLIGHT
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH	"1"
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_RELIEF		"sunken"
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_SCROLL_COMMAND	""
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_SELECT_COLOR	SELECT_BG
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_SELECT_MONO		BLACK
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_SELECT_BD		"1"
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_SELECT_FG_COLOR	SELECT_FG
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_SELECT_FG_MONO	WHITE
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_SELECT_MODE		"browse"
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_SET_GRID		"0"
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_TAKE_FOCUS		(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_WIDTH		"20"
+
+/*
+ * Defaults for individual entries of menus:
+ */
+
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_ACTIVE_BG	(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_ACTIVE_FG	(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_ACCELERATOR	(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_BG		(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_BITMAP		None
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_COLUMN_BREAK	"0"
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_COMMAND		(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_FG		(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_FONT		(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_HIDE_MARGIN	"0"
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_IMAGE		(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_INDICATOR	"1"
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_LABEL		(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_MENU		(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_OFF_VALUE	"0"
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_ON_VALUE		"1"
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_SELECT_IMAGE	(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_STATE		"normal"
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_VALUE		(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_CHECK_VARIABLE	(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_RADIO_VARIABLE	"selectedButton"
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_SELECT	(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_UNDERLINE	"-1"
+
+/*
+ * Defaults for menus overall:
+ */
+
+#define DEF_MENU_ACTIVE_BG_COLOR	SELECT_BG
+#define DEF_MENU_ACTIVE_BG_MONO		BLACK
+#define DEF_MENU_ACTIVE_BORDER_WIDTH	"0"
+#define DEF_MENU_ACTIVE_FG_COLOR	SELECT_FG
+#define DEF_MENU_ACTIVE_FG_MONO		WHITE
+#define DEF_MENU_BG_COLOR		MENU_BG
+#define DEF_MENU_BG_MONO		WHITE
+#define DEF_MENU_BORDER_WIDTH		"0"
+#define DEF_MENU_CURSOR			"arrow"
+#define DEF_MENU_DISABLED_FG_COLOR	DISABLED
+#define DEF_MENU_DISABLED_FG_MONO	""
+#define DEF_MENU_FONT			CTL_FONT
+#define DEF_MENU_FG			MENU_FG
+#define DEF_MENU_POST_COMMAND		""
+#define DEF_MENU_RELIEF			"flat"
+#define DEF_MENU_SELECT_COLOR		MENU_FG
+#define DEF_MENU_SELECT_MONO		BLACK
+#define DEF_MENU_TAKE_FOCUS		"0"
+#define DEF_MENU_TEAROFF		"1"
+#define DEF_MENU_TEAROFF_CMD		(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_MENU_TITLE			""
+#define DEF_MENU_TYPE			"normal"
+
+/*
+ * Defaults for menubuttons:
+ */
+
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_ANCHOR		"center"
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_COLOR	ACTIVE_BG
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_MONO	BLACK
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_ACTIVE_FG_COLOR	NORMAL_FG
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_ACTIVE_FG_MONO	WHITE
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_BG_COLOR		NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_BG_MONO		WHITE
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_BITMAP		""
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_BORDER_WIDTH	"2"
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_CURSOR		""
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_DIRECTION	"below"
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_DISABLED_FG_COLOR DISABLED
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_DISABLED_FG_MONO	""
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_FONT		CTL_FONT
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_FG		NORMAL_FG
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_HEIGHT		"0"
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_BG	NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_HIGHLIGHT	HIGHLIGHT
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH	"0"
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_IMAGE		(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_INDICATOR	"0"
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_JUSTIFY		"center"
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_MENU		""
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_PADX		"4p"
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_PADY		"3p"
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_RELIEF		"flat"
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_STATE		"normal"
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_TAKE_FOCUS	"0"
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_TEXT		""
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_TEXT_VARIABLE	""
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_UNDERLINE	"-1"
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_WIDTH		"0"
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_WRAP_LENGTH	"0"
+
+/*
+ * Defaults for messages:
+ */
+
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_ANCHOR		"center"
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_ASPECT		"150"
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_BG_COLOR		NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_BG_MONO		WHITE
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_BORDER_WIDTH	"2"
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_CURSOR		""
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_FG			NORMAL_FG
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_FONT		CTL_FONT
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_HIGHLIGHT_BG	NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_HIGHLIGHT		HIGHLIGHT
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH	"0"
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_JUSTIFY		"left"
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_PADX		"-1"
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_PADY		"-1"
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_RELIEF		"flat"
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_TAKE_FOCUS		"0"
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_TEXT		""
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_TEXT_VARIABLE	""
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_WIDTH		"0"
+
+/*
+ * Defaults for scales:
+ */
+
+#define DEF_SCALE_ACTIVE_BG_COLOR	ACTIVE_BG
+#define DEF_SCALE_ACTIVE_BG_MONO	BLACK
+#define DEF_SCALE_BG_COLOR		NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_SCALE_BG_MONO		WHITE
+#define DEF_SCALE_BIG_INCREMENT		"0"
+#define DEF_SCALE_BORDER_WIDTH		"2"
+#define DEF_SCALE_COMMAND		""
+#define DEF_SCALE_CURSOR		""
+#define DEF_SCALE_DIGITS		"0"
+#define DEF_SCALE_FONT			CTL_FONT
+#define DEF_SCALE_FG_COLOR		NORMAL_FG
+#define DEF_SCALE_FG_MONO		BLACK
+#define DEF_SCALE_FROM			"0"
+#define DEF_SCALE_HIGHLIGHT_BG		NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_SCALE_HIGHLIGHT		HIGHLIGHT
+#define DEF_SCALE_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH	"2"
+#define DEF_SCALE_LABEL			""
+#define DEF_SCALE_LENGTH		"100"
+#define DEF_SCALE_ORIENT		"vertical"
+#define DEF_SCALE_RELIEF		"flat"
+#define DEF_SCALE_REPEAT_DELAY	"300"
+#define DEF_SCALE_REPEAT_INTERVAL	"100"
+#define DEF_SCALE_RESOLUTION		"1"
+#define DEF_SCALE_TROUGH_COLOR		TROUGH
+#define DEF_SCALE_TROUGH_MONO		WHITE
+#define DEF_SCALE_SHOW_VALUE		"1"
+#define DEF_SCALE_SLIDER_LENGTH		"30"
+#define DEF_SCALE_SLIDER_RELIEF		"raised"
+#define DEF_SCALE_STATE			"normal"
+#define DEF_SCALE_TAKE_FOCUS		(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_SCALE_TICK_INTERVAL		"0"
+#define DEF_SCALE_TO			"100"
+#define DEF_SCALE_VARIABLE		""
+#define DEF_SCALE_WIDTH			"15"
+
+/*
+ * Defaults for scrollbars:
+ */
+
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_ACTIVE_BG_COLOR	ACTIVE_BG
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_ACTIVE_BG_MONO	BLACK
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_ACTIVE_RELIEF	"raised"
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_BG_COLOR		NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_BG_MONO		WHITE
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_BORDER_WIDTH	"0"
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_COMMAND		""
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_CURSOR		""
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_EL_BORDER_WIDTH	"-1"
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_HIGHLIGHT_BG	NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_HIGHLIGHT	HIGHLIGHT
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH	"0"
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_JUMP		"0"
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_ORIENT		"vertical"
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_RELIEF		"sunken"
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_REPEAT_DELAY	"300"
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_REPEAT_INTERVAL	"100"
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_TAKE_FOCUS	(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_TROUGH_COLOR	TROUGH
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_TROUGH_MONO	WHITE
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_WIDTH		"10"
+
+/*
+ * Defaults for texts:
+ */
+
+#define DEF_TEXT_BG_COLOR		"SystemWindow"
+#define DEF_TEXT_BG_MONO		WHITE
+#define DEF_TEXT_BORDER_WIDTH		"2"
+#define DEF_TEXT_CURSOR			"xterm"
+#define DEF_TEXT_FG			TEXT_FG
+#define DEF_TEXT_EXPORT_SELECTION	"1"
+#define DEF_TEXT_FONT			CTL_FONT
+#define DEF_TEXT_HEIGHT			"24"
+#define DEF_TEXT_HIGHLIGHT_BG		NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_TEXT_HIGHLIGHT		HIGHLIGHT
+#define DEF_TEXT_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH	"0"
+#define DEF_TEXT_INSERT_BG		TEXT_FG
+#define DEF_TEXT_INSERT_BD_COLOR	"0"
+#define DEF_TEXT_INSERT_BD_MONO		"0"
+#define DEF_TEXT_INSERT_OFF_TIME	"300"
+#define DEF_TEXT_INSERT_ON_TIME		"600"
+#define DEF_TEXT_INSERT_WIDTH		"2"
+#define DEF_TEXT_PADX			"1"
+#define DEF_TEXT_PADY			"1"
+#define DEF_TEXT_RELIEF			"sunken"
+#define DEF_TEXT_SELECT_COLOR		SELECT_BG
+#define DEF_TEXT_SELECT_MONO		BLACK
+#define DEF_TEXT_SELECT_BD_COLOR	"0"
+#define DEF_TEXT_SELECT_BD_MONO		"0"
+#define DEF_TEXT_SELECT_FG_COLOR	SELECT_FG
+#define DEF_TEXT_SELECT_FG_MONO		WHITE
+#define DEF_TEXT_SELECT_RELIEF		"flat"
+#define DEF_TEXT_SET_GRID		"0"
+#define DEF_TEXT_SPACING1		"0"
+#define DEF_TEXT_SPACING2		"0"
+#define DEF_TEXT_SPACING3		"0"
+#define DEF_TEXT_STATE			"normal"
+#define DEF_TEXT_TABS			""
+#define DEF_TEXT_TAKE_FOCUS		(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_TEXT_WIDTH			"80"
+#define DEF_TEXT_WRAP			"char"
+#define DEF_TEXT_XSCROLL_COMMAND	""
+#define DEF_TEXT_YSCROLL_COMMAND	""
+
+/*
+ * Defaults for canvas text:
+ */
+
+#define DEF_CANVTEXT_FONT		CTL_FONT
+
+/*
+ * Defaults for toplevels (most of the defaults for frames also apply
+ * to toplevels):
+ */
+
+#define DEF_TOPLEVEL_CLASS		"Toplevel"
+#define DEF_TOPLEVEL_MENU		""
+#define DEF_TOPLEVEL_SCREEN		""
+
+#endif /* _TKWINDEFAULT */
diff --git a/win/tkWinDialog.c b/win/tkWinDialog.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7d01edb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/tkWinDialog.c
@@ -0,0 +1,1050 @@
+/*
+ * tkWinDialog.c --
+ *
+ *	Contains the Windows implementation of the common dialog boxes.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1996-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkWinDialog.c 1.10 97/10/21 11:29:18
+ *
+ */
+ 
+#include "tkWinInt.h"
+#include "tkFileFilter.h"
+
+#include <commdlg.h>    /* includes common dialog functionality */
+#include <dlgs.h>       /* includes common dialog template defines */
+#include <cderr.h>      /* includes the common dialog error codes */
+
+#if ((TK_MAJOR_VERSION == 4) && (TK_MINOR_VERSION <= 2))
+/*
+ * The following function is implemented on tk4.3 and after only 
+ */
+#define Tk_GetHWND TkWinGetHWND
+#endif
+
+#define SAVE_FILE 0
+#define OPEN_FILE 1
+
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ * MsgTypeInfo --
+ *
+ *	This structure stores the type of available message box in an
+ *	easy-to-process format. Used by th Tk_MessageBox() function
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+typedef struct MsgTypeInfo {
+    char * name;
+    int type;
+    int numButtons;
+    char * btnNames[3];
+} MsgTypeInfo;
+
+#define NUM_TYPES 6
+
+static MsgTypeInfo 
+msgTypeInfo[NUM_TYPES] = {
+    {"abortretryignore", MB_ABORTRETRYIGNORE, 3, {"abort", "retry", "ignore"}},
+    {"ok", 		 MB_OK, 	      1, {"ok"                      }},
+    {"okcancel",	 MB_OKCANCEL,	      2, {"ok",    "cancel"         }},
+    {"retrycancel",	 MB_RETRYCANCEL,      2, {"retry", "cancel"         }},
+    {"yesno",		 MB_YESNO,	      2, {"yes",   "no"             }},
+    {"yesnocancel",	 MB_YESNOCANCEL,      3, {"yes",   "no",    "cancel"}}
+};
+
+/*
+ * The following structure is used in the GetOpenFileName() and
+ * GetSaveFileName() calls.
+ */
+typedef struct _OpenFileData {
+    Tcl_Interp * interp;
+    TCHAR szFile[MAX_PATH+1];
+} OpenFileData;
+
+/*
+ * The following structure is used in the ChooseColor() call.
+ */
+typedef struct _ChooseColorData {
+    Tcl_Interp * interp;
+    char * title;			/* Title of the color dialog */
+} ChooseColorData;
+
+
+static int 		GetFileName _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+    			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int argc, char **argv,
+    			    int isOpen));
+static UINT CALLBACK	ColorDlgHookProc _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hDlg, UINT uMsg,
+			    WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam));
+static int 		MakeFilter _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+    			    OPENFILENAME *ofnPtr, char * string));
+static int		ParseFileDlgArgs _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp * interp,
+    			    OPENFILENAME *ofnPtr, int argc, char ** argv,
+			    int isOpen));
+static int 		ProcessCDError _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp * interp,
+			    DWORD dwErrorCode, HWND hWnd));
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * EvalArgv --
+ *
+ *	Invokes the Tcl procedure with the arguments. argv[0] is set by
+ *	the caller of this function. It may be different than cmdName.
+ *	The TCL command will see argv[0], not cmdName, as its name if it
+ *	invokes [lindex [info level 0] 0]
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	TCL_ERROR if the command does not exist and cannot be autoloaded.
+ *	Otherwise, return the result of the evaluation of the command.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The command may be autoloaded.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int 
+EvalArgv(interp, cmdName, argc, argv)
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
+    char * cmdName;		/* Name of the TCL command to call */
+    int argc;			/* Number of arguments. */
+    char **argv;		/* Argument strings. */
+{
+    Tcl_CmdInfo cmdInfo;
+
+    if (!Tcl_GetCommandInfo(interp, cmdName, &cmdInfo)) {
+	char * cmdArgv[2];
+
+	/*
+	 * This comand is not in the interpreter yet -- looks like we
+	 * have to auto-load it
+	 */
+	if (!Tcl_GetCommandInfo(interp, "auto_load", &cmdInfo)) {
+	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "cannot execute command \"auto_load\"",
+		NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+
+	cmdArgv[0] = "auto_load";
+	cmdArgv[1] = cmdName;
+
+	if ((*cmdInfo.proc)(cmdInfo.clientData, interp, 2, cmdArgv)!= TCL_OK){ 
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+
+	if (!Tcl_GetCommandInfo(interp, cmdName, &cmdInfo)) {
+	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "cannot auto-load command \"",
+		cmdName, "\"",NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+    }
+
+    return (*cmdInfo.proc)(cmdInfo.clientData, interp, argc, argv);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_ChooseColorCmd --
+ *
+ *	This procedure implements the color dialog box for the Windows
+ *	platform. See the user documentation for details on what it
+ *	does.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	See user documentation.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	A dialog window is created the first time this procedure is called.
+ *	This window is not destroyed and will be reused the next time the
+ *	application invokes the "tk_chooseColor" command.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+Tk_ChooseColorCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int argc;			/* Number of arguments. */
+    char **argv;		/* Argument strings. */
+{
+    Tk_Window parent = Tk_MainWindow(interp);
+    ChooseColorData custData;
+    int oldMode;
+    CHOOSECOLOR chooseColor;
+    char * colorStr = NULL;
+    int i;
+    int winCode, tclCode;
+    XColor * colorPtr = NULL;
+    static inited = 0;
+    static long dwCustColors[16];
+    static long oldColor;		/* the color selected last time */
+
+    custData.title     = NULL;
+
+    if (!inited) {
+	/*
+	 * dwCustColors stores the custom color which the user can
+	 * modify. We store these colors in a fixed array so that the next
+	 * time the color dialog pops up, the same set of custom colors
+	 * remain in the dialog.
+	 */
+	for (i=0; i<16; i++) {
+	    dwCustColors[i] = (RGB(255-i*10, i, i*10)) ;
+	}
+	oldColor = RGB(0xa0,0xa0,0xa0);
+	inited = 1;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * 1. Parse the arguments
+     */
+
+    chooseColor.lStructSize  = sizeof(CHOOSECOLOR) ;
+    chooseColor.hwndOwner    = 0;			/* filled in below */
+    chooseColor.hInstance    = 0;
+    chooseColor.rgbResult    = oldColor;
+    chooseColor.lpCustColors = (LPDWORD) dwCustColors ;
+    chooseColor.Flags        = CC_RGBINIT | CC_FULLOPEN | CC_ENABLEHOOK;
+    chooseColor.lCustData    = (LPARAM)&custData;
+    chooseColor.lpfnHook     = ColorDlgHookProc;
+    chooseColor.lpTemplateName = NULL;
+
+    for (i=1; i<argc; i+=2) {
+        int v = i+1;
+	int len = strlen(argv[i]);
+
+	if (strncmp(argv[i], "-initialcolor", len)==0) {
+	    if (v==argc) {goto arg_missing;}
+
+	    colorStr = argv[v];
+	}
+	else if (strncmp(argv[i], "-parent", len)==0) {
+	    if (v==argc) {goto arg_missing;}
+
+	    parent=Tk_NameToWindow(interp, argv[v], Tk_MainWindow(interp));
+	    if (parent == NULL) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	}
+	else if (strncmp(argv[i], "-title", len)==0) {
+	    if (v==argc) {goto arg_missing;}
+
+	    custData.title = argv[v];
+	}
+	else {
+    	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unknown option \"", 
+		argv[i], "\", must be -initialcolor, -parent or -title",
+		NULL);
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+    }
+
+    if (Tk_WindowId(parent) == None) {
+	Tk_MakeWindowExist(parent);
+    }
+    chooseColor.hwndOwner = Tk_GetHWND(Tk_WindowId(parent));
+
+    if (colorStr != NULL) {
+	colorPtr = Tk_GetColor(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp), colorStr);
+	if (!colorPtr) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	chooseColor.rgbResult = RGB((colorPtr->red/0x100), 
+	    (colorPtr->green/0x100), (colorPtr->blue/0x100));
+    }	
+
+    /*
+     * 2. Popup the dialog
+     */
+
+    oldMode = Tcl_SetServiceMode(TCL_SERVICE_ALL);
+    winCode = ChooseColor(&chooseColor);
+    (void) Tcl_SetServiceMode(oldMode);
+
+    /*
+     * Clear the interp result since anything may have happened during the
+     * modal loop.
+     */
+
+    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+
+    /*
+     * 3. Process the result of the dialog
+     */
+    if (winCode) {
+	/*
+	 * User has selected a color
+	 */
+	char result[100];
+
+	sprintf(result, "#%02x%02x%02x",
+	    GetRValue(chooseColor.rgbResult), 
+	    GetGValue(chooseColor.rgbResult), 
+	    GetBValue(chooseColor.rgbResult));
+        Tcl_AppendResult(interp, result, NULL);
+	tclCode = TCL_OK;
+
+	oldColor = chooseColor.rgbResult;
+    } else {
+	/*
+	 * User probably pressed Cancel, or an error occurred
+	 */
+	tclCode = ProcessCDError(interp, CommDlgExtendedError(), 
+	     chooseColor.hwndOwner);
+    }
+
+    if (colorPtr) {
+	Tk_FreeColor(colorPtr);
+    }
+
+    return tclCode;
+
+  arg_missing:
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"", argv[argc-1], "\" missing",
+	NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * ColorDlgHookProc --
+ *
+ *	Gets called during the execution of the color dialog. It processes
+ *	the "interesting" messages that Windows send to the dialog.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	TRUE if the message has been processed, FALSE otherwise.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Changes the title of the dialog window when it is popped up.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static UINT
+CALLBACK ColorDlgHookProc(hDlg, uMsg, wParam, lParam)
+    HWND hDlg;			/* Handle to the color dialog */
+    UINT uMsg;			/* Type of message */
+    WPARAM wParam;		/* word param, interpretation depends on uMsg*/
+    LPARAM lParam;		/* long param, interpretation depends on uMsg*/
+{
+    CHOOSECOLOR * ccPtr;
+    ChooseColorData * pCustData;
+
+    switch (uMsg) {
+      case WM_INITDIALOG:
+	/* Save the pointer to CHOOSECOLOR so that we can use it later */
+	SetWindowLong(hDlg, DWL_USER, lParam);
+
+	/* Set the title string of the dialog */
+	ccPtr = (CHOOSECOLOR*)lParam;
+	pCustData = (ChooseColorData*)(ccPtr->lCustData);
+	if (pCustData->title && *(pCustData->title)) {
+ 	    SetWindowText(hDlg, (LPCSTR)pCustData->title);
+	}
+
+	return TRUE;
+    }
+
+    return FALSE;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_GetOpenFileCmd --
+ *
+ *	This procedure implements the "open file" dialog box for the
+ *	Windows platform. See the user documentation for details on what
+ *	it does.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	See user documentation.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	A dialog window is created the first this procedure is called.
+ *	This window is not destroyed and will be reused the next time
+ *	the application invokes the "tk_getOpenFile" or
+ *	"tk_getSaveFile" command.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+Tk_GetOpenFileCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int argc;			/* Number of arguments. */
+    char **argv;		/* Argument strings. */
+{
+    return GetFileName(clientData, interp, argc, argv, OPEN_FILE);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_GetSaveFileCmd --
+ *
+ *	Same as Tk_GetOpenFileCmd but opens a "save file" dialog box
+ *	instead
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Same as Tk_GetOpenFileCmd.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Same as Tk_GetOpenFileCmd.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+Tk_GetSaveFileCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int argc;			/* Number of arguments. */
+    char **argv;		/* Argument strings. */
+{
+    return GetFileName(clientData, interp, argc, argv, SAVE_FILE);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * GetFileName --
+ *
+ *	Calls GetOpenFileName() or GetSaveFileName().
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	See user documentation.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	See user documentation.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int 
+GetFileName(clientData, interp, argc, argv, isOpen)
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int argc;			/* Number of arguments. */
+    char **argv;		/* Argument strings. */
+    int isOpen;			/* true if we should call GetOpenFileName(),
+				 * false if we should call GetSaveFileName() */
+{
+    OPENFILENAME openFileName, *ofnPtr;
+    int tclCode, winCode, oldMode;
+    OpenFileData *custData;
+    char buffer[MAX_PATH+1];
+    
+    ofnPtr = &openFileName;
+
+    /*
+     * 1. Parse the arguments.
+     */
+    if (ParseFileDlgArgs(interp, ofnPtr, argc, argv, isOpen) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    custData = (OpenFileData*) ofnPtr->lCustData;
+
+    /*
+     * 2. Call the common dialog function.
+     */
+    oldMode = Tcl_SetServiceMode(TCL_SERVICE_ALL);
+    GetCurrentDirectory(MAX_PATH+1, buffer);
+    if (isOpen) {
+	winCode = GetOpenFileName(ofnPtr);
+    } else {
+	winCode = GetSaveFileName(ofnPtr);
+    }
+    SetCurrentDirectory(buffer);
+    (void) Tcl_SetServiceMode(oldMode);
+
+    /*
+     * Clear the interp result since anything may have happened during the
+     * modal loop.
+     */
+
+    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+
+    if (ofnPtr->lpstrInitialDir != NULL) {
+	ckfree((char*) ofnPtr->lpstrInitialDir);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * 3. Process the results.
+     */
+    if (winCode) {
+	char *p;
+	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+
+	for (p = custData->szFile; p && *p; p++) {
+	    /*
+	     * Change the pathname to the Tcl "normalized" pathname, where
+	     * back slashes are used instead of forward slashes
+	     */
+	    if (*p == '\\') {
+		*p = '/';
+	    }
+	}
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, custData->szFile, NULL);
+	tclCode = TCL_OK;
+    } else {
+	tclCode = ProcessCDError(interp, CommDlgExtendedError(),
+		ofnPtr->hwndOwner);
+    }
+
+    if (custData) {
+	ckfree((char*)custData);
+    }
+    if (ofnPtr->lpstrFilter) {
+	ckfree((char*)ofnPtr->lpstrFilter);
+    }
+
+    return tclCode;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * ParseFileDlgArgs --
+ *
+ *	Parses the arguments passed to tk_getOpenFile and tk_getSaveFile.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	A standard TCL return value.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The OPENFILENAME structure is initialized and modified according
+ *	to the arguments.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int 
+ParseFileDlgArgs(interp, ofnPtr, argc, argv, isOpen)
+    Tcl_Interp * interp;	/* Current interpreter. */
+    OPENFILENAME *ofnPtr;	/* Info about the file dialog */
+    int argc;			/* Number of arguments. */
+    char **argv;		/* Argument strings. */
+    int isOpen;			/* true if we should call GetOpenFileName(),
+				 * false if we should call GetSaveFileName() */
+{
+    OpenFileData * custData;
+    int i;
+    Tk_Window parent = Tk_MainWindow(interp);
+    int doneFilter = 0;
+    int windowsMajorVersion;
+    Tcl_DString buffer;
+
+    custData = (OpenFileData*)ckalloc(sizeof(OpenFileData));
+    custData->interp = interp;
+    strcpy(custData->szFile, "");
+
+    /* Fill in the OPENFILENAME structure to */
+    ofnPtr->lStructSize       = sizeof(OPENFILENAME);
+    ofnPtr->hwndOwner         = 0;			/* filled in below */
+    ofnPtr->lpstrFilter       = NULL;
+    ofnPtr->lpstrCustomFilter = NULL;
+    ofnPtr->nMaxCustFilter    = 0;
+    ofnPtr->nFilterIndex      = 0;
+    ofnPtr->lpstrFile         = custData->szFile;
+    ofnPtr->nMaxFile          = sizeof(custData->szFile);
+    ofnPtr->lpstrFileTitle    = NULL;
+    ofnPtr->nMaxFileTitle     = 0;
+    ofnPtr->lpstrInitialDir   = NULL;
+    ofnPtr->lpstrTitle        = NULL;
+    ofnPtr->nFileOffset       = 0;
+    ofnPtr->nFileExtension    = 0;
+    ofnPtr->lpstrDefExt       = NULL;
+    ofnPtr->lpfnHook 	      = NULL; 
+    ofnPtr->lCustData         = (DWORD)custData;
+    ofnPtr->lpTemplateName    = NULL;
+    ofnPtr->Flags             = OFN_HIDEREADONLY | OFN_PATHMUSTEXIST;
+
+    windowsMajorVersion = LOBYTE(LOWORD(GetVersion()));
+    if (windowsMajorVersion >= 4) {
+	/*
+	 * Use the "explorer" style file selection box on platforms that
+	 * support it (Win95 and NT4.0, both have a major version number
+	 * of 4)
+	 */
+	ofnPtr->Flags |= OFN_EXPLORER;
+    }
+
+
+    if (isOpen) {
+	ofnPtr->Flags |= OFN_FILEMUSTEXIST;
+    } else {
+	ofnPtr->Flags |= OFN_OVERWRITEPROMPT;
+    }
+
+    for (i=1; i<argc; i+=2) {
+        int v = i+1;
+	int len = strlen(argv[i]);
+
+	if (strncmp(argv[i], "-defaultextension", len)==0) {
+	    if (v==argc) {goto arg_missing;}
+
+	    ofnPtr->lpstrDefExt = argv[v];
+	    if (ofnPtr->lpstrDefExt[0] == '.') {
+		/* Windows will insert the dot for us */
+		ofnPtr->lpstrDefExt ++;
+	    }
+	}
+	else if (strncmp(argv[i], "-filetypes", len)==0) {
+	    if (v==argc) {goto arg_missing;}
+
+	    if (MakeFilter(interp, ofnPtr, argv[v]) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    doneFilter = 1;
+	}
+	else if (strncmp(argv[i], "-initialdir", len)==0) {
+	    if (v==argc) {goto arg_missing;}
+
+	    if (Tcl_TranslateFileName(interp, argv[v], &buffer) == NULL) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    ofnPtr->lpstrInitialDir = ckalloc(Tcl_DStringLength(&buffer)+1);
+	    strcpy((char*)ofnPtr->lpstrInitialDir, Tcl_DStringValue(&buffer));
+	    Tcl_DStringFree(&buffer);
+	}
+	else if (strncmp(argv[i], "-initialfile", len)==0) {
+	    if (v==argc) {goto arg_missing;}
+
+	    if (Tcl_TranslateFileName(interp, argv[v], &buffer) == NULL) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    strcpy(ofnPtr->lpstrFile, Tcl_DStringValue(&buffer));
+	    Tcl_DStringFree(&buffer);
+	}
+	else if (strncmp(argv[i], "-parent", len)==0) {
+	    if (v==argc) {goto arg_missing;}
+
+	    parent=Tk_NameToWindow(interp, argv[v], Tk_MainWindow(interp));
+	    if (parent == NULL) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	}
+	else if (strncmp(argv[i], "-title", len)==0) {
+	    if (v==argc) {goto arg_missing;}
+
+	    ofnPtr->lpstrTitle = argv[v];
+	}
+	else {
+    	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unknown option \"", 
+		argv[i], "\", must be -defaultextension, ",
+		"-filetypes, -initialdir, -initialfile, -parent or -title",
+		NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+    }
+
+    if (!doneFilter) {
+	if (MakeFilter(interp, ofnPtr, "") != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+    }
+
+    if (Tk_WindowId(parent) == None) {
+	Tk_MakeWindowExist(parent);
+    }
+    ofnPtr->hwndOwner = Tk_GetHWND(Tk_WindowId(parent));
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+  arg_missing:
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"", argv[argc-1], "\" missing",
+	NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * MakeFilter --
+ *
+ *	Allocate a buffer to store the filters in a format understood by
+ *	Windows
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	A standard TCL return value.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	ofnPtr->lpstrFilter is modified.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+static int MakeFilter(interp, ofnPtr, string) 
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
+    OPENFILENAME *ofnPtr;	/* Info about the file dialog */
+    char *string;		/* String value of the -filetypes option */
+{
+    char *filterStr;
+    char *p;
+    int pass;
+    FileFilterList flist;
+    FileFilter *filterPtr;
+
+    TkInitFileFilters(&flist);
+    if (TkGetFileFilters(interp, &flist, string, 1) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (flist.filters == NULL) {
+	/*
+	 * Use "All Files (*.*) as the default filter is none is specified
+	 */
+	char *defaultFilter = "All Files (*.*)";
+
+	p = filterStr = (char*)ckalloc(30 * sizeof(char));
+
+	strcpy(p, defaultFilter);
+	p+= strlen(defaultFilter);
+
+	*p++ = '\0';
+	*p++ = '*';
+	*p++ = '.';
+	*p++ = '*';
+	*p++ = '\0';
+	*p++ = '\0';
+	*p = '\0';
+
+    } else {
+	/* We format the filetype into a string understood by Windows:
+	 * {"Text Documents" {.doc .txt} {TEXT}} becomes
+	 * "Text Documents (*.doc,*.txt)\0*.doc;*.txt\0"
+	 *
+	 * See the Windows OPENFILENAME manual page for details on the filter
+	 * string format.
+	 */
+
+	/*
+	 * Since we may only add asterisks (*) to the filter, we need at most
+	 * twice the size of the string to format the filter
+	 */
+	filterStr = ckalloc(strlen(string) * 3);
+
+	for (filterPtr = flist.filters, p = filterStr; filterPtr;
+	        filterPtr = filterPtr->next) {
+	    char *sep;
+	    FileFilterClause *clausePtr;
+
+	    /*
+	     *  First, put in the name of the file type
+	     */
+	    strcpy(p, filterPtr->name);
+	    p+= strlen(filterPtr->name);
+	    *p++ = ' ';
+	    *p++ = '(';
+
+	    for (pass = 1; pass <= 2; pass++) {
+		/*
+		 * In the first pass, we format the extensions in the 
+		 * name field. In the second pass, we format the extensions in
+		 * the filter pattern field
+		 */
+		sep = "";
+		for (clausePtr=filterPtr->clauses;clausePtr;
+		         clausePtr=clausePtr->next) {
+		    GlobPattern *globPtr;
+		
+
+		    for (globPtr=clausePtr->patterns; globPtr;
+			    globPtr=globPtr->next) {
+			strcpy(p, sep);
+			p+= strlen(sep);
+			strcpy(p, globPtr->pattern);
+			p+= strlen(globPtr->pattern);
+
+			if (pass==1) {
+			    sep = ",";
+			} else {
+			    sep = ";";
+			}
+		    }
+		}
+		if (pass == 1) {
+		    if (pass == 1) {
+			*p ++ = ')';
+		    }
+		}
+		*p ++ = '\0';
+	    }
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Windows requires the filter string to be ended by two NULL
+	 * characters.
+	 */
+	*p++ = '\0';
+	*p = '\0';
+    }
+
+    if (ofnPtr->lpstrFilter != NULL) {
+	ckfree((char*)ofnPtr->lpstrFilter);
+    }
+    ofnPtr->lpstrFilter = filterStr;
+
+    TkFreeFileFilters(&flist);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_MessageBoxCmd --
+ *
+ *	This procedure implements the MessageBox window for the
+ *	Windows platform. See the user documentation for details on what
+ *	it does.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	See user documentation.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None. The MessageBox window will be destroy before this procedure
+ *	returns.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+Tk_MessageBoxCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int argc;			/* Number of arguments. */
+    char **argv;		/* Argument strings. */
+{
+    int flags;
+    Tk_Window parent = Tk_MainWindow(interp);
+    HWND hWnd;
+    char *message = "";
+    char *title = "";
+    int icon = MB_ICONINFORMATION;
+    int type = MB_OK;
+    int i, j;
+    char *result;
+    int code, oldMode;
+    char *defaultBtn = NULL;
+    int defaultBtnIdx = -1;
+
+    for (i=1; i<argc; i+=2) {
+	int v = i+1;
+	int len = strlen(argv[i]);
+
+	if (strncmp(argv[i], "-default", len)==0) {
+	    if (v==argc) {goto arg_missing;}
+
+	    defaultBtn = argv[v];
+	}
+	else if (strncmp(argv[i], "-icon", len)==0) {
+	    if (v==argc) {goto arg_missing;}
+
+	    if (strcmp(argv[v], "error") == 0) {
+		icon = MB_ICONERROR;
+	    }
+	    else if (strcmp(argv[v], "info") == 0) {
+		icon = MB_ICONINFORMATION;
+	    }
+	    else if (strcmp(argv[v], "question") == 0) {
+		icon = MB_ICONQUESTION;
+	    }
+	    else if (strcmp(argv[v], "warning") == 0) {
+		icon = MB_ICONWARNING;
+	    }
+	    else {
+	        Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "invalid icon \"", argv[v],
+		    "\", must be error, info, question or warning", NULL);
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	}
+	else if (strncmp(argv[i], "-message", len)==0) {
+	    if (v==argc) {goto arg_missing;}
+
+	    message = argv[v];
+	}
+	else if (strncmp(argv[i], "-parent", len)==0) {
+	    if (v==argc) {goto arg_missing;}
+
+	    parent=Tk_NameToWindow(interp, argv[v], Tk_MainWindow(interp));
+	    if (parent == NULL) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	}
+	else if (strncmp(argv[i], "-title", len)==0) {
+	    if (v==argc) {goto arg_missing;}
+
+	    title = argv[v];
+	}
+	else if (strncmp(argv[i], "-type", len)==0) {
+	    int found = 0;
+
+	    if (v==argc) {goto arg_missing;}
+
+	    for (j=0; j<NUM_TYPES; j++) {
+		if (strcmp(argv[v], msgTypeInfo[j].name) == 0) {
+		    type = msgTypeInfo[j].type;
+		    found = 1;
+		    break;
+		}
+	    }
+	    if (!found) {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "invalid message box type \"", 
+		    argv[v], "\", must be abortretryignore, ok, ",
+		    "okcancel, retrycancel, yesno or yesnocancel", NULL);
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	}
+	else {
+    	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unknown option \"", 
+		argv[i], "\", must be -default, -icon, ",
+		"-message, -parent, -title or -type", NULL);
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /* Make sure we have a valid hWnd to act as the parent of this message box
+     */
+    if (Tk_WindowId(parent) == None) {
+	Tk_MakeWindowExist(parent);
+    }
+    hWnd = Tk_GetHWND(Tk_WindowId(parent));
+
+    if (defaultBtn != NULL) {
+	for (i=0; i<NUM_TYPES; i++) {
+	    if (type == msgTypeInfo[i].type) {
+		for (j=0; j<msgTypeInfo[i].numButtons; j++) {
+		    if (strcmp(defaultBtn, msgTypeInfo[i].btnNames[j])==0) {
+		        defaultBtnIdx = j;
+			break;
+		    }
+		}
+		if (defaultBtnIdx < 0) {
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "invalid default button \"",
+			defaultBtn, "\"", NULL);
+		    return TCL_ERROR;
+		}
+		break;
+	    }
+	}
+
+	switch (defaultBtnIdx) {
+	  case 0: flags = MB_DEFBUTTON1; break;
+	  case 1: flags = MB_DEFBUTTON2; break;
+	  case 2: flags = MB_DEFBUTTON3; break;
+	  case 3: flags = MB_DEFBUTTON4; break;
+	}
+    } else {
+	flags = 0;
+    }
+    
+    flags |= icon | type;
+    oldMode = Tcl_SetServiceMode(TCL_SERVICE_ALL);
+    code = MessageBox(hWnd, message, title, flags|MB_SYSTEMMODAL);
+    (void) Tcl_SetServiceMode(oldMode);
+
+    switch (code) {
+      case IDABORT:	result = "abort";  break;
+      case IDCANCEL:	result = "cancel"; break;
+      case IDIGNORE:	result = "ignore"; break;
+      case IDNO:	result = "no";     break;
+      case IDOK:	result = "ok";     break;
+      case IDRETRY:	result = "retry";  break;
+      case IDYES:	result = "yes";    break;
+      default:		result = "";
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * When we come to here interp->result may have been changed by some
+     * background scripts. Call Tcl_SetResult() to make sure that any stuff
+     * lingering in interp->result will not appear in the result of
+     * this command.
+     */
+
+    Tcl_SetResult(interp, result, TCL_STATIC);
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+  arg_missing:
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"", argv[argc-1], "\" missing",
+	NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * ProcessCDError --
+ *
+ *	This procedure gets called if a Windows-specific error message
+ *	has occurred during the execution of a common dialog or the
+ *	user has pressed the CANCEL button.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	If an error has indeed happened, returns a standard TCL result
+ *	that reports the error code in string format. If the user has
+ *	pressed the CANCEL button (dwErrorCode == 0), resets
+ *	interp->result to the empty string.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	interp->result is changed.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+static int ProcessCDError(interp, dwErrorCode, hWnd)
+    Tcl_Interp * interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
+    DWORD dwErrorCode;			/* The Windows-specific error code */
+    HWND hWnd;				/* window in which the error happened*/
+{
+    char *string;
+
+    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+
+    switch(dwErrorCode) {
+      case 0:	  /* User has hit CANCEL */
+	return TCL_OK;
+
+      case CDERR_DIALOGFAILURE:   string="CDERR_DIALOGFAILURE";  	break;
+      case CDERR_STRUCTSIZE:      string="CDERR_STRUCTSIZE";   		break;
+      case CDERR_INITIALIZATION:  string="CDERR_INITIALIZATION";   	break;
+      case CDERR_NOTEMPLATE:      string="CDERR_NOTEMPLATE";   		break;
+      case CDERR_NOHINSTANCE:     string="CDERR_NOHINSTANCE";   	break;
+      case CDERR_LOADSTRFAILURE:  string="CDERR_LOADSTRFAILURE";   	break;
+      case CDERR_FINDRESFAILURE:  string="CDERR_FINDRESFAILURE";   	break;
+      case CDERR_LOADRESFAILURE:  string="CDERR_LOADRESFAILURE";   	break;
+      case CDERR_LOCKRESFAILURE:  string="CDERR_LOCKRESFAILURE";   	break;
+      case CDERR_MEMALLOCFAILURE: string="CDERR_MEMALLOCFAILURE";   	break;
+      case CDERR_MEMLOCKFAILURE:  string="CDERR_MEMLOCKFAILURE";   	break;
+      case CDERR_NOHOOK:          string="CDERR_NOHOOK";   	 	break;
+      case PDERR_SETUPFAILURE:    string="PDERR_SETUPFAILURE";   	break;
+      case PDERR_PARSEFAILURE:    string="PDERR_PARSEFAILURE";   	break;
+      case PDERR_RETDEFFAILURE:   string="PDERR_RETDEFFAILURE";   	break;
+      case PDERR_LOADDRVFAILURE:  string="PDERR_LOADDRVFAILURE";   	break;
+      case PDERR_GETDEVMODEFAIL:  string="PDERR_GETDEVMODEFAIL";   	break;
+      case PDERR_INITFAILURE:     string="PDERR_INITFAILURE";   	break;
+      case PDERR_NODEVICES:       string="PDERR_NODEVICES";   		break;
+      case PDERR_NODEFAULTPRN:    string="PDERR_NODEFAULTPRN";   	break;
+      case PDERR_DNDMMISMATCH:    string="PDERR_DNDMMISMATCH";   	break;
+      case PDERR_CREATEICFAILURE: string="PDERR_CREATEICFAILURE";   	break;
+      case PDERR_PRINTERNOTFOUND: string="PDERR_PRINTERNOTFOUND";   	break;
+      case CFERR_NOFONTS:         string="CFERR_NOFONTS";   	 	break;
+      case FNERR_SUBCLASSFAILURE: string="FNERR_SUBCLASSFAILURE";   	break;
+      case FNERR_INVALIDFILENAME: string="FNERR_INVALIDFILENAME";   	break;
+      case FNERR_BUFFERTOOSMALL:  string="FNERR_BUFFERTOOSMALL";   	break;
+	
+      default:
+	string="unknown error";
+    }
+
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Win32 internal error: ", string, NULL); 
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
diff --git a/win/tkWinDraw.c b/win/tkWinDraw.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e972365
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/tkWinDraw.c
@@ -0,0 +1,1264 @@
+/* 
+ * tkWinDraw.c --
+ *
+ *	This file contains the Xlib emulation functions pertaining to
+ *	actually drawing objects on a window.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ * Copyright (c) 1994 Software Research Associates, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkWinDraw.c 1.30 97/03/21 11:20:05
+ */
+
+#include "tkWinInt.h"
+
+/*
+ * These macros convert between X's bizarre angle units to radians.
+ */
+
+#define PI 3.14159265358979
+#define XAngleToRadians(a) ((double)(a) / 64 * PI / 180);
+
+/*
+ * Translation table between X gc functions and Win32 raster op modes.
+ */
+
+int tkpWinRopModes[] = {
+    R2_BLACK,			/* GXclear */
+    R2_MASKPEN,			/* GXand */
+    R2_MASKPENNOT,		/* GXandReverse */
+    R2_COPYPEN,			/* GXcopy */
+    R2_MASKNOTPEN,		/* GXandInverted */
+    R2_NOT,			/* GXnoop */
+    R2_XORPEN,			/* GXxor */
+    R2_MERGEPEN,		/* GXor */
+    R2_NOTMERGEPEN,		/* GXnor */
+    R2_NOTXORPEN,		/* GXequiv */
+    R2_NOT,			/* GXinvert */
+    R2_MERGEPENNOT,		/* GXorReverse */
+    R2_NOTCOPYPEN,		/* GXcopyInverted */
+    R2_MERGENOTPEN,		/* GXorInverted */
+    R2_NOTMASKPEN,		/* GXnand */
+    R2_WHITE			/* GXset */
+};
+
+/*
+ * Translation table between X gc functions and Win32 BitBlt op modes.  Some
+ * of the operations defined in X don't have names, so we have to construct
+ * new opcodes for those functions.  This is arcane and probably not all that
+ * useful, but at least it's accurate.
+ */
+
+#define NOTSRCAND	(DWORD)0x00220326 /* dest = (NOT source) AND dest */
+#define NOTSRCINVERT	(DWORD)0x00990066 /* dest = (NOT source) XOR dest */
+#define SRCORREVERSE	(DWORD)0x00DD0228 /* dest = source OR (NOT dest) */
+#define SRCNAND		(DWORD)0x007700E6 /* dest = NOT (source AND dest) */
+
+static int bltModes[] = {
+    BLACKNESS,			/* GXclear */
+    SRCAND,			/* GXand */
+    SRCERASE,			/* GXandReverse */
+    SRCCOPY,			/* GXcopy */
+    NOTSRCAND,			/* GXandInverted */
+    PATCOPY,			/* GXnoop */
+    SRCINVERT,			/* GXxor */
+    SRCPAINT,			/* GXor */
+    NOTSRCERASE,		/* GXnor */
+    NOTSRCINVERT,		/* GXequiv */
+    DSTINVERT,			/* GXinvert */
+    SRCORREVERSE,		/* GXorReverse */
+    NOTSRCCOPY,			/* GXcopyInverted */
+    MERGEPAINT,			/* GXorInverted */
+    SRCNAND,			/* GXnand */
+    WHITENESS			/* GXset */
+};
+
+/*
+ * The following raster op uses the source bitmap as a mask for the
+ * pattern.  This is used to draw in a foreground color but leave the
+ * background color transparent.
+ */
+
+#define MASKPAT		0x00E20746 /* dest = (src & pat) | (!src & dst) */
+
+/*
+ * The following two raster ops are used to copy the foreground and background
+ * bits of a source pattern as defined by a stipple used as the pattern.
+ */
+
+#define COPYFG		0x00CA0749 /* dest = (pat & src) | (!pat & dst) */
+#define COPYBG		0x00AC0744 /* dest = (!pat & src) | (pat & dst) */
+
+/*
+ * Macros used later in the file.
+ */
+
+#define MIN(a,b)	((a>b) ? b : a)
+#define MAX(a,b)	((a<b) ? b : a)
+
+/*
+ * The followng typedef is used to pass Windows GDI drawing functions.
+ */
+
+typedef BOOL (CALLBACK *WinDrawFunc) _ANSI_ARGS_((HDC dc,
+			    CONST POINT* points, int npoints));
+
+/*
+ * Forward declarations for procedures defined in this file:
+ */
+
+static POINT *		ConvertPoints _ANSI_ARGS_((XPoint *points, int npoints,
+			    int mode, RECT *bbox));
+static void		DrawOrFillArc _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
+			    Drawable d, GC gc, int x, int y,
+			    unsigned int width, unsigned int height,
+			    int start, int extent, int fill));
+static void		RenderObject _ANSI_ARGS_((HDC dc, GC gc,
+			    XPoint* points, int npoints, int mode, HPEN pen,
+			    WinDrawFunc func));
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWinGetDrawableDC --
+ *
+ *	Retrieve the DC from a drawable.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns the window DC for windows.  Returns a new memory DC
+ *	for pixmaps.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Sets up the palette for the device context, and saves the old
+ *	device context state in the passed in TkWinDCState structure.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+HDC
+TkWinGetDrawableDC(display, d, state)
+    Display *display;
+    Drawable d;
+    TkWinDCState* state;
+{
+    HDC dc;
+    TkWinDrawable *twdPtr = (TkWinDrawable *)d;
+    Colormap cmap;
+
+    if (twdPtr->type == TWD_WINDOW) {
+	TkWindow *winPtr = twdPtr->window.winPtr;
+    
+ 	dc = GetDC(twdPtr->window.handle);
+	if (winPtr == NULL) {
+	    cmap = DefaultColormap(display, DefaultScreen(display));
+	} else {
+	    cmap = winPtr->atts.colormap;
+	}
+    } else if (twdPtr->type == TWD_WINDC) {
+	dc = twdPtr->winDC.hdc;
+	cmap = DefaultColormap(display, DefaultScreen(display));
+    } else {
+	dc = CreateCompatibleDC(NULL);
+	SelectObject(dc, twdPtr->bitmap.handle);
+	cmap = twdPtr->bitmap.colormap;
+    }
+    state->palette = TkWinSelectPalette(dc, cmap);
+    return dc;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWinReleaseDrawableDC --
+ *
+ *	Frees the resources associated with a drawable's DC.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Restores the old bitmap handle to the memory DC for pixmaps.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkWinReleaseDrawableDC(d, dc, state)
+    Drawable d;
+    HDC dc;
+    TkWinDCState *state;
+{
+    TkWinDrawable *twdPtr = (TkWinDrawable *)d;
+    SelectPalette(dc, state->palette, TRUE);
+    RealizePalette(dc);
+    if (twdPtr->type == TWD_WINDOW) {
+	ReleaseDC(TkWinGetHWND(d), dc);
+    } else if (twdPtr->type == TWD_BITMAP) {
+	DeleteDC(dc);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * ConvertPoints --
+ *
+ *	Convert an array of X points to an array of Win32 points.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns the converted array of POINTs.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Allocates a block of memory that should not be freed.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static POINT *
+ConvertPoints(points, npoints, mode, bbox)
+    XPoint *points;
+    int npoints;
+    int mode;			/* CoordModeOrigin or CoordModePrevious. */
+    RECT *bbox;			/* Bounding box of points. */
+{
+    static POINT *winPoints = NULL; /* Array of points that is reused. */
+    static int nWinPoints = -1;	    /* Current size of point array. */
+    int i;
+
+    /*
+     * To avoid paying the cost of a malloc on every drawing routine,
+     * we reuse the last array if it is large enough.
+     */
+
+    if (npoints > nWinPoints) {
+	if (winPoints != NULL) {
+	    ckfree((char *) winPoints);
+	}
+	winPoints = (POINT *) ckalloc(sizeof(POINT) * npoints);
+	if (winPoints == NULL) {
+	    nWinPoints = -1;
+	    return NULL;
+	}
+	nWinPoints = npoints;
+    }
+
+    bbox->left = bbox->right = points[0].x;
+    bbox->top = bbox->bottom = points[0].y;
+    
+    if (mode == CoordModeOrigin) {
+	for (i = 0; i < npoints; i++) {
+	    winPoints[i].x = points[i].x;
+	    winPoints[i].y = points[i].y;
+	    bbox->left = MIN(bbox->left, winPoints[i].x);
+	    bbox->right = MAX(bbox->right, winPoints[i].x);
+	    bbox->top = MIN(bbox->top, winPoints[i].y);
+	    bbox->bottom = MAX(bbox->bottom, winPoints[i].y);
+	}
+    } else {
+	winPoints[0].x = points[0].x;
+	winPoints[0].y = points[0].y;
+	for (i = 1; i < npoints; i++) {
+	    winPoints[i].x = winPoints[i-1].x + points[i].x;
+	    winPoints[i].y = winPoints[i-1].y + points[i].y;
+	    bbox->left = MIN(bbox->left, winPoints[i].x);
+	    bbox->right = MAX(bbox->right, winPoints[i].x);
+	    bbox->top = MIN(bbox->top, winPoints[i].y);
+	    bbox->bottom = MAX(bbox->bottom, winPoints[i].y);
+	}
+    }
+    return winPoints;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XCopyArea --
+ *
+ *	Copies data from one drawable to another using block transfer
+ *	routines.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Data is moved from a window or bitmap to a second window or
+ *	bitmap.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+XCopyArea(display, src, dest, gc, src_x, src_y, width, height, dest_x, dest_y)
+    Display* display;
+    Drawable src;
+    Drawable dest;
+    GC gc;
+    int src_x, src_y;
+    unsigned int width, height;
+    int dest_x, dest_y;
+{
+    HDC srcDC, destDC;
+    TkWinDCState srcState, destState;
+    TkpClipMask *clipPtr = (TkpClipMask*)gc->clip_mask;
+
+    srcDC = TkWinGetDrawableDC(display, src, &srcState);
+
+    if (src != dest) {
+	destDC = TkWinGetDrawableDC(display, dest, &destState);
+    } else {
+	destDC = srcDC;
+    }
+
+    if (clipPtr && clipPtr->type == TKP_CLIP_REGION) {
+	SelectClipRgn(destDC, (HRGN) clipPtr->value.region);
+	OffsetClipRgn(destDC, gc->clip_x_origin, gc->clip_y_origin);
+    }
+
+    BitBlt(destDC, dest_x, dest_y, width, height, srcDC, src_x, src_y,
+	    bltModes[gc->function]);
+
+    SelectClipRgn(destDC, NULL);
+
+    if (src != dest) {
+	TkWinReleaseDrawableDC(dest, destDC, &destState);
+    }
+    TkWinReleaseDrawableDC(src, srcDC, &srcState);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XCopyPlane --
+ *
+ *	Copies a bitmap from a source drawable to a destination
+ *	drawable.  The plane argument specifies which bit plane of
+ *	the source contains the bitmap.  Note that this implementation
+ *	ignores the gc->function.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Changes the destination drawable.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+XCopyPlane(display, src, dest, gc, src_x, src_y, width, height, dest_x,
+	dest_y, plane)
+    Display* display;
+    Drawable src;
+    Drawable dest;
+    GC gc;
+    int src_x, src_y;
+    unsigned int width, height;
+    int dest_x, dest_y;
+    unsigned long plane;
+{
+    HDC srcDC, destDC;
+    TkWinDCState srcState, destState;
+    HBRUSH bgBrush, fgBrush, oldBrush;
+    TkpClipMask *clipPtr = (TkpClipMask*)gc->clip_mask;
+
+    display->request++;
+
+    if (plane != 1) {
+	panic("Unexpected plane specified for XCopyPlane");
+    }
+
+    srcDC = TkWinGetDrawableDC(display, src, &srcState);
+
+    if (src != dest) {
+	destDC = TkWinGetDrawableDC(display, dest, &destState);
+    } else {
+	destDC = srcDC;
+    }
+
+    if (clipPtr == NULL || clipPtr->type == TKP_CLIP_REGION) {
+
+	/*
+	 * Case 1: opaque bitmaps.  Windows handles the conversion
+	 * from one bit to multiple bits by setting 0 to the
+	 * foreground color, and 1 to the background color (seems
+	 * backwards, but there you are).
+	 */
+
+	if (clipPtr && clipPtr->type == TKP_CLIP_REGION) {
+	    SelectClipRgn(destDC, (HRGN) clipPtr->value.region);
+	    OffsetClipRgn(destDC, gc->clip_x_origin, gc->clip_y_origin);
+	}
+
+	SetBkMode(destDC, OPAQUE);
+	SetBkColor(destDC, gc->foreground);
+	SetTextColor(destDC, gc->background);
+	BitBlt(destDC, dest_x, dest_y, width, height, srcDC, src_x, src_y,
+		SRCCOPY);
+
+	SelectClipRgn(destDC, NULL);
+    } else if (clipPtr->type == TKP_CLIP_PIXMAP) {
+	if (clipPtr->value.pixmap == src) {
+
+	    /*
+	     * Case 2: transparent bitmaps are handled by setting the
+	     * destination to the foreground color whenever the source
+	     * pixel is set.
+	     */
+
+	    fgBrush = CreateSolidBrush(gc->foreground);
+	    oldBrush = SelectObject(destDC, fgBrush);
+	    BitBlt(destDC, dest_x, dest_y, width, height, srcDC, src_x, src_y,
+		    MASKPAT);
+	    SelectObject(destDC, oldBrush);
+	    DeleteObject(fgBrush);
+	} else {
+
+	    /*
+	     * Case 3: two arbitrary bitmaps.  Copy the source rectangle
+	     * into a color pixmap.  Use the result as a brush when
+	     * copying the clip mask into the destination.	 
+	     */
+
+	    HDC memDC, maskDC;
+	    HBITMAP bitmap;
+	    TkWinDCState maskState;
+
+	    fgBrush = CreateSolidBrush(gc->foreground);
+	    bgBrush = CreateSolidBrush(gc->background);
+	    maskDC = TkWinGetDrawableDC(display, clipPtr->value.pixmap,
+		    &maskState);
+	    memDC = CreateCompatibleDC(destDC);
+	    bitmap = CreateBitmap(width, height, 1, 1, NULL);
+	    SelectObject(memDC, bitmap);
+
+	    /*
+	     * Set foreground bits.  We create a new bitmap containing
+	     * (source AND mask), then use it to set the foreground color
+	     * into the destination.
+	     */
+
+	    BitBlt(memDC, 0, 0, width, height, srcDC, src_x, src_y, SRCCOPY);
+	    BitBlt(memDC, 0, 0, width, height, maskDC,
+		    dest_x - gc->clip_x_origin, dest_y - gc->clip_y_origin,
+		    SRCAND);
+	    oldBrush = SelectObject(destDC, fgBrush);
+	    BitBlt(destDC, dest_x, dest_y, width, height, memDC, 0, 0,
+		    MASKPAT);
+
+	    /*
+	     * Set background bits.  Same as foreground, except we use
+	     * ((NOT source) AND mask) and the background brush.
+	     */
+
+	    BitBlt(memDC, 0, 0, width, height, srcDC, src_x, src_y,
+		    NOTSRCCOPY);
+	    BitBlt(memDC, 0, 0, width, height, maskDC,
+		    dest_x - gc->clip_x_origin, dest_y - gc->clip_y_origin,
+		    SRCAND);
+	    SelectObject(destDC, bgBrush);
+	    BitBlt(destDC, dest_x, dest_y, width, height, memDC, 0, 0,
+		    MASKPAT);
+
+	    TkWinReleaseDrawableDC(clipPtr->value.pixmap, maskDC, &maskState);
+	    SelectObject(destDC, oldBrush);
+	    DeleteDC(memDC);
+	    DeleteObject(bitmap);
+	    DeleteObject(fgBrush);
+	    DeleteObject(bgBrush);
+	}
+    }
+    if (src != dest) {
+	TkWinReleaseDrawableDC(dest, destDC, &destState);
+    }
+    TkWinReleaseDrawableDC(src, srcDC, &srcState);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkPutImage --
+ *
+ *	Copies a subimage from an in-memory image to a rectangle of
+ *	of the specified drawable.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Draws the image on the specified drawable.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkPutImage(colors, ncolors, display, d, gc, image, src_x, src_y, dest_x,
+	dest_y, width, height)
+    unsigned long *colors;		/* Array of pixel values used by this
+					 * image.  May be NULL. */
+    int ncolors;			/* Number of colors used, or 0. */
+    Display* display;
+    Drawable d;				/* Destination drawable. */
+    GC gc;
+    XImage* image;			/* Source image. */
+    int src_x, src_y;			/* Offset of subimage. */      
+    int dest_x, dest_y;			/* Position of subimage origin in
+					 * drawable.  */
+    unsigned int width, height;		/* Dimensions of subimage. */
+{
+    HDC dc, dcMem;
+    TkWinDCState state;
+    BITMAPINFO *infoPtr;
+    HBITMAP bitmap;
+    char *data;
+
+    display->request++;
+
+    dc = TkWinGetDrawableDC(display, d, &state);
+    SetROP2(dc, tkpWinRopModes[gc->function]);
+    dcMem = CreateCompatibleDC(dc);
+
+    if (image->bits_per_pixel == 1) {
+	/*
+	 * If the image isn't in the right format, we have to copy
+	 * it into a new buffer in MSBFirst and word-aligned format.
+	 */
+
+	if ((image->bitmap_bit_order != MSBFirst)
+		|| (image->bitmap_pad != sizeof(WORD))) {
+	    data = TkAlignImageData(image, sizeof(WORD), MSBFirst);
+	    bitmap = CreateBitmap(image->width, image->height, 1, 1, data);
+	    ckfree(data);
+	} else {
+	    bitmap = CreateBitmap(image->width, image->height, 1, 1,
+		    image->data);
+	}
+	SetTextColor(dc, gc->foreground);
+	SetBkColor(dc, gc->background);
+    } else {    
+	int i, usePalette;
+
+	/*
+	 * Do not use a palette for TrueColor images.
+	 */
+	
+	usePalette = (image->bits_per_pixel < 16);
+	
+	if (usePalette) {
+	    infoPtr = (BITMAPINFO*) ckalloc(sizeof(BITMAPINFOHEADER)
+		    + sizeof(RGBQUAD)*ncolors);
+	} else {
+	    infoPtr = (BITMAPINFO*) ckalloc(sizeof(BITMAPINFOHEADER));
+	}
+	
+	infoPtr->bmiHeader.biSize = sizeof(BITMAPINFOHEADER);
+	infoPtr->bmiHeader.biWidth = image->width;
+
+	/*
+	 * The following code works around a bug in Win32s.  CreateDIBitmap
+	 * fails under Win32s for top-down images.  So we have to reverse the
+	 * order of the scanlines.  If we are not running under Win32s, we can
+	 * just declare the image to be top-down.
+	 */
+
+	if (tkpIsWin32s) {
+	    int y;
+	    char *srcPtr, *dstPtr, *temp;
+
+	    temp = ckalloc((unsigned) image->bytes_per_line);
+	    srcPtr = image->data;
+	    dstPtr = image->data+(image->bytes_per_line * (image->height - 1));
+	    for (y = 0; y < (image->height/2); y++) {
+		memcpy(temp, srcPtr, image->bytes_per_line);
+		memcpy(srcPtr, dstPtr, image->bytes_per_line);
+		memcpy(dstPtr, temp, image->bytes_per_line);
+		srcPtr += image->bytes_per_line;
+		dstPtr -= image->bytes_per_line;
+	    }
+	    ckfree(temp);
+	    infoPtr->bmiHeader.biHeight = image->height; /* Bottom-up order */
+	} else {
+	    infoPtr->bmiHeader.biHeight = -image->height; /* Top-down order */
+	}
+	infoPtr->bmiHeader.biPlanes = 1;
+	infoPtr->bmiHeader.biBitCount = image->bits_per_pixel;
+	infoPtr->bmiHeader.biCompression = BI_RGB;
+	infoPtr->bmiHeader.biSizeImage = 0;
+	infoPtr->bmiHeader.biXPelsPerMeter = 0;
+	infoPtr->bmiHeader.biYPelsPerMeter = 0;
+	infoPtr->bmiHeader.biClrImportant = 0;
+
+	if (usePalette) {
+	    infoPtr->bmiHeader.biClrUsed = ncolors;
+	    for (i = 0; i < ncolors; i++) {
+		infoPtr->bmiColors[i].rgbBlue = GetBValue(colors[i]);
+		infoPtr->bmiColors[i].rgbGreen = GetGValue(colors[i]);
+		infoPtr->bmiColors[i].rgbRed = GetRValue(colors[i]);
+		infoPtr->bmiColors[i].rgbReserved = 0;
+	    }
+	} else {
+	    infoPtr->bmiHeader.biClrUsed = 0;
+	}
+	bitmap = CreateDIBitmap(dc, &infoPtr->bmiHeader, CBM_INIT,
+		image->data, infoPtr, DIB_RGB_COLORS);
+	ckfree((char *) infoPtr);
+    }
+    bitmap = SelectObject(dcMem, bitmap);
+    BitBlt(dc, dest_x, dest_y, width, height, dcMem, src_x, src_y, SRCCOPY);
+    DeleteObject(SelectObject(dcMem, bitmap));
+    DeleteDC(dcMem);
+    TkWinReleaseDrawableDC(d, dc, &state);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XFillRectangles --
+ *
+ *	Fill multiple rectangular areas in the given drawable.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Draws onto the specified drawable.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+XFillRectangles(display, d, gc, rectangles, nrectangles)
+    Display* display;
+    Drawable d;
+    GC gc;
+    XRectangle* rectangles;
+    int nrectangles;
+{
+    HDC dc;
+    int i;
+    RECT rect;
+    TkWinDCState state;
+    HBRUSH brush;
+
+    if (d == None) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    dc = TkWinGetDrawableDC(display, d, &state);
+    SetROP2(dc, tkpWinRopModes[gc->function]);
+    brush = CreateSolidBrush(gc->foreground);
+
+    if ((gc->fill_style == FillStippled
+	    || gc->fill_style == FillOpaqueStippled)
+	    && gc->stipple != None) {
+	TkWinDrawable *twdPtr = (TkWinDrawable *)gc->stipple;
+	HBRUSH oldBrush, stipple;
+	HBITMAP oldBitmap, bitmap;
+	HDC dcMem;
+	HBRUSH bgBrush = CreateSolidBrush(gc->background);
+
+	if (twdPtr->type != TWD_BITMAP) {
+	    panic("unexpected drawable type in stipple");
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Select stipple pattern into destination dc.
+	 */
+	
+	stipple = CreatePatternBrush(twdPtr->bitmap.handle);
+	SetBrushOrgEx(dc, gc->ts_x_origin, gc->ts_y_origin, NULL);
+	oldBrush = SelectObject(dc, stipple);
+	dcMem = CreateCompatibleDC(dc);
+
+	/*
+	 * For each rectangle, create a drawing surface which is the size of
+	 * the rectangle and fill it with the background color.  Then merge the
+	 * result with the stipple pattern.
+	 */
+
+	for (i = 0; i < nrectangles; i++) {
+	    bitmap = CreateCompatibleBitmap(dc, rectangles[i].width,
+		    rectangles[i].height);
+	    oldBitmap = SelectObject(dcMem, bitmap);
+	    rect.left = 0;
+	    rect.top = 0;
+	    rect.right = rectangles[i].width;
+	    rect.bottom = rectangles[i].height;
+	    FillRect(dcMem, &rect, brush);
+	    BitBlt(dc, rectangles[i].x, rectangles[i].y, rectangles[i].width,
+		    rectangles[i].height, dcMem, 0, 0, COPYFG);
+	    if (gc->fill_style == FillOpaqueStippled) {
+		FillRect(dcMem, &rect, bgBrush);
+		BitBlt(dc, rectangles[i].x, rectangles[i].y,
+			rectangles[i].width, rectangles[i].height, dcMem,
+			0, 0, COPYBG);
+	    }
+	    SelectObject(dcMem, oldBitmap);
+	    DeleteObject(bitmap);
+	}
+	
+	DeleteDC(dcMem);
+	SelectObject(dc, oldBrush);
+	DeleteObject(stipple);
+	DeleteObject(bgBrush);
+    } else {
+	for (i = 0; i < nrectangles; i++) {
+	    TkWinFillRect(dc, rectangles[i].x, rectangles[i].y,
+		    rectangles[i].width, rectangles[i].height, gc->foreground);
+	}
+    }
+    DeleteObject(brush);
+    TkWinReleaseDrawableDC(d, dc, &state);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * RenderObject --
+ *
+ *	This function draws a shape using a list of points, a
+ *	stipple pattern, and the specified drawing function.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+RenderObject(dc, gc, points, npoints, mode, pen, func)
+    HDC dc;
+    GC gc;
+    XPoint* points;
+    int npoints;
+    int mode;
+    HPEN pen;
+    WinDrawFunc func;
+{
+    RECT rect;
+    HPEN oldPen;
+    HBRUSH oldBrush;
+    POINT *winPoints = ConvertPoints(points, npoints, mode, &rect);
+    
+    if ((gc->fill_style == FillStippled
+	    || gc->fill_style == FillOpaqueStippled)
+	    && gc->stipple != None) {
+
+	TkWinDrawable *twdPtr = (TkWinDrawable *)gc->stipple;
+	HDC dcMem;
+	LONG width, height;
+	HBITMAP oldBitmap;
+	int i;
+	HBRUSH oldMemBrush;
+	
+	if (twdPtr->type != TWD_BITMAP) {
+	    panic("unexpected drawable type in stipple");
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Grow the bounding box enough to account for wide lines.
+	 */
+
+	if (gc->line_width > 1) {
+	    rect.left -= gc->line_width;
+	    rect.top -= gc->line_width;
+	    rect.right += gc->line_width;
+	    rect.bottom += gc->line_width;
+	}
+
+	width = rect.right - rect.left;
+	height = rect.bottom - rect.top;
+
+	/*
+	 * Select stipple pattern into destination dc.
+	 */
+	
+	SetBrushOrgEx(dc, gc->ts_x_origin, gc->ts_y_origin, NULL);
+	oldBrush = SelectObject(dc, CreatePatternBrush(twdPtr->bitmap.handle));
+
+	/*
+	 * Create temporary drawing surface containing a copy of the
+	 * destination equal in size to the bounding box of the object.
+	 */
+	
+	dcMem = CreateCompatibleDC(dc);
+	oldBitmap = SelectObject(dcMem, CreateCompatibleBitmap(dc, width,
+		height));
+	oldPen = SelectObject(dcMem, pen);
+	BitBlt(dcMem, 0, 0, width, height, dc, rect.left, rect.top, SRCCOPY);
+
+	/*
+	 * Translate the object for rendering in the temporary drawing
+	 * surface. 
+	 */
+
+	for (i = 0; i < npoints; i++) {
+	    winPoints[i].x -= rect.left;
+	    winPoints[i].y -= rect.top;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Draw the object in the foreground color and copy it to the
+	 * destination wherever the pattern is set.
+	 */
+
+	SetPolyFillMode(dcMem, (gc->fill_rule == EvenOddRule) ? ALTERNATE
+		: WINDING);
+	oldMemBrush = SelectObject(dcMem, CreateSolidBrush(gc->foreground));
+	(*func)(dcMem, winPoints, npoints);
+	BitBlt(dc, rect.left, rect.top, width, height, dcMem, 0, 0, COPYFG);
+
+	/*
+	 * If we are rendering an opaque stipple, then draw the polygon in the
+	 * background color and copy it to the destination wherever the pattern
+	 * is clear.
+	 */
+
+	if (gc->fill_style == FillOpaqueStippled) {
+	    DeleteObject(SelectObject(dcMem,
+		    CreateSolidBrush(gc->background)));
+	    (*func)(dcMem, winPoints, npoints);
+	    BitBlt(dc, rect.left, rect.top, width, height, dcMem, 0, 0,
+		    COPYBG);
+	}
+
+	SelectObject(dcMem, oldPen);
+	DeleteObject(SelectObject(dcMem, oldMemBrush));
+	DeleteObject(SelectObject(dcMem, oldBitmap));
+	DeleteDC(dcMem);
+    } else {
+	oldPen = SelectObject(dc, pen);
+	oldBrush = SelectObject(dc, CreateSolidBrush(gc->foreground));
+	SetROP2(dc, tkpWinRopModes[gc->function]);
+
+	SetPolyFillMode(dc, (gc->fill_rule == EvenOddRule) ? ALTERNATE
+		: WINDING);
+
+	(*func)(dc, winPoints, npoints);
+
+	SelectObject(dc, oldPen);
+    }
+    DeleteObject(SelectObject(dc, oldBrush));
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XDrawLines --
+ *
+ *	Draw connected lines.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Renders a series of connected lines.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+XDrawLines(display, d, gc, points, npoints, mode)
+    Display* display;
+    Drawable d;
+    GC gc;
+    XPoint* points;
+    int npoints;
+    int mode;
+{
+    HPEN pen;
+    TkWinDCState state;
+    HDC dc;
+    
+    if (d == None) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    dc = TkWinGetDrawableDC(display, d, &state);
+
+    if (!tkpIsWin32s && (gc->line_width > 1)) {
+	LOGBRUSH lb;
+	DWORD style;
+
+	lb.lbStyle = BS_SOLID;
+	lb.lbColor = gc->foreground;
+	lb.lbHatch = 0;
+
+	style = PS_GEOMETRIC|PS_COSMETIC;
+	switch (gc->cap_style) {
+	    case CapNotLast:
+	    case CapButt:
+		style |= PS_ENDCAP_FLAT; 
+		break;
+	    case CapRound:
+		style |= PS_ENDCAP_ROUND; 
+		break;
+	    default:
+		style |= PS_ENDCAP_SQUARE; 
+		break;
+	}
+	switch (gc->join_style) {
+	    case JoinMiter: 
+		style |= PS_JOIN_MITER; 
+		break;
+	    case JoinRound:
+		style |= PS_JOIN_ROUND; 
+		break;
+	    default:
+		style |= PS_JOIN_BEVEL; 
+		break;
+	}
+	pen = ExtCreatePen(style, gc->line_width, &lb, 0, NULL);
+    } else {
+	pen = CreatePen(PS_SOLID, gc->line_width, gc->foreground);
+    }
+    RenderObject(dc, gc, points, npoints, mode, pen, Polyline);
+    DeleteObject(pen);
+    
+    TkWinReleaseDrawableDC(d, dc, &state);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XFillPolygon --
+ *
+ *	Draws a filled polygon.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Draws a filled polygon on the specified drawable.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+XFillPolygon(display, d, gc, points, npoints, shape, mode)
+    Display* display;
+    Drawable d;
+    GC gc;
+    XPoint* points;
+    int npoints;
+    int shape;
+    int mode;
+{
+    HPEN pen;
+    TkWinDCState state;
+    HDC dc;
+
+    if (d == None) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    dc = TkWinGetDrawableDC(display, d, &state);
+
+    pen = GetStockObject(NULL_PEN);
+    RenderObject(dc, gc, points, npoints, mode, pen, Polygon);
+
+    TkWinReleaseDrawableDC(d, dc, &state);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XDrawRectangle --
+ *
+ *	Draws a rectangle.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Draws a rectangle on the specified drawable.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+XDrawRectangle(display, d, gc, x, y, width, height)
+    Display* display;
+    Drawable d;
+    GC gc;
+    int x;
+    int y;
+    unsigned int width;
+    unsigned int height;
+{
+    HPEN pen, oldPen;
+    TkWinDCState state;
+    HBRUSH oldBrush;
+    HDC dc;
+
+    if (d == None) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    dc = TkWinGetDrawableDC(display, d, &state);
+
+    pen = CreatePen(PS_SOLID, gc->line_width, gc->foreground);
+    oldPen = SelectObject(dc, pen);
+    oldBrush = SelectObject(dc, GetStockObject(NULL_BRUSH));
+    SetROP2(dc, tkpWinRopModes[gc->function]);
+
+    Rectangle(dc, x, y, x+width+1, y+height+1);
+
+    DeleteObject(SelectObject(dc, oldPen));
+    SelectObject(dc, oldBrush);
+    TkWinReleaseDrawableDC(d, dc, &state);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XDrawArc --
+ *
+ *	Draw an arc.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Draws an arc on the specified drawable.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+XDrawArc(display, d, gc, x, y, width, height, start, extent)
+    Display* display;
+    Drawable d;
+    GC gc;
+    int x;
+    int y;
+    unsigned int width;
+    unsigned int height;
+    int start;
+    int extent;
+{
+    display->request++;
+
+    DrawOrFillArc(display, d, gc, x, y, width, height, start, extent, 0);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XFillArc --
+ *
+ *	Draw a filled arc.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Draws a filled arc on the specified drawable.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+XFillArc(display, d, gc, x, y, width, height, start, extent)
+    Display* display;
+    Drawable d;
+    GC gc;
+    int x;
+    int y;
+    unsigned int width;
+    unsigned int height;
+    int start;
+    int extent;
+{
+    display->request++;
+
+    DrawOrFillArc(display, d, gc, x, y, width, height, start, extent, 1);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * DrawOrFillArc --
+ *
+ *	This procedure handles the rendering of drawn or filled
+ *	arcs and chords.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Renders the requested arc.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+DrawOrFillArc(display, d, gc, x, y, width, height, start, extent, fill)
+    Display *display;
+    Drawable d;
+    GC gc;
+    int x, y;			/* left top */
+    unsigned int width, height;
+    int start;			/* start: three-o'clock (deg*64) */
+    int extent;			/* extent: relative (deg*64) */
+    int fill;			/* ==0 draw, !=0 fill */
+{
+    HDC dc;
+    HBRUSH brush, oldBrush;
+    HPEN pen, oldPen;
+    TkWinDCState state;
+    int clockwise = (extent < 0); /* non-zero if clockwise */
+    int xstart, ystart, xend, yend;
+    double radian_start, radian_end, xr, yr;
+
+    if (d == None) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    dc = TkWinGetDrawableDC(display, d, &state);
+
+    SetROP2(dc, tkpWinRopModes[gc->function]);
+
+    /*
+     * Compute the absolute starting and ending angles in normalized radians.
+     * Swap the start and end if drawing clockwise.
+     */
+
+    start = start % (64*360);
+    if (start < 0) {
+	start += (64*360);
+    }
+    extent = (start+extent) % (64*360);
+    if (extent < 0) {
+	extent += (64*360);
+    }
+    if (clockwise) {
+	int tmp = start;
+	start = extent;
+	extent = tmp;
+    }
+    radian_start = XAngleToRadians(start);
+    radian_end = XAngleToRadians(extent);
+
+    /*
+     * Now compute points on the radial lines that define the starting and
+     * ending angles.  Be sure to take into account that the y-coordinate
+     * system is inverted.
+     */
+
+    xr = x + width / 2.0;
+    yr = y + height / 2.0;
+    xstart = (int)((xr + cos(radian_start)*width/2.0) + 0.5);
+    ystart = (int)((yr + sin(-radian_start)*height/2.0) + 0.5);
+    xend = (int)((xr + cos(radian_end)*width/2.0) + 0.5);
+    yend = (int)((yr + sin(-radian_end)*height/2.0) + 0.5);
+
+    /*
+     * Now draw a filled or open figure.  Note that we have to
+     * increase the size of the bounding box by one to account for the
+     * difference in pixel definitions between X and Windows.
+     */
+
+    pen = CreatePen(PS_SOLID, gc->line_width, gc->foreground);
+    oldPen = SelectObject(dc, pen);
+    if (!fill) {
+	/*
+	 * Note that this call will leave a gap of one pixel at the
+	 * end of the arc for thin arcs.  We can't use ArcTo because
+	 * it's only supported under Windows NT.
+	 */
+
+	Arc(dc, x, y, x+width+1, y+height+1, xstart, ystart, xend, yend);
+    } else {
+	brush = CreateSolidBrush(gc->foreground);
+	oldBrush = SelectObject(dc, brush);
+	if (gc->arc_mode == ArcChord) {
+	    Chord(dc, x, y, x+width+1, y+height+1, xstart, ystart, xend, yend);
+	} else if ( gc->arc_mode == ArcPieSlice ) {
+	    Pie(dc, x, y, x+width+1, y+height+1, xstart, ystart, xend, yend);
+	}
+	DeleteObject(SelectObject(dc, oldBrush));
+    }
+    DeleteObject(SelectObject(dc, oldPen));
+    TkWinReleaseDrawableDC(d, dc, &state);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkScrollWindow --
+ *
+ *	Scroll a rectangle of the specified window and accumulate
+ *	a damage region.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns 0 if the scroll genereated no additional damage.
+ *	Otherwise, sets the region that needs to be repainted after
+ *	scrolling and returns 1.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Scrolls the bits in the window.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkScrollWindow(tkwin, gc, x, y, width, height, dx, dy, damageRgn)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* The window to be scrolled. */
+    GC gc;			/* GC for window to be scrolled. */
+    int x, y, width, height;	/* Position rectangle to be scrolled. */
+    int dx, dy;			/* Distance rectangle should be moved. */
+    TkRegion damageRgn;		/* Region to accumulate damage in. */
+{
+    HWND hwnd = TkWinGetHWND(Tk_WindowId(tkwin));
+    RECT scrollRect;
+
+    scrollRect.left = x;
+    scrollRect.top = y;
+    scrollRect.right = x + width;
+    scrollRect.bottom = y + height;
+    return (ScrollWindowEx(hwnd, dx, dy, &scrollRect, NULL, (HRGN) damageRgn,
+	    NULL, 0) == NULLREGION) ? 0 : 1;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWinFillRect --
+ *
+ *	This routine fills a rectangle with the foreground color
+ *	from the specified GC ignoring all other GC values.  This
+ *	is the fastest way to fill a drawable with a solid color.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Modifies the contents of the DC drawing surface.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkWinFillRect(dc, x, y, width, height, pixel)
+    HDC dc;
+    int x, y, width, height;
+    int pixel;
+{
+    RECT rect;
+    COLORREF oldColor;
+
+    rect.left = x;
+    rect.top = y;
+    rect.right = x + width;
+    rect.bottom = y + height;
+    oldColor = SetBkColor(dc, (COLORREF)pixel);
+    SetBkMode(dc, OPAQUE);
+    ExtTextOut(dc, 0, 0, ETO_OPAQUE, &rect, NULL, 0, NULL);
+    SetBkColor(dc, oldColor);
+}
diff --git a/win/tkWinEmbed.c b/win/tkWinEmbed.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0dc4036
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/tkWinEmbed.c
@@ -0,0 +1,645 @@
+/* 
+ * tkWinEmbed.c --
+ *
+ *	This file contains platform specific procedures for Windows platforms
+ *	to provide basic operations needed for application embedding (where
+ *	one application can use as its main window an internal window from
+ *	another application).
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkWinEmbed.c 1.20 97/11/05 17:47:09;
+ */
+
+#include "tkWinInt.h"
+
+
+/*
+ * One of the following structures exists for each container in this
+ * application.  It keeps track of the container window and its
+ * associated embedded window.
+ */
+
+typedef struct Container {
+    HWND parentHWnd;			/* Windows HWND to the parent window */
+    TkWindow *parentPtr;		/* Tk's information about the container
+					 * or NULL if the container isn't
+					 * in this process. */
+    HWND embeddedHWnd;			/* Windows HWND to the embedded window
+					 */
+    TkWindow *embeddedPtr;		/* Tk's information about the embedded
+					 * window, or NULL if the
+					 * embedded application isn't in
+					 * this process. */
+    struct Container *nextPtr;		/* Next in list of all containers in
+					 * this process. */
+} Container;
+
+static Container *firstContainerPtr = NULL;
+					/* First in list of all containers
+					 * managed by this process.  */
+
+static void		CleanupContainerList _ANSI_ARGS_((
+    			    ClientData clientData));
+static void		ContainerEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr));
+static void		EmbeddedEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
+			    ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr));
+static void		EmbedGeometryRequest _ANSI_ARGS_((
+    			    Container*containerPtr, int width, int height));
+static void		EmbedWindowDeleted _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * CleanupContainerList --
+ *
+ *	Finalizes the list of containers.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Releases memory occupied by containers of embedded windows.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+	/* ARGSUSED */
+static void
+CleanupContainerList(clientData)
+    ClientData clientData;
+{
+    Container *nextPtr;
+    
+    for (;
+        firstContainerPtr != (Container *) NULL;
+        firstContainerPtr = nextPtr) {
+        nextPtr = firstContainerPtr->nextPtr;
+        ckfree((char *) firstContainerPtr);
+    }
+    firstContainerPtr = (Container *) NULL;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpTestembedCmd --
+ *
+ *	Test command for the embedding facility.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Always returns TCL_OK.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Currently it does not do anything.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+	/* ARGSUSED */
+int
+TkpTestembedCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
+    ClientData clientData;
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;
+    int argc;
+    char **argv;
+{
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpUseWindow --
+ *
+ *	This procedure causes a Tk window to use a given Windows handle
+ *	for a window as its underlying window, rather than a new Windows
+ *	window being created automatically. It is invoked by an embedded
+ *	application to specify the window in which the application is
+ *	embedded.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The return value is normally TCL_OK. If an error occurred (such as
+ *	if the argument does not identify a legal Windows window handle),
+ *	the return value is TCL_ERROR and an error message is left in the
+ *	interp->result if interp is not NULL.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int 
+TkpUseWindow(interp, tkwin, string)
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* If not NULL, used for error reporting
+				 * if string is bogus. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Tk window that does not yet have an
+				 * associated X window. */
+    char *string;		/* String identifying an X window to use
+				 * for tkwin;  must be an integer value. */
+{
+    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
+    int id;
+    HWND hwnd;
+    Container *containerPtr;
+
+    if (winPtr->window != None) {
+        panic("TkpUseWindow: Already assigned a window");
+    }
+
+    if (Tcl_GetInt(interp, string, &id) != TCL_OK) {
+        return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    hwnd = (HWND) id;
+
+    /*
+     * Check if the window is a valid handle. If it is invalid, return
+     * TCL_ERROR and potentially leave an error message in interp->result.
+     */
+
+    if (!IsWindow(hwnd)) {
+        if (interp != (Tcl_Interp *) NULL) {
+            Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "window \"", string,
+                    "\" doesn't exist", (char *) NULL);
+        }
+        return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Store the parent window in the platform private data slot so
+     * TkWmMapWindow can use it when creating the wrapper window.
+     */
+
+    winPtr->privatePtr = (struct TkWindowPrivate*) hwnd;
+
+    /*
+     * Create an event handler to clean up the Container structure when
+     * tkwin is eventually deleted.
+     */
+
+    Tk_CreateEventHandler(tkwin, StructureNotifyMask, EmbeddedEventProc,
+	    (ClientData) winPtr);
+
+    /*
+     * If this is the first container, register an exit handler so that
+     * things will get cleaned up at finalization.
+     */
+
+    if (firstContainerPtr == (Container *) NULL) {
+        Tcl_CreateExitHandler(CleanupContainerList, (ClientData) NULL);
+    }
+    
+    /*
+     * Save information about the container and the embedded window
+     * in a Container structure.  If there is already an existing
+     * Container structure, it means that both container and embedded
+     * app. are in the same process.
+     */
+
+    for (containerPtr = firstContainerPtr; containerPtr != NULL;
+	    containerPtr = containerPtr->nextPtr) {
+	if (containerPtr->parentHWnd == hwnd) {
+	    winPtr->flags |= TK_BOTH_HALVES;
+	    containerPtr->parentPtr->flags |= TK_BOTH_HALVES;
+	    break;
+	}
+    }
+    if (containerPtr == NULL) {
+	containerPtr = (Container *) ckalloc(sizeof(Container));
+	containerPtr->parentPtr = NULL;
+	containerPtr->parentHWnd = hwnd;
+	containerPtr->nextPtr = firstContainerPtr;
+	firstContainerPtr = containerPtr;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * embeddedHWnd is not created yet. It will be created by TkWmMapWindow(),
+     * which will send a TK_ATTACHWINDOW to the container window.
+     * TkWinEmbeddedEventProc will process this message and set the embeddedHWnd
+     * variable
+     */
+
+    containerPtr->embeddedPtr = winPtr;
+    containerPtr->embeddedHWnd = NULL;
+
+    winPtr->flags |= TK_EMBEDDED;
+    winPtr->flags &= (~(TK_MAPPED));
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpMakeContainer --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is called to indicate that a particular window will
+ *	be a container for an embedded application. This changes certain
+ *	aspects of the window's behavior, such as whether it will receive
+ *	events anymore.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpMakeContainer(tkwin)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;
+{
+    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
+    Container *containerPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * If this is the first container, register an exit handler so that
+     * things will get cleaned up at finalization.
+     */
+
+    if (firstContainerPtr == (Container *) NULL) {
+        Tcl_CreateExitHandler(CleanupContainerList, (ClientData) NULL);
+    }
+    
+    /*
+     * Register the window as a container so that, for example, we can
+     * find out later if the embedded app. is in the same process.
+     */
+
+    Tk_MakeWindowExist(tkwin);
+    containerPtr = (Container *) ckalloc(sizeof(Container));
+    containerPtr->parentPtr = winPtr;
+    containerPtr->parentHWnd = Tk_GetHWND(Tk_WindowId(tkwin));
+    containerPtr->embeddedHWnd = NULL;
+    containerPtr->embeddedPtr = NULL;
+    containerPtr->nextPtr = firstContainerPtr;
+    firstContainerPtr = containerPtr;
+    winPtr->flags |= TK_CONTAINER;
+
+    /*
+     * Unlike in tkUnixEmbed.c, we don't make any requests for events
+     * in the embedded window here.  Now we just allow the embedding
+     * of another TK application into TK windows. When the embedded
+     * window makes a request, that will be done by sending to the
+     * container window a WM_USER message, which will be intercepted
+     * by TkWinContainerProc.
+     *
+     * We need to get structure events of the container itself, though.
+     */
+
+    Tk_CreateEventHandler(tkwin, StructureNotifyMask,
+	ContainerEventProc, (ClientData) containerPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * EmbeddedEventProc --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk event dispatcher when various
+ *	useful events are received for a window that is embedded in
+ *	another application.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Our internal state gets cleaned up when an embedded window is
+ *	destroyed.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+EmbeddedEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
+    ClientData clientData;		/* Token for container window. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr;			/* ResizeRequest event. */
+{
+    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) clientData;
+
+    if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) {
+	EmbedWindowDeleted(winPtr);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWinEmbeddedEventProc --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk event dispatcher when
+ *	various useful events are received for the *children* of a
+ *	container window. It forwards relevant information, such as
+ *	geometry requests, from the events into the container's
+ *	application.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Depends on the event.  For example, when ConfigureRequest events
+ *	occur, geometry information gets set for the container window.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+LRESULT
+TkWinEmbeddedEventProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
+    HWND hwnd;
+    UINT message;
+    WPARAM wParam;
+    LPARAM lParam;
+{
+    Container *containerPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * Find the Container structure associated with the parent window.
+     */
+
+    for (containerPtr = firstContainerPtr;
+	    containerPtr->parentHWnd != hwnd;
+	    containerPtr = containerPtr->nextPtr) {
+	if (containerPtr == NULL) {
+	    panic("TkWinContainerProc couldn't find Container record");
+	}
+    }
+
+    switch (message) {
+      case TK_ATTACHWINDOW:
+	/* An embedded window (either from this application or from
+	 * another application) is trying to attach to this container.
+	 * We attach it only if this container is not yet containing any
+	 * window.
+	 */
+	if (containerPtr->embeddedHWnd == NULL) {
+	    containerPtr->embeddedHWnd = (HWND)wParam;
+	} else {
+	    return 0;
+	}
+
+	break;
+      case TK_GEOMETRYREQ:
+	EmbedGeometryRequest(containerPtr, wParam, lParam);
+	break;
+    }
+    return 1;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * EmbedGeometryRequest --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked when an embedded application requests
+ *	a particular size.  It processes the request (which may or may
+ *	not actually resize the window) and reflects the results back
+ *	to the embedded application.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	If we deny the child's size change request, a Configure event
+ *	is synthesized to let the child know that the size is the same
+ *	as it used to be.  Events get processed while we're waiting for
+ *	the geometry managers to do their thing.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+EmbedGeometryRequest(containerPtr, width, height)
+    Container *containerPtr;	/* Information about the container window. */
+    int width, height;		/* Size that the child has requested. */
+{
+    TkWindow * winPtr = containerPtr->parentPtr;
+    
+    /*
+     * Forward the requested size into our geometry management hierarchy
+     * via the container window.  We need to send a Configure event back
+     * to the embedded application even if we decide not to resize
+     * the window;  to make this happen, process all idle event handlers
+     * synchronously here (so that the geometry managers have had a
+     * chance to do whatever they want to do), and if the window's size
+     * didn't change then generate a configure event.
+     */
+    Tk_GeometryRequest((Tk_Window)winPtr, width, height);
+
+    if (containerPtr->embeddedHWnd != NULL) {
+	while (Tcl_DoOneEvent(TCL_IDLE_EVENTS)) {
+	    /* Empty loop body. */
+	}
+
+	SetWindowPos(containerPtr->embeddedHWnd, NULL,
+	    0, 0, winPtr->changes.width, winPtr->changes.height, SWP_NOZORDER);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * ContainerEventProc --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk event dispatcher when
+ *	various useful events are received for the container window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Depends on the event.  For example, when ConfigureRequest events
+ *	occur, geometry information gets set for the container window.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+ContainerEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
+    ClientData clientData;		/* Token for container window. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr;			/* ResizeRequest event. */
+{
+    Container *containerPtr = (Container *)clientData;
+    Tk_Window tkwin = (Tk_Window)containerPtr->parentPtr;
+
+    if (eventPtr->type == ConfigureNotify) {
+	if (containerPtr->embeddedPtr == NULL) {
+	    return;
+	}
+	/* Resize the embedded window, if there is any */
+	if (containerPtr->embeddedHWnd) {
+	    SetWindowPos(containerPtr->embeddedHWnd, NULL,
+	        0, 0, Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin), SWP_NOZORDER);
+	}
+    } else if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) {
+	/* The container is gone, remove it from the list */
+	EmbedWindowDeleted(containerPtr->parentPtr);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpGetOtherWindow --
+ *
+ *	If both the container and embedded window are in the same
+ *	process, this procedure will return either one, given the other.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	If winPtr is a container, the return value is the token for the
+ *	embedded window, and vice versa.  If the "other" window isn't in
+ *	this process, NULL is returned.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+TkWindow *
+TkpGetOtherWindow(winPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Tk's structure for a container or
+				 * embedded window. */
+{
+    Container *containerPtr;
+
+    for (containerPtr = firstContainerPtr; containerPtr != NULL;
+	    containerPtr = containerPtr->nextPtr) {
+	if (containerPtr->embeddedPtr == winPtr) {
+	    return containerPtr->parentPtr;
+	} else if (containerPtr->parentPtr == winPtr) {
+	    return containerPtr->embeddedPtr;
+	}
+    }
+    panic("TkpGetOtherWindow couldn't find window");
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpClaimFocus --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked when someone asks or the input focus
+ *	to be put on a window in an embedded application, but the
+ *	application doesn't currently have the focus.  It requests the
+ *	input focus from the container application.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The input focus may change.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpClaimFocus(topLevelPtr, force)
+    TkWindow *topLevelPtr;		/* Top-level window containing desired
+					 * focus window; should be embedded. */
+    int force;				/* One means that the container should
+					 * claim the focus if it doesn't
+					 * currently have it. */
+{
+    HWND hwnd = GetParent(Tk_GetHWND(topLevelPtr->window));
+    SendMessage(hwnd, TK_CLAIMFOCUS, (WPARAM) force, 0);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpRedirectKeyEvent --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked when a key press or release event
+ *	arrives for an application that does not believe it owns the
+ *	input focus.  This can happen because of embedding; for example,
+ *	X can send an event to an embedded application when the real
+ *	focus window is in the container application and is an ancestor
+ *	of the container.  This procedure's job is to forward the event
+ *	back to the application where it really belongs.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The event may get sent to a different application.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpRedirectKeyEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window to which the event was originally
+				 * reported. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* X event to redirect (should be KeyPress
+				 * or KeyRelease). */
+{
+    /* not implemented */
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * EmbedWindowDeleted --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked when a window involved in embedding
+ *	(as either the container or the embedded application) is
+ *	destroyed.  It cleans up the Container structure for the window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	A Container structure may be freed.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+EmbedWindowDeleted(winPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Tk's information about window that
+				 * was deleted. */
+{
+    Container *containerPtr, *prevPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * Find the Container structure for this window work.  Delete the
+     * information about the embedded application and free the container's
+     * record.
+     */
+
+    prevPtr = NULL;
+    containerPtr = firstContainerPtr;
+    while (1) {
+	if (containerPtr->embeddedPtr == winPtr) {
+	    containerPtr->embeddedHWnd = NULL;
+	    containerPtr->embeddedPtr = NULL;
+	    break;
+	}
+	if (containerPtr->parentPtr == winPtr) {
+	    containerPtr->parentPtr = NULL;
+	    break;
+	}
+	prevPtr = containerPtr;
+	containerPtr = containerPtr->nextPtr;
+	if (containerPtr == NULL) {
+	    panic("EmbedWindowDeleted couldn't find window");
+	}
+    }
+    if ((containerPtr->embeddedPtr == NULL)
+	    && (containerPtr->parentPtr == NULL)) {
+	if (prevPtr == NULL) {
+	    firstContainerPtr = containerPtr->nextPtr;
+	} else {
+	    prevPtr->nextPtr = containerPtr->nextPtr;
+	}
+	ckfree((char *) containerPtr);
+    }
+}
diff --git a/win/tkWinFont.c b/win/tkWinFont.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c1d5161
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/tkWinFont.c
@@ -0,0 +1,643 @@
+/* 
+ * tkWinFont.c --
+ *
+ *	Contains the Windows implementation of the platform-independant
+ *	font package interface.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1995-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ * Copyright (c) 1994 Software Research Associates, Inc. 
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkWinFont.c 1.20 97/05/14 15:45:30
+ */
+
+#include "tkWinInt.h"
+#include "tkFont.h"
+
+/*
+ * The following structure represents Windows' implementation of a font.
+ */
+
+typedef struct WinFont {
+    TkFont font;		/* Stuff used by generic font package.  Must
+				 * be first in structure. */
+    HFONT hFont;		/* Windows information about font. */
+    HWND hwnd;			/* Toplevel window of application that owns
+				 * this font, used for getting HDC. */
+    int widths[256];		/* Widths of first 256 chars in this font. */
+} WinFont;
+
+/*
+ * The following structure is used as to map between the Tcl strings
+ * that represent the system fonts and the numbers used by Windows.
+ */
+
+static TkStateMap systemMap[] = {
+    {ANSI_FIXED_FONT,	    "ansifixed"},
+    {ANSI_VAR_FONT,	    "ansi"},
+    {DEVICE_DEFAULT_FONT,   "device"},
+    {OEM_FIXED_FONT,	    "oemfixed"},
+    {SYSTEM_FIXED_FONT,	    "systemfixed"},
+    {SYSTEM_FONT,	    "system"},
+    {-1,		    NULL}
+};
+
+#define ABS(x)          (((x) < 0) ? -(x) : (x))
+
+static TkFont *		AllocFont _ANSI_ARGS_((TkFont *tkFontPtr, 
+                            Tk_Window tkwin, HFONT hFont));
+static char *		GetProperty _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST TkFontAttributes *faPtr,
+			    CONST char *option));
+static int CALLBACK	WinFontFamilyEnumProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ENUMLOGFONT *elfPtr,
+			    NEWTEXTMETRIC *ntmPtr, int fontType,
+			    LPARAM lParam));
+
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpGetNativeFont --
+ *
+ *	Map a platform-specific native font name to a TkFont.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ * 	The return value is a pointer to a TkFont that represents the
+ *	native font.  If a native font by the given name could not be
+ *	found, the return value is NULL.  
+ *
+ *	Every call to this procedure returns a new TkFont structure,
+ *	even if the name has already been seen before.  The caller should
+ *	call TkpDeleteFont() when the font is no longer needed.
+ *
+ *	The caller is responsible for initializing the memory associated
+ *	with the generic TkFont when this function returns and releasing
+ *	the contents of the generic TkFont before calling TkpDeleteFont().
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+TkFont *
+TkpGetNativeFont(tkwin, name)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* For display where font will be used. */
+    CONST char *name;		/* Platform-specific font name. */
+{
+    int object;
+    HFONT hFont;
+    
+    object = TkFindStateNum(NULL, NULL, systemMap, name);
+    if (object < 0) {
+	return NULL;
+    }
+    hFont = GetStockObject(object);
+    if (hFont == NULL) {
+	panic("TkpGetNativeFont: can't allocate stock font");
+    }
+
+    return AllocFont(NULL, tkwin, hFont);
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpGetFontFromAttributes -- 
+ *
+ *	Given a desired set of attributes for a font, find a font with
+ *	the closest matching attributes.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ * 	The return value is a pointer to a TkFont that represents the
+ *	font with the desired attributes.  If a font with the desired
+ *	attributes could not be constructed, some other font will be
+ *	substituted automatically.  NULL is never returned.
+ *
+ *	Every call to this procedure returns a new TkFont structure,
+ *	even if the specified attributes have already been seen before.
+ *	The caller should call TkpDeleteFont() to free the platform-
+ *	specific data when the font is no longer needed.  
+ *
+ *	The caller is responsible for initializing the memory associated
+ *	with the generic TkFont when this function returns and releasing
+ *	the contents of the generic TkFont before calling TkpDeleteFont().
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+TkFont *
+TkpGetFontFromAttributes(tkFontPtr, tkwin, faPtr)
+    TkFont *tkFontPtr;		/* If non-NULL, store the information in
+				 * this existing TkFont structure, rather than
+				 * allocating a new structure to hold the
+				 * font; the existing contents of the font
+				 * will be released.  If NULL, a new TkFont
+				 * structure is allocated. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* For display where font will be used. */
+    CONST TkFontAttributes *faPtr;  /* Set of attributes to match. */
+{
+    LOGFONT lf;
+    HFONT hFont;
+    Window window;
+    HWND hwnd;
+    HDC hdc;
+
+    window = Tk_WindowId(((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr->winPtr);
+    hwnd = (window == None) ? NULL : TkWinGetHWND(window);
+
+    hdc = GetDC(hwnd);
+    lf.lfHeight		= -faPtr->pointsize;
+    if (lf.lfHeight < 0) {
+	lf.lfHeight = MulDiv(lf.lfHeight, 
+	        254 * WidthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin)),
+		720 * WidthMMOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin)));
+    }
+    lf.lfWidth		= 0;
+    lf.lfEscapement	= 0;
+    lf.lfOrientation	= 0;
+    lf.lfWeight		= (faPtr->weight == TK_FW_NORMAL) ? FW_NORMAL : FW_BOLD;
+    lf.lfItalic		= faPtr->slant;
+    lf.lfUnderline	= faPtr->underline;
+    lf.lfStrikeOut	= faPtr->overstrike;
+    lf.lfCharSet	= DEFAULT_CHARSET;
+    lf.lfOutPrecision	= OUT_DEFAULT_PRECIS;
+    lf.lfClipPrecision	= CLIP_DEFAULT_PRECIS;
+    lf.lfQuality	= DEFAULT_QUALITY;
+    lf.lfPitchAndFamily = DEFAULT_PITCH | FF_DONTCARE;
+    if (faPtr->family == NULL) {
+	lf.lfFaceName[0] = '\0';
+    } else {
+	lstrcpyn(lf.lfFaceName, faPtr->family, sizeof(lf.lfFaceName));
+    }
+    ReleaseDC(hwnd, hdc);
+
+    /*
+     * Replace the standard X and Mac family names with the names that
+     * Windows likes.
+     */
+
+    if ((stricmp(lf.lfFaceName, "Times") == 0)
+	    || (stricmp(lf.lfFaceName, "New York") == 0)) {
+	strcpy(lf.lfFaceName, "Times New Roman");
+    } else if ((stricmp(lf.lfFaceName, "Courier") == 0)
+	    || (stricmp(lf.lfFaceName, "Monaco") == 0)) {
+	strcpy(lf.lfFaceName, "Courier New");
+    } else if ((stricmp(lf.lfFaceName, "Helvetica") == 0)
+	    || (stricmp(lf.lfFaceName, "Geneva") == 0)) {
+	strcpy(lf.lfFaceName, "Arial");
+    }
+
+    hFont = CreateFontIndirect(&lf);
+    if (hFont == NULL) {
+        hFont = GetStockObject(SYSTEM_FONT);
+	if (hFont == NULL) {
+	    panic("TkpGetFontFromAttributes: cannot get system font");
+	}
+    }
+    return AllocFont(tkFontPtr, tkwin, hFont);
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpDeleteFont --
+ *
+ *	Called to release a font allocated by TkpGetNativeFont() or
+ *	TkpGetFontFromAttributes().  The caller should have already
+ *	released the fields of the TkFont that are used exclusively by
+ *	the generic TkFont code.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	TkFont is deallocated.
+ *
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpDeleteFont(tkFontPtr)
+    TkFont *tkFontPtr;		/* Token of font to be deleted. */
+{
+    WinFont *fontPtr;
+
+    fontPtr = (WinFont *) tkFontPtr;
+    DeleteObject(fontPtr->hFont);
+    ckfree((char *) fontPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpGetFontFamilies, WinFontEnumFamilyProc --
+ *
+ *	Return information about the font families that are available
+ *	on the display of the given window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	interp->result is modified to hold a list of all the available
+ *	font families.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+ 
+void
+TkpGetFontFamilies(interp, tkwin)
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interp to hold result. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* For display to query. */
+{    
+    Window window;
+    HWND hwnd;
+    HDC hdc;
+
+    window = Tk_WindowId(tkwin);
+    hwnd = (window == (Window) NULL) ? NULL : TkWinGetHWND(window);
+
+    hdc = GetDC(hwnd);
+    EnumFontFamilies(hdc, NULL, (FONTENUMPROC) WinFontFamilyEnumProc,
+	    (LPARAM) interp);
+    ReleaseDC(hwnd, hdc);
+}
+
+/* ARGSUSED */
+
+static int CALLBACK
+WinFontFamilyEnumProc(elfPtr, ntmPtr, fontType, lParam)
+    ENUMLOGFONT *elfPtr;	/* Logical-font data. */
+    NEWTEXTMETRIC *ntmPtr;	/* Physical-font data (not used). */
+    int fontType;		/* Type of font (not used). */
+    LPARAM lParam;		/* Interp to hold result. */
+{
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;
+
+    interp = (Tcl_Interp *) lParam;
+    Tcl_AppendElement(interp, elfPtr->elfLogFont.lfFaceName);
+    return 1;
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ *  Tk_MeasureChars --
+ *
+ *	Determine the number of characters from the string that will fit
+ *	in the given horizontal span.  The measurement is done under the
+ *	assumption that Tk_DrawChars() will be used to actually display
+ *	the characters.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The return value is the number of characters from source that
+ *	fit into the span that extends from 0 to maxLength.  *lengthPtr is
+ *	filled with the x-coordinate of the right edge of the last
+ *	character that did fit.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+int
+Tk_MeasureChars(tkfont, source, numChars, maxLength, flags, lengthPtr)
+    Tk_Font tkfont;		/* Font in which characters will be drawn. */
+    CONST char *source;		/* Characters to be displayed.  Need not be
+				 * '\0' terminated. */
+    int numChars;		/* Maximum number of characters to consider
+				 * from source string. */
+    int maxLength;		/* If > 0, maxLength specifies the longest
+				 * permissible line length; don't consider any
+				 * character that would cross this
+				 * x-position.  If <= 0, then line length is
+				 * unbounded and the flags argument is
+				 * ignored. */
+    int flags;			/* Various flag bits OR-ed together:
+				 * TK_PARTIAL_OK means include the last char
+				 * which only partially fit on this line.
+				 * TK_WHOLE_WORDS means stop on a word
+				 * boundary, if possible.
+				 * TK_AT_LEAST_ONE means return at least one
+				 * character even if no characters fit. */
+    int *lengthPtr;		/* Filled with x-location just after the
+				 * terminating character. */
+{
+    WinFont *fontPtr;
+    HDC hdc;
+    HFONT hFont;
+    int curX, curIdx;
+
+    /*
+     * On the authority of the Gates Empire, Windows does not use kerning
+     * or fractional character widths when displaying text on the screen.
+     * So that means we can safely measure individual characters or spans
+     * of characters and add up the widths w/o any "off-by-one pixel" 
+     * errors.  
+     */
+
+    fontPtr = (WinFont *) tkfont;
+
+    hdc = GetDC(fontPtr->hwnd);
+    hFont = SelectObject(hdc, fontPtr->hFont);
+
+    if (numChars == 0) {
+	curX = 0;
+	curIdx = 0;
+    } else if (maxLength <= 0) {
+	SIZE size;
+
+	GetTextExtentPoint(hdc, source, numChars, &size);
+	curX = size.cx;
+	curIdx = numChars;
+    } else {
+	int newX, termX, sawNonSpace;
+	CONST char *term, *end, *p;
+	int ch;
+
+	ch = UCHAR(*source);
+	newX = curX = termX = 0;
+	
+	term = source;
+	end = source + numChars;
+
+	sawNonSpace = !isspace(ch);
+	for (p = source; ; ) {
+	    newX += fontPtr->widths[ch];
+	    if (newX > maxLength) {
+		break;
+	    }
+	    curX = newX;
+	    p++;
+	    if (p >= end) {
+		term = end;
+		termX = curX;
+		break;
+	    }
+
+	    ch = UCHAR(*p);
+	    if (isspace(ch)) {
+		if (sawNonSpace) {
+		    term = p;
+		    termX = curX;
+		    sawNonSpace = 0;
+		}
+	    } else {
+		sawNonSpace = 1;
+	    }
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * P points to the first character that doesn't fit in the desired
+	 * span.  Use the flags to figure out what to return.
+	 */
+
+	if ((flags & TK_PARTIAL_OK) && (p < end) && (curX < maxLength)) {
+	    /*
+	     * Include the first character that didn't quite fit in the desired
+	     * span.  The width returned will include the width of that extra
+	     * character.
+	     */
+
+	    curX = newX;
+	    p++;
+	}
+	if ((flags & TK_AT_LEAST_ONE) && (term == source) && (p < end)) {
+	    term = p;
+	    termX = curX;
+	    if (term == source) {
+		term++;
+		termX = newX;
+	    }
+	} else if ((p >= end) || !(flags & TK_WHOLE_WORDS)) {
+	    term = p;
+	    termX = curX;
+	}
+
+	curX = termX;
+	curIdx = term - source;	
+    }
+
+    SelectObject(hdc, hFont);
+    ReleaseDC(fontPtr->hwnd, hdc);
+
+    *lengthPtr = curX;
+    return curIdx;
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_DrawChars --
+ *
+ *	Draw a string of characters on the screen.  
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Information gets drawn on the screen.
+ *
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+Tk_DrawChars(display, drawable, gc, tkfont, source, numChars, x, y)
+    Display *display;		/* Display on which to draw. */
+    Drawable drawable;		/* Window or pixmap in which to draw. */
+    GC gc;			/* Graphics context for drawing characters. */
+    Tk_Font tkfont;		/* Font in which characters will be drawn;
+				 * must be the same as font used in GC. */
+    CONST char *source;		/* Characters to be displayed.  Need not be
+				 * '\0' terminated.  All Tk meta-characters
+				 * (tabs, control characters, and newlines)
+				 * should be stripped out of the string that
+				 * is passed to this function.  If they are
+				 * not stripped out, they will be displayed as
+				 * regular printing characters. */
+    int numChars;		/* Number of characters in string. */
+    int x, y;			/* Coordinates at which to place origin of
+				 * string when drawing. */
+{
+    HDC dc;
+    HFONT hFont;
+    TkWinDCState state;
+    WinFont *fontPtr;
+
+    fontPtr = (WinFont *) gc->font;
+    display->request++;
+
+    if (drawable == None) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    dc = TkWinGetDrawableDC(display, drawable, &state);
+
+    SetROP2(dc, tkpWinRopModes[gc->function]);
+
+    if ((gc->fill_style == FillStippled
+	    || gc->fill_style == FillOpaqueStippled)
+	    && gc->stipple != None) {
+	TkWinDrawable *twdPtr = (TkWinDrawable *)gc->stipple;
+	HBRUSH oldBrush, stipple;
+	HBITMAP oldBitmap, bitmap;
+	HDC dcMem;
+	TEXTMETRIC tm;
+	SIZE size;
+
+	if (twdPtr->type != TWD_BITMAP) {
+	    panic("unexpected drawable type in stipple");
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Select stipple pattern into destination dc.
+	 */
+	
+	dcMem = CreateCompatibleDC(dc);
+
+	stipple = CreatePatternBrush(twdPtr->bitmap.handle);
+	SetBrushOrgEx(dc, gc->ts_x_origin, gc->ts_y_origin, NULL);
+	oldBrush = SelectObject(dc, stipple);
+
+	SetTextAlign(dcMem, TA_LEFT | TA_TOP);
+	SetTextColor(dcMem, gc->foreground);
+	SetBkMode(dcMem, TRANSPARENT);
+	SetBkColor(dcMem, RGB(0, 0, 0));
+
+        hFont = SelectObject(dcMem, fontPtr->hFont);
+
+	/*
+	 * Compute the bounding box and create a compatible bitmap.
+	 */
+
+	GetTextExtentPoint(dcMem, source, numChars, &size);
+	GetTextMetrics(dcMem, &tm);
+	size.cx -= tm.tmOverhang;
+	bitmap = CreateCompatibleBitmap(dc, size.cx, size.cy);
+	oldBitmap = SelectObject(dcMem, bitmap);
+
+	/*
+	 * The following code is tricky because fonts are rendered in multiple
+	 * colors.  First we draw onto a black background and copy the white
+	 * bits.  Then we draw onto a white background and copy the black bits.
+	 * Both the foreground and background bits of the font are ANDed with
+	 * the stipple pattern as they are copied.
+	 */
+
+	PatBlt(dcMem, 0, 0, size.cx, size.cy, BLACKNESS);
+	TextOut(dcMem, 0, 0, source, numChars);
+	BitBlt(dc, x, y - tm.tmAscent, size.cx, size.cy, dcMem,
+		0, 0, 0xEA02E9);
+	PatBlt(dcMem, 0, 0, size.cx, size.cy, WHITENESS);
+	TextOut(dcMem, 0, 0, source, numChars);
+	BitBlt(dc, x, y - tm.tmAscent, size.cx, size.cy, dcMem,
+		0, 0, 0x8A0E06);
+
+	/*
+	 * Destroy the temporary bitmap and restore the device context.
+	 */
+
+        SelectObject(dcMem, hFont);
+	SelectObject(dcMem, oldBitmap);
+	DeleteObject(bitmap);
+	DeleteDC(dcMem);
+	SelectObject(dc, oldBrush);
+	DeleteObject(stipple);
+    } else {
+	SetTextAlign(dc, TA_LEFT | TA_BASELINE);
+	SetTextColor(dc, gc->foreground);
+	SetBkMode(dc, TRANSPARENT);
+	hFont = SelectObject(dc, fontPtr->hFont);
+	TextOut(dc, x, y, source, numChars);
+        SelectObject(dc, hFont);
+    }
+    TkWinReleaseDrawableDC(drawable, dc, &state);
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * AllocFont --
+ *
+ *	Helper for TkpGetNativeFont() and TkpGetFontFromAttributes().
+ *	Allocates and intializes the memory for a new TkFont that
+ *	wraps the platform-specific data.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns pointer to newly constructed TkFont.  
+ *
+ *	The caller is responsible for initializing the fields of the
+ *	TkFont that are used exclusively by the generic TkFont code, and
+ *	for releasing those fields before calling TkpDeleteFont().
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Memory allocated.
+ *
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */ 
+
+static TkFont *
+AllocFont(tkFontPtr, tkwin, hFont)
+    TkFont *tkFontPtr;		/* If non-NULL, store the information in
+				 * this existing TkFont structure, rather than
+				 * allocating a new structure to hold the
+				 * font; the existing contents of the font
+				 * will be released.  If NULL, a new TkFont
+				 * structure is allocated. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* For display where font will be used. */
+    HFONT hFont;		/* Windows information about font. */
+{
+    HWND hwnd;
+    WinFont *fontPtr;
+    HDC hdc;
+    TEXTMETRIC tm;
+    Window window;
+    char buf[LF_FACESIZE];
+    TkFontAttributes *faPtr;
+
+    if (tkFontPtr != NULL) {
+        fontPtr = (WinFont *) tkFontPtr;
+        DeleteObject(fontPtr->hFont);
+    } else {
+        fontPtr = (WinFont *) ckalloc(sizeof(WinFont));
+    }
+    
+    window = Tk_WindowId(((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr->winPtr);
+    hwnd = (window == None) ? NULL : TkWinGetHWND(window);
+
+    hdc = GetDC(hwnd);
+    hFont = SelectObject(hdc, hFont);
+    GetTextFace(hdc, sizeof(buf), buf);
+    GetTextMetrics(hdc, &tm);
+    GetCharWidth(hdc, 0, 255, fontPtr->widths);
+
+    fontPtr->font.fid	= (Font) fontPtr;
+
+    faPtr = &fontPtr->font.fa;
+    faPtr->family	= Tk_GetUid(buf);
+    faPtr->pointsize	= MulDiv(tm.tmHeight - tm.tmInternalLeading,
+	    720 * WidthMMOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin)),
+	    254 * WidthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin)));
+    faPtr->weight	= (tm.tmWeight > FW_MEDIUM) ? TK_FW_BOLD : TK_FW_NORMAL;
+    faPtr->slant	= (tm.tmItalic != 0) ? TK_FS_ITALIC : TK_FS_ROMAN;
+    faPtr->underline	= (tm.tmUnderlined != 0) ? 1 : 0;
+    faPtr->overstrike	= (tm.tmStruckOut != 0) ? 1 : 0;
+
+    fontPtr->font.fm.ascent	= tm.tmAscent;
+    fontPtr->font.fm.descent	= tm.tmDescent;
+    fontPtr->font.fm.maxWidth	= tm.tmMaxCharWidth;
+    fontPtr->font.fm.fixed	= !(tm.tmPitchAndFamily & TMPF_FIXED_PITCH);
+
+    hFont = SelectObject(hdc, hFont);
+    ReleaseDC(hwnd, hdc);
+
+    fontPtr->hFont		= hFont;
+    fontPtr->hwnd		= hwnd;
+
+    return (TkFont *) fontPtr;
+}
+
diff --git a/win/tkWinImage.c b/win/tkWinImage.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..388a58a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/tkWinImage.c
@@ -0,0 +1,329 @@
+/* 
+ * tkWinImage.c --
+ *
+ *	This file contains routines for manipulation full-color images.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkWinImage.c 1.13 97/07/07 11:19:45
+ */
+
+#include "tkWinInt.h"
+
+static int		DestroyImage _ANSI_ARGS_((XImage* data));
+static unsigned long	ImageGetPixel _ANSI_ARGS_((XImage *image, int x, int y));
+static int		PutPixel _ANSI_ARGS_((XImage *image, int x, int y,
+			    unsigned long pixel));
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * DestroyImage --
+ *
+ *	This is a trivial wrapper around ckfree to make it possible to
+ *	pass ckfree as a pointer.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Deallocates the image.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+DestroyImage(imagePtr)
+     XImage *imagePtr;		/* image to free */
+{
+    if (imagePtr) {
+	if (imagePtr->data) {
+	    ckfree((char*)imagePtr->data);
+	}
+	ckfree((char*)imagePtr);
+    }
+    return 0;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * ImageGetPixel --
+ *
+ *	Get a single pixel from an image.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns the 32 bit pixel value.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+unsigned long
+ImageGetPixel(image, x, y)
+    XImage *image;
+    int x, y;
+{
+    unsigned long pixel = 0;
+    unsigned char *srcPtr = &(image->data[(y * image->bytes_per_line)
+	    + ((x * image->bits_per_pixel) / NBBY)]);
+
+    switch (image->bits_per_pixel) {
+	case 32:
+	case 24:
+	    pixel = RGB(srcPtr[2], srcPtr[1], srcPtr[0]);
+	    break;
+	case 16:
+	    pixel = RGB(((((WORD*)srcPtr)[0]) >> 7) & 0xf8,
+		    ((((WORD*)srcPtr)[0]) >> 2) & 0xf8,
+		    ((((WORD*)srcPtr)[0]) << 3) & 0xf8);
+	    break;
+	case 8:
+	    pixel = srcPtr[0];
+	    break;
+	case 4:
+	    pixel = ((x%2) ? (*srcPtr) : ((*srcPtr) >> 4)) & 0x0f;
+	    break;
+	case 1:
+	    pixel = ((*srcPtr) & (0x80 >> (x%8))) ? 1 : 0;
+	    break;
+    }
+    return pixel;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * PutPixel --
+ *
+ *	Set a single pixel in an image.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+PutPixel(image, x, y, pixel)
+    XImage *image;
+    int x, y;
+    unsigned long pixel;
+{
+    unsigned char *destPtr = &(image->data[(y * image->bytes_per_line)
+	    + ((x * image->bits_per_pixel) / NBBY)]);
+
+    switch  (image->bits_per_pixel) {
+	case 32:
+	    /*
+	     * Pixel is DWORD: 0x00BBGGRR
+	     */
+
+	    destPtr[3] = 0;
+	case 24:
+	    /*
+	     * Pixel is triplet: 0xBBGGRR.
+	     */
+
+	    destPtr[0] = (unsigned char) GetBValue(pixel);
+	    destPtr[1] = (unsigned char) GetGValue(pixel);
+	    destPtr[2] = (unsigned char) GetRValue(pixel);
+	    break;
+	case 16:
+	    /*
+	     * Pixel is WORD: 5-5-5 (R-G-B)
+	     */
+
+	    (*(WORD*)destPtr) = 
+		((GetRValue(pixel) & 0xf8) << 7)
+		| ((GetGValue(pixel) & 0xf8) <<2)
+		| ((GetBValue(pixel) & 0xf8) >> 3);
+	    break;
+	case 8:
+	    /*
+	     * Pixel is 8-bit index into color table.
+	     */
+
+	    (*destPtr) = (unsigned char) pixel;
+	    break;
+	case 4:
+	    /*
+	     * Pixel is 4-bit index in MSBFirst order.
+	     */
+	    if (x%2) {
+		(*destPtr) = (unsigned char) (((*destPtr) & 0xf0)
+		    | (pixel & 0x0f));
+	    } else {
+		(*destPtr) = (unsigned char) (((*destPtr) & 0x0f)
+		    | ((pixel << 4) & 0xf0));
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case 1: {
+	    /*
+	     * Pixel is bit in MSBFirst order.
+	     */
+
+	    int mask = (0x80 >> (x%8));
+	    if (pixel) {
+		(*destPtr) |= mask;
+	    } else {
+		(*destPtr) &= ~mask;
+	    }
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    return 0;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XCreateImage --
+ *
+ *	Allocates storage for a new XImage.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns a newly allocated XImage.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+XImage *
+XCreateImage(display, visual, depth, format, offset, data, width, height,
+	bitmap_pad, bytes_per_line)
+    Display* display;
+    Visual* visual;
+    unsigned int depth;
+    int format;
+    int offset;
+    char* data;
+    unsigned int width;
+    unsigned int height;
+    int bitmap_pad;
+    int bytes_per_line;
+{
+    XImage* imagePtr = (XImage *) ckalloc(sizeof(XImage));
+    imagePtr->width = width;
+    imagePtr->height = height;
+    imagePtr->xoffset = offset;
+    imagePtr->format = format;
+    imagePtr->data = data;
+    imagePtr->byte_order = LSBFirst;
+    imagePtr->bitmap_unit = 8;
+    imagePtr->bitmap_bit_order = MSBFirst;
+    imagePtr->bitmap_pad = bitmap_pad;
+    imagePtr->bits_per_pixel = depth;
+    imagePtr->depth = depth;
+
+    /*
+     * Under Windows, bitmap_pad must be on an LONG data-type boundary.
+     */
+
+#define LONGBITS    (sizeof(LONG) * 8)
+
+    bitmap_pad = (bitmap_pad + LONGBITS - 1) / LONGBITS * LONGBITS;
+
+    /*
+     * Round to the nearest bitmap_pad boundary.
+     */
+
+    if (bytes_per_line) {
+	imagePtr->bytes_per_line = bytes_per_line;
+    } else {
+	imagePtr->bytes_per_line = (((depth * width)
+		+ (bitmap_pad - 1)) >> 3) & ~((bitmap_pad >> 3) - 1);
+    }
+
+    imagePtr->red_mask = 0;
+    imagePtr->green_mask = 0;
+    imagePtr->blue_mask = 0;
+
+    imagePtr->f.put_pixel = PutPixel;
+    imagePtr->f.get_pixel = ImageGetPixel;
+    imagePtr->f.destroy_image = DestroyImage;
+    imagePtr->f.create_image = NULL;
+    imagePtr->f.sub_image = NULL;
+    imagePtr->f.add_pixel = NULL;
+    
+    return imagePtr;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XGetImage --
+ *
+ *	This function copies data from a pixmap or window into an
+ *	XImage.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns a newly allocated image containing the data from the
+ *	given rectangle of the given drawable.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+XImage *
+XGetImage(display, d, x, y, width, height, plane_mask, format)
+    Display* display;
+    Drawable d;
+    int x;
+    int y;
+    unsigned int width;
+    unsigned int height;
+    unsigned long plane_mask;
+    int	format;
+{
+    TkWinDrawable *twdPtr = (TkWinDrawable *)d;
+    XImage *imagePtr;
+    HDC dc;
+    char infoBuf[sizeof(BITMAPINFO) + sizeof(RGBQUAD)];
+    BITMAPINFO *infoPtr = (BITMAPINFO*)infoBuf;
+
+    if ((twdPtr->type != TWD_BITMAP) || (twdPtr->bitmap.handle == NULL)
+	    || (format != XYPixmap) || (plane_mask != 1)) {
+	panic("XGetImage: not implemented");
+    }
+
+
+    imagePtr = XCreateImage(display, NULL, 1, XYBitmap, 0, NULL,
+	    width, height, 32, 0);
+    imagePtr->data = ckalloc(imagePtr->bytes_per_line * imagePtr->height);
+
+    dc = GetDC(NULL);
+
+    GetDIBits(dc, twdPtr->bitmap.handle, 0, height, NULL,
+	    infoPtr, DIB_RGB_COLORS);
+
+    infoPtr->bmiHeader.biSize = sizeof(BITMAPINFOHEADER);
+    infoPtr->bmiHeader.biWidth = width;
+    infoPtr->bmiHeader.biHeight = -(LONG)height;
+    infoPtr->bmiHeader.biPlanes = 1;
+    infoPtr->bmiHeader.biBitCount = 1;
+    infoPtr->bmiHeader.biCompression = BI_RGB;
+    infoPtr->bmiHeader.biCompression = 0;
+    infoPtr->bmiHeader.biXPelsPerMeter = 0;
+    infoPtr->bmiHeader.biYPelsPerMeter = 0;
+    infoPtr->bmiHeader.biClrUsed = 0;
+    infoPtr->bmiHeader.biClrImportant = 0;
+
+    GetDIBits(dc, twdPtr->bitmap.handle, 0, height, imagePtr->data,
+	    infoPtr, DIB_RGB_COLORS);
+    ReleaseDC(NULL, dc);
+
+    return imagePtr;
+}
diff --git a/win/tkWinInit.c b/win/tkWinInit.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..400f693
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/tkWinInit.c
@@ -0,0 +1,121 @@
+/* 
+ * tkWinInit.c --
+ *
+ *	This file contains Windows-specific interpreter initialization
+ *	functions.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1995-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkWinInit.c 1.29 97/07/24 14:46:35
+ */
+
+#include "tkWinInt.h"
+
+/*
+ * The Init script (common to Windows and Unix platforms) is
+ * defined in tkInitScript.h
+ */
+#include "tkInitScript.h"
+
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpInit --
+ *
+ *	Performs Windows-specific interpreter initialization related to the
+ *      tk_library variable.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	A standard Tcl completion code (TCL_OK or TCL_ERROR).  Also
+ *	leaves information in interp->result.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Sets "tk_library" Tcl variable, runs "tk.tcl" script.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkpInit(interp)
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;
+{
+    return Tcl_Eval(interp, initScript);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpGetAppName --
+ *
+ *	Retrieves the name of the current application from a platform
+ *	specific location.  For Windows, the application name is the
+ *	root of the tail of the path contained in the tcl variable argv0.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns the application name in the given Tcl_DString.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpGetAppName(interp, namePtr)
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;
+    Tcl_DString *namePtr;	/* A previously initialized Tcl_DString. */
+{
+    int argc;
+    char **argv = NULL, *name, *p;
+
+    name = Tcl_GetVar(interp, "argv0", TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+    if (name != NULL) {
+	Tcl_SplitPath(name, &argc, &argv);
+	if (argc > 0) {
+	    name = argv[argc-1];
+	    p = strrchr(name, '.');
+	    if (p != NULL) {
+		*p = '\0';
+	    }
+	} else {
+	    name = NULL;
+	}
+    }
+    if ((name == NULL) || (*name == 0)) {
+	name = "tk";
+    }
+    Tcl_DStringAppend(namePtr, name, -1);
+    if (argv != NULL) {
+	ckfree((char *)argv);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpDisplayWarning --
+ *
+ *	This routines is called from Tk_Main to display warning
+ *	messages that occur during startup.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Displays a message box.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpDisplayWarning(msg, title)
+    char *msg;			/* Message to be displayed. */
+    char *title;		/* Title of warning. */
+{
+    MessageBox(NULL, msg, title, MB_OK | MB_ICONEXCLAMATION | MB_SYSTEMMODAL
+	    | MB_SETFOREGROUND | MB_TOPMOST);
+}
diff --git a/win/tkWinInt.h b/win/tkWinInt.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f3bca19
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/tkWinInt.h
@@ -0,0 +1,194 @@
+/*
+ * tkWinInt.h --
+ *
+ *	This file contains declarations that are shared among the
+ *	Windows-specific parts of Tk, but aren't used by the rest of
+ *	Tk.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkWinInt.h 1.34 97/09/02 13:06:20
+ */
+
+#ifndef _TKWININT
+#define _TKWININT
+
+#ifndef _TKINT
+#include "tkInt.h"
+#endif
+
+/*
+ * Include platform specific public interfaces.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _TKWIN
+#include "tkWin.h"
+#endif
+
+/*
+ * Define constants missing from older Win32 SDK header files.
+ */
+
+#ifndef WS_EX_TOOLWINDOW
+#define WS_EX_TOOLWINDOW	0x00000080L 
+#endif
+
+typedef struct TkFontAttributes TkFontAttributes;
+
+/*
+ * The TkWinDCState is used to save the state of a device context
+ * so that it can be restored later.
+ */
+
+typedef struct TkWinDCState {
+    HPALETTE palette;
+} TkWinDCState;
+
+/*
+ * The TkWinDrawable is the internal implementation of an X Drawable (either
+ * a Window or a Pixmap).  The following constants define the valid Drawable
+ * types.
+ */
+
+#define TWD_BITMAP	1
+#define TWD_WINDOW	2
+#define TWD_WINDC	3
+
+typedef struct {
+    int type;
+    HWND handle;
+    TkWindow *winPtr;
+} TkWinWindow;
+
+typedef struct {
+    int type;
+    HBITMAP handle;
+    Colormap colormap;
+    int depth;
+} TkWinBitmap;
+
+typedef struct {
+    int type;
+    HDC hdc;
+}TkWinDC;
+
+typedef union {
+    int type;
+    TkWinWindow window;
+    TkWinBitmap bitmap;
+    TkWinDC winDC;
+} TkWinDrawable;
+
+/*
+ * The following macros are used to retrieve internal values from a Drawable.
+ */
+
+#define TkWinGetHWND(w) (((TkWinDrawable *) w)->window.handle)
+#define TkWinGetWinPtr(w) (((TkWinDrawable*)w)->window.winPtr)
+#define TkWinGetHBITMAP(w) (((TkWinDrawable*)w)->bitmap.handle)
+#define TkWinGetColormap(w) (((TkWinDrawable*)w)->bitmap.colormap)
+#define TkWinGetHDC(w) (((TkWinDrawable *) w)->winDC.hdc)
+
+/*
+ * The following structure is used to encapsulate palette information.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    HPALETTE palette;		/* Palette handle used when drawing. */
+    UINT size;			/* Number of entries in the palette. */
+    int stale;			/* 1 if palette needs to be realized,
+				 * otherwise 0.  If the palette is stale,
+				 * then an idle handler is scheduled to
+				 * realize the palette. */
+    Tcl_HashTable refCounts;	/* Hash table of palette entry reference counts
+				 * indexed by pixel value. */
+} TkWinColormap;
+
+/*
+ * The following macro retrieves the Win32 palette from a colormap.
+ */
+
+#define TkWinGetPalette(colormap) (((TkWinColormap *) colormap)->palette)
+
+/*
+ * The following macros define the class names for Tk Window types.
+ */
+
+#define TK_WIN_TOPLEVEL_CLASS_NAME "TkTopLevel"
+#define TK_WIN_CHILD_CLASS_NAME "TkChild"
+
+/*
+ * The following variable indicates whether we are restricted to Win32s
+ * GDI calls.
+ */
+
+extern int tkpIsWin32s;
+
+/*
+ * The following variable is a translation table between X gc functions and
+ * Win32 raster op modes.
+ */
+
+extern int tkpWinRopModes[];
+
+/*
+ * The following defines are used with TkWinGetBorderPixels to get the
+ * extra 2 border colors from a Tk_3DBorder.
+ */
+
+#define TK_3D_LIGHT2 TK_3D_DARK_GC+1
+#define TK_3D_DARK2 TK_3D_DARK_GC+2
+
+/*
+ * Internal procedures used by more than one source file.
+ */
+
+extern LRESULT CALLBACK	TkWinChildProc _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd, UINT message,
+			    WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam));
+extern void		TkWinClipboardRender _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr,
+			    UINT format));
+extern LRESULT		TkWinEmbeddedEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd,
+			    UINT message, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam));
+extern void		TkWinFillRect _ANSI_ARGS_((HDC dc, int x, int y,
+			    int width, int height, int pixel));
+extern COLORREF		TkWinGetBorderPixels _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tk_3DBorder border, int which));
+extern HDC		TkWinGetDrawableDC _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
+			    Drawable d, TkWinDCState* state));
+extern int		TkWinGetModifierState _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+extern HPALETTE		TkWinGetSystemPalette _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+extern HWND		TkWinGetWrapperWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin));
+extern int		TkWinHandleMenuEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND *phwnd,
+			    UINT *pMessage, WPARAM *pwParam, LPARAM *plParam,
+			    LRESULT *plResult));
+extern int		TkWinIndexOfColor _ANSI_ARGS_((XColor *colorPtr));
+extern void		TkWinPointerDeadWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+extern void		TkWinPointerEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd, int x,
+			    int y));
+extern void		TkWinPointerInit _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+extern LRESULT 		TkWinReflectMessage _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd,
+			    UINT message, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam));
+extern void		TkWinReleaseDrawableDC _ANSI_ARGS_((Drawable d,
+			    HDC hdc, TkWinDCState* state));
+extern LRESULT		TkWinResendEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((WNDPROC wndproc,
+			    HWND hwnd, XEvent *eventPtr));
+extern HPALETTE		TkWinSelectPalette _ANSI_ARGS_((HDC dc,
+			    Colormap colormap));
+extern void		TkWinSetMenu _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    HMENU hMenu));
+extern void		TkWinSetWindowPos _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd,
+			    HWND siblingHwnd, int pos));
+extern void		TkWinUpdateCursor _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+extern void		TkWinWmCleanup _ANSI_ARGS_((HINSTANCE hInstance));
+extern HWND		TkWinWmFindEmbedAssociation _ANSI_ARGS_((
+			    TkWindow *winPtr));
+extern void		TkWinWmStoreEmbedAssociation _ANSI_ARGS_((
+			    TkWindow *winPtr, HWND hwnd));
+extern void		TkWinXCleanup _ANSI_ARGS_((HINSTANCE hInstance));
+extern void 		TkWinXInit _ANSI_ARGS_((HINSTANCE hInstance));
+
+#endif /* _TKWININT */
+
diff --git a/win/tkWinKey.c b/win/tkWinKey.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3589143
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/tkWinKey.c
@@ -0,0 +1,360 @@
+/* 
+ * tkWinKey.c --
+ *
+ *	This file contains X emulation routines for keyboard related
+ *	functions.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkWinKey.c 1.9 97/06/20 15:12:39
+ */
+
+#include "tkWinInt.h"
+
+typedef struct {
+    unsigned int keycode;
+    KeySym keysym;
+} Keys;
+
+static Keys keymap[] = {
+    VK_CANCEL, XK_Cancel,
+    VK_BACK, XK_BackSpace,
+    VK_TAB, XK_Tab,
+    VK_CLEAR, XK_Clear,
+    VK_RETURN, XK_Return,
+    VK_SHIFT, XK_Shift_L,
+    VK_CONTROL, XK_Control_L,
+    VK_MENU, XK_Alt_L,
+    VK_PAUSE, XK_Pause,
+    VK_CAPITAL, XK_Caps_Lock,
+    VK_ESCAPE, XK_Escape,
+    VK_SPACE, XK_space,
+    VK_PRIOR, XK_Prior,
+    VK_NEXT, XK_Next,
+    VK_END, XK_End,
+    VK_HOME, XK_Home,
+    VK_LEFT, XK_Left,
+    VK_UP, XK_Up,
+    VK_RIGHT, XK_Right,
+    VK_DOWN, XK_Down,
+    VK_SELECT, XK_Select,
+    VK_PRINT, XK_Print,
+    VK_EXECUTE, XK_Execute,
+    VK_INSERT, XK_Insert,
+    VK_DELETE, XK_Delete,
+    VK_HELP, XK_Help,
+    VK_F1, XK_F1,
+    VK_F2, XK_F2,
+    VK_F3, XK_F3,
+    VK_F4, XK_F4,
+    VK_F5, XK_F5,
+    VK_F6, XK_F6,
+    VK_F7, XK_F7,
+    VK_F8, XK_F8,
+    VK_F9, XK_F9,
+    VK_F10, XK_F10,
+    VK_F11, XK_F11,
+    VK_F12, XK_F12,
+    VK_F13, XK_F13,
+    VK_F14, XK_F14,
+    VK_F15, XK_F15,
+    VK_F16, XK_F16,
+    VK_F17, XK_F17,
+    VK_F18, XK_F18,
+    VK_F19, XK_F19,
+    VK_F20, XK_F20,
+    VK_F21, XK_F21,
+    VK_F22, XK_F22,
+    VK_F23, XK_F23,
+    VK_F24, XK_F24,
+    VK_NUMLOCK, XK_Num_Lock, 
+    VK_SCROLL, XK_Scroll_Lock,
+    0, NoSymbol
+};
+
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XLookupString --
+ *
+ *	Retrieve the string equivalent for the given keyboard event.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns the number of characters stored in buffer_return.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Retrieves the characters stored in the event and inserts them
+ *	into buffer_return.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+XLookupString(event_struct, buffer_return, bytes_buffer, keysym_return,
+	status_in_out)
+    XKeyEvent* event_struct;
+    char* buffer_return;
+    int bytes_buffer;
+    KeySym* keysym_return;
+    XComposeStatus* status_in_out;
+{
+    int i, limit;
+
+    if (event_struct->send_event != -1) {
+	/*
+	 * This is an event generated from generic code.  It has no
+	 * nchars or trans_chars members. 
+	 */
+
+	int index;
+	KeySym keysym;
+
+	index = 0;
+	if (event_struct->state & ShiftMask) {
+	    index |= 1;
+	}
+	if (event_struct->state & Mod1Mask) {
+	    index |= 2;
+	}
+	keysym = XKeycodeToKeysym(event_struct->display, 
+		event_struct->keycode, index);
+	if (((keysym != NoSymbol) && (keysym > 0) && (keysym < 256)) 
+		|| (keysym == XK_Return)
+		|| (keysym == XK_Tab)) {
+	    buffer_return[0] = (char) keysym;
+	    return 1;
+	}
+	return 0;
+    }
+    if ((event_struct->nchars <= 0) || (buffer_return == NULL)) {
+	return 0;
+    }
+    limit = (event_struct->nchars < bytes_buffer) ? event_struct->nchars :
+	bytes_buffer;
+
+    for (i = 0; i < limit; i++) {
+	buffer_return[i] = event_struct->trans_chars[i];
+    }
+
+    if (keysym_return != NULL) {
+	*keysym_return = NoSymbol;
+    }
+    return i;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XKeycodeToKeysym --
+ *
+ *	Translate from a system-dependent keycode to a
+ *	system-independent keysym.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns the translated keysym, or NoSymbol on failure.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+KeySym
+XKeycodeToKeysym(display, keycode, index)
+    Display* display;
+    unsigned int keycode;
+    int index;
+{
+    Keys* key;
+    BYTE keys[256];
+    int result;
+    char buf[4];
+    unsigned int scancode = MapVirtualKey(keycode, 0);
+
+    memset(keys, 0, 256);
+    if (index & 0x02) {
+	keys[VK_NUMLOCK] = 1;
+    }
+    if (index & 0x01) {
+	keys[VK_SHIFT] = 0x80;
+    }
+    result = ToAscii(keycode, scancode, keys, (LPWORD) buf, 0);
+
+    /*
+     * Keycode mapped to a valid Latin-1 character.  Since the keysyms
+     * for alphanumeric characters map onto Latin-1, we just return it.
+     */
+
+    if (result == 1 && buf[0] >= 0x20) {
+	return (KeySym) buf[0];
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Keycode is a non-alphanumeric key, so we have to do the lookup.
+     */
+
+    for (key = keymap; key->keycode != 0; key++) {
+	if (key->keycode == keycode) {
+	    return key->keysym;
+	}
+    }
+
+    return NoSymbol;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XKeysymToKeycode --
+ *
+ *	Translate a keysym back into a keycode.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns the keycode that would generate the specified keysym.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+KeyCode
+XKeysymToKeycode(display, keysym)
+    Display* display;
+    KeySym keysym;
+{
+    Keys* key;
+    SHORT result;
+
+    if (keysym >= 0x20) {
+	result = VkKeyScan((char) keysym);
+	if (result != -1) {
+	    return (KeyCode) (result & 0xff);
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Couldn't map the character to a virtual keycode, so do a
+     * table lookup.
+     */
+
+    for (key = keymap; key->keycode != 0; key++) {
+	if (key->keysym == keysym) {
+	    return key->keycode;
+	}
+    }
+    return 0;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XGetModifierMapping --
+ *
+ *	Fetch the current keycodes used as modifiers.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns a new modifier map.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Allocates a new modifier map data structure.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+XModifierKeymap	*
+XGetModifierMapping(display)
+    Display* display;
+{
+    XModifierKeymap *map = (XModifierKeymap *)ckalloc(sizeof(XModifierKeymap));
+
+    map->max_keypermod = 1;
+    map->modifiermap = (KeyCode *) ckalloc(sizeof(KeyCode)*8);
+    map->modifiermap[ShiftMapIndex] = VK_SHIFT;
+    map->modifiermap[LockMapIndex] = VK_CAPITAL;
+    map->modifiermap[ControlMapIndex] = VK_CONTROL;
+    map->modifiermap[Mod1MapIndex] = VK_NUMLOCK;
+    map->modifiermap[Mod2MapIndex] = VK_MENU;
+    map->modifiermap[Mod3MapIndex] = VK_SCROLL;
+    map->modifiermap[Mod4MapIndex] = 0;
+    map->modifiermap[Mod5MapIndex] = 0;
+    return map;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XFreeModifiermap --
+ *
+ *	Deallocate a modifier map that was created by
+ *	XGetModifierMapping.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Frees the datastructure referenced by modmap.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+XFreeModifiermap(modmap)
+    XModifierKeymap* modmap;
+{
+    ckfree((char *) modmap->modifiermap);
+    ckfree((char *) modmap);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XStringToKeysym --
+ *
+ *	Translate a keysym name to the matching keysym. 
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns the keysym.  Since this is already handled by
+ *	Tk's StringToKeysym function, we just return NoSymbol.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+KeySym
+XStringToKeysym(string)
+    _Xconst char *string;
+{
+    return NoSymbol;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XKeysymToString --
+ *
+ *	Convert a keysym to character form.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns NULL, since Tk will have handled this already.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+char *
+XKeysymToString(keysym)
+    KeySym keysym;
+{
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+
diff --git a/win/tkWinMenu.c b/win/tkWinMenu.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..00e24b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/tkWinMenu.c
@@ -0,0 +1,2646 @@
+/* 
+ * tkWinMenu.c --
+ *
+ *	This module implements the Mac-platform specific features of menus.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1996-1997 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkWinMenu.c 1.102 97/10/28 13:56:58
+ */
+
+#define OEMRESOURCE
+#include <string.h>
+#include "tkMenu.h"
+#include "tkWinInt.h"
+
+/*
+ * The class of the window for popup menus.
+ */
+
+#define MENU_CLASS_NAME "MenuWindowClass"
+
+/*
+ * Used to align a windows bitmap inside a rectangle
+ */
+
+#define ALIGN_BITMAP_LEFT   0x00000001
+#define ALIGN_BITMAP_RIGHT  0x00000002
+#define ALIGN_BITMAP_TOP    0x00000004
+#define ALIGN_BITMAP_BOTTOM 0x00000008
+
+/*
+ * Platform-specific menu flags:
+ *
+ * MENU_SYSTEM_MENU	Non-zero means that the Windows menu handle
+ *			was retrieved with GetSystemMenu and needs
+ *			to be disposed of specially.
+ * MENU_RECONFIGURE_PENDING
+ *			Non-zero means that an idle handler has
+ *			been set up to reconfigure the Windows menu
+ *			handle for this menu.
+ */
+
+#define MENU_SYSTEM_MENU	    MENU_PLATFORM_FLAG1
+#define MENU_RECONFIGURE_PENDING    MENU_PLATFORM_FLAG2
+
+static int indicatorDimensions[2];
+				/* The dimensions of the indicator space
+				 * in a menu entry. Calculated at init
+				 * time to save time. */
+static Tcl_HashTable commandTable;
+				/* A map of command ids to menu entries */
+static int inPostMenu;		/* We cannot be re-entrant like X Windows. */
+static WORD lastCommandID;	/* The last command ID we allocated. */
+static HWND menuHWND;		/* A window to service popup-menu messages
+				 * in. */
+static int oldServiceMode;	/* Used while processing a menu; we need
+				 * to set the event mode specially when we
+				 * enter the menu processing modal loop
+				 * and reset it when menus go away. */
+static TkMenu *modalMenuPtr;	/* The menu we are processing inside the modal
+				 * loop. We need this to reset all of the 
+				 * active items when menus go away since
+				 * Windows does not see fit to give this
+				 * to us when it sends its WM_MENUSELECT. */
+static OSVERSIONINFO versionInfo;
+				/* So we don't have to keep doing this */
+static Tcl_HashTable winMenuTable;
+				/* Need this to map HMENUs back to menuPtrs */
+
+/*
+ * The following are default menu value strings.
+ */
+
+static char borderString[5];	/* The string indicating how big the border is */
+static Tcl_DString menuFontDString;
+				/* A buffer to store the default menu font
+				 * string. */
+
+/*
+ * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ */
+
+static void		DrawMenuEntryAccelerator _ANSI_ARGS_((
+			    TkMenu *menuPtr, TkMenuEntry *mePtr, 
+			    Drawable d, GC gc, Tk_Font tkfont,
+			    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr,
+			    Tk_3DBorder activeBorder, int x, int y,
+			    int width, int height, int drawArrow));
+static void		DrawMenuEntryBackground _ANSI_ARGS_((
+			    TkMenu *menuPtr, TkMenuEntry *mePtr,
+			    Drawable d, Tk_3DBorder activeBorder,
+			    Tk_3DBorder bgBorder, int x, int y,
+			    int width, int heigth));
+static void		DrawMenuEntryIndicator _ANSI_ARGS_((
+			    TkMenu *menuPtr, TkMenuEntry *mePtr,
+			    Drawable d, GC gc, GC indicatorGC, 
+			    Tk_Font tkfont,
+			    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr, int x, int y,
+			    int width, int height));
+static void		DrawMenuEntryLabel _ANSI_ARGS_((
+			    TkMenu * menuPtr, TkMenuEntry *mePtr, Drawable d,
+			    GC gc, Tk_Font tkfont,
+			    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr, int x, int y,
+			    int width, int height));
+static void		DrawMenuSeparator _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenu *menuPtr,
+			    TkMenuEntry *mePtr, Drawable d, GC gc, 
+			    Tk_Font tkfont, CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr, 
+			    int x, int y, int width, int height));
+static void		DrawTearoffEntry _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenu *menuPtr,
+			    TkMenuEntry *mePtr, Drawable d, GC gc, 
+			    Tk_Font tkfont, CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr, 
+			    int x, int y, int width, int height));
+static void		DrawMenuUnderline _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenu *menuPtr,
+			    TkMenuEntry *mePtr, Drawable d, GC gc,
+			    Tk_Font tkfont, CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr, int x,
+			    int y, int width, int height));
+static void		DrawWindowsSystemBitmap _ANSI_ARGS_((
+			    Display *display, Drawable drawable, 
+			    GC gc, CONST RECT *rectPtr, int bitmapID,
+			    int alignFlags));
+static void		FreeID _ANSI_ARGS_((int commandID));
+static char *		GetEntryText _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenuEntry *mePtr));
+static void		GetMenuAccelGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenu *menuPtr,
+			    TkMenuEntry *mePtr, Tk_Font tkfont,
+			    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr, int *widthPtr,
+			    int *heightPtr));
+static void		GetMenuLabelGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenuEntry *mePtr,
+			    Tk_Font tkfont, CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr,
+			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr));
+static void		GetMenuIndicatorGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((
+			    TkMenu *menuPtr, TkMenuEntry *mePtr, 
+			    Tk_Font tkfont, CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr, 
+			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr));
+static void		GetMenuSeparatorGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((
+			    TkMenu *menuPtr, TkMenuEntry *mePtr,
+			    Tk_Font tkfont, CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr,
+			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr));
+static void		GetTearoffEntryGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenu *menuPtr,
+			    TkMenuEntry *mePtr, Tk_Font tkfont,
+			    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr, int *widthPtr,
+			    int *heightPtr));
+static int		GetNewID _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenuEntry *mePtr,
+			    int *menuIDPtr));
+static void		MenuExitProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
+static int		MenuKeyBindProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
+			    ClientData clientData, 
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, XEvent *eventPtr,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin, KeySym keySym));
+static void		MenuSelectEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenu *menuPtr));
+static void		ReconfigureWindowsMenu _ANSI_ARGS_((
+			    ClientData clientData));
+static void		RecursivelyClearActiveMenu _ANSI_ARGS_((
+			    TkMenu *menuPtr));
+static LRESULT CALLBACK	TkWinMenuProc _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd,
+			    UINT message, WPARAM wParam,
+			    LPARAM lParam));
+
+
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * GetNewID --
+ *
+ *	Allocates a new menu id and marks it in use.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns TCL_OK if succesful; TCL_ERROR if there are no more
+ *	ids of the appropriate type to allocate. menuIDPtr contains
+ *	the new id if succesful.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	An entry is created for the menu in the command hash table,
+ *	and the hash entry is stored in the appropriate field in the
+ *	menu data structure.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+GetNewID(mePtr, menuIDPtr)
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;		/* The menu we are working with */
+    int *menuIDPtr;		/* The resulting id */
+{
+    int found = 0;
+    int newEntry;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *commandEntryPtr;
+    WORD returnID;
+
+    WORD curID = lastCommandID + 1;
+
+    /*
+     * The following code relies on WORD wrapping when the highest value is
+     * incremented.
+     */
+    
+    while (curID != lastCommandID) {
+    	commandEntryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&commandTable,
+		(char *) curID, &newEntry);
+    	if (newEntry == 1) {
+    	    found = 1;
+    	    returnID = curID;
+    	    break;
+    	}
+    	curID++;
+    }
+
+    if (found) {
+    	Tcl_SetHashValue(commandEntryPtr, (char *) mePtr);
+    	*menuIDPtr = (int) returnID;
+    	lastCommandID = returnID;
+    	return TCL_OK;
+    } else {
+    	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * FreeID --
+ *
+ *	Marks the itemID as free.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The hash table entry for the ID is cleared.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+FreeID(commandID)
+    int commandID;
+{
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&commandTable,
+	    (char *) commandID);
+    
+    if (entryPtr != NULL) {
+    	 Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(entryPtr);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpNewMenu --
+ *
+ *	Gets a new blank menu. Only the platform specific options are filled
+ *	in.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Standard TCL error.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Allocates a Windows menu handle and places it in the platformData
+ *	field of the menuPtr.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkpNewMenu(menuPtr)
+    TkMenu *menuPtr;	/* The common structure we are making the
+			 * platform structure for. */
+{
+    HMENU winMenuHdl;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *hashEntryPtr;
+    int newEntry;
+
+    winMenuHdl = CreatePopupMenu();
+    
+    if (winMenuHdl == NULL) {
+    	Tcl_AppendResult(menuPtr->interp, "No more menus can be allocated.",
+    		(char *) NULL);
+    	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * We hash all of the HMENU's so that we can get their menu ptrs
+     * back when dispatch messages.
+     */
+
+    hashEntryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&winMenuTable, (char *) winMenuHdl,
+	    &newEntry);
+    Tcl_SetHashValue(hashEntryPtr, (char *) menuPtr);
+
+    menuPtr->platformData = (TkMenuPlatformData) winMenuHdl;
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpDestroyMenu --
+ *
+ *	Destroys platform-specific menu structures.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	All platform-specific allocations are freed up.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpDestroyMenu(menuPtr)
+    TkMenu *menuPtr;	    /* The common menu structure */
+{
+    HMENU winMenuHdl = (HMENU) menuPtr->platformData;
+
+    if (menuPtr->menuFlags & MENU_RECONFIGURE_PENDING) {
+	Tcl_CancelIdleCall(ReconfigureWindowsMenu, (ClientData) menuPtr);
+    }
+    
+    if (NULL != winMenuHdl) {
+	if (menuPtr->menuFlags & MENU_SYSTEM_MENU) {
+	    TkMenuEntry *searchEntryPtr;
+	    Tcl_HashTable *tablePtr = TkGetMenuHashTable(menuPtr->interp);
+	    char *menuName = Tcl_GetHashKey(tablePtr, 
+		    menuPtr->menuRefPtr->hashEntryPtr);
+
+	    for (searchEntryPtr = menuPtr->menuRefPtr->parentEntryPtr;
+		    searchEntryPtr != NULL;
+		    searchEntryPtr = searchEntryPtr->nextCascadePtr) {
+		if (strcmp(searchEntryPtr->name,
+			menuName) == 0) {
+		    Tk_Window parentTopLevelPtr = searchEntryPtr
+			    ->menuPtr->parentTopLevelPtr;
+
+		    if (parentTopLevelPtr != NULL) {
+			GetSystemMenu(TkWinGetWrapperWindow(parentTopLevelPtr),
+				TRUE);
+		    }
+		    break;
+		}
+	    }
+	} else {
+    	    DestroyMenu(winMenuHdl);
+	}
+    	menuPtr->platformData = NULL;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpDestroyMenuEntry --
+ *
+ *	Cleans up platform-specific menu entry items.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	All platform-specific allocations are freed up.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpDestroyMenuEntry(mePtr)
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;		    /* The entry to destroy */
+{
+    TkMenu *menuPtr = mePtr->menuPtr;
+    HMENU winMenuHdl = (HMENU) menuPtr->platformData;
+
+    if (NULL != winMenuHdl) {
+        if (!(menuPtr->menuFlags & MENU_RECONFIGURE_PENDING)) {
+	    menuPtr->menuFlags |= MENU_RECONFIGURE_PENDING;
+	    Tcl_DoWhenIdle(ReconfigureWindowsMenu, (ClientData) menuPtr);
+	}
+    }
+    FreeID((int) mePtr->platformEntryData);
+    mePtr->platformEntryData = NULL;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * GetEntryText --
+ *
+ *	Given a menu entry, gives back the text that should go in it.
+ *	Separators should be done by the caller, as they have to be
+ *	handled specially. Allocates the memory with alloc. The caller
+ *	should free the memory.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	itemText points to the new text for the item.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static char *
+GetEntryText(mePtr)
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;		/* A pointer to the menu entry. */
+{
+    char *itemText;
+
+    if (mePtr->type == TEAROFF_ENTRY) {
+	itemText = ckalloc(sizeof("(Tear-off)"));
+	strcpy(itemText, "(Tear-off)");
+    } else if (mePtr->imageString != NULL) {
+	itemText = ckalloc(sizeof("(Image)"));
+	strcpy(itemText, "(Image)");
+    } else if (mePtr->bitmap != None) {
+	itemText = ckalloc(sizeof("(Pixmap)"));
+	strcpy(itemText, "(Pixmap)");
+    } else if (mePtr->label == NULL || mePtr->labelLength == 0) {
+	itemText = ckalloc(sizeof("( )"));
+	strcpy(itemText, "( )");
+    } else {
+	int size = mePtr->labelLength + 1;
+	int i, j;
+
+	/*
+	 * We have to construct the string with an ampersand
+	 * preceeding the underline character, and a tab seperating
+	 * the text and the accel text. We have to be careful with
+	 * ampersands in the string.
+	 */
+
+	for (i = 0; i < mePtr->labelLength; i++) {
+	    if (mePtr->label[i] == '&') {
+		size++;
+	    }
+	}
+
+	if (mePtr->underline >= 0) {
+	    size++;
+	    if (mePtr->label[mePtr->underline] == '&') {
+		size++;
+	    }
+	}
+
+	if (mePtr->accelLength > 0) {
+	    size += mePtr->accelLength + 1;
+	}
+
+	for (i = 0; i < mePtr->accelLength; i++) {
+	    if (mePtr->accel[i] == '&') {
+		size++;
+	    }
+	}
+
+	itemText = ckalloc(size);
+	
+	if (mePtr->labelLength == 0) {
+	    itemText[0] = 0;
+	} else {
+	    for (i = 0, j = 0; i < mePtr->labelLength; i++, j++) {
+		if (mePtr->label[i] == '&') {
+		    itemText[j++] = '&';
+		}
+		if (i == mePtr->underline) {
+		    itemText[j++] = '&';
+		}
+		itemText[j] = mePtr->label[i];
+	    }
+	    itemText[j] = '\0';
+	}
+
+	if (mePtr->accelLength > 0) {
+	    strcat(itemText, "\t");
+	    for (i = 0, j = strlen(itemText); i < mePtr->accelLength;
+		    i++, j++) {
+		if (mePtr->accel[i] == '&') {
+		    itemText[j++] = '&';
+		}
+		itemText[j] = mePtr->accel[i];
+	    }
+	    itemText[j] = '\0';
+	}
+    }
+    return itemText;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * ReconfigureWindowsMenu --
+ *
+ *	Tears down and rebuilds the platform-specific part of this menu.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Configuration information get set for mePtr; old resources
+ *	get freed, if any need it.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+ReconfigureWindowsMenu(
+    ClientData clientData)	    /* The menu we are rebuilding */
+{
+    TkMenu *menuPtr = (TkMenu *) clientData;
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;
+    HMENU winMenuHdl = (HMENU) menuPtr->platformData;
+    char *itemText = NULL;
+    LPCTSTR lpNewItem;
+    UINT flags;
+    UINT itemID;
+    int i, count, systemMenu = 0, base;
+    int width, height;
+
+    if (NULL == winMenuHdl) {
+    	return;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Reconstruct the entire menu. Takes care of nasty system menu and index
+     * problem.
+     *
+     */
+
+    if ((menuPtr->menuType == MENUBAR)
+	    && (menuPtr->parentTopLevelPtr != NULL)) {
+	width = Tk_Width(menuPtr->parentTopLevelPtr);
+	height = Tk_Width(menuPtr->parentTopLevelPtr);
+    }
+
+    base = (menuPtr->menuFlags & MENU_SYSTEM_MENU) ? 7 : 0;
+    count = GetMenuItemCount(winMenuHdl);
+    for (i = base; i < count; i++) {
+	RemoveMenu(winMenuHdl, base, MF_BYPOSITION);
+    }
+
+    count = menuPtr->numEntries;
+    for (i = 0; i < count; i++) {
+	mePtr = menuPtr->entries[i];
+	lpNewItem = NULL;
+	flags = MF_BYPOSITION;
+	itemID = 0;
+
+	if ((menuPtr->menuType == MENUBAR) && (mePtr->type == TEAROFF_ENTRY)) {
+	    continue;
+	}
+
+	if (mePtr->type == SEPARATOR_ENTRY) {
+	    flags |= MF_SEPARATOR;
+	} else {
+	    itemText = GetEntryText(mePtr);
+	    if ((menuPtr->menuType == MENUBAR)
+		    || (menuPtr->menuFlags & MENU_SYSTEM_MENU)) {
+		lpNewItem = itemText;
+	    } else {
+		lpNewItem = (LPCTSTR) mePtr;
+		flags |= MF_OWNERDRAW;
+	    }
+
+    	    /*
+    	     * Set enabling and disabling correctly.
+    	     */
+
+	    if (mePtr->state == tkDisabledUid) {
+		flags |= MF_DISABLED;
+	    }
+    	    
+    	    /*
+    	     * Set the check mark for check entries and radio entries.
+    	     */
+	    
+	    if (((mePtr->type == CHECK_BUTTON_ENTRY)
+		    || (mePtr->type == RADIO_BUTTON_ENTRY))
+		    && (mePtr->entryFlags & ENTRY_SELECTED)) {
+		flags |= MF_CHECKED;
+	    }
+
+	    if (mePtr->columnBreak) {
+		flags |= MF_MENUBREAK;
+	    }
+
+	    itemID = (int) mePtr->platformEntryData;
+	    if (mePtr->type == CASCADE_ENTRY) {
+		if ((mePtr->childMenuRefPtr != NULL)
+			&& (mePtr->childMenuRefPtr->menuPtr != NULL)) {
+		    HMENU childMenuHdl = 
+			    (HMENU) mePtr->childMenuRefPtr->menuPtr
+			    ->platformData;
+		    if (childMenuHdl != NULL) {
+			itemID = (UINT) childMenuHdl;
+			flags |= MF_POPUP;
+		    }
+		    if ((menuPtr->menuType == MENUBAR) 
+			    && !(mePtr->childMenuRefPtr->menuPtr->menuFlags
+			    & MENU_SYSTEM_MENU)) {
+			TkMenuReferences *menuRefPtr;
+			TkMenu *systemMenuPtr = mePtr->childMenuRefPtr
+				->menuPtr;
+			char *systemMenuName = ckalloc(strlen(
+				Tk_PathName(menuPtr->masterMenuPtr->tkwin))
+				+ strlen(".system") + 1);
+
+			strcpy(systemMenuName, 
+				Tk_PathName(menuPtr->masterMenuPtr->tkwin));
+			strcat(systemMenuName, ".system");
+			menuRefPtr = TkFindMenuReferences(menuPtr->interp,
+				systemMenuName);
+			if ((menuRefPtr != NULL) 
+				&& (menuRefPtr->menuPtr != NULL)
+				&& (menuPtr->parentTopLevelPtr != NULL)
+				&& (systemMenuPtr->masterMenuPtr
+				== menuRefPtr->menuPtr)) {
+			    HMENU systemMenuHdl = 
+				    (HMENU) systemMenuPtr->platformData;
+			    HWND wrapper = TkWinGetWrapperWindow(menuPtr
+				    ->parentTopLevelPtr);
+			    if (wrapper != NULL) {
+				DestroyMenu(systemMenuHdl);
+				systemMenuHdl = GetSystemMenu(
+				    wrapper, FALSE);
+				systemMenuPtr->menuFlags |= MENU_SYSTEM_MENU;
+				systemMenuPtr->platformData = 
+					(TkMenuPlatformData) systemMenuHdl;
+				if (!(systemMenuPtr->menuFlags 
+					& MENU_RECONFIGURE_PENDING)) {
+				    systemMenuPtr->menuFlags 
+					    |= MENU_RECONFIGURE_PENDING;
+				    Tcl_DoWhenIdle(ReconfigureWindowsMenu,
+					    (ClientData) systemMenuPtr);
+				}
+			    }
+			}
+			ckfree(systemMenuName);
+		    }
+		    if (mePtr->childMenuRefPtr->menuPtr->menuFlags 
+			    & MENU_SYSTEM_MENU) {
+			systemMenu++;
+		    }
+		}
+	    }
+	}
+	if (!systemMenu) {
+	    InsertMenu(winMenuHdl, 0xFFFFFFFF, flags, itemID, lpNewItem);
+	}
+	if (itemText != NULL) {
+	    ckfree(itemText);
+	    itemText = NULL;
+	}
+    }
+
+
+    if ((menuPtr->menuType == MENUBAR) 
+	    && (menuPtr->parentTopLevelPtr != NULL)) {
+	DrawMenuBar(TkWinGetWrapperWindow(menuPtr->parentTopLevelPtr));
+	Tk_GeometryRequest(menuPtr->parentTopLevelPtr, width, height);
+    }
+    
+    menuPtr->menuFlags &= ~(MENU_RECONFIGURE_PENDING);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpPostMenu --
+ *
+ *	Posts a menu on the screen
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The menu is posted and handled.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkpPostMenu(interp, menuPtr, x, y)
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;
+    TkMenu *menuPtr;
+    int x;
+    int y;
+{
+    HMENU winMenuHdl = (HMENU) menuPtr->platformData;
+    int result, flags;
+    RECT noGoawayRect;
+    POINT point;
+    Tk_Window parentWindow = Tk_Parent(menuPtr->tkwin);
+    int oldServiceMode = Tcl_GetServiceMode();
+
+    inPostMenu++;
+
+    if (menuPtr->menuFlags & MENU_RECONFIGURE_PENDING) {
+	Tcl_CancelIdleCall(ReconfigureWindowsMenu, (ClientData) menuPtr);
+	ReconfigureWindowsMenu((ClientData) menuPtr);
+    }
+
+    result = TkPreprocessMenu(menuPtr);
+    if (result != TCL_OK) {
+	inPostMenu--;
+	return result;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * The post commands could have deleted the menu, which means
+     * we are dead and should go away.
+     */
+    
+    if (menuPtr->tkwin == NULL) {
+	inPostMenu--;
+    	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    if (NULL == parentWindow) {
+	noGoawayRect.top = y - 50;
+	noGoawayRect.bottom = y + 50;
+	noGoawayRect.left = x - 50;
+	noGoawayRect.right = x + 50;
+    } else {
+	int left, top;
+	Tk_GetRootCoords(parentWindow, &left, &top);
+	noGoawayRect.left = left;
+	noGoawayRect.top = top;
+	noGoawayRect.bottom = noGoawayRect.top + Tk_Height(parentWindow);
+	noGoawayRect.right = noGoawayRect.left + Tk_Width(parentWindow);
+    }
+
+    Tcl_SetServiceMode(TCL_SERVICE_NONE);
+    
+    /*
+     * Make an assumption here. If the right button is down,
+     * then we want to track it. Otherwise, track the left mouse button.
+     */
+
+    flags = TPM_LEFTALIGN;
+    if (GetSystemMetrics(SM_SWAPBUTTON)) {
+	if (GetAsyncKeyState(VK_LBUTTON) < 0) {
+	    flags |= TPM_RIGHTBUTTON;
+	} else {
+	    flags |= TPM_LEFTBUTTON;
+	}
+    } else {
+	if (GetAsyncKeyState(VK_RBUTTON) < 0) {
+	    flags |= TPM_RIGHTBUTTON;
+	} else {
+	    flags |= TPM_LEFTBUTTON;
+	}
+    }
+
+    TrackPopupMenu(winMenuHdl, flags, x, y, 0, 
+	    menuHWND, &noGoawayRect);
+    Tcl_SetServiceMode(oldServiceMode);
+
+    GetCursorPos(&point);
+    Tk_PointerEvent(NULL, point.x, point.y);
+
+    if (inPostMenu) {
+	inPostMenu = 0;
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpMenuNewEntry --
+ *
+ *	Adds a pointer to a new menu entry structure with the platform-
+ *	specific fields filled in.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Standard TCL error.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	A new command ID is allocated and stored in the platformEntryData
+ *	field of mePtr.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkpMenuNewEntry(mePtr)
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;
+{
+    int commandID;
+    TkMenu *menuPtr = mePtr->menuPtr;
+
+    if (GetNewID(mePtr, &commandID) != TCL_OK) {
+    	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    if (!(menuPtr->menuFlags & MENU_RECONFIGURE_PENDING)) {
+    	menuPtr->menuFlags |= MENU_RECONFIGURE_PENDING;
+    	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(ReconfigureWindowsMenu, (ClientData) menuPtr);
+    }
+    
+    mePtr->platformEntryData = (TkMenuPlatformEntryData) commandID;
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWinMenuProc --
+ *
+ *	The window proc for the dummy window we put popups in. This allows
+ *	is to post a popup whether or not we know what the parent window
+ *	is.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns whatever is appropriate for the message in question.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Normal side-effect for windows messages.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static LRESULT CALLBACK
+TkWinMenuProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
+    HWND hwnd;
+    UINT message;
+    WPARAM wParam;
+    LPARAM lParam;
+{
+    LRESULT lResult;
+
+    if (!TkWinHandleMenuEvent(&hwnd, &message, &wParam, &lParam, &lResult)) {
+	lResult = DefWindowProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam);
+    }
+    return lResult;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWinHandleMenuEvent --
+ *
+ *	Filters out menu messages from messages passed to a top-level.
+ *	Will respond appropriately to WM_COMMAND, WM_MENUSELECT,
+ *	WM_MEASUREITEM, WM_DRAWITEM
+ *
+ * Result:
+ *	Returns 1 if this handled the message; 0 if it did not.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	All of the parameters may be modified so that the caller can
+ *	think it is getting a different message. plResult points to
+ *	the result that should be returned to windows from this message.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkWinHandleMenuEvent(phwnd, pMessage, pwParam, plParam, plResult)
+    HWND *phwnd;
+    UINT *pMessage;
+    WPARAM *pwParam;
+    LPARAM *plParam;
+    LRESULT *plResult;
+{
+    Tcl_HashEntry *hashEntryPtr;
+    int returnResult = 0;
+    TkMenu *menuPtr;
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;
+
+    switch (*pMessage) {
+	case WM_INITMENU:
+	    TkMenuInit();
+	    hashEntryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&winMenuTable, (char *) *pwParam);
+	    if (hashEntryPtr != NULL) {
+		oldServiceMode = Tcl_SetServiceMode(TCL_SERVICE_ALL);
+		menuPtr = (TkMenu *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hashEntryPtr);
+		modalMenuPtr = menuPtr;
+		if (menuPtr->menuFlags & MENU_RECONFIGURE_PENDING) {
+		    Tcl_CancelIdleCall(ReconfigureWindowsMenu, 
+			    (ClientData) menuPtr);
+		    ReconfigureWindowsMenu((ClientData) menuPtr);
+		}
+		if (!inPostMenu) {
+		    TkPreprocessMenu(menuPtr);
+		}
+		TkActivateMenuEntry(menuPtr, -1);
+		*plResult = 0;
+		returnResult = 1;
+	    } else {
+		modalMenuPtr = NULL;
+	    }
+	    break;
+
+	case WM_SYSCOMMAND:
+	case WM_COMMAND: {
+	    TkMenuInit();
+	    if (HIWORD(*pwParam) == 0) {
+		hashEntryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&commandTable,
+			(char *)LOWORD(*pwParam));
+		if (hashEntryPtr != NULL) {
+		    mePtr = (TkMenuEntry *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hashEntryPtr);
+		    if (mePtr != NULL) {
+			TkMenuReferences *menuRefPtr;
+			TkMenuEntry *parentEntryPtr;
+
+			/*
+			 * We have to set the parent of this menu to be active
+			 * if this is a submenu so that tearoffs will get the
+			 * correct title.
+			 */
+
+			menuPtr = mePtr->menuPtr;
+    			menuRefPtr = TkFindMenuReferences(menuPtr->interp,
+    	    			Tk_PathName(menuPtr->tkwin));
+    			if ((menuRefPtr != NULL) && (menuRefPtr->parentEntryPtr 
+				!= NULL)) {
+    	    		    for (parentEntryPtr = menuRefPtr->parentEntryPtr;
+    	    	    		    strcmp(parentEntryPtr->name, 
+				    Tk_PathName(menuPtr->tkwin)) != 0; 
+				    parentEntryPtr = parentEntryPtr->nextCascadePtr) {
+
+				/*
+				 * Empty loop body.
+				 */
+
+    	    		    }
+    	    		    if (parentEntryPtr->menuPtr
+    	    		    	    ->entries[parentEntryPtr->index]->state
+    	    		    	    != tkDisabledUid) {
+			    	TkActivateMenuEntry(parentEntryPtr->menuPtr, 
+				    	parentEntryPtr->index);
+			    }
+    			}
+
+		    	TkInvokeMenu(mePtr->menuPtr->interp,
+				menuPtr, mePtr->index);
+		    }
+		    *plResult = 0;
+		    returnResult = 1;
+		}
+	    }
+	    break;
+	}
+
+
+	case WM_MENUCHAR: {
+	    unsigned char menuChar = (unsigned char) LOWORD(*pwParam);
+	    hashEntryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&winMenuTable, (char *) *plParam);
+	    if (hashEntryPtr != NULL) {
+		int i;
+
+		*plResult = 0;
+		menuPtr = (TkMenu *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hashEntryPtr);
+		for (i = 0; i < menuPtr->numEntries; i++) {
+		    int underline = menuPtr->entries[i]->underline;
+		    if ((-1 != underline) 
+			    && (NULL != menuPtr->entries[i]->label)
+			    && (CharUpper((LPTSTR) menuChar) 
+			    == CharUpper((LPTSTR) (unsigned char) menuPtr
+			    ->entries[i]->label[underline]))) {
+			*plResult = (2 << 16) | i;
+			break;
+		    }
+		}
+		returnResult = 1;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	}
+
+	case WM_MEASUREITEM: {
+	    LPMEASUREITEMSTRUCT itemPtr = (LPMEASUREITEMSTRUCT) *plParam;
+    
+	    if (itemPtr != NULL) {
+		mePtr = (TkMenuEntry *) itemPtr->itemData;
+		menuPtr = mePtr->menuPtr;
+
+		TkRecomputeMenu(menuPtr);
+		itemPtr->itemHeight = mePtr->height;
+		itemPtr->itemWidth = mePtr->width;
+		if (mePtr->hideMargin) {
+		    itemPtr->itemWidth += 2 - indicatorDimensions[0];
+		} else {
+		    itemPtr->itemWidth += 2 * menuPtr->activeBorderWidth;
+		}
+		*plResult = 1;
+		returnResult = 1;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	}
+	
+	case WM_DRAWITEM: {
+	    TkWinDrawable *twdPtr;
+	    LPDRAWITEMSTRUCT itemPtr = (LPDRAWITEMSTRUCT) *plParam;
+	    Tk_FontMetrics fontMetrics;
+
+	    if (itemPtr != NULL) {
+		mePtr = (TkMenuEntry *) itemPtr->itemData;
+		menuPtr = mePtr->menuPtr;
+		twdPtr = (TkWinDrawable *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkWinDrawable));
+		twdPtr->type = TWD_WINDC;
+		twdPtr->winDC.hdc = itemPtr->hDC;
+
+		if (mePtr->state != tkDisabledUid) {
+		    if (itemPtr->itemState & ODS_SELECTED) {
+			TkActivateMenuEntry(menuPtr, mePtr->index);
+		    } else {
+			TkActivateMenuEntry(menuPtr, -1);
+		    }
+		}
+
+		Tk_GetFontMetrics(menuPtr->tkfont, &fontMetrics);
+		TkpDrawMenuEntry(mePtr, (Drawable) twdPtr, menuPtr->tkfont,
+			&fontMetrics, itemPtr->rcItem.left,
+			itemPtr->rcItem.top, itemPtr->rcItem.right
+			- itemPtr->rcItem.left, itemPtr->rcItem.bottom
+			- itemPtr->rcItem.top, 0, 0);
+
+		ckfree((char *) twdPtr);
+		*plResult = 1;
+		returnResult = 1;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	}
+
+	case WM_MENUSELECT: {
+	    UINT flags = HIWORD(*pwParam);
+
+	    TkMenuInit();
+
+	    if ((flags == 0xFFFF) && (*plParam == 0)) {
+		Tcl_SetServiceMode(oldServiceMode);
+		if (modalMenuPtr != NULL) {
+		    RecursivelyClearActiveMenu(modalMenuPtr);
+		}
+	    } else {
+		menuPtr = NULL;
+		if (*plParam != 0) {
+		    hashEntryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&winMenuTable,
+			    (char *) *plParam);
+		    if (hashEntryPtr != NULL) {
+			menuPtr = (TkMenu *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hashEntryPtr);
+		    }
+		}
+
+		if (menuPtr != NULL) {
+	    	    mePtr = NULL;
+		    if (flags != 0xFFFF) {
+			if (flags & MF_POPUP) {
+			    mePtr = menuPtr->entries[LOWORD(*pwParam)];
+			} else {
+			    hashEntryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&commandTable,
+				    (char *) LOWORD(*pwParam));
+			    if (hashEntryPtr != NULL) {
+				mePtr = (TkMenuEntry *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hashEntryPtr);
+			    }
+			}
+		    }	 
+
+		    if ((mePtr == NULL) || (mePtr->state == tkDisabledUid)) {
+			TkActivateMenuEntry(menuPtr, -1);
+		    } else {
+			TkActivateMenuEntry(menuPtr, mePtr->index);
+		    }
+		    MenuSelectEvent(menuPtr);
+		    Tcl_ServiceAll();
+		}
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+    return returnResult;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * RecursivelyClearActiveMenu --
+ *
+ *	Recursively clears the active entry in the menu's cascade hierarchy.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Generates <<MenuSelect>> virtual events.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+RecursivelyClearActiveMenu(
+    TkMenu *menuPtr)		/* The menu to reset. */
+{
+    int i;
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;
+    
+    TkActivateMenuEntry(menuPtr, -1);
+    MenuSelectEvent(menuPtr);
+    for (i = 0; i < menuPtr->numEntries; i++) {
+    	mePtr = menuPtr->entries[i];
+    	if (mePtr->type == CASCADE_ENTRY) {
+    	    if ((mePtr->childMenuRefPtr != NULL)
+    	    	    && (mePtr->childMenuRefPtr->menuPtr != NULL)) {
+    	    	RecursivelyClearActiveMenu(mePtr->childMenuRefPtr->menuPtr);
+    	    }
+    	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpSetWindowMenuBar --
+ *
+ *	Associates a given menu with a window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	On Windows and UNIX, associates the platform menu with the
+ *	platform window.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpSetWindowMenuBar(tkwin, menuPtr)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;	    /* The window we are putting the menubar into.*/
+    TkMenu *menuPtr;	    /* The menu we are inserting */
+{
+    HMENU winMenuHdl;
+
+    if (menuPtr != NULL) {
+	Tcl_HashEntry *hashEntryPtr;
+	int newEntry;
+
+	winMenuHdl = (HMENU) menuPtr->platformData;
+	hashEntryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&winMenuTable, (char *) winMenuHdl);
+	Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(hashEntryPtr);
+	DestroyMenu(winMenuHdl);
+	winMenuHdl = CreateMenu();
+	hashEntryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&winMenuTable, (char *) winMenuHdl,
+		&newEntry);
+	Tcl_SetHashValue(hashEntryPtr, (char *) menuPtr);
+	menuPtr->platformData = (TkMenuPlatformData) winMenuHdl;
+	TkWinSetMenu(tkwin, winMenuHdl);
+	if (menuPtr->menuFlags & MENU_RECONFIGURE_PENDING) {
+	    Tcl_DoWhenIdle(ReconfigureWindowsMenu, (ClientData) menuPtr);
+	    menuPtr->menuFlags |= MENU_RECONFIGURE_PENDING;
+	}
+    } else {
+	TkWinSetMenu(tkwin, NULL);
+    }
+}
+
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpSetMainMenubar --
+ *
+ *	Puts the menu associated with a window into the menubar. Should
+ *	only be called when the window is in front.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The menubar is changed.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+void
+TkpSetMainMenubar(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* The interpreter of the application */
+    Tk_Window tkwin,		/* The frame we are setting up */
+    char *menuName)		/* The name of the menu to put in front.
+    				 * If NULL, use the default menu bar.
+    				 */
+{
+    /*
+     * Nothing to do.
+     */
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * GetMenuIndicatorGeometry --
+ *
+ *	Gets the width and height of the indicator area of a menu.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	widthPtr and heightPtr are set.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+GetMenuIndicatorGeometry (
+    TkMenu *menuPtr,			/* The menu we are measuring */
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr,			/* The entry we are measuring */
+    Tk_Font tkfont,			/* Precalculated font */
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr,	/* Precalculated font metrics */
+    int *widthPtr,			/* The resulting width */
+    int *heightPtr)			/* The resulting height */
+{
+    *heightPtr = indicatorDimensions[0];
+    if (mePtr->hideMargin) {
+	*widthPtr = 0;
+    } else {
+	*widthPtr = indicatorDimensions[1] - menuPtr->borderWidth;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * GetMenuAccelGeometry --
+ *
+ *	Gets the width and height of the indicator area of a menu.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	widthPtr and heightPtr are set.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+GetMenuAccelGeometry (
+    TkMenu *menuPtr,			/* The menu we are measuring */
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr,			/* The entry we are measuring */
+    Tk_Font tkfont,			/* The precalculated font */
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr,	/* The precalculated font metrics */
+    int *widthPtr,			/* The resulting width */
+    int *heightPtr)			/* The resulting height */
+{
+    *heightPtr = fmPtr->linespace;
+    if (mePtr->type == CASCADE_ENTRY) {
+	*widthPtr = 0;
+    } else if (mePtr->accel == NULL) {
+	*widthPtr = 0;
+    } else {
+	*widthPtr = Tk_TextWidth(tkfont, mePtr->accel, mePtr->accelLength);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * GetTearoffEntryGeometry --
+ *
+ *	Gets the width and height of the indicator area of a menu.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	widthPtr and heightPtr are set.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+GetTearoffEntryGeometry (
+    TkMenu *menuPtr,			/* The menu we are measuring */
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr,			/* The entry we are measuring */
+    Tk_Font tkfont,			/* The precalculated font */
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr,	/* The precalculated font metrics */
+    int *widthPtr,			/* The resulting width */
+    int *heightPtr)			/* The resulting height */
+{
+    if (menuPtr->menuType != MASTER_MENU) {
+	*heightPtr = 0;
+    } else {
+	*heightPtr = fmPtr->linespace;
+    }
+    *widthPtr = 0;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * GetMenuSeparatorGeometry --
+ *
+ *	Gets the width and height of the indicator area of a menu.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	widthPtr and heightPtr are set.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+GetMenuSeparatorGeometry (
+    TkMenu *menuPtr,			/* The menu we are measuring */
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr,			/* The entry we are measuring */
+    Tk_Font tkfont,			/* The precalculated font */
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr,	/* The precalcualted font metrics */
+    int *widthPtr,			/* The resulting width */
+    int *heightPtr)			/* The resulting height */
+{
+    *widthPtr = 0;
+    *heightPtr = fmPtr->linespace;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * DrawWindowsSystemBitmap --
+ *
+ *	Draws the windows system bitmap given by bitmapID into the rect
+ *	given by rectPtr in the drawable. The bitmap is centered in the
+ *	rectangle. It is not clipped, so if the bitmap is bigger than
+ *	the rect it will bleed.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Drawing occurs. Some storage is allocated and released.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+DrawWindowsSystemBitmap(display, drawable, gc, rectPtr, bitmapID, alignFlags)
+    Display *display;			/* The display we are drawing into */
+    Drawable drawable;			/* The drawable we are working with */
+    GC gc;				/* The GC to draw with */
+    CONST RECT *rectPtr;		/* The rectangle to draw into */			
+    int bitmapID;			/* The windows id of the system
+					 * bitmap to draw. */
+    int alignFlags;			/* How to align the bitmap inside the
+					 * rectangle. */
+{
+    TkWinDCState state;
+    HDC hdc = TkWinGetDrawableDC(display, drawable, &state);
+    HDC scratchDC;
+    HBITMAP bitmap;
+    BITMAP bm;
+    POINT ptSize;
+    POINT ptOrg;
+    int topOffset, leftOffset;
+    
+    SetBkColor(hdc, gc->background);
+    SetTextColor(hdc, gc->foreground);
+
+    scratchDC = CreateCompatibleDC(hdc);
+    bitmap = LoadBitmap(NULL, MAKEINTRESOURCE(bitmapID));
+
+    SelectObject(scratchDC, bitmap);
+    SetMapMode(scratchDC, GetMapMode(hdc));
+    GetObject(bitmap, sizeof(BITMAP), &bm);
+    ptSize.x = bm.bmWidth;
+    ptSize.y = bm.bmHeight;
+    DPtoLP(hdc, &ptSize, 1);
+
+    ptOrg.y = ptOrg.x = 0;
+    DPtoLP(hdc, &ptOrg, 1);
+
+    if (alignFlags & ALIGN_BITMAP_TOP) {
+	topOffset = 0;
+    } else if (alignFlags & ALIGN_BITMAP_BOTTOM) {
+	topOffset = (rectPtr->bottom - rectPtr->top) - ptSize.y;
+    } else {
+	topOffset = (rectPtr->bottom - rectPtr->top) / 2 - (ptSize.y / 2);
+    }
+
+    if (alignFlags & ALIGN_BITMAP_LEFT) {
+	leftOffset = 0;
+    } else if (alignFlags & ALIGN_BITMAP_RIGHT) {
+	leftOffset = (rectPtr->right - rectPtr->left) - ptSize.x;
+    } else {
+	leftOffset = (rectPtr->right - rectPtr->left) / 2 - (ptSize.x / 2);
+    }
+    
+    BitBlt(hdc, rectPtr->left + leftOffset, rectPtr->top + topOffset, ptSize.x,
+	    ptSize.y, scratchDC, ptOrg.x, ptOrg.y, SRCCOPY);
+    DeleteDC(scratchDC);
+    DeleteObject(bitmap);
+
+    TkWinReleaseDrawableDC(drawable, hdc, &state);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * DrawMenuEntryIndicator --
+ *
+ *	This procedure draws the indicator part of a menu.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Commands are output to X to display the menu in its
+ *	current mode.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+void
+DrawMenuEntryIndicator(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, indicatorGC, tkfont, fmPtr, x,
+	y, width, height)
+    TkMenu *menuPtr;		    /* The menu we are drawing */
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;		    /* The entry we are drawing */
+    Drawable d;			    /* What we are drawing into */
+    GC gc;			    /* The gc we are drawing with */
+    GC indicatorGC;		    /* The gc for indicator objects */
+    Tk_Font tkfont;		    /* The precalculated font */
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr;    /* The precalculated font metrics */
+    int x;			    /* Left edge */
+    int y;			    /* Top edge */
+    int width;
+    int height;
+{
+    if ((mePtr->type == CHECK_BUTTON_ENTRY || 
+    	    mePtr->type == RADIO_BUTTON_ENTRY) 
+    	    && mePtr->indicatorOn
+	    && mePtr->entryFlags & ENTRY_SELECTED) {
+	RECT rect;
+	GC whichGC;
+
+	if (mePtr->state != tkNormalUid) {
+	    whichGC = gc;
+	} else {
+	    whichGC = indicatorGC;
+	}
+
+	rect.top = y;
+	rect.bottom = y + mePtr->height;
+	rect.left = menuPtr->borderWidth + menuPtr->activeBorderWidth + x;
+	rect.right = mePtr->indicatorSpace + x;
+
+	if ((mePtr->state == tkDisabledUid) && (menuPtr->disabledFg != NULL)
+		&& (versionInfo.dwMajorVersion >= 4)) {
+	    RECT hilightRect;
+	    COLORREF oldFgColor = whichGC->foreground;
+	
+	    whichGC->foreground = GetSysColor(COLOR_3DHILIGHT);
+	    hilightRect.top = rect.top + 1;
+	    hilightRect.bottom = rect.bottom + 1;
+	    hilightRect.left = rect.left + 1;
+	    hilightRect.right = rect.right + 1;
+	    DrawWindowsSystemBitmap(menuPtr->display, d, whichGC, 
+		    &hilightRect, OBM_CHECK, 0);
+	    whichGC->foreground = oldFgColor;
+	}
+
+	DrawWindowsSystemBitmap(menuPtr->display, d, whichGC, &rect, 
+		OBM_CHECK, 0);
+
+	if ((mePtr->state == tkDisabledUid) 
+		&& (menuPtr->disabledImageGC != None)
+		&& (versionInfo.dwMajorVersion < 4)) {
+	    XFillRectangle(menuPtr->display, d, menuPtr->disabledImageGC,
+		    rect.left, rect.top, rect.right, rect.bottom);
+	}
+    }    
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * DrawMenuEntryAccelerator --
+ *
+ *	This procedure draws the accelerator part of a menu. We
+ *	need to decide what to draw here. Should we replace strings
+ *	like "Control", "Command", etc?
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Commands are output to X to display the menu in its
+ *	current mode.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+DrawMenuEntryAccelerator(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, tkfont, fmPtr,
+	activeBorder, x, y, width, height, drawArrow)
+    TkMenu *menuPtr;			/* The menu we are drawing */
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;			/* The entry we are drawing */
+    Drawable d;				/* What we are drawing into */
+    GC gc;				/* The gc we are drawing with */
+    Tk_Font tkfont;			/* The precalculated font */
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr;	/* The precalculated font metrics */
+    Tk_3DBorder activeBorder;		/* The border when an item is active */
+    int x;				/* left edge */
+    int y;				/* top edge */
+    int width;				/* Width of menu entry */
+    int height;				/* Height of menu entry */
+    int drawArrow;			/* For cascade menus, whether of not
+					 * to draw the arraw. I cannot figure
+					 * out Windows' algorithm for where
+					 * to draw this. */
+{
+    int baseline;
+    int leftEdge = x + mePtr->indicatorSpace + mePtr->labelWidth;
+
+    baseline = y + (height + fmPtr->ascent - fmPtr->descent) / 2;
+
+    if ((mePtr->state == tkDisabledUid) && (menuPtr->disabledFg != NULL)
+	    && ((mePtr->accel != NULL)
+	    || ((mePtr->type == CASCADE_ENTRY) && drawArrow))) {
+	if (versionInfo.dwMajorVersion >= 4) {
+	    COLORREF oldFgColor = gc->foreground;
+	    
+	    gc->foreground = GetSysColor(COLOR_3DHILIGHT);
+	    if (mePtr->accel != NULL) {
+		Tk_DrawChars(menuPtr->display, d, gc, tkfont, mePtr->accel,
+			mePtr->accelLength, leftEdge + 1, baseline + 1);
+	    }
+
+	    if (mePtr->type == CASCADE_ENTRY) {
+		RECT rect;
+
+		rect.top = y + GetSystemMetrics(SM_CYBORDER) + 1;
+		rect.bottom = y + height - GetSystemMetrics(SM_CYBORDER) + 1;
+		rect.left = x + mePtr->indicatorSpace + mePtr->labelWidth + 1;
+		rect.right = x + width;
+		DrawWindowsSystemBitmap(menuPtr->display, d, gc, &rect, 
+			OBM_MNARROW, ALIGN_BITMAP_RIGHT);
+	    }
+	    gc->foreground = oldFgColor;
+	}
+    }
+
+    if (mePtr->accel != NULL) {
+	Tk_DrawChars(menuPtr->display, d, gc, tkfont, mePtr->accel, 
+		mePtr->accelLength, leftEdge, baseline);
+    }
+
+    if ((mePtr->state == tkDisabledUid) 
+	    && (menuPtr->disabledImageGC != None)
+	    && (versionInfo.dwMajorVersion < 4)) {
+	XFillRectangle(menuPtr->display, d, menuPtr->disabledImageGC,
+		leftEdge, y, width - mePtr->labelWidth 
+		- mePtr->indicatorSpace, height);
+    }
+
+    if ((mePtr->type == CASCADE_ENTRY) && drawArrow) {
+	RECT rect;
+
+	rect.top = y + GetSystemMetrics(SM_CYBORDER);
+	rect.bottom = y + height - GetSystemMetrics(SM_CYBORDER);
+	rect.left = x + mePtr->indicatorSpace + mePtr->labelWidth;
+	rect.right = x + width - 1;
+	DrawWindowsSystemBitmap(menuPtr->display, d, gc, &rect, OBM_MNARROW, 
+		ALIGN_BITMAP_RIGHT);
+	if ((mePtr->state == tkDisabledUid) 
+		&& (menuPtr->disabledImageGC != None)
+		&& (versionInfo.dwMajorVersion < 4)) {
+	    XFillRectangle(menuPtr->display, d, menuPtr->disabledImageGC,
+		    rect.left, rect.top, rect.right, rect.bottom);
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * DrawMenuSeparator --
+ *
+ *	The menu separator is drawn.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Commands are output to X to display the menu in its
+ *	current mode.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+void
+DrawMenuSeparator(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, tkfont, fmPtr, x, y, width, height)
+    TkMenu *menuPtr;			/* The menu we are drawing */
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;			/* The entry we are drawing */
+    Drawable d;				/* What we are drawing into */
+    GC gc;				/* The gc we are drawing with */
+    Tk_Font tkfont;			/* The precalculated font */
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr;	/* The precalculated font metrics */
+    int x;				/* left edge */
+    int y;				/* top edge */
+    int width;				/* width of item */
+    int height;				/* height of item */
+{
+    XPoint points[2];
+
+    points[0].x = x;
+    points[0].y = y + height / 2;
+    points[1].x = x + width - 1;
+    points[1].y = points[0].y;
+    Tk_Draw3DPolygon(menuPtr->tkwin, d,
+	    menuPtr->border, points, 2, 1, TK_RELIEF_RAISED);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * DrawMenuUnderline --
+ *
+ *	On appropriate platforms, draw the underline character for the
+ *	menu.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Commands are output to X to display the menu in its
+ *	current mode.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+static void
+DrawMenuUnderline(
+    TkMenu *menuPtr,			/* The menu to draw into */
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr,			/* The entry we are drawing */
+    Drawable d,				/* What we are drawing into */
+    GC gc,				/* The gc to draw into */
+    Tk_Font tkfont,			/* The precalculated font */
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr,	/* The precalculated font metrics */
+    int x,				/* Left Edge */
+    int y,				/* Top Edge */
+    int width,				/* Width of entry */
+    int height)				/* Height of entry */
+{
+    if (mePtr->underline >= 0) {
+    	Tk_UnderlineChars(menuPtr->display, d,
+    		gc, tkfont, mePtr->label, x + mePtr->indicatorSpace,
+    		y + (height + fmPtr->ascent - fmPtr->descent) / 2, 
+		mePtr->underline, mePtr->underline + 1);
+    }		
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * MenuKeyBindProc --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked when keys related to pulling
+ *	down menus is pressed. The corresponding Windows events
+ *	are generated and passed to DefWindowProc if appropriate.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Always returns TCL_OK.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The menu system may take over and process user events
+ *	for menu input.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+MenuKeyBindProc(clientData, interp, eventPtr, tkwin, keySym)
+    ClientData clientData;	/* not used in this proc */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* The interpreter of the receiving window. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* The XEvent to process */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* The window receiving the event */
+    KeySym keySym;		/* The key sym that is produced. */
+{
+    UINT scanCode;
+    UINT virtualKey;
+    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *)tkwin;
+
+    if (eventPtr->type == KeyPress) {
+	switch (keySym) {
+	case XK_Alt_L:
+	    scanCode = MapVirtualKey(VK_LMENU, 0);
+	    CallWindowProc(DefWindowProc, Tk_GetHWND(Tk_WindowId(tkwin)),
+		    WM_SYSKEYDOWN, VK_MENU, (scanCode << 16)
+		    | (1 << 29));
+	    break;
+	case XK_Alt_R:
+	    scanCode = MapVirtualKey(VK_RMENU, 0);
+	    CallWindowProc(DefWindowProc, Tk_GetHWND(Tk_WindowId(tkwin)),
+		    WM_SYSKEYDOWN, VK_MENU, (scanCode << 16)
+		    | (1 << 29) | (1 << 24));
+	    break;
+	case XK_F10:
+	    scanCode = MapVirtualKey(VK_F10, 0);
+	    CallWindowProc(DefWindowProc, Tk_GetHWND(Tk_WindowId(tkwin)),
+		    WM_SYSKEYDOWN, VK_F10, (scanCode << 16));
+	    break;
+	default:
+	    virtualKey = XKeysymToKeycode(winPtr->display, keySym);
+	    scanCode = MapVirtualKey(virtualKey, 0);
+	    if (0 != scanCode) {
+		CallWindowProc(DefWindowProc, Tk_GetHWND(Tk_WindowId(tkwin)),
+			WM_SYSKEYDOWN, virtualKey, ((scanCode << 16)
+			| (1 << 29)));
+	    }
+	}
+    } else if (eventPtr->type == KeyRelease) {
+	switch (keySym) {
+	case XK_Alt_L:
+	    scanCode = MapVirtualKey(VK_LMENU, 0);
+	    CallWindowProc(DefWindowProc, Tk_GetHWND(Tk_WindowId(tkwin)),
+		    WM_SYSKEYUP, VK_MENU, (scanCode << 16)
+		    | (1 << 29) | (1 << 30) | (1 << 31));
+	    break;
+	case XK_Alt_R:
+	    scanCode = MapVirtualKey(VK_RMENU, 0);
+	    CallWindowProc(DefWindowProc, Tk_GetHWND(Tk_WindowId(tkwin)),
+		    WM_SYSKEYUP, VK_MENU, (scanCode << 16) | (1 << 24)
+		    | (0x111 << 29) | (1 << 30) | (1 << 31));
+	    break;
+	case XK_F10:
+	    scanCode = MapVirtualKey(VK_F10, 0);
+	    CallWindowProc(DefWindowProc, Tk_GetHWND(Tk_WindowId(tkwin)),
+		    WM_SYSKEYUP, VK_F10, (scanCode << 16)
+		    | (1 << 30) | (1 << 31));
+	    break;
+	default:
+	    virtualKey = XKeysymToKeycode(winPtr->display, keySym);
+	    scanCode = MapVirtualKey(virtualKey, 0);
+	    if (0 != scanCode) {
+		CallWindowProc(DefWindowProc, Tk_GetHWND(Tk_WindowId(tkwin)),
+			WM_SYSKEYUP, virtualKey, ((scanCode << 16)
+			| (1 << 29) | (1 << 30) | (1 << 31)));
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}   
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpInitializeMenuBindings --
+ *
+ *	For every interp, initializes the bindings for Windows
+ *	menus. Does nothing on Mac or XWindows.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	C-level bindings are setup for the interp which will
+ *	handle Alt-key sequences for menus without beeping
+ *	or interfering with user-defined Alt-key bindings.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpInitializeMenuBindings(interp, bindingTable)
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		    /* The interpreter to set. */
+    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable;   /* The table to add to. */
+{
+    Tk_Uid uid = Tk_GetUid("all");
+
+    /*
+     * We need to set up the bindings for menubars. These have to
+     * recreate windows events, so we need to have a C-level
+     * binding for this. We have to generate the WM_SYSKEYDOWNS
+     * and WM_SYSKEYUPs appropriately.
+     */
+    
+    TkCreateBindingProcedure(interp, bindingTable, (ClientData)uid, 
+	    "<Alt_L>", MenuKeyBindProc, NULL, NULL);
+    TkCreateBindingProcedure(interp, bindingTable, (ClientData)uid,
+	    "<KeyRelease-Alt_L>", MenuKeyBindProc, NULL, NULL);
+    TkCreateBindingProcedure(interp, bindingTable, (ClientData)uid, 
+	    "<Alt_R>", MenuKeyBindProc, NULL, NULL);
+    TkCreateBindingProcedure(interp, bindingTable, (ClientData)uid,
+	    "<KeyRelease-Alt_R>", MenuKeyBindProc, NULL, NULL);
+    TkCreateBindingProcedure(interp, bindingTable, (ClientData)uid,
+	    "<Alt-KeyPress>", MenuKeyBindProc, NULL, NULL);
+    TkCreateBindingProcedure(interp, bindingTable, (ClientData)uid,
+	    "<Alt-KeyRelease>", MenuKeyBindProc, NULL, NULL);
+    TkCreateBindingProcedure(interp, bindingTable, (ClientData)uid,
+	    "<KeyPress-F10>", MenuKeyBindProc, NULL, NULL);
+    TkCreateBindingProcedure(interp, bindingTable, (ClientData)uid,
+	    "<KeyRelease-F10>", MenuKeyBindProc, NULL, NULL);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * DrawMenuEntryLabel --
+ *
+ *	This procedure draws the label part of a menu.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Commands are output to X to display the menu in its
+ *	current mode.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+DrawMenuEntryLabel(
+    TkMenu *menuPtr,			/* The menu we are drawing */
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr,			/* The entry we are drawing */
+    Drawable d,				/* What we are drawing into */
+    GC gc,				/* The gc we are drawing into */
+    Tk_Font tkfont,			/* The precalculated font */
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr,	/* The precalculated font metrics */
+    int x,				/* left edge */
+    int y,				/* right edge */
+    int width,				/* width of entry */
+    int height)				/* height of entry */
+{
+    int baseline;
+    int indicatorSpace =  mePtr->indicatorSpace;
+    int leftEdge = x + indicatorSpace + menuPtr->activeBorderWidth;
+    int imageHeight, imageWidth;
+
+    /*
+     * Draw label or bitmap or image for entry.
+     */
+
+    baseline = y + (height + fmPtr->ascent - fmPtr->descent) / 2;
+    if (mePtr->image != NULL) {
+    	Tk_SizeOfImage(mePtr->image, &imageWidth, &imageHeight);
+    	if ((mePtr->selectImage != NULL)
+	    	&& (mePtr->entryFlags & ENTRY_SELECTED)) {
+	    Tk_RedrawImage(mePtr->selectImage, 0, 0,
+		    imageWidth, imageHeight, d, leftEdge,
+	            (int) (y + (mePtr->height - imageHeight)/2));
+    	} else {
+	    Tk_RedrawImage(mePtr->image, 0, 0, imageWidth,
+		    imageHeight, d, leftEdge,
+		    (int) (y + (mePtr->height - imageHeight)/2));
+    	}
+    } else if (mePtr->bitmap != None) {
+    	int width, height;
+
+        Tk_SizeOfBitmap(menuPtr->display,
+	        mePtr->bitmap, &width, &height);
+    	XCopyPlane(menuPtr->display,
+	    	mePtr->bitmap, d,
+	    	gc, 0, 0, (unsigned) width, (unsigned) height, leftEdge,
+	    	(int) (y + (mePtr->height - height)/2), 1);
+    } else {
+    	if (mePtr->labelLength > 0) {
+	    Tk_DrawChars(menuPtr->display, d, gc,
+		    tkfont, mePtr->label, mePtr->labelLength,
+		    leftEdge, baseline);
+	    DrawMenuUnderline(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, tkfont, fmPtr, x, y,
+		    width, height);
+    	}
+    }
+
+    if (mePtr->state == tkDisabledUid) {
+	if (menuPtr->disabledFg == NULL) {
+	    XFillRectangle(menuPtr->display, d, menuPtr->disabledGC, x, y,
+		    (unsigned) width, (unsigned) height);
+	} else if ((mePtr->image != NULL) 
+		&& (menuPtr->disabledImageGC != None)) {
+	    XFillRectangle(menuPtr->display, d, menuPtr->disabledImageGC,
+		    leftEdge,
+		    (int) (y + (mePtr->height - imageHeight)/2),
+		    (unsigned) imageWidth, (unsigned) imageHeight);
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpComputeMenubarGeometry --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked to recompute the size and
+ *	layout of a menu that is a menubar clone.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Fields of menu entries are changed to reflect their
+ *	current positions, and the size of the menu window
+ *	itself may be changed.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpComputeMenubarGeometry(menuPtr)
+    TkMenu *menuPtr;		/* Structure describing menu. */
+{
+    TkpComputeStandardMenuGeometry(menuPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * DrawTearoffEntry --
+ *
+ *	This procedure draws the background part of a menu.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Commands are output to X to display the menu in its
+ *	current mode.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+DrawTearoffEntry(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, tkfont, fmPtr, x, y, width, height)
+    TkMenu *menuPtr;			/* The menu we are drawing */
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;			/* The entry we are drawing */
+    Drawable d;				/* The drawable we are drawing into */
+    GC gc;				/* The gc we are drawing with */
+    Tk_Font tkfont;			/* The font we are drawing with */
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr;	/* The metrics we are drawing with */
+    int x;
+    int y;
+    int width;
+    int height;
+{
+    XPoint points[2];
+    int segmentWidth, maxX;
+
+    if (menuPtr->menuType != MASTER_MENU) {
+	return;
+    }
+    
+    points[0].x = x;
+    points[0].y = y + height/2;
+    points[1].y = points[0].y;
+    segmentWidth = 6;
+    maxX  = width - 1;
+
+    while (points[0].x < maxX) {
+	points[1].x = points[0].x + segmentWidth;
+	if (points[1].x > maxX) {
+	    points[1].x = maxX;
+	}
+	Tk_Draw3DPolygon(menuPtr->tkwin, d, menuPtr->border, points, 2, 1,
+		TK_RELIEF_RAISED);
+	points[0].x += 2*segmentWidth;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpConfigureMenuEntry --
+ *
+ *	Processes configurations for menu entries.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns standard TCL result. If TCL_ERROR is returned, then
+ *	interp->result contains an error message.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Configuration information get set for mePtr; old resources
+ *	get freed, if any need it.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkpConfigureMenuEntry(mePtr)
+    register TkMenuEntry *mePtr;	/* Information about menu entry;  may
+					 * or may not already have values for
+					 * some fields. */
+{
+    TkMenu *menuPtr = mePtr->menuPtr;
+
+    if (!(menuPtr->menuFlags & MENU_RECONFIGURE_PENDING)) {
+	menuPtr->menuFlags |= MENU_RECONFIGURE_PENDING;
+	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(ReconfigureWindowsMenu, (ClientData) menuPtr);
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpDrawMenuEntry --
+ *
+ *	Draws the given menu entry at the given coordinates with the
+ *	given attributes.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	X Server commands are executed to display the menu entry.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpDrawMenuEntry(mePtr, d, tkfont, menuMetricsPtr, x, y, width, height, 
+	strictMotif, drawArrow)
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;		    /* The entry to draw */
+    Drawable d;			    /* What to draw into */
+    Tk_Font tkfont;		    /* Precalculated font for menu */
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *menuMetricsPtr;
+				    /* Precalculated metrics for menu */
+    int x;			    /* X-coordinate of topleft of entry */
+    int y;			    /* Y-coordinate of topleft of entry */
+    int width;			    /* Width of the entry rectangle */
+    int height;			    /* Height of the current rectangle */
+    int strictMotif;		    /* Boolean flag */
+    int drawArrow;		    /* Whether or not to draw the cascade
+				     * arrow for cascade items. Only applies
+				     * to Windows. */
+{
+    GC gc, indicatorGC;
+    TkMenu *menuPtr = mePtr->menuPtr;
+    Tk_3DBorder bgBorder, activeBorder;
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr;
+    Tk_FontMetrics entryMetrics;
+    int padY = (menuPtr->menuType == MENUBAR) ? 3 : 0;
+    int adjustedY = y + padY;
+    int adjustedHeight = height - 2 * padY;
+
+    /*
+     * Choose the gc for drawing the foreground part of the entry.
+     */
+
+    if ((mePtr->state == tkActiveUid)
+	    && !strictMotif) {
+	gc = mePtr->activeGC;
+	if (gc == NULL) {
+	    gc = menuPtr->activeGC;
+	}
+    } else {
+    	TkMenuEntry *cascadeEntryPtr;
+    	int parentDisabled = 0;
+    	
+    	for (cascadeEntryPtr = menuPtr->menuRefPtr->parentEntryPtr;
+    		cascadeEntryPtr != NULL;
+    		cascadeEntryPtr = cascadeEntryPtr->nextCascadePtr) {
+    	    if (strcmp(cascadeEntryPtr->name, 
+    	    	    Tk_PathName(menuPtr->tkwin)) == 0) {
+    	    	if (cascadeEntryPtr->state == tkDisabledUid) {
+    	    	    parentDisabled = 1;
+    	    	}
+    	    	break;
+    	    }
+    	}
+
+	if (((parentDisabled || (mePtr->state == tkDisabledUid)))
+		&& (menuPtr->disabledFg != NULL)) {
+	    gc = mePtr->disabledGC;
+	    if (gc == NULL) {
+		gc = menuPtr->disabledGC;
+	    }
+	} else {
+	    gc = mePtr->textGC;
+	    if (gc == NULL) {
+		gc = menuPtr->textGC;
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+    indicatorGC = mePtr->indicatorGC;
+    if (indicatorGC == NULL) {
+	indicatorGC = menuPtr->indicatorGC;
+    }
+	    
+    bgBorder = mePtr->border;
+    if (bgBorder == NULL) {
+	bgBorder = menuPtr->border;
+    }
+    if (strictMotif) {
+	activeBorder = bgBorder;
+    } else {
+	activeBorder = mePtr->activeBorder;
+	if (activeBorder == NULL) {
+	    activeBorder = menuPtr->activeBorder;
+	}
+    }
+
+    if (mePtr->tkfont == NULL) {
+	fmPtr = menuMetricsPtr;
+    } else {
+	tkfont = mePtr->tkfont;
+	Tk_GetFontMetrics(tkfont, &entryMetrics);
+	fmPtr = &entryMetrics;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Need to draw the entire background, including padding. On Unix,
+     * for menubars, we have to draw the rest of the entry taking
+     * into account the padding.
+     */
+    
+    DrawMenuEntryBackground(menuPtr, mePtr, d, activeBorder, 
+	    bgBorder, x, y, width, height);
+    
+    if (mePtr->type == SEPARATOR_ENTRY) {
+	DrawMenuSeparator(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, tkfont, 
+		fmPtr, x, adjustedY, width, adjustedHeight);
+    } else if (mePtr->type == TEAROFF_ENTRY) {
+	DrawTearoffEntry(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, tkfont, fmPtr, x, adjustedY,
+		width, adjustedHeight);
+    } else {
+	DrawMenuEntryLabel(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, tkfont, fmPtr, x, adjustedY,
+		width, adjustedHeight);
+	DrawMenuEntryAccelerator(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, tkfont, fmPtr,
+		activeBorder, x, adjustedY, width, adjustedHeight, drawArrow);
+	if (!mePtr->hideMargin) {
+	    DrawMenuEntryIndicator(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, indicatorGC, tkfont,
+		    fmPtr, x, adjustedY, width, adjustedHeight);
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * GetMenuLabelGeometry --
+ *
+ *	Figures out the size of the label portion of a menu item.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	widthPtr and heightPtr are filled in with the correct geometry
+ *	information.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+GetMenuLabelGeometry(mePtr, tkfont, fmPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr)
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;			/* The entry we are computing */
+    Tk_Font tkfont;			/* The precalculated font */
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr;	/* The precalculated metrics */
+    int *widthPtr;			/* The resulting width of the label
+					 * portion */
+    int *heightPtr;			/* The resulting height of the label
+					 * portion */
+{
+    TkMenu *menuPtr = mePtr->menuPtr;
+ 
+    if (mePtr->image != NULL) {
+    	Tk_SizeOfImage(mePtr->image, widthPtr, heightPtr);
+    } else if (mePtr->bitmap != (Pixmap) NULL) {
+    	Tk_SizeOfBitmap(menuPtr->display, mePtr->bitmap, widthPtr, heightPtr);
+    } else {
+    	*heightPtr = fmPtr->linespace;
+    	
+    	if (mePtr->label != NULL) {
+    	    *widthPtr = Tk_TextWidth(tkfont, mePtr->label, mePtr->labelLength);
+    	} else {
+    	    *widthPtr = 0;
+    	}
+    }
+    *heightPtr += 1;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * DrawMenuEntryBackground --
+ *
+ *	This procedure draws the background part of a menu.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Commands are output to X to display the menu in its
+ *	current mode.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+DrawMenuEntryBackground(
+    TkMenu *menuPtr,			/* The menu we are drawing. */
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr,			/* The entry we are drawing. */
+    Drawable d,				/* What we are drawing into */
+    Tk_3DBorder activeBorder,		/* Border for active items */
+    Tk_3DBorder bgBorder,		/* Border for the background */
+    int x,				/* left edge */
+    int y,				/* top edge */
+    int width,				/* width of rectangle to draw */
+    int height)				/* height of rectangle to draw */
+{
+    if (mePtr->state == tkActiveUid) {
+	bgBorder = activeBorder;
+    }
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(menuPtr->tkwin, d, bgBorder,
+    	    x, y, width, height, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpComputeStandardMenuGeometry --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked to recompute the size and
+ *	layout of a menu that is not a menubar clone.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Fields of menu entries are changed to reflect their
+ *	current positions, and the size of the menu window
+ *	itself may be changed.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpComputeStandardMenuGeometry(
+    TkMenu *menuPtr)		/* Structure describing menu. */
+{
+    Tk_Font tkfont;
+    Tk_FontMetrics menuMetrics, entryMetrics, *fmPtr;
+    int x, y, height, width, indicatorSpace, labelWidth, accelWidth;
+    int windowWidth, windowHeight, accelSpace;
+    int i, j, lastColumnBreak = 0;
+    
+    if (menuPtr->tkwin == NULL) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    x = y = menuPtr->borderWidth;
+    indicatorSpace = labelWidth = accelWidth = 0;
+    windowHeight = 0;
+
+    /*
+     * On the Mac especially, getting font metrics can be quite slow,
+     * so we want to do it intelligently. We are going to precalculate
+     * them and pass them down to all of the measuring and drawing
+     * routines. We will measure the font metrics of the menu once.
+     * If an entry does not have its own font set, then we give
+     * the geometry/drawing routines the menu's font and metrics.
+     * If an entry has its own font, we will measure that font and
+     * give all of the geometry/drawing the entry's font and metrics.
+     */
+
+    Tk_GetFontMetrics(menuPtr->tkfont, &menuMetrics);
+    accelSpace = Tk_TextWidth(menuPtr->tkfont, "M", 1);
+
+    for (i = 0; i < menuPtr->numEntries; i++) {
+    	tkfont = menuPtr->entries[i]->tkfont;
+    	if (tkfont == NULL) {
+    	    tkfont = menuPtr->tkfont;
+    	    fmPtr = &menuMetrics;
+    	} else {
+    	    Tk_GetFontMetrics(tkfont, &entryMetrics);
+    	    fmPtr = &entryMetrics;
+    	}
+    	
+	if ((i > 0) && menuPtr->entries[i]->columnBreak) {
+	    if (accelWidth != 0) {
+		labelWidth += accelSpace;
+	    }
+	    for (j = lastColumnBreak; j < i; j++) {
+		menuPtr->entries[j]->indicatorSpace = indicatorSpace;
+		menuPtr->entries[j]->labelWidth = labelWidth;
+		menuPtr->entries[j]->width = indicatorSpace + labelWidth
+			+ accelWidth + 2 * menuPtr->activeBorderWidth;
+		menuPtr->entries[j]->x = x;
+		menuPtr->entries[j]->entryFlags &= ~ENTRY_LAST_COLUMN;
+	    }
+	    x += indicatorSpace + labelWidth + accelWidth
+		    + 2 * menuPtr->borderWidth;
+	    indicatorSpace = labelWidth = accelWidth = 0;
+	    lastColumnBreak = i;
+	    y = menuPtr->borderWidth;
+	}
+
+	if (menuPtr->entries[i]->type == SEPARATOR_ENTRY) {
+	    GetMenuSeparatorGeometry(menuPtr, menuPtr->entries[i], tkfont,
+	    	    fmPtr, &width, &height);
+	    menuPtr->entries[i]->height = height;
+	} else if (menuPtr->entries[i]->type == TEAROFF_ENTRY) {
+	    GetTearoffEntryGeometry(menuPtr, menuPtr->entries[i], tkfont, 
+	    	    fmPtr, &width, &height);
+	    menuPtr->entries[i]->height = height;
+	} else {
+	    
+	    /*
+	     * For each entry, compute the height required by that
+	     * particular entry, plus three widths:  the width of the
+	     * label, the width to allow for an indicator to be displayed
+	     * to the left of the label (if any), and the width of the
+	     * accelerator to be displayed to the right of the label
+	     * (if any).  These sizes depend, of course, on the type
+	     * of the entry.
+	     */
+	    
+	    GetMenuLabelGeometry(menuPtr->entries[i], tkfont, fmPtr, &width,
+	    	    &height);
+	    menuPtr->entries[i]->height = height;
+	    if (width > labelWidth) {
+	    	labelWidth = width;
+	    }
+	
+	    GetMenuAccelGeometry(menuPtr, menuPtr->entries[i], tkfont,
+		    fmPtr, &width, &height);
+	    if (height > menuPtr->entries[i]->height) {
+	    	menuPtr->entries[i]->height = height;
+	    }
+	    if (width > accelWidth) {
+	    	accelWidth = width;
+	    }
+
+	    GetMenuIndicatorGeometry(menuPtr, menuPtr->entries[i], tkfont, 
+	    	    fmPtr, &width, &height);
+	    if (height > menuPtr->entries[i]->height) {
+	    	menuPtr->entries[i]->height = height;
+	    }
+	    if (width > indicatorSpace) {
+	    	indicatorSpace = width;
+	    }
+
+	    menuPtr->entries[i]->height += 2 * menuPtr->activeBorderWidth + 1;
+    	}
+        menuPtr->entries[i]->y = y;
+	y += menuPtr->entries[i]->height;
+	if (y > windowHeight) {
+	    windowHeight = y;
+	}
+    }
+
+    if (accelWidth != 0) {
+	labelWidth += accelSpace;
+    }
+    for (j = lastColumnBreak; j < menuPtr->numEntries; j++) {
+	menuPtr->entries[j]->indicatorSpace = indicatorSpace;
+	menuPtr->entries[j]->labelWidth = labelWidth;
+	menuPtr->entries[j]->width = indicatorSpace + labelWidth
+		+ accelWidth + 2 * menuPtr->activeBorderWidth;
+	menuPtr->entries[j]->x = x;
+	menuPtr->entries[j]->entryFlags |= ENTRY_LAST_COLUMN;
+    }
+    windowWidth = x + indicatorSpace + labelWidth + accelWidth + accelSpace
+	    + 2 * menuPtr->activeBorderWidth
+	    + 2 * menuPtr->borderWidth;
+
+
+    windowHeight += menuPtr->borderWidth;
+    
+    /*
+     * The X server doesn't like zero dimensions, so round up to at least
+     * 1 (a zero-sized menu should never really occur, anyway).
+     */
+
+    if (windowWidth <= 0) {
+	windowWidth = 1;
+    }
+    if (windowHeight <= 0) {
+	windowHeight = 1;
+    }
+    menuPtr->totalWidth = windowWidth;
+    menuPtr->totalHeight = windowHeight;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * MenuSelectEvent --
+ *
+ *	Generates a "MenuSelect" virtual event. This can be used to
+ *	do context-sensitive menu help.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Places a virtual event on the event queue.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+MenuSelectEvent(
+    TkMenu *menuPtr)		/* the menu we have selected. */
+{
+    XVirtualEvent event;
+    POINTS rootPoint;
+    DWORD msgPos;
+   
+    event.type = VirtualEvent;
+    event.serial = menuPtr->display->request;
+    event.send_event = 0;
+    event.display = menuPtr->display;
+    Tk_MakeWindowExist(menuPtr->tkwin);
+    event.event = Tk_WindowId(menuPtr->tkwin);
+    event.root = XRootWindow(menuPtr->display, 0);
+    event.subwindow = None;
+    event.time = TkpGetMS();
+    
+    msgPos = GetMessagePos();
+    rootPoint = MAKEPOINTS(msgPos);
+    event.x_root = rootPoint.x;
+    event.y_root = rootPoint.y;
+    event.state = TkWinGetModifierState();
+    event.same_screen = 1;
+    event.name = Tk_GetUid("MenuSelect");
+    Tk_QueueWindowEvent((XEvent *) &event, TCL_QUEUE_TAIL);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpMenuNotifyToplevelCreate --
+ *
+ *	This routine reconfigures the menu and the clones indicated by
+ *	menuName becuase a toplevel has been created and any system
+ *	menus need to be created.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	An idle handler is set up to do the reconfiguration.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpMenuNotifyToplevelCreate(
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,			/* The interp the menu lives in. */
+    char *menuName)			/* The name of the menu to 
+					 * reconfigure. */
+{
+    TkMenuReferences *menuRefPtr;
+    TkMenu *menuPtr;
+
+    if ((menuName != NULL) && (menuName[0] != '\0')) {
+	menuRefPtr = TkFindMenuReferences(interp, menuName);
+	if ((menuRefPtr != NULL) && (menuRefPtr->menuPtr != NULL)) {
+	    for (menuPtr = menuRefPtr->menuPtr->masterMenuPtr; menuPtr != NULL;
+		    menuPtr = menuPtr->nextInstancePtr) {
+		if ((menuPtr->menuType == MENUBAR) 
+			&& !(menuPtr->menuFlags & MENU_RECONFIGURE_PENDING)) {
+		    menuPtr->menuFlags |= MENU_RECONFIGURE_PENDING;
+		    Tcl_DoWhenIdle(ReconfigureWindowsMenu, 
+			    (ClientData) menuPtr);
+		}
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * MenuExitHandler --
+ *
+ *	Throws away the utility window needed for menus and unregisters
+ *	the class.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Menus have to be reinitialized next time.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+MenuExitHandler(
+    ClientData clientData)	    /* Not used */
+{
+    DestroyWindow(menuHWND);
+    UnregisterClass(MENU_CLASS_NAME, Tk_GetHINSTANCE());
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpMenuInit --
+ *
+ *	Sets up the hash tables and the variables used by the menu package.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	lastMenuID gets initialized, and the parent hash and the command hash
+ *	are allocated.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpMenuInit()
+{
+    WNDCLASS wndClass;
+    char sizeString[4];
+    char faceName[LF_FACESIZE];
+    HDC scratchDC;
+    Tcl_DString boldItalicDString;
+    int bold = 0; 
+    int italic = 0;
+    int i;
+    TEXTMETRIC tm;
+
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&winMenuTable, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS);
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&commandTable, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS);
+ 
+    wndClass.style = CS_OWNDC;
+    wndClass.lpfnWndProc = TkWinMenuProc;
+    wndClass.cbClsExtra = 0;
+    wndClass.cbWndExtra = 0;
+    wndClass.hInstance = Tk_GetHINSTANCE();
+    wndClass.hIcon = NULL;
+    wndClass.hCursor = NULL;
+    wndClass.hbrBackground = (HBRUSH)(COLOR_WINDOW + 1);
+    wndClass.lpszMenuName = NULL;
+    wndClass.lpszClassName = MENU_CLASS_NAME;
+    RegisterClass(&wndClass);
+
+    menuHWND = CreateWindow(MENU_CLASS_NAME, "MenuWindow", WS_POPUP,
+	0, 0, 10, 10, NULL, NULL, Tk_GetHINSTANCE(), NULL);
+
+    Tcl_CreateExitHandler(MenuExitHandler, (ClientData) NULL);
+
+    versionInfo.dwOSVersionInfoSize = sizeof(versionInfo);
+
+    /*
+     * If GetVersionEx fails, it means that the version info record
+     * is too big for what is compiled. Should never happen, but if
+     * it does, we are later than Windows 95 or NT 4.0.
+     */
+
+    if (!GetVersionEx(&versionInfo)) {
+	versionInfo.dwMajorVersion = 4;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Set all of the default options. The loop will terminate when we run 
+     * out of options via a break statement.
+     */
+
+    for (i = 0; ; i++) {
+	if (tkMenuConfigSpecs[i].type == TK_CONFIG_END) {
+	    break;
+	}
+
+	if ((strcmp(tkMenuConfigSpecs[i].dbName,
+		"activeBorderWidth") == 0) ||
+		(strcmp(tkMenuConfigSpecs[i].dbName, "borderWidth") == 0)) {
+	    int borderWidth;
+
+	    borderWidth = GetSystemMetrics(SM_CXBORDER);
+	    if (GetSystemMetrics(SM_CYBORDER) > borderWidth) {
+		borderWidth = GetSystemMetrics(SM_CYBORDER);
+	    }
+	    sprintf(borderString, "%d", borderWidth);
+	    tkMenuConfigSpecs[i].defValue = borderString;
+	} else if ((strcmp(tkMenuConfigSpecs[i].dbName, "font") == 0)) {
+	    int pointSize;
+	    HFONT menuFont;
+
+	    scratchDC = CreateDC("DISPLAY", NULL, NULL, NULL);
+	    Tcl_DStringInit(&menuFontDString);
+
+	    if (versionInfo.dwMajorVersion >= 4) {
+		NONCLIENTMETRICS ncMetrics;
+
+		ncMetrics.cbSize = sizeof(ncMetrics);
+		SystemParametersInfo(SPI_GETNONCLIENTMETRICS, sizeof(ncMetrics),
+			&ncMetrics, 0);
+		menuFont = CreateFontIndirect(&ncMetrics.lfMenuFont);
+	    } else {
+		menuFont = GetStockObject(SYSTEM_FONT);
+	    }
+	    SelectObject(scratchDC, menuFont);
+	    GetTextMetrics(scratchDC, &tm);
+	    GetTextFace(scratchDC, sizeof(menuFontDString), faceName);
+	    pointSize = MulDiv(tm.tmHeight - tm.tmInternalLeading,
+		    72, GetDeviceCaps(scratchDC, LOGPIXELSY));
+	    if (tm.tmWeight >= 700) {
+		bold = 1;
+	    }
+	    if (tm.tmItalic) {
+		italic = 1;
+	    }
+
+	    SelectObject(scratchDC, GetStockObject(SYSTEM_FONT));
+	    DeleteDC(scratchDC);
+
+	    DeleteObject(menuFont);
+	    
+	    Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&menuFontDString, faceName);
+	    sprintf(sizeString, "%d", pointSize);
+	    Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&menuFontDString, sizeString);
+
+	    if (bold == 1 || italic == 1) {
+		Tcl_DStringInit(&boldItalicDString);
+		if (bold == 1) {
+		    Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&boldItalicDString, "bold");
+		}
+		if (italic == 1) {
+		    Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&boldItalicDString, "italic");
+		}
+		Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&menuFontDString, 
+			Tcl_DStringValue(&boldItalicDString));
+	    }
+
+	    tkMenuConfigSpecs[i].defValue = Tcl_DStringValue(&menuFontDString);
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Now we go ahead and get the dimensions of the check mark and the
+     * appropriate margins. Since this is fairly hairy, we do it here
+     * to save time when traversing large sets of menu items.
+     *
+     * The code below was given to me by Microsoft over the phone. It
+     * is the only way to insure menu items lining up, and is not
+     * documented.
+     */
+
+    if (versionInfo.dwPlatformId == VER_PLATFORM_WIN32_WINDOWS) {
+	indicatorDimensions[0] = GetSystemMetrics(SM_CYMENUCHECK);
+	indicatorDimensions[1] = ((GetSystemMetrics(SM_CXFIXEDFRAME) +
+		GetSystemMetrics(SM_CXBORDER) 
+		+ GetSystemMetrics(SM_CXMENUCHECK) + 7) & 0xFFF8)
+		- GetSystemMetrics(SM_CXFIXEDFRAME);
+    } else {
+	DWORD dimensions = GetMenuCheckMarkDimensions();
+	indicatorDimensions[0] = HIWORD(dimensions);
+	indicatorDimensions[1] = LOWORD(dimensions);
+   }
+
+}
diff --git a/win/tkWinPixmap.c b/win/tkWinPixmap.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1ca2d7e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/tkWinPixmap.c
@@ -0,0 +1,184 @@
+/* 
+ * tkWinPixmap.c --
+ *
+ *	This file contains the Xlib emulation functions pertaining to
+ *	creating and destroying pixmaps.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkWinPixmap.c 1.18 97/08/06 15:36:23
+ */
+
+#include "tkWinInt.h"
+
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_GetPixmap --
+ *
+ *	Creates an in memory drawing surface.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns a handle to a new pixmap.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Allocates a new Win32 bitmap.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+Pixmap
+Tk_GetPixmap(display, d, width, height, depth)
+    Display* display;
+    Drawable d;
+    int width;
+    int height;
+    int depth;
+{
+    TkWinDrawable *newTwdPtr, *twdPtr;
+    int planes;
+    Screen *screen;
+    
+    display->request++;
+
+    newTwdPtr = (TkWinDrawable*) ckalloc(sizeof(TkWinDrawable));
+    newTwdPtr->type = TWD_BITMAP;
+    newTwdPtr->bitmap.depth = depth;
+    twdPtr = (TkWinDrawable *)d;
+    if (twdPtr->type != TWD_BITMAP) {
+	if (twdPtr->window.winPtr == NULL) {
+	    newTwdPtr->bitmap.colormap = DefaultColormap(display,
+		    DefaultScreen(display));
+	} else {
+	    newTwdPtr->bitmap.colormap = twdPtr->window.winPtr->atts.colormap;
+	}
+    } else {
+	newTwdPtr->bitmap.colormap = twdPtr->bitmap.colormap;
+    }
+    screen = &display->screens[0];
+    planes = 1;
+    if (depth == screen->root_depth) {
+	planes = (int) screen->ext_data;
+	depth /= planes;
+    }
+    newTwdPtr->bitmap.handle = CreateBitmap(width, height, planes, depth, NULL);
+
+    if (newTwdPtr->bitmap.handle == NULL) {
+	ckfree((char *) newTwdPtr);
+	return None;
+    }
+    
+    return (Pixmap)newTwdPtr;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_FreePixmap --
+ *
+ *	Release the resources associated with a pixmap.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Deletes the bitmap created by Tk_GetPixmap.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+Tk_FreePixmap(display, pixmap)
+    Display* display;
+    Pixmap pixmap;
+{
+    TkWinDrawable *twdPtr = (TkWinDrawable *) pixmap;
+
+    display->request++;
+    if (twdPtr != NULL) {
+	DeleteObject(twdPtr->bitmap.handle);
+	ckfree((char *)twdPtr);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkSetPixmapColormap --
+ *
+ *	The following function is a hack used by the photo widget to
+ *	explicitly set the colormap slot of a Pixmap.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkSetPixmapColormap(pixmap, colormap)
+    Pixmap pixmap;
+    Colormap colormap;
+{
+    TkWinDrawable *twdPtr = (TkWinDrawable *)pixmap;
+    twdPtr->bitmap.colormap = colormap;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XGetGeometry --
+ *
+ *	Retrieve the geometry of the given drawable.  Note that
+ *	this is a degenerate implementation that only returns the
+ *	size of a pixmap.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns 0.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+XGetGeometry(display, d, root_return, x_return, y_return, width_return,
+	height_return, border_width_return, depth_return)
+    Display* display;
+    Drawable d;
+    Window* root_return;
+    int* x_return;
+    int* y_return;
+    unsigned int* width_return;
+    unsigned int* height_return;
+    unsigned int* border_width_return;
+    unsigned int* depth_return;
+{
+    TkWinDrawable *twdPtr = (TkWinDrawable *)d;
+    HDC dc;
+    BITMAPINFO info;
+
+    if ((twdPtr->type != TWD_BITMAP) || (twdPtr->bitmap.handle == NULL)) {
+	panic("XGetGeometry: invalid pixmap");
+    }
+    dc = GetDC(NULL);
+    info.bmiHeader.biSize = sizeof(BITMAPINFOHEADER);
+    info.bmiHeader.biBitCount = 0;
+    if (!GetDIBits(dc, twdPtr->bitmap.handle, 0, 0, NULL, &info,
+	    DIB_RGB_COLORS)) {
+	panic("XGetGeometry: unable to get bitmap size");
+    }
+    ReleaseDC(NULL, dc);
+
+    *width_return = info.bmiHeader.biWidth;
+    *height_return = info.bmiHeader.biHeight;
+    return 1;
+}
diff --git a/win/tkWinPointer.c b/win/tkWinPointer.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..96661ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/tkWinPointer.c
@@ -0,0 +1,457 @@
+/* 
+ * tkWinPointer.c --
+ *
+ *	Windows specific mouse tracking code.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1995-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkWinPointer.c 1.28 97/10/31 08:40:07
+ */
+
+#include "tkWinInt.h"
+
+/*
+ * Check for enter/leave events every MOUSE_TIMER_INTERVAL milliseconds.
+ */
+
+#define MOUSE_TIMER_INTERVAL 250
+
+/*
+ * Declarations of static variables used in this file.
+ */
+
+static int captured = 0;		/* 1 if mouse is currently captured. */
+static TkWindow *keyboardWinPtr = NULL; /* Current keyboard grab window. */
+static Tcl_TimerToken mouseTimer;	/* Handle to the latest mouse timer. */
+static int mouseTimerSet = 0;		/* 1 if the mouse timer is active. */
+
+/*
+ * Forward declarations of procedures used in this file.
+ */
+
+static void		MouseTimerProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWinGetModifierState --
+ *
+ *	Return the modifier state as of the last message.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns the X modifier mask.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkWinGetModifierState()
+{
+    int state = 0;
+
+    if (GetKeyState(VK_SHIFT) & 0x8000) {
+	state |= ShiftMask;
+    }
+    if (GetKeyState(VK_CONTROL) & 0x8000) {
+	state |= ControlMask;
+    }
+    if (GetKeyState(VK_MENU) & 0x8000) {
+	state |= Mod2Mask;
+    }
+    if (GetKeyState(VK_CAPITAL) & 0x0001) {
+	state |= LockMask;
+    }
+    if (GetKeyState(VK_NUMLOCK) & 0x0001) {
+	state |= Mod1Mask;
+    }
+    if (GetKeyState(VK_SCROLL) & 0x0001) {
+	state |= Mod3Mask;
+    }
+    if (GetKeyState(VK_LBUTTON) & 0x8000) {
+	state |= Button1Mask;
+    }
+    if (GetKeyState(VK_MBUTTON) & 0x8000) {
+	state |= Button2Mask;
+    }
+    if (GetKeyState(VK_RBUTTON) & 0x8000) {
+	state |= Button3Mask;
+    }
+    return state;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_PointerEvent --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is called for each pointer-related event.
+ *	It converts the position to root coords and updates the
+ *	global pointer state machine.  It also ensures that the
+ *	mouse timer is scheduled.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	May queue events and change the grab state.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+Tk_PointerEvent(hwnd, x, y)
+    HWND hwnd;				/* Window for coords, or NULL for
+					 * the root window. */
+    int x, y;				/* Coords relative to hwnd, or screen
+					 * if hwnd is NULL. */
+{
+    POINT pos;
+    int state;
+    Tk_Window tkwin;
+
+    pos.x = x;
+    pos.y = y;
+
+    /*
+     * Convert client coords to root coords if we were given a window.
+     */
+
+    if (hwnd) {
+	ClientToScreen(hwnd, &pos);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * If the mouse is captured, Windows will report all pointer
+     * events to the capture window.  So, we need to determine which
+     * window the mouse is really over and change the event.  Note
+     * that the computed hwnd may point to a window not owned by Tk,
+     * or a toplevel decorative frame, so tkwin can be NULL.
+     */
+
+    if (captured || hwnd == NULL) {
+	hwnd = WindowFromPoint(pos);
+    }
+    tkwin = Tk_HWNDToWindow(hwnd);
+
+    state = TkWinGetModifierState();
+
+    Tk_UpdatePointer(tkwin, pos.x, pos.y, state);
+
+    if ((captured || tkwin) && !mouseTimerSet) {
+	mouseTimerSet = 1;
+	mouseTimer = Tcl_CreateTimerHandler(MOUSE_TIMER_INTERVAL,
+		MouseTimerProc, NULL);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XGrabKeyboard --
+ *
+ *	Simulates a keyboard grab by setting the focus.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Always returns GrabSuccess.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Sets the keyboard focus to the specified window.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+XGrabKeyboard(display, grab_window, owner_events, pointer_mode,
+	keyboard_mode, time)
+    Display* display;
+    Window grab_window;
+    Bool owner_events;
+    int pointer_mode;
+    int keyboard_mode;
+    Time time;
+{
+    keyboardWinPtr = TkWinGetWinPtr(grab_window);
+    return GrabSuccess;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XUngrabKeyboard --
+ *
+ *	Releases the simulated keyboard grab.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Sets the keyboard focus back to the value before the grab.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+XUngrabKeyboard(display, time)
+    Display* display;
+    Time time;
+{
+    keyboardWinPtr = NULL;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * MouseTimerProc --
+ *
+ *	Check the current mouse position and look for enter/leave 
+ *	events.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	May schedule a new timer and/or generate enter/leave events.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+MouseTimerProc(clientData)
+    ClientData clientData;
+{
+    POINT pos;
+
+    mouseTimerSet = 0;
+
+    /*
+     * Get the current mouse position and window.  Don't do anything
+     * if the mouse hasn't moved since the last time we looked.
+     */
+
+    GetCursorPos(&pos);
+    Tk_PointerEvent(NULL, pos.x, pos.y);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkGetPointerCoords --
+ *
+ *	Fetch the position of the mouse pointer.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	*xPtr and *yPtr are filled in with the root coordinates
+ *	of the mouse pointer for the display.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkGetPointerCoords(tkwin, xPtr, yPtr)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that identifies screen on which
+				 * lookup is to be done. */
+    int *xPtr, *yPtr;		/* Store pointer coordinates here. */
+{
+    POINT point;
+
+    GetCursorPos(&point);
+    *xPtr = point.x;
+    *yPtr = point.y;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XQueryPointer --
+ *
+ *	Check the current state of the mouse.  This is not a complete
+ *	implementation of this function.  It only computes the root
+ *	coordinates and the current mask.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Sets root_x_return, root_y_return, and mask_return.  Returns
+ *	true on success.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+Bool
+XQueryPointer(display, w, root_return, child_return, root_x_return,
+	root_y_return, win_x_return, win_y_return, mask_return)
+    Display* display;
+    Window w;
+    Window* root_return;
+    Window* child_return;
+    int* root_x_return;
+    int* root_y_return;
+    int* win_x_return;
+    int* win_y_return;
+    unsigned int* mask_return;
+{
+    display->request++;
+    TkGetPointerCoords(NULL, root_x_return, root_y_return);
+    *mask_return = TkWinGetModifierState();
+    return True;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XGetInputFocus --
+ *
+ *	Retrieves the current keyboard focus window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns the current focus window.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+XGetInputFocus(display, focus_return, revert_to_return)
+    Display *display;
+    Window *focus_return;
+    int *revert_to_return;
+{
+    Tk_Window tkwin = Tk_HWNDToWindow(GetFocus());
+    *focus_return = tkwin ? Tk_WindowId(tkwin) : None;
+    *revert_to_return = RevertToParent;
+    display->request++;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XSetInputFocus --
+ *
+ *	Set the current focus window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Changes the keyboard focus and causes the selected window to
+ *	be activated.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+XSetInputFocus(display, focus, revert_to, time)
+    Display* display;
+    Window focus;
+    int revert_to;
+    Time time;
+{
+    display->request++;
+    if (focus != None) {
+	SetFocus(Tk_GetHWND(focus));
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpChangeFocus --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked to move the system focus from
+ *	one window to another.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The return value is the serial number of the command that
+ *	changed the focus.  It may be needed by the caller to filter
+ *	out focus change events that were queued before the command.
+ *	If the procedure doesn't actually change the focus then
+ *	it returns 0.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The official Windows focus window changes;  the application's focus
+ *	window isn't changed by this procedure.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkpChangeFocus(winPtr, force)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window that is to receive the X focus. */
+    int force;			/* Non-zero means claim the focus even
+				 * if it didn't originally belong to
+				 * topLevelPtr's application. */
+{
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr = winPtr->dispPtr;
+    Window focusWindow;
+    int dummy, serial;
+    TkWindow *winPtr2;
+
+    if (!force) {
+	XGetInputFocus(dispPtr->display, &focusWindow, &dummy);
+	winPtr2 = (TkWindow *) Tk_IdToWindow(dispPtr->display, focusWindow);
+	if ((winPtr2 == NULL) || (winPtr2->mainPtr != winPtr->mainPtr)) {
+	    return 0;
+	}
+    }
+
+    if (winPtr->window == None) {
+	panic("ChangeXFocus got null X window");
+    }
+    XSetInputFocus(dispPtr->display, winPtr->window, RevertToParent,
+	    CurrentTime);
+
+    /*
+     * Remember the current serial number for the X server and issue
+     * a dummy server request.  This marks the position at which we
+     * changed the focus, so we can distinguish FocusIn and FocusOut
+     * events on either side of the mark.
+     */
+
+    serial = NextRequest(winPtr->display);
+    XNoOp(winPtr->display);
+    return serial;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpSetCapture --
+ *
+ *	This function captures the mouse so that all future events
+ *	will be reported to this window, even if the mouse is outside
+ *	the window.  If the specified window is NULL, then the mouse
+ *	is released. 
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Sets the capture flag and captures the mouse.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpSetCapture(winPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;			/* Capture window, or NULL. */
+{
+    if (winPtr) {
+	SetCapture(Tk_GetHWND(Tk_WindowId(winPtr)));
+	captured = 1;
+    } else {
+	captured = 0;
+	ReleaseCapture();
+    }
+}
diff --git a/win/tkWinPort.h b/win/tkWinPort.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1f755a7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/tkWinPort.h
@@ -0,0 +1,117 @@
+/*
+ * tkWinPort.h --
+ *
+ *	This header file handles porting issues that occur because of
+ *	differences between Windows and Unix. It should be the only
+ *	file that contains #ifdefs to handle different flavors of OS.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkWinPort.h 1.25 97/04/21 17:08:42
+ */
+
+#ifndef _WINPORT
+#define _WINPORT
+
+#include <X11/Xlib.h>
+#include <X11/cursorfont.h>
+#include <X11/keysym.h>
+#include <X11/Xatom.h>
+#include <X11/Xutil.h>
+
+#include <malloc.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+#include <ctype.h>
+#include <math.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <limits.h>
+#include <fcntl.h>
+#include <io.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+#include <time.h>
+
+#ifdef _MSC_VER
+#    define hypot _hypot
+#endif /* _MSC_VER */
+
+#define strncasecmp strnicmp
+#define strcasecmp stricmp
+
+#define NBBY 8
+
+#define OPEN_MAX 32
+
+/*
+ * The following define causes Tk to use its internal keysym hash table
+ */
+
+#define REDO_KEYSYM_LOOKUP
+
+/*
+ * The following macro checks to see whether there is buffered
+ * input data available for a stdio FILE.
+ */
+
+#ifdef _MSC_VER
+#    define TK_READ_DATA_PENDING(f) ((f)->_cnt > 0)
+#else /* _MSC_VER */
+#    define TK_READ_DATA_PENDING(f) ((f)->level > 0)
+#endif /* _MSC_VER */
+
+/*
+ * The following stubs implement various calls that don't do anything
+ * under Windows.
+ */
+
+#define TkFreeWindowId(dispPtr,w)
+#define TkInitXId(dispPtr)
+#define TkpCmapStressed(tkwin,colormap) (0)
+#define XFlush(display)
+#define XGrabServer(display)
+#define XUngrabServer(display)
+#define TkpSync(display)
+
+/*
+ * The following functions are implemented as macros under Windows.
+ */
+
+#define XFree(data) {if ((data) != NULL) ckfree((char *) (data));}
+#define XNoOp(display) {display->request++;}
+#define XSynchronize(display, bool) {display->request++;}
+#define XSync(display, bool) {display->request++;}
+#define XVisualIDFromVisual(visual) (visual->visualid)
+
+/*
+ * The following Tk functions are implemented as macros under Windows.
+ */
+
+#define TkGetNativeProlog(interp) TkGetProlog(interp)
+#define TkpGetPixel(p) (((((p)->red >> 8) & 0xff) \
+	| ((p)->green & 0xff00) | (((p)->blue << 8) & 0xff0000)) | 0x20000000)
+
+/*
+ * These calls implement native bitmaps which are not currently 
+ * supported under Windows.  The macros eliminate the calls.
+ */
+
+#define TkpDefineNativeBitmaps()
+#define TkpCreateNativeBitmap(display, source) None
+#define TkpGetNativeAppBitmap(display, name, w, h) None
+
+/*
+ * Define timezone for gettimeofday.
+ */
+
+struct timezone {
+    int tz_minuteswest;
+    int tz_dsttime;
+};
+
+extern int gettimeofday(struct timeval *, struct timezone *);
+EXTERN void		panic _ANSI_ARGS_(TCL_VARARGS(char *,format));
+
+#endif /* _WINPORT */
diff --git a/win/tkWinRegion.c b/win/tkWinRegion.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3303022
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/tkWinRegion.c
@@ -0,0 +1,179 @@
+/* 
+ * tkWinRegion.c --
+ *
+ *	Tk Region emulation code.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkWinRegion.c 1.7 96/05/03 11:05:54
+ */
+
+#include "tkWinInt.h"
+
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkCreateRegion --
+ *
+ *	Construct an empty region.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns a new region handle.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+TkRegion
+TkCreateRegion()
+{
+    RECT rect;
+    memset(&rect, 0, sizeof(RECT));
+    return (TkRegion) CreateRectRgnIndirect(&rect);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkDestroyRegion --
+ *
+ *	Destroy the specified region.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Frees the storage associated with the specified region.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkDestroyRegion(r)
+    TkRegion r;
+{
+    DeleteObject((HRGN) r);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkClipBox --
+ *
+ *	Computes the bounding box of a region.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Sets rect_return to the bounding box of the region.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkClipBox(r, rect_return)
+    TkRegion r;
+    XRectangle* rect_return;
+{
+    RECT rect;
+    GetRgnBox((HRGN)r, &rect);
+    rect_return->x = (short) rect.left;
+    rect_return->y = (short) rect.top;
+    rect_return->width = (short) (rect.right - rect.left);
+    rect_return->height = (short) (rect.bottom - rect.top);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkIntersectRegion --
+ *
+ *	Compute the intersection of two regions.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns the result in the dr_return region.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkIntersectRegion(sra, srb, dr_return)
+    TkRegion sra;
+    TkRegion srb;
+    TkRegion dr_return;
+{
+    CombineRgn((HRGN) dr_return, (HRGN) sra, (HRGN) srb, RGN_AND);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkUnionRectWithRegion --
+ *
+ *	Create the union of a source region and a rectangle.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns the result in the dr_return region.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkUnionRectWithRegion(rectangle, src_region, dest_region_return)
+    XRectangle* rectangle;
+    TkRegion src_region;
+    TkRegion dest_region_return;
+{
+    HRGN rectRgn = CreateRectRgn(rectangle->x, rectangle->y,
+	    rectangle->x + rectangle->width, rectangle->y + rectangle->height);
+    CombineRgn((HRGN) dest_region_return, (HRGN) src_region,
+	    (HRGN) rectRgn, RGN_OR);
+    DeleteObject(rectRgn);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkRectInRegion --
+ *
+ *	Test whether a given rectangle overlaps with a region.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns RectanglePart or RectangleOut.  Note that this is
+ *	not a complete implementation since it doesn't test for
+ *	RectangleIn.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkRectInRegion(r, x, y, width, height)
+    TkRegion r;
+    int x;
+    int y;
+    unsigned int width;
+    unsigned int height;
+{
+    RECT rect;
+    rect.top = y;
+    rect.left = x;
+    rect.bottom = y+height;
+    rect.right = x+width;
+    return RectInRegion((HRGN)r, &rect) ? RectanglePart : RectangleOut;
+}
diff --git a/win/tkWinScrlbr.c b/win/tkWinScrlbr.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6c1a664
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/tkWinScrlbr.c
@@ -0,0 +1,745 @@
+/* 
+ * tkWinScrollbar.c --
+ *
+ *	This file implements the Windows specific portion of the scrollbar
+ *	widget.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1996 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkWinScrlbr.c 1.19 97/08/13 17:37:49
+ */
+
+#include "tkWinInt.h"
+#include "tkScrollbar.h"
+
+
+/*
+ * The following constant is used to specify the maximum scroll position.
+ * This value is limited by the Win32 API to either 16-bits or 32-bits,
+ * depending on the context.  For now we'll just use a value small
+ * enough to fit in 16-bits, but which gives us 4-digits of precision.
+ */
+
+#define MAX_SCROLL 10000
+
+/*
+ * Declaration of Windows specific scrollbar structure.
+ */
+
+typedef struct WinScrollbar {
+    TkScrollbar info;		/* Generic scrollbar info. */
+    WNDPROC oldProc;		/* Old window procedure. */
+    int lastVertical;		/* 1 if was vertical at last refresh. */
+    HWND hwnd;			/* Current window handle. */
+    int winFlags;		/* Various flags; see below. */
+} WinScrollbar;
+
+/*
+ * Flag bits for native scrollbars:
+ * 
+ * IN_MODAL_LOOP:		Non-zero means this scrollbar is in the middle
+ *				of a modal loop.
+ * ALREADY_DEAD:		Non-zero means this scrollbar has been
+ *				destroyed, but has not been cleaned up.
+ */
+
+#define IN_MODAL_LOOP	1
+#define ALREADY_DEAD	2
+
+/*
+ * Cached system metrics used to determine scrollbar geometry.
+ */
+
+static int initialized = 0;
+static int hArrowWidth, hThumb; /* Horizontal control metrics. */
+static int vArrowWidth, vArrowHeight, vThumb; /* Vertical control metrics. */
+
+/*
+ * This variable holds the default width for a scrollbar in string
+ * form for use in a Tk_ConfigSpec.
+ */
+
+static char defWidth[8];
+
+/*
+ * Declarations for functions defined in this file.
+ */
+
+static Window		CreateProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Window parent, ClientData instanceData));
+static void		ModalLoopProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr));
+static int		ScrollbarBindProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, XEvent *eventPtr,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin, KeySym keySym));
+static LRESULT CALLBACK	ScrollbarProc _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd, UINT message,
+			    WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam));
+static void		UpdateScrollbar _ANSI_ARGS_((
+    			    WinScrollbar *scrollPtr));
+static void		UpdateScrollbarMetrics _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+
+/*
+ * The class procedure table for the scrollbar widget.
+ */
+
+TkClassProcs tkpScrollbarProcs = {
+    CreateProc,			/* createProc */
+    NULL,			/* geometryProc */
+    ModalLoopProc,		/* modalProc */
+};
+
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpCreateScrollbar --
+ *
+ *	Allocate a new TkScrollbar structure.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns a newly allocated TkScrollbar structure.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Registers an event handler for the widget.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+TkScrollbar *
+TkpCreateScrollbar(tkwin)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;
+{
+    WinScrollbar *scrollPtr;
+    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *)tkwin;
+    
+    if (!initialized) {
+	UpdateScrollbarMetrics();
+	initialized = 1;
+    }
+
+    scrollPtr = (WinScrollbar *) ckalloc(sizeof(WinScrollbar));
+    scrollPtr->winFlags = 0;
+    scrollPtr->hwnd = NULL;
+
+    Tk_CreateEventHandler(tkwin,
+	    ExposureMask|StructureNotifyMask|FocusChangeMask,
+	    TkScrollbarEventProc, (ClientData) scrollPtr);
+
+    if (!Tcl_GetAssocData(winPtr->mainPtr->interp, "TkScrollbar", NULL)) {
+	Tcl_SetAssocData(winPtr->mainPtr->interp, "TkScrollbar", NULL,
+		(ClientData)1);
+	TkCreateBindingProcedure(winPtr->mainPtr->interp,
+		winPtr->mainPtr->bindingTable,
+		(ClientData)Tk_GetUid("Scrollbar"), "<ButtonPress>",
+		ScrollbarBindProc, NULL, NULL);
+    }
+
+    return (TkScrollbar*) scrollPtr;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * UpdateScrollbar --
+ *
+ *	This function updates the position and size of the scrollbar
+ *	thumb based on the current settings.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Moves the thumb.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+UpdateScrollbar(scrollPtr)
+    WinScrollbar *scrollPtr;
+{
+    SCROLLINFO scrollInfo;
+    double thumbSize;
+
+    /*
+     * Update the current scrollbar position and shape.
+     */
+
+    scrollInfo.fMask = SIF_PAGE | SIF_POS | SIF_RANGE;
+    scrollInfo.cbSize = sizeof(scrollInfo);
+    scrollInfo.nMin = 0;
+    scrollInfo.nMax = MAX_SCROLL;
+    thumbSize = (scrollPtr->info.lastFraction - scrollPtr->info.firstFraction);
+    if (tkpIsWin32s) {
+	scrollInfo.nPage = 0;
+    } else {
+	scrollInfo.nPage = ((UINT) (thumbSize * (double) MAX_SCROLL)) + 1;
+    } 
+    if (thumbSize < 1.0) {
+	scrollInfo.nPos = (int)
+	    ((scrollPtr->info.firstFraction / (1.0-thumbSize))
+		    * (MAX_SCROLL - (scrollInfo.nPage - 1)));
+    } else {
+	scrollInfo.nPos = 0;
+    }
+    SetScrollInfo(scrollPtr->hwnd, SB_CTL, &scrollInfo, TRUE);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * CreateProc --
+ *
+ *	This function creates a new Scrollbar control, subclasses
+ *	the instance, and generates a new Window object.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns the newly allocated Window object, or None on failure.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Causes a new Scrollbar control to come into existence.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static Window
+CreateProc(tkwin, parentWin, instanceData)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window. */
+    Window parentWin;		/* Parent of new window. */
+    ClientData instanceData;	/* Scrollbar instance data. */
+{
+    DWORD style;
+    Window window;
+    HWND parent;
+    TkWindow *winPtr;
+    WinScrollbar *scrollPtr = (WinScrollbar *)instanceData;
+
+    parent = Tk_GetHWND(parentWin);
+
+    if (scrollPtr->info.vertical) {
+	style = WS_CHILD | WS_VISIBLE | WS_CLIPCHILDREN | WS_CLIPSIBLINGS
+	    | SBS_VERT | SBS_RIGHTALIGN;
+    } else {
+	style = WS_CHILD | WS_VISIBLE | WS_CLIPCHILDREN | WS_CLIPSIBLINGS
+	    | SBS_HORZ | SBS_BOTTOMALIGN;
+    }
+
+    scrollPtr->hwnd = CreateWindow("SCROLLBAR", NULL, style,
+	    Tk_X(tkwin), Tk_Y(tkwin), Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin),
+	    parent, NULL, Tk_GetHINSTANCE(), NULL);
+
+    /*
+     * Ensure new window is inserted into the stacking order at the correct
+     * place. 
+     */
+
+    SetWindowPos(scrollPtr->hwnd, HWND_TOP, 0, 0, 0, 0,
+		    SWP_NOACTIVATE | SWP_NOMOVE | SWP_NOSIZE);
+
+    for (winPtr = ((TkWindow*)tkwin)->nextPtr; winPtr != NULL;
+	 winPtr = winPtr->nextPtr) {
+	if ((winPtr->window != None) && !(winPtr->flags & TK_TOP_LEVEL)) {
+	    TkWinSetWindowPos(scrollPtr->hwnd, Tk_GetHWND(winPtr->window),
+		    Below);
+	    break;
+	}
+    }
+
+    scrollPtr->lastVertical = scrollPtr->info.vertical;
+    scrollPtr->oldProc = (WNDPROC)SetWindowLong(scrollPtr->hwnd, GWL_WNDPROC,
+	    (DWORD) ScrollbarProc);
+    window = Tk_AttachHWND(tkwin, scrollPtr->hwnd);
+
+    UpdateScrollbar(scrollPtr);
+    return window;
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpDisplayScrollbar --
+ *
+ *	This procedure redraws the contents of a scrollbar window.
+ *	It is invoked as a do-when-idle handler, so it only runs
+ *	when there's nothing else for the application to do.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Information appears on the screen.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpDisplayScrollbar(clientData)
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about window. */
+{
+    WinScrollbar *scrollPtr = (WinScrollbar *) clientData;
+    Tk_Window tkwin = scrollPtr->info.tkwin;
+
+    scrollPtr->info.flags &= ~REDRAW_PENDING;
+    if ((tkwin == NULL) || !Tk_IsMapped(tkwin)) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Destroy and recreate the scrollbar control if the orientation
+     * has changed.
+     */
+
+    if (scrollPtr->lastVertical != scrollPtr->info.vertical) {
+	HWND hwnd = Tk_GetHWND(Tk_WindowId(tkwin));
+
+	SetWindowLong(hwnd, GWL_WNDPROC, (DWORD) scrollPtr->oldProc);
+	DestroyWindow(hwnd);
+
+	CreateProc(tkwin, Tk_WindowId(Tk_Parent(tkwin)),
+		(ClientData) scrollPtr);
+    } else {
+	UpdateScrollbar(scrollPtr);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpDestroyScrollbar --
+ *
+ *	Free data structures associated with the scrollbar control.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Restores the default control state.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpDestroyScrollbar(scrollPtr)
+    TkScrollbar *scrollPtr;
+{
+    WinScrollbar *winScrollPtr = (WinScrollbar *)scrollPtr;
+    HWND hwnd = winScrollPtr->hwnd;
+    if (hwnd) {
+	SetWindowLong(hwnd, GWL_WNDPROC, (DWORD) winScrollPtr->oldProc);
+	if (winScrollPtr->winFlags & IN_MODAL_LOOP) {
+	    ((TkWindow *)scrollPtr->tkwin)->flags |= TK_DONT_DESTROY_WINDOW;
+	    SetParent(hwnd, NULL);
+	}
+    }
+    winScrollPtr->winFlags |= ALREADY_DEAD;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * UpdateScrollbarMetrics --
+ *
+ *	This function retrieves the current system metrics for a
+ *	scrollbar.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Updates the geometry cache info for all scrollbars.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+UpdateScrollbarMetrics()
+{
+    Tk_ConfigSpec *specPtr;
+
+    hArrowWidth = GetSystemMetrics(SM_CXHSCROLL);
+    hThumb = GetSystemMetrics(SM_CXHTHUMB);
+    vArrowWidth = GetSystemMetrics(SM_CXVSCROLL);
+    vArrowHeight = GetSystemMetrics(SM_CYVSCROLL);
+    vThumb = GetSystemMetrics(SM_CYVTHUMB);
+
+    sprintf(defWidth, "%d", vArrowWidth);
+    for (specPtr = tkpScrollbarConfigSpecs; specPtr->type != TK_CONFIG_END;
+	    specPtr++) {
+	if (specPtr->offset == Tk_Offset(TkScrollbar, width)) {
+	    specPtr->defValue = defWidth;
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpComputeScrollbarGeometry --
+ *
+ *	After changes in a scrollbar's size or configuration, this
+ *	procedure recomputes various geometry information used in
+ *	displaying the scrollbar.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The scrollbar will be displayed differently.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpComputeScrollbarGeometry(scrollPtr)
+    register TkScrollbar *scrollPtr;	/* Scrollbar whose geometry may
+					 * have changed. */
+{
+    int fieldLength, minThumbSize;
+
+    /*
+     * Windows doesn't use focus rings on scrollbars, but we still
+     * perform basic sanity checks to appease backwards compatibility.
+     */
+
+    if (scrollPtr->highlightWidth < 0) {
+	scrollPtr->highlightWidth = 0;
+    }
+
+    if (scrollPtr->vertical) {
+	scrollPtr->arrowLength = vArrowHeight;
+	fieldLength = Tk_Height(scrollPtr->tkwin);
+	minThumbSize = vThumb;
+    } else {
+	scrollPtr->arrowLength = hArrowWidth;
+	fieldLength = Tk_Width(scrollPtr->tkwin);
+	minThumbSize = hThumb;
+    }
+    fieldLength -= 2*scrollPtr->arrowLength;
+    if (fieldLength < 0) {
+	fieldLength = 0;
+    }
+    scrollPtr->sliderFirst = (int) ((double)fieldLength
+	    * scrollPtr->firstFraction);
+    scrollPtr->sliderLast = (int) ((double)fieldLength
+	    * scrollPtr->lastFraction);
+
+    /*
+     * Adjust the slider so that some piece of it is always
+     * displayed in the scrollbar and so that it has at least
+     * a minimal width (so it can be grabbed with the mouse).
+     */
+
+    if (scrollPtr->sliderFirst > fieldLength) {
+	scrollPtr->sliderFirst = fieldLength;
+    }
+    if (scrollPtr->sliderFirst < 0) {
+	scrollPtr->sliderFirst = 0;
+    }
+    if (scrollPtr->sliderLast < (scrollPtr->sliderFirst
+	    + minThumbSize)) {
+	scrollPtr->sliderLast = scrollPtr->sliderFirst + minThumbSize;
+    }
+    if (scrollPtr->sliderLast > fieldLength) {
+	scrollPtr->sliderLast = fieldLength;
+    }
+    scrollPtr->sliderFirst += scrollPtr->arrowLength;
+    scrollPtr->sliderLast += scrollPtr->arrowLength;
+
+    /*
+     * Register the desired geometry for the window (leave enough space
+     * for the two arrows plus a minimum-size slider, plus border around
+     * the whole window, if any).  Then arrange for the window to be
+     * redisplayed.
+     */
+
+    if (scrollPtr->vertical) {
+	Tk_GeometryRequest(scrollPtr->tkwin,
+		scrollPtr->width, 2*scrollPtr->arrowLength + minThumbSize);
+    } else {
+	Tk_GeometryRequest(scrollPtr->tkwin,
+		2*scrollPtr->arrowLength + minThumbSize, scrollPtr->width);
+    }
+    Tk_SetInternalBorder(scrollPtr->tkwin, 0);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * ScrollbarProc --
+ *
+ *	This function is call by Windows whenever an event occurs on
+ *	a scrollbar control created by Tk.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Standard Windows return value.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	May generate events.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static LRESULT CALLBACK
+ScrollbarProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
+    HWND hwnd;
+    UINT message;
+    WPARAM wParam;
+    LPARAM lParam;
+{
+    LRESULT result;
+    POINT point;
+    WinScrollbar *scrollPtr;
+    Tk_Window tkwin = Tk_HWNDToWindow(hwnd);
+
+    if (tkwin == NULL) {
+	panic("ScrollbarProc called on an invalid HWND");
+    }
+    scrollPtr = (WinScrollbar *)((TkWindow*)tkwin)->instanceData;
+
+    switch(message) {
+	case WM_HSCROLL:
+	case WM_VSCROLL: {
+	    Tcl_Interp *interp;
+	    Tcl_DString cmdString;
+	    int command = LOWORD(wParam);
+	    int code;
+
+	    GetCursorPos(&point);
+	    Tk_TranslateWinEvent(NULL, WM_MOUSEMOVE, 0,
+		    MAKELPARAM(point.x, point.y), &result);
+
+	    if (command == SB_ENDSCROLL) {
+		return 0;
+	    }
+
+	    /*
+	     * Bail out immediately if there isn't a command to invoke.
+	     */
+
+	    if (scrollPtr->info.commandSize == 0) {
+		Tcl_ServiceAll();
+		return 0;
+	    }
+		
+	    Tcl_DStringInit(&cmdString);
+	    Tcl_DStringAppend(&cmdString, scrollPtr->info.command,
+		    scrollPtr->info.commandSize);
+		
+	    if (command == SB_LINELEFT || command == SB_LINERIGHT) {
+		Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&cmdString, "scroll");
+		Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&cmdString,
+			(command == SB_LINELEFT ) ? "-1" : "1");
+		Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&cmdString, "units");
+	    } else if (command == SB_PAGELEFT || command == SB_PAGERIGHT) {
+		Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&cmdString, "scroll");
+		Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&cmdString,
+			(command == SB_PAGELEFT ) ? "-1" : "1");
+		Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&cmdString, "pages");
+	    } else {
+		char valueString[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE];
+		double pos = 0.0;
+		switch (command) {
+		    case SB_THUMBPOSITION:
+			pos = ((double)HIWORD(wParam)) / MAX_SCROLL;
+			break;
+
+		    case SB_THUMBTRACK:
+			pos = ((double)HIWORD(wParam)) / MAX_SCROLL;
+			break;
+
+		    case SB_TOP:
+			pos = 0.0;
+			break;
+
+		    case SB_BOTTOM:
+			pos = 1.0;
+			break;
+		}
+		sprintf(valueString, "%g", pos);
+		Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&cmdString, "moveto");
+		Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&cmdString, valueString);
+	    }
+
+	    interp = scrollPtr->info.interp;
+	    code = Tcl_GlobalEval(interp, cmdString.string);
+	    if (code != TCL_OK && code != TCL_CONTINUE && code != TCL_BREAK) {
+		Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, "\n    (scrollbar command)");
+		Tcl_BackgroundError(interp);
+	    }		
+	    Tcl_DStringFree(&cmdString);		
+
+	    Tcl_ServiceAll();
+	    return 0;
+	}
+
+	default:
+	    if (Tk_TranslateWinEvent(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam, &result)) {
+		return result;
+	    }
+    }
+    return CallWindowProc(scrollPtr->oldProc, hwnd, message, wParam, lParam);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpConfigureScrollbar --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is called after the generic code has finished
+ *	processing configuration options, in order to configure
+ *	platform specific options.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpConfigureScrollbar(scrollPtr)
+    register TkScrollbar *scrollPtr;	/* Information about widget;  may or
+					 * may not already have values for
+					 * some fields. */
+{
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * ScrollbarBindProc --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked when the default <ButtonPress>
+ *	binding on the Scrollbar bind tag fires.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The event enters a modal loop.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+ScrollbarBindProc(clientData, interp, eventPtr, tkwin, keySym)
+    ClientData clientData;
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;
+    XEvent *eventPtr;
+    Tk_Window tkwin;
+    KeySym keySym;
+{
+    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow*)tkwin;
+    if (eventPtr->type == ButtonPress) {
+	winPtr->flags |= TK_DEFER_MODAL;
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * ModalLoopProc --
+ *
+ *	This function is invoked at the end of the event processing
+ *	whenever the ScrollbarBindProc has been invoked for a ButtonPress
+ *	event. 
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Enters a modal loop.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+ModalLoopProc(tkwin, eventPtr)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;
+    XEvent *eventPtr;
+{
+    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow*)tkwin;
+    WinScrollbar *scrollPtr = (WinScrollbar *) winPtr->instanceData;
+    int oldMode;
+
+    Tcl_Preserve((ClientData)scrollPtr);
+    scrollPtr->winFlags |= IN_MODAL_LOOP;
+    oldMode = Tcl_SetServiceMode(TCL_SERVICE_ALL);
+    TkWinResendEvent(scrollPtr->oldProc, scrollPtr->hwnd, eventPtr);
+    (void) Tcl_SetServiceMode(oldMode);
+    scrollPtr->winFlags &= ~IN_MODAL_LOOP;
+    if (scrollPtr->hwnd && scrollPtr->winFlags & ALREADY_DEAD) {
+	DestroyWindow(scrollPtr->hwnd);
+    }
+    Tcl_Release((ClientData)scrollPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpScrollbarPosition --
+ *
+ *	Determine the scrollbar element corresponding to a
+ *	given position.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	One of TOP_ARROW, TOP_GAP, etc., indicating which element
+ *	of the scrollbar covers the position given by (x, y).  If
+ *	(x,y) is outside the scrollbar entirely, then OUTSIDE is
+ *	returned.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkpScrollbarPosition(scrollPtr, x, y)
+    register TkScrollbar *scrollPtr;	/* Scrollbar widget record. */
+    int x, y;				/* Coordinates within scrollPtr's
+					 * window. */
+{
+    int length, width, tmp;
+
+    if (scrollPtr->vertical) {
+	length = Tk_Height(scrollPtr->tkwin);
+	width = Tk_Width(scrollPtr->tkwin);
+    } else {
+	tmp = x;
+	x = y;
+	y = tmp;
+	length = Tk_Width(scrollPtr->tkwin);
+	width = Tk_Height(scrollPtr->tkwin);
+    }
+
+    if ((x < scrollPtr->inset) || (x >= (width - scrollPtr->inset))
+	    || (y < scrollPtr->inset) || (y >= (length - scrollPtr->inset))) {
+	return OUTSIDE;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * All of the calculations in this procedure mirror those in
+     * TkpDisplayScrollbar.  Be sure to keep the two consistent.
+     */
+
+    if (y < (scrollPtr->inset + scrollPtr->arrowLength)) {
+	return TOP_ARROW;
+    }
+    if (y < scrollPtr->sliderFirst) {
+	return TOP_GAP;
+    }
+    if (y < scrollPtr->sliderLast) {
+	return SLIDER;
+    }
+    if (y >= (length - (scrollPtr->arrowLength + scrollPtr->inset))) {
+	return BOTTOM_ARROW;
+    }
+    return BOTTOM_GAP;
+}
diff --git a/win/tkWinSend.c b/win/tkWinSend.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6d12ed4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/tkWinSend.c
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+/* 
+ * tkWinSend.c --
+ *
+ *	This file provides procedures that implement the "send"
+ *	command, allowing commands to be passed from interpreter
+ *	to interpreter.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1997 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkWinSend.c 1.4 97/06/10 09:39:50
+ */
+
+#include "tkPort.h"
+#include "tkInt.h"
+
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_SetAppName --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is called to associate an ASCII name with a Tk
+ *	application.  If the application has already been named, the
+ *	name replaces the old one.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The return value is the name actually given to the application.
+ *	This will normally be the same as name, but if name was already
+ *	in use for an application then a name of the form "name #2" will
+ *	be chosen,  with a high enough number to make the name unique.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Registration info is saved, thereby allowing the "send" command
+ *	to be used later to invoke commands in the application.  In
+ *	addition, the "send" command is created in the application's
+ *	interpreter.  The registration will be removed automatically
+ *	if the interpreter is deleted or the "send" command is removed.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+char *
+Tk_SetAppName(tkwin, name)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for any window in the application
+				 * to be named:  it is just used to identify
+				 * the application and the display.  */
+    char *name;			/* The name that will be used to
+				 * refer to the interpreter in later
+				 * "send" commands.  Must be globally
+				 * unique. */
+{
+    return name;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkGetInterpNames --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked to fetch a list of all the
+ *	interpreter names currently registered for the display
+ *	of a particular window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	A standard Tcl return value.  Interp->result will be set
+ *	to hold a list of all the interpreter names defined for
+ *	tkwin's display.  If an error occurs, then TCL_ERROR
+ *	is returned and interp->result will hold an error message.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkGetInterpNames(interp, tkwin)
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for returning a result. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window whose display is to be used
+				 * for the lookup. */
+{
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
diff --git a/win/tkWinWindow.c b/win/tkWinWindow.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2b8eb41
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/tkWinWindow.c
@@ -0,0 +1,796 @@
+/* 
+ * tkWinWindow.c --
+ *
+ *	Xlib emulation routines for Windows related to creating,
+ *	displaying and destroying windows.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkWinWindow.c 1.23 97/07/01 18:14:13
+ */
+
+#include "tkWinInt.h"
+
+/*
+ * The windowTable maps from HWND to Tk_Window handles.
+ */
+
+static Tcl_HashTable windowTable;
+
+/*
+ * Have statics in this module been initialized?
+ */
+
+static int initialized = 0;
+
+/*
+ * Forward declarations for procedures defined in this file:
+ */
+
+static void		NotifyVisibility _ANSI_ARGS_((XEvent *eventPtr,
+			    TkWindow *winPtr));
+static void 		StackWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Window w, Window sibling,
+			    int stack_mode));
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_AttachHWND --
+ *
+ *	This function binds an HWND and a reflection procedure to
+ *	the specified Tk_Window. 
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns an X Window that encapsulates the HWND.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	May allocate a new X Window.  Also enters the HWND into the
+ *	global window table.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+Window
+Tk_AttachHWND(tkwin, hwnd)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;
+    HWND hwnd;
+{
+    int new;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+    TkWinDrawable *twdPtr = (TkWinDrawable *) Tk_WindowId(tkwin);
+
+    if (!initialized) {
+	Tcl_InitHashTable(&windowTable, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS);
+	initialized = 1;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Allocate a new drawable if necessary.  Otherwise, remove the
+     * previous HWND from from the window table.
+     */
+
+    if (twdPtr == NULL) {
+	twdPtr = (TkWinDrawable*) ckalloc(sizeof(TkWinDrawable));
+	twdPtr->type = TWD_WINDOW;
+	twdPtr->window.winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
+    } else if (twdPtr->window.handle != NULL) {
+	entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&windowTable,
+		(char *)twdPtr->window.handle);
+	Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(entryPtr);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Insert the new HWND into the window table.
+     */
+
+    twdPtr->window.handle = hwnd;
+    entryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&windowTable, (char *)hwnd, &new);
+    Tcl_SetHashValue(entryPtr, (ClientData)tkwin);
+
+    return (Window)twdPtr;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_HWNDToWindow --
+ *
+ *	This function retrieves a Tk_Window from the window table
+ *	given an HWND.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns the matching Tk_Window.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+Tk_Window
+Tk_HWNDToWindow(hwnd)
+    HWND hwnd;
+{
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&windowTable, (char*)hwnd);
+    if (entryPtr != NULL) {
+	return (Tk_Window) Tcl_GetHashValue(entryPtr);
+    }
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_GetHWND --
+ *
+ *	This function extracts the HWND from an X Window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns the HWND associated with the Window.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+HWND
+Tk_GetHWND(window)
+    Window window;
+{
+    TkWinDrawable *twdPtr = (TkWinDrawable *) window;
+    return twdPtr->window.handle;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpPrintWindowId --
+ *
+ *	This routine stores the string representation of the
+ *	platform dependent window handle for an X Window in the
+ *	given buffer.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns the result in the specified buffer.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpPrintWindowId(buf, window)
+    char *buf;			/* Pointer to string large enough to hold
+				 * the hex representation of a pointer. */
+    Window window;		/* Window to be printed into buffer. */
+{
+    HWND hwnd = (window) ? Tk_GetHWND(window) : 0;
+    sprintf(buf, "0x%x", (unsigned int) hwnd);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpScanWindowId --
+ *
+ *	Given a string which represents the platform dependent window
+ *	handle, produce the X Window id for the window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The return value is normally TCL_OK;  in this case *idPtr
+ *	will be set to the X Window id equivalent to string.  If
+ *	string is improperly formed then TCL_ERROR is returned and
+ *	an error message will be left in interp->result.  If the
+ *	number does not correspond to a Tk Window, then *idPtr will
+ *	be set to None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkpScanWindowId(interp, string, idPtr)
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
+    char *string;		/* String containing a (possibly signed)
+				 * integer in a form acceptable to strtol. */
+    int *idPtr;			/* Place to store converted result. */
+{
+    int number;
+    Tk_Window tkwin;
+
+    if (Tcl_GetInt(interp, string, &number) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    tkwin = Tk_HWNDToWindow((HWND)number);
+    if (tkwin) {
+	*idPtr = Tk_WindowId(tkwin);
+    } else {
+	*idPtr = None;
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpMakeWindow --
+ *
+ *	Creates a Windows window object based on the current attributes
+ *	of the specified TkWindow.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns a pointer to a new TkWinDrawable cast to a Window.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Creates a new window.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+Window
+TkpMakeWindow(winPtr, parent)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;
+    Window parent;
+{
+    HWND parentWin;
+    int style;
+    HWND hwnd;
+    
+    if (parent != None) {
+	parentWin = Tk_GetHWND(parent);
+	style = WS_CHILD | WS_CLIPCHILDREN | WS_CLIPSIBLINGS;
+    } else {
+	parentWin = NULL;
+	style = WS_POPUP | WS_CLIPCHILDREN;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Create the window, then ensure that it is at the top of the
+     * stacking order.
+     */
+
+    hwnd = CreateWindow(TK_WIN_CHILD_CLASS_NAME, NULL, style,
+	    Tk_X(winPtr), Tk_Y(winPtr), Tk_Width(winPtr), Tk_Height(winPtr),
+	    parentWin, NULL, Tk_GetHINSTANCE(), NULL);
+    SetWindowPos(hwnd, HWND_TOP, 0, 0, 0, 0,
+		    SWP_NOACTIVATE | SWP_NOMOVE | SWP_NOSIZE);
+    return Tk_AttachHWND((Tk_Window)winPtr, hwnd);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XDestroyWindow --
+ *
+ *	Destroys the given window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Sends the WM_DESTROY message to the window and then destroys
+ *	it the Win32 resources associated with the window.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+XDestroyWindow(display, w)
+    Display* display;
+    Window w;
+{
+    Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
+    TkWinDrawable *twdPtr = (TkWinDrawable *)w;
+    TkWindow *winPtr = TkWinGetWinPtr(w);
+    HWND hwnd = Tk_GetHWND(w);
+
+    display->request++;
+
+    /*
+     * Remove references to the window in the pointer module then
+     * release the drawable.
+     */
+
+    TkPointerDeadWindow(winPtr);
+
+    entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&windowTable, (char*)hwnd);
+    if (entryPtr != NULL) {
+	Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(entryPtr);
+    }
+
+    ckfree((char *)twdPtr);
+
+    /*
+     * Don't bother destroying the window if we are going to destroy
+     * the parent later.
+     */
+
+    if (hwnd != NULL && !(winPtr->flags & TK_DONT_DESTROY_WINDOW)) {
+	DestroyWindow(hwnd);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XMapWindow --
+ *
+ *	Cause the given window to become visible.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Causes the window state to change, and generates a MapNotify
+ *	event.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+XMapWindow(display, w)
+    Display* display;
+    Window w;
+{
+    XEvent event;
+    TkWindow *parentPtr;
+    TkWindow *winPtr = TkWinGetWinPtr(w);
+
+    display->request++;
+
+    ShowWindow(TkWinGetHWND(w), SW_SHOWNORMAL);
+    winPtr->flags |= TK_MAPPED;
+
+    /*
+     * Check to see if this window is visible now.  If all of the parent
+     * windows up to the first toplevel are mapped, then this window and
+     * its mapped children have just become visible.
+     */
+
+    if (!(winPtr->flags & TK_TOP_LEVEL)) {
+	for (parentPtr = winPtr->parentPtr; ;
+	        parentPtr = parentPtr->parentPtr) {
+	    if ((parentPtr == NULL) || !(parentPtr->flags & TK_MAPPED)) {
+		return;
+	    }
+	    if (parentPtr->flags & TK_TOP_LEVEL) {
+		break;
+	    }
+	}
+    } else {
+	event.type = MapNotify;
+	event.xmap.serial = display->request;
+	event.xmap.send_event = False;
+	event.xmap.display = display;
+	event.xmap.event = winPtr->window;
+	event.xmap.window = winPtr->window;
+	event.xmap.override_redirect = winPtr->atts.override_redirect;
+	Tk_QueueWindowEvent(&event, TCL_QUEUE_TAIL);
+    }
+    
+    /*
+     * Generate VisibilityNotify events for this window and its mapped
+     * children.
+     */
+
+    event.type = VisibilityNotify;
+    event.xvisibility.serial = display->request;
+    event.xvisibility.send_event = False;
+    event.xvisibility.display = display;
+    event.xvisibility.window = winPtr->window;
+    event.xvisibility.state = VisibilityUnobscured;
+    NotifyVisibility(&event, winPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * NotifyVisibility --
+ *
+ *	This function recursively notifies the mapped children of the
+ *	specified window of a change in visibility.  Note that we don't
+ *	properly report the visibility state, since Windows does not
+ *	provide that info.  The eventPtr argument must point to an event
+ *	that has been completely initialized except for the window slot.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Generates lots of events.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+NotifyVisibility(eventPtr, winPtr)
+    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Initialized VisibilityNotify event. */
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window to notify. */
+{
+    if (winPtr->atts.event_mask & VisibilityChangeMask) {
+	eventPtr->xvisibility.window = winPtr->window;
+	Tk_QueueWindowEvent(eventPtr, TCL_QUEUE_TAIL);
+    }
+    for (winPtr = winPtr->childList; winPtr != NULL; 
+	    winPtr = winPtr->nextPtr) {
+	if (winPtr->flags & TK_MAPPED) {
+	    NotifyVisibility(eventPtr, winPtr);
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XUnmapWindow --
+ *
+ *	Cause the given window to become invisible.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Causes the window state to change, and generates an UnmapNotify
+ *	event.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+XUnmapWindow(display, w)
+    Display* display;
+    Window w;
+{
+    XEvent event;
+    TkWindow *winPtr = TkWinGetWinPtr(w);
+
+    display->request++;
+
+    /*
+     * Bug fix: Don't short circuit this routine based on TK_MAPPED because
+     * it will be cleared before XUnmapWindow is called.
+     */
+
+    ShowWindow(TkWinGetHWND(w), SW_HIDE);
+    winPtr->flags &= ~TK_MAPPED;
+
+    if (winPtr->flags & TK_TOP_LEVEL) {
+	event.type = UnmapNotify;
+	event.xunmap.serial = display->request;
+	event.xunmap.send_event = False;
+	event.xunmap.display = display;
+	event.xunmap.event = winPtr->window;
+	event.xunmap.window = winPtr->window;
+	event.xunmap.from_configure = False;
+	Tk_HandleEvent(&event);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XMoveResizeWindow --
+ *
+ *	Move and resize a window relative to its parent.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Repositions and resizes the specified window.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+XMoveResizeWindow(display, w, x, y, width, height)
+    Display* display;
+    Window w;
+    int x;			/* Position relative to parent. */
+    int y;
+    unsigned int width;
+    unsigned int height;
+{
+    display->request++;
+    MoveWindow(TkWinGetHWND(w), x, y, width, height, TRUE);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XMoveWindow --
+ *
+ *	Move a window relative to its parent.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Repositions the specified window.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+XMoveWindow(display, w, x, y)
+    Display* display;
+    Window w;
+    int x;
+    int y;
+{
+    TkWindow *winPtr = TkWinGetWinPtr(w);
+
+    display->request++;
+
+    MoveWindow(TkWinGetHWND(w), x, y, winPtr->changes.width,
+	    winPtr->changes.height, TRUE);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XResizeWindow --
+ *
+ *	Resize a window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Resizes the specified window.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+XResizeWindow(display, w, width, height)
+    Display* display;
+    Window w;
+    unsigned int width;
+    unsigned int height;
+{
+    TkWindow *winPtr = TkWinGetWinPtr(w);
+
+    display->request++;
+
+    MoveWindow(TkWinGetHWND(w), winPtr->changes.x, winPtr->changes.y, width,
+	    height, TRUE);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XRaiseWindow --
+ *
+ *	Change the stacking order of a window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Changes the stacking order of the specified window.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+XRaiseWindow(display, w)
+    Display* display;
+    Window w;
+{
+    HWND window = TkWinGetHWND(w);
+
+    display->request++;
+    SetWindowPos(window, HWND_TOPMOST, 0, 0, 0, 0,
+	    SWP_NOMOVE | SWP_NOSIZE);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XConfigureWindow --
+ *
+ *	Change the size, position, stacking, or border of the specified
+ *	window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Changes the attributes of the specified window.  Note that we
+ *	ignore the passed in values and use the values stored in the
+ *	TkWindow data structure.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+XConfigureWindow(display, w, value_mask, values)
+    Display* display;
+    Window w;
+    unsigned int value_mask;
+    XWindowChanges* values;
+{
+    TkWindow *winPtr = TkWinGetWinPtr(w);
+    HWND hwnd = TkWinGetHWND(w);
+
+    display->request++;
+
+    /*
+     * Change the shape and/or position of the window.
+     */
+
+    if (value_mask & (CWX|CWY|CWWidth|CWHeight)) {
+	MoveWindow(hwnd, winPtr->changes.x, winPtr->changes.y,
+		winPtr->changes.width, winPtr->changes.height, TRUE);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Change the stacking order of the window.
+     */
+
+    if (value_mask & CWStackMode) {
+	HWND sibling;
+	if ((value_mask & CWSibling) && (values->sibling != None)) {
+	    sibling = Tk_GetHWND(values->sibling);
+	} else {
+	    sibling = NULL;
+	}
+	TkWinSetWindowPos(hwnd, sibling, values->stack_mode);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XClearWindow --
+ *
+ *	Clears the entire window to the current background color.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Erases the current contents of the window.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+XClearWindow(display, w)
+    Display* display;
+    Window w;
+{
+    RECT rc;
+    HBRUSH brush;
+    HPALETTE oldPalette, palette;
+    TkWindow *winPtr;
+    HWND hwnd = TkWinGetHWND(w);
+    HDC dc = GetDC(hwnd);
+
+    palette = TkWinGetPalette(display->screens[0].cmap);
+    oldPalette = SelectPalette(dc, palette, FALSE);
+
+    display->request++;
+
+    winPtr = TkWinGetWinPtr(w);
+    brush = CreateSolidBrush(winPtr->atts.background_pixel);
+    GetWindowRect(hwnd, &rc);
+    rc.right = rc.right - rc.left;
+    rc.bottom = rc.bottom - rc.top;
+    rc.left = rc.top = 0;
+    FillRect(dc, &rc, brush);
+
+    DeleteObject(brush);
+    SelectPalette(dc, oldPalette, TRUE);
+    ReleaseDC(hwnd, dc);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XChangeWindowAttributes --
+ *
+ *	This function is called when the attributes on a window are
+ *	updated.  Since Tk maintains all of the window state, the only
+ *	relevant value is the cursor.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	May cause the mouse position to be updated.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+XChangeWindowAttributes(display, w, valueMask, attributes)
+    Display* display;
+    Window w;
+    unsigned long valueMask;
+    XSetWindowAttributes* attributes;
+{
+    if (valueMask & CWCursor) {
+	XDefineCursor(display, w, attributes->cursor);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWinSetWindowPos --
+ *
+ *	Adjust the stacking order of a window relative to a second
+ *	window (or NULL).
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Moves the specified window in the stacking order.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkWinSetWindowPos(hwnd, siblingHwnd, pos)
+    HWND hwnd;			/* Window to restack. */
+    HWND siblingHwnd;		/* Sibling window. */
+    int pos;			/* One of Above or Below. */
+{
+    HWND temp;
+
+    /*
+     * Since Windows does not support Above mode, we place the
+     * specified window below the sibling and then swap them.
+     */
+
+    if (siblingHwnd) {
+	if (pos == Above) {
+	    SetWindowPos(hwnd, siblingHwnd, 0, 0, 0, 0,
+		    SWP_NOACTIVATE | SWP_NOMOVE | SWP_NOSIZE);
+	    temp = hwnd;
+	    hwnd = siblingHwnd;
+	    siblingHwnd = temp;
+	}
+    } else {
+	siblingHwnd = (pos == Above) ? HWND_TOP : HWND_BOTTOM;
+    }
+
+    SetWindowPos(hwnd, siblingHwnd, 0, 0, 0, 0,
+	    SWP_NOACTIVATE | SWP_NOMOVE | SWP_NOSIZE);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpWindowWasRecentlyDeleted --
+ *
+ *	Determines whether we know if the window given as argument was
+ *	recently deleted. Called by the generic code error handler to
+ *	handle BadWindow events.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Always 0. We do not keep this information on Windows.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkpWindowWasRecentlyDeleted(win, dispPtr)
+    Window win;
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr;
+{
+    return 0;
+}
diff --git a/win/tkWinWm.c b/win/tkWinWm.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6ec1a2a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/tkWinWm.c
@@ -0,0 +1,4115 @@
+/* 
+ * tkWinWm.c --
+ *
+ *	This module takes care of the interactions between a Tk-based
+ *	application and the window manager.  Among other things, it
+ *	implements the "wm" command and passes geometry information
+ *	to the window manager.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1995-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkWinWm.c 1.67 97/09/23 17:39:47
+ */
+
+#include "tkWinInt.h"
+
+/*
+ * A data structure of the following type holds information for
+ * each window manager protocol (such as WM_DELETE_WINDOW) for
+ * which a handler (i.e. a Tcl command) has been defined for a
+ * particular top-level window.
+ */
+
+typedef struct ProtocolHandler {
+    Atom protocol;		/* Identifies the protocol. */
+    struct ProtocolHandler *nextPtr;
+				/* Next in list of protocol handlers for
+				 * the same top-level window, or NULL for
+				 * end of list. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter in which to invoke command. */
+    char command[4];		/* Tcl command to invoke when a client
+				 * message for this protocol arrives. 
+				 * The actual size of the structure varies
+				 * to accommodate the needs of the actual
+				 * command. THIS MUST BE THE LAST FIELD OF
+				 * THE STRUCTURE. */
+} ProtocolHandler;
+
+#define HANDLER_SIZE(cmdLength) \
+    ((unsigned) (sizeof(ProtocolHandler) - 3 + cmdLength))
+
+/*
+ * A data structure of the following type holds window-manager-related
+ * information for each top-level window in an application.
+ */
+
+typedef struct TkWmInfo {
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Pointer to main Tk information for
+				 * this window. */
+    HWND wrapper;		/* This is the decorative frame window
+				 * created by the window manager to wrap
+				 * a toplevel window.  This window is
+				 * a direct child of the root window. */
+    Tk_Uid titleUid;		/* Title to display in window caption.  If
+				 * NULL, use name of widget. */
+    Tk_Uid iconName;		/* Name to display in icon. */
+    TkWindow *masterPtr;	/* Master window for TRANSIENT_FOR property,
+				 * or NULL. */
+    XWMHints hints;		/* Various pieces of information for
+				 * window manager. */
+    char *leaderName;		/* Path name of leader of window group
+				 * (corresponds to hints.window_group).
+				 * Malloc-ed. Note:  this field doesn't
+				 * get updated if leader is destroyed. */
+    Tk_Window icon;		/* Window to use as icon for this window,
+				 * or NULL. */
+    Tk_Window iconFor;		/* Window for which this window is icon, or
+				 * NULL if this isn't an icon for anyone. */
+
+    /*
+     * Information used to construct an XSizeHints structure for
+     * the window manager:
+     */
+
+    int defMinWidth, defMinHeight, defMaxWidth, defMaxHeight;
+				/* Default resize limits given by system. */
+    int sizeHintsFlags;		/* Flags word for XSizeHints structure.
+				 * If the PBaseSize flag is set then the
+				 * window is gridded;  otherwise it isn't
+				 * gridded. */
+    int minWidth, minHeight;	/* Minimum dimensions of window, in
+				 * grid units, not pixels. */
+    int maxWidth, maxHeight;	/* Maximum dimensions of window, in
+				 * grid units, not pixels, or 0 to default. */
+    Tk_Window gridWin;		/* Identifies the window that controls
+				 * gridding for this top-level, or NULL if
+				 * the top-level isn't currently gridded. */
+    int widthInc, heightInc;	/* Increments for size changes (# pixels
+				 * per step). */
+    struct {
+	int x;	/* numerator */
+	int y;  /* denominator */
+    } minAspect, maxAspect;	/* Min/max aspect ratios for window. */
+    int reqGridWidth, reqGridHeight;
+				/* The dimensions of the window (in
+				 * grid units) requested through
+				 * the geometry manager. */
+    int gravity;		/* Desired window gravity. */
+
+    /*
+     * Information used to manage the size and location of a window.
+     */
+
+    int width, height;		/* Desired dimensions of window, specified
+				 * in grid units.  These values are
+				 * set by the "wm geometry" command and by
+				 * ConfigureNotify events (for when wm
+				 * resizes window).  -1 means user hasn't
+				 * requested dimensions. */
+    int x, y;			/* Desired X and Y coordinates for window.
+				 * These values are set by "wm geometry",
+				 * plus by ConfigureNotify events (when wm
+				 * moves window).  These numbers are
+				 * different than the numbers stored in
+				 * winPtr->changes because (a) they could be
+				 * measured from the right or bottom edge
+				 * of the screen (see WM_NEGATIVE_X and
+				 * WM_NEGATIVE_Y flags) and (b) if the window
+				 * has been reparented then they refer to the
+				 * parent rather than the window itself. */
+    int borderWidth, borderHeight;
+				/* Width and height of window dressing, in
+				 * pixels for the current style/exStyle.  This
+				 * includes the border on both sides of the
+				 * window. */
+    int configWidth, configHeight;
+				/* Dimensions passed to last request that we
+				 * issued to change geometry of window.  Used
+				 * to eliminate redundant resize operations. */
+    HMENU hMenu;		/* the hMenu associated with this menu */
+    DWORD style, exStyle;	/* Style flags for the wrapper window. */
+
+    /*
+     * List of children of the toplevel which have private colormaps.
+     */
+
+    TkWindow **cmapList;	/* Array of window with private colormaps. */
+    int cmapCount;		/* Number of windows in array. */
+
+    /*
+     * Miscellaneous information.
+     */
+
+    ProtocolHandler *protPtr;	/* First in list of protocol handlers for
+				 * this window (NULL means none). */
+    int cmdArgc;		/* Number of elements in cmdArgv below. */
+    char **cmdArgv;		/* Array of strings to store in the
+				 * WM_COMMAND property.  NULL means nothing
+				 * available. */
+    char *clientMachine;	/* String to store in WM_CLIENT_MACHINE
+				 * property, or NULL. */
+    int flags;			/* Miscellaneous flags, defined below. */
+    struct TkWmInfo *nextPtr;	/* Next in list of all top-level windows. */
+} WmInfo;
+
+/*
+ * Flag values for WmInfo structures:
+ *
+ * WM_NEVER_MAPPED -		non-zero means window has never been
+ *				mapped;  need to update all info when
+ *				window is first mapped.
+ * WM_UPDATE_PENDING -		non-zero means a call to UpdateGeometryInfo
+ *				has already been scheduled for this
+ *				window;  no need to schedule another one.
+ * WM_NEGATIVE_X -		non-zero means x-coordinate is measured in
+ *				pixels from right edge of screen, rather
+ *				than from left edge.
+ * WM_NEGATIVE_Y -		non-zero means y-coordinate is measured in
+ *				pixels up from bottom of screen, rather than
+ *				down from top.
+ * WM_UPDATE_SIZE_HINTS -	non-zero means that new size hints need to be
+ *				propagated to window manager.
+ * WM_SYNC_PENDING -		set to non-zero while waiting for the window
+ *				manager to respond to some state change.
+ * WM_MOVE_PENDING -		non-zero means the application has requested
+ *				a new position for the window, but it hasn't
+ *				been reflected through the window manager
+ *				yet.
+ * WM_COLORAMPS_EXPLICIT -	non-zero means the colormap windows were
+ *				set explicitly via "wm colormapwindows".
+ * WM_ADDED_TOPLEVEL_COLORMAP - non-zero means that when "wm colormapwindows"
+ *				was called the top-level itself wasn't
+ *				specified, so we added it implicitly at
+ *				the end of the list.
+ */
+
+#define WM_NEVER_MAPPED			(1<<0)
+#define WM_UPDATE_PENDING		(1<<1)
+#define WM_NEGATIVE_X			(1<<2)
+#define WM_NEGATIVE_Y			(1<<3)
+#define WM_UPDATE_SIZE_HINTS		(1<<4)
+#define WM_SYNC_PENDING			(1<<5)
+#define WM_CREATE_PENDING		(1<<6)
+#define WM_MOVE_PENDING			(1<<7)
+#define WM_COLORMAPS_EXPLICIT		(1<<8)
+#define WM_ADDED_TOPLEVEL_COLORMAP	(1<<9)
+#define WM_WIDTH_NOT_RESIZABLE		(1<<10)
+#define WM_HEIGHT_NOT_RESIZABLE		(1<<11)
+
+/*
+ * Window styles for various types of toplevel windows.
+ */
+
+#define WM_OVERRIDE_STYLE (WS_POPUP|WS_CLIPCHILDREN|CS_DBLCLKS)
+#define EX_OVERRIDE_STYLE (WS_EX_TOOLWINDOW)
+
+#define WM_TOPLEVEL_STYLE (WS_OVERLAPPEDWINDOW|WS_CLIPCHILDREN|CS_DBLCLKS)
+#define EX_TOPLEVEL_STYLE (0)
+
+#define WM_TRANSIENT_STYLE \
+		(WS_POPUP|WS_CAPTION|WS_SYSMENU|WS_CLIPSIBLINGS|CS_DBLCLKS)
+#define EX_TRANSIENT_STYLE (WS_EX_TOOLWINDOW | WS_EX_DLGMODALFRAME)
+
+/*
+ * This module keeps a list of all top-level windows.
+ */
+
+static WmInfo *firstWmPtr = NULL;	/* Points to first top-level window. */
+static WmInfo *foregroundWmPtr = NULL; /* Points to the foreground window. */
+
+/*
+ * The variable below is used to enable or disable tracing in this
+ * module.  If tracing is enabled, then information is printed on
+ * standard output about interesting interactions with the window
+ * manager.
+ */
+
+static int wmTracing = 0;
+
+/*
+ * The following structure is the official type record for geometry
+ * management of top-level windows.
+ */
+
+static void		TopLevelReqProc(ClientData dummy, Tk_Window tkwin);
+
+static Tk_GeomMgr wmMgrType = {
+    "wm",				/* name */
+    TopLevelReqProc,			/* requestProc */
+    (Tk_GeomLostSlaveProc *) NULL,	/* lostSlaveProc */
+};
+
+/*
+ * Global system palette.  This value always refers to the currently
+ * installed foreground logical palette.
+ */
+
+static HPALETTE systemPalette = NULL;
+
+/*
+ * Window that is being constructed.  This value is set immediately
+ * before a call to CreateWindowEx, and is used by SetLimits.
+ * This is a gross hack needed to work around Windows brain damage
+ * where it sends the WM_GETMINMAXINFO message before the WM_CREATE
+ * window.
+ */
+
+static TkWindow *createWindow = NULL;
+
+/*
+ * Flag indicating whether this module has been initialized yet.
+ */
+
+static int initialized = 0;
+
+/*
+ * Class for toplevel windows.
+ */
+
+static WNDCLASS toplevelClass;
+
+/*
+ * This flag is cleared when the first window is mapped in a non-iconic
+ * state.
+ */
+
+static int firstWindow = 1;
+
+/*
+ * Forward declarations for procedures defined in this file:
+ */
+
+static void		ConfigureEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr,
+			    XConfigureEvent *eventPtr));
+static void		ConfigureTopLevel _ANSI_ARGS_((WINDOWPOS *pos));
+static void		GenerateConfigureNotify _ANSI_ARGS_((
+			    TkWindow *winPtr));
+static void		GetMaxSize _ANSI_ARGS_((WmInfo *wmPtr,
+			    int *maxWidthPtr, int *maxHeightPtr));
+static void		GetMinSize _ANSI_ARGS_((WmInfo *wmPtr,
+			    int *minWidthPtr, int *minHeightPtr));
+static TkWindow *	GetTopLevel _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd));
+static void		InitWm _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+static int		InstallColormaps _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd, int message,
+			    int isForemost));
+static void		InvalidateSubTree _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr,
+			    Colormap colormap));
+static int		ParseGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    char *string, TkWindow *winPtr));
+static void		RefreshColormap _ANSI_ARGS_((Colormap colormap));
+static void		SetLimits _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd, MINMAXINFO *info));
+static LRESULT CALLBACK	TopLevelProc _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd, UINT message,
+			    WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam));
+static void		TopLevelEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr));
+static void		TopLevelReqProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData dummy,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin));
+static void		UpdateGeometryInfo _ANSI_ARGS_((
+			    ClientData clientData));
+static void		UpdateWrapper _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+static LRESULT CALLBACK	WmProc _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd, UINT message,
+			    WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam));
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * InitWm --
+ *
+ *	This routine creates the Wm toplevel decorative frame class.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Registers a new window class.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+InitWm(void)
+{
+    if (initialized) {
+        return;
+    }
+    initialized = 1;
+
+    toplevelClass.style = CS_HREDRAW | CS_VREDRAW | CS_CLASSDC;
+    toplevelClass.cbClsExtra = 0;
+    toplevelClass.cbWndExtra = 0;
+    toplevelClass.hInstance = Tk_GetHINSTANCE();
+    toplevelClass.hbrBackground = NULL;
+    toplevelClass.lpszMenuName = NULL;
+    toplevelClass.lpszClassName = TK_WIN_TOPLEVEL_CLASS_NAME;
+    toplevelClass.lpfnWndProc = WmProc;
+    toplevelClass.hIcon = LoadIcon(Tk_GetHINSTANCE(), "tk");
+    toplevelClass.hCursor = LoadCursor(NULL, IDC_ARROW);
+
+    if (!RegisterClass(&toplevelClass)) {
+	panic("Unable to register TkTopLevel class");
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * GetTopLevel --
+ *
+ *	This function retrieves the TkWindow associated with the
+ *	given HWND.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns the matching TkWindow.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static TkWindow *
+GetTopLevel(hwnd)
+    HWND hwnd;
+{
+    /*
+     * If this function is called before the CreateWindowEx call
+     * has completed, then the user data slot will not have been
+     * set yet, so we use the global createWindow variable.
+     */
+
+    if (createWindow) {
+	return createWindow;
+    }
+    return (TkWindow *) GetWindowLong(hwnd, GWL_USERDATA);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * SetLimits --
+ *
+ *	Updates the minimum and maximum window size constraints.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Changes the values of the info pointer to reflect the current
+ *	minimum and maximum size values.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+SetLimits(hwnd, info)
+    HWND hwnd;
+    MINMAXINFO *info;
+{
+    register WmInfo *wmPtr;
+    int maxWidth, maxHeight;
+    int minWidth, minHeight;
+    int base;
+    TkWindow *winPtr = GetTopLevel(hwnd);
+
+    if (winPtr == NULL) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
+    
+    /*
+     * Copy latest constraint info.
+     */
+
+    wmPtr->defMinWidth = info->ptMinTrackSize.x;
+    wmPtr->defMinHeight = info->ptMinTrackSize.y;
+    wmPtr->defMaxWidth = info->ptMaxTrackSize.x;
+    wmPtr->defMaxHeight = info->ptMaxTrackSize.y;
+    
+    GetMaxSize(wmPtr, &maxWidth, &maxHeight);
+    GetMinSize(wmPtr, &minWidth, &minHeight);
+
+    if (wmPtr->gridWin != NULL) {
+	base = winPtr->reqWidth - (wmPtr->reqGridWidth * wmPtr->widthInc);
+	if (base < 0) {
+	    base = 0;
+	}
+	base += wmPtr->borderWidth;
+	info->ptMinTrackSize.x = base + (minWidth * wmPtr->widthInc);
+	info->ptMaxTrackSize.x = base + (maxWidth * wmPtr->widthInc);
+
+	base = winPtr->reqHeight - (wmPtr->reqGridHeight * wmPtr->heightInc);
+	if (base < 0) {
+	    base = 0;
+	}
+	base += wmPtr->borderHeight;
+	info->ptMinTrackSize.y = base + (minHeight * wmPtr->heightInc);
+	info->ptMaxTrackSize.y = base + (maxHeight * wmPtr->heightInc);
+    } else {
+	info->ptMaxTrackSize.x = maxWidth + wmPtr->borderWidth;
+	info->ptMaxTrackSize.y = maxHeight + wmPtr->borderHeight;
+	info->ptMinTrackSize.x = minWidth + wmPtr->borderWidth;
+	info->ptMinTrackSize.y = minHeight + wmPtr->borderHeight;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * If the window isn't supposed to be resizable, then set the
+     * minimum and maximum dimensions to be the same as the current size.
+     */
+
+    if (!(wmPtr->flags & WM_SYNC_PENDING)) {
+	if (wmPtr->flags & WM_WIDTH_NOT_RESIZABLE) {
+	    info->ptMinTrackSize.x = winPtr->changes.width
+		+ wmPtr->borderWidth;
+	    info->ptMaxTrackSize.x = info->ptMinTrackSize.x;
+	}
+	if (wmPtr->flags & WM_HEIGHT_NOT_RESIZABLE) {
+	    info->ptMinTrackSize.y = winPtr->changes.height 
+		+ wmPtr->borderHeight;
+	    info->ptMaxTrackSize.y = info->ptMinTrackSize.y;
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWinWmCleanup --
+ *
+ *	Unregisters classes registered by the window manager. This is
+ *	called from the DLL main entry point when the DLL is unloaded.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The window classes are discarded.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkWinWmCleanup(hInstance)
+    HINSTANCE hInstance;
+{
+    if (!initialized) {
+        return;
+    }
+    initialized = 0;
+    
+    UnregisterClass(TK_WIN_TOPLEVEL_CLASS_NAME, hInstance);
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWmNewWindow --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked whenever a new top-level
+ *	window is created.  Its job is to initialize the WmInfo
+ *	structure for the window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	A WmInfo structure gets allocated and initialized.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkWmNewWindow(winPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Newly-created top-level window. */
+{
+    register WmInfo *wmPtr;
+
+    wmPtr = (WmInfo *) ckalloc(sizeof(WmInfo));
+    winPtr->wmInfoPtr = wmPtr;
+    wmPtr->winPtr = winPtr;
+    wmPtr->wrapper = NULL;
+    wmPtr->titleUid = NULL;
+    wmPtr->iconName = NULL;
+    wmPtr->masterPtr = NULL;
+    wmPtr->hints.flags = InputHint | StateHint;
+    wmPtr->hints.input = True;
+    wmPtr->hints.initial_state = NormalState;
+    wmPtr->hints.icon_pixmap = None;
+    wmPtr->hints.icon_window = None;
+    wmPtr->hints.icon_x = wmPtr->hints.icon_y = 0;
+    wmPtr->hints.icon_mask = None;
+    wmPtr->hints.window_group = None;
+    wmPtr->leaderName = NULL;
+    wmPtr->icon = NULL;
+    wmPtr->iconFor = NULL;
+    wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags = 0;
+
+    /*
+     * Default the maximum dimensions to the size of the display.
+     */
+
+    wmPtr->defMinWidth = wmPtr->defMinHeight = 0;
+    wmPtr->defMaxWidth = DisplayWidth(winPtr->display,
+	    winPtr->screenNum);
+    wmPtr->defMaxHeight = DisplayHeight(winPtr->display,
+	    winPtr->screenNum);
+    wmPtr->minWidth = wmPtr->minHeight = 1;
+    wmPtr->maxWidth = wmPtr->maxHeight = 0;
+    wmPtr->gridWin = NULL;
+    wmPtr->widthInc = wmPtr->heightInc = 1;
+    wmPtr->minAspect.x = wmPtr->minAspect.y = 1;
+    wmPtr->maxAspect.x = wmPtr->maxAspect.y = 1;
+    wmPtr->reqGridWidth = wmPtr->reqGridHeight = -1;
+    wmPtr->gravity = NorthWestGravity;
+    wmPtr->width = -1;
+    wmPtr->height = -1;
+    wmPtr->hMenu = NULL;
+    wmPtr->x = winPtr->changes.x;
+    wmPtr->y = winPtr->changes.y;
+    wmPtr->borderWidth = 0;
+    wmPtr->borderHeight = 0;
+    
+    wmPtr->cmapList = NULL;
+    wmPtr->cmapCount = 0;
+
+    wmPtr->configWidth = -1;
+    wmPtr->configHeight = -1;
+    wmPtr->protPtr = NULL;
+    wmPtr->cmdArgv = NULL;
+    wmPtr->clientMachine = NULL;
+    wmPtr->flags = WM_NEVER_MAPPED;
+    wmPtr->nextPtr = firstWmPtr;
+    firstWmPtr = wmPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * Tk must monitor structure events for top-level windows, in order
+     * to detect size and position changes caused by window managers.
+     */
+
+    Tk_CreateEventHandler((Tk_Window) winPtr, StructureNotifyMask,
+	    TopLevelEventProc, (ClientData) winPtr);
+
+    /*
+     * Arrange for geometry requests to be reflected from the window
+     * to the window manager.
+     */
+
+    Tk_ManageGeometry((Tk_Window) winPtr, &wmMgrType, (ClientData) 0);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * UpdateWrapper --
+ *
+ *	This function creates the wrapper window that contains the
+ *	window decorations and menus for a toplevel.  This function
+ *	may be called after a window is mapped to change the window
+ *	style.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Destroys any old wrapper window and replaces it with a newly
+ *	created wrapper.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+UpdateWrapper(winPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Top-level window to redecorate. */
+{
+    register WmInfo *wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
+    HWND parentHWND = NULL, oldWrapper;
+    HWND child = TkWinGetHWND(winPtr->window);
+    int x, y, width, height, state;
+    WINDOWPLACEMENT place;
+
+    parentHWND = NULL;
+    child = TkWinGetHWND(winPtr->window); 
+
+    if (winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED) {
+	wmPtr->wrapper = (HWND) winPtr->privatePtr;
+	if (wmPtr->wrapper == NULL) {
+	    panic("TkWmMapWindow: Cannot find container window");
+	}
+	if (!IsWindow(wmPtr->wrapper)) {
+	    panic("TkWmMapWindow: Container was destroyed");
+	}
+
+    } else {
+	/*
+	 * Pick the decorative frame style.  Override redirect windows get
+	 * created as undecorated popups.  Transient windows get a modal
+	 * dialog frame.  Neither override, nor transient windows appear in
+	 * the Win95 taskbar.  Note that a transient window does not resize
+	 * by default, so we need to explicitly add the WS_THICKFRAME style
+	 * if we want it to be resizeable.
+	 */
+	
+	if (winPtr->atts.override_redirect) {
+	    wmPtr->style = WM_OVERRIDE_STYLE;
+	    wmPtr->exStyle = EX_OVERRIDE_STYLE;
+	} else if (wmPtr->masterPtr) {
+	    wmPtr->style = WM_TRANSIENT_STYLE;
+	    wmPtr->exStyle = EX_TRANSIENT_STYLE;
+	    parentHWND = Tk_GetHWND(Tk_WindowId(wmPtr->masterPtr));
+	    if (! ((wmPtr->flags & WM_WIDTH_NOT_RESIZABLE) && 
+		    (wmPtr->flags & WM_HEIGHT_NOT_RESIZABLE))) {
+		wmPtr->style |= WS_THICKFRAME;
+	    }
+	} else {
+	    wmPtr->style = WM_TOPLEVEL_STYLE;
+	    wmPtr->exStyle = EX_TOPLEVEL_STYLE;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Compute the geometry of the parent and child windows.
+	 */
+
+	wmPtr->flags |= WM_CREATE_PENDING|WM_MOVE_PENDING;
+	UpdateGeometryInfo((ClientData)winPtr);
+	wmPtr->flags &= ~(WM_CREATE_PENDING|WM_MOVE_PENDING);
+
+	width = wmPtr->borderWidth + winPtr->changes.width;
+	height = wmPtr->borderHeight + winPtr->changes.height;
+
+	/*
+	 * Set the initial position from the user or program specified
+	 * location.  If nothing has been specified, then let the system
+	 * pick a location.
+	 */
+
+   
+	if (!(wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags & (USPosition | PPosition))
+		&& (wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED)) {
+	    x = CW_USEDEFAULT;
+	    y = CW_USEDEFAULT;
+	} else {
+	    x = winPtr->changes.x;
+	    y = winPtr->changes.y;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Create the containing window, and set the user data to point
+	 * to the TkWindow.
+	 */
+
+	createWindow = winPtr;
+	wmPtr->wrapper = CreateWindowEx(wmPtr->exStyle,
+		TK_WIN_TOPLEVEL_CLASS_NAME,
+		wmPtr->titleUid, wmPtr->style, x, y, width, height,
+		parentHWND, NULL, Tk_GetHINSTANCE(), NULL);
+	SetWindowLong(wmPtr->wrapper, GWL_USERDATA, (LONG) winPtr);
+	createWindow = NULL;
+
+	place.length = sizeof(WINDOWPLACEMENT);
+	GetWindowPlacement(wmPtr->wrapper, &place);
+	wmPtr->x = place.rcNormalPosition.left;
+	wmPtr->y = place.rcNormalPosition.top;
+
+	TkInstallFrameMenu((Tk_Window) winPtr);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Now we need to reparent the contained window and set its
+     * style appropriately.  Be sure to update the style first so that
+     * Windows doesn't try to set the focus to the child window.
+     */
+
+    SetWindowLong(child, GWL_STYLE,
+	    WS_CHILD | WS_CLIPCHILDREN | WS_CLIPSIBLINGS);
+    if (winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED) {
+	SetWindowLong(child, GWL_WNDPROC, (LONG) TopLevelProc);
+    }
+    oldWrapper = SetParent(child, wmPtr->wrapper);
+    if (oldWrapper && (oldWrapper != wmPtr->wrapper) 
+	    && (oldWrapper != GetDesktopWindow())) {
+	SetWindowLong(oldWrapper, GWL_USERDATA, (LONG) NULL);
+	DestroyWindow(oldWrapper);
+    }
+    wmPtr->flags &= ~WM_NEVER_MAPPED;
+    SendMessage(wmPtr->wrapper, TK_ATTACHWINDOW, (WPARAM) child, 0);
+
+    /*
+     * Force an initial transition from withdrawn to the real
+     * initial state.	 
+     */
+
+    state = wmPtr->hints.initial_state;
+    wmPtr->hints.initial_state = WithdrawnState;
+    TkpWmSetState(winPtr, state);
+
+    /*
+     * If we are embedded then force a mapping of the window now,
+     * because we do not necessarily own the wrapper and may not
+     * get another opportunity to map ourselves. We should not be
+     * in either iconified or zoomed states when we get here, so
+     * it is safe to just check for TK_EMBEDDED without checking
+     * what state we are supposed to be in (default to NormalState).
+     */
+
+    if (winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED) {
+	XMapWindow(winPtr->display, winPtr->window);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Set up menus on the wrapper if required.
+     */
+        
+    if (wmPtr->hMenu != NULL) {
+	wmPtr->flags = WM_SYNC_PENDING;
+	SetMenu(wmPtr->wrapper, wmPtr->hMenu);
+	wmPtr->flags &= ~WM_SYNC_PENDING;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * If this is the first window created by the application, then
+     * we should activate the initial window.
+     */
+
+    if (firstWindow) {
+	firstWindow = 0;
+	SetActiveWindow(wmPtr->wrapper);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWmMapWindow --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked to map a top-level window.  This
+ *	module gets a chance to update all window-manager-related
+ *	information in properties before the window manager sees
+ *	the map event and checks the properties.  It also gets to
+ *	decide whether or not to even map the window after all.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Properties of winPtr may get updated to provide up-to-date
+ *	information to the window manager.  The window may also get
+ *	mapped, but it may not be if this procedure decides that
+ *	isn't appropriate (e.g. because the window is withdrawn).
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkWmMapWindow(winPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Top-level window that's about to
+				 * be mapped. */
+{
+    register WmInfo *wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
+
+    if (!initialized) {
+	InitWm();
+    }
+
+    if (!(wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED)) {
+	if (wmPtr->hints.initial_state == WithdrawnState) {
+	    return;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Map the window in either the iconified or normal state.  Note that
+	 * we only send a map event if the window is in the normal state.
+	 */
+
+	TkpWmSetState(winPtr, wmPtr->hints.initial_state);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * This is the first time this window has ever been mapped.
+     * Store all the window-manager-related information for the
+     * window.
+     */
+
+    if (wmPtr->titleUid == NULL) {
+	wmPtr->titleUid = winPtr->nameUid;
+    }
+    UpdateWrapper(winPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWmUnmapWindow --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked to unmap a top-level window.  The
+ *	only thing it does special is unmap the decorative frame before
+ *	unmapping the toplevel window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Unmaps the decorative frame and the window.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkWmUnmapWindow(winPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Top-level window that's about to
+				 * be unmapped. */
+{
+    TkpWmSetState(winPtr, WithdrawnState);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpWmSetState --
+ *
+ *	Sets the window manager state for the wrapper window of a
+ *	given toplevel window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	May maximize, minimize, restore, or withdraw a window.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpWmSetState(winPtr, state)
+     TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Toplevel window to operate on. */
+     int state;			/* One of IconicState, ZoomState, NormalState,
+				 * or WithdrawnState. */
+{
+    WmInfo *wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
+    int cmd;
+    
+    if (wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED) {
+	wmPtr->hints.initial_state = state;
+	return;
+    }
+
+    wmPtr->flags |= WM_SYNC_PENDING;
+    if (state == WithdrawnState) {
+	cmd = SW_HIDE;
+    } else if (state == IconicState) {
+	cmd = SW_SHOWMINNOACTIVE;
+    } else if (state == NormalState) {
+	cmd = SW_SHOWNOACTIVATE;
+    } else if (state == ZoomState) {
+	cmd = SW_SHOWMAXIMIZED;
+    }
+    ShowWindow(wmPtr->wrapper, cmd);
+    wmPtr->flags &= ~WM_SYNC_PENDING;
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWmDeadWindow --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked when a top-level window is
+ *	about to be deleted.  It cleans up the wm-related data
+ *	structures for the window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The WmInfo structure for winPtr gets freed up.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkWmDeadWindow(winPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Top-level window that's being deleted. */
+{
+    register WmInfo *wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
+    WmInfo *wmPtr2;
+
+    if (wmPtr == NULL) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Clean up event related window info.
+     */
+
+    if (firstWmPtr == wmPtr) {
+	firstWmPtr = wmPtr->nextPtr;
+    } else {
+	register WmInfo *prevPtr;
+	for (prevPtr = firstWmPtr; ; prevPtr = prevPtr->nextPtr) {
+	    if (prevPtr == NULL) {
+		panic("couldn't unlink window in TkWmDeadWindow");
+	    }
+	    if (prevPtr->nextPtr == wmPtr) {
+		prevPtr->nextPtr = wmPtr->nextPtr;
+		break;
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Reset all transient windows whose master is the dead window.
+     */
+
+    for (wmPtr2 = firstWmPtr; wmPtr2 != NULL; wmPtr2 = wmPtr2->nextPtr) {
+	if (wmPtr2->masterPtr == winPtr) {
+	    wmPtr2->masterPtr = NULL;
+	    if ((wmPtr2->wrapper != None)
+		    && !(wmPtr2->flags & (WM_NEVER_MAPPED))) {
+		UpdateWrapper(wmPtr2->winPtr);
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+    
+    if (wmPtr->hints.flags & IconPixmapHint) {
+	Tk_FreeBitmap(winPtr->display, wmPtr->hints.icon_pixmap);
+    }
+    if (wmPtr->hints.flags & IconMaskHint) {
+	Tk_FreeBitmap(winPtr->display, wmPtr->hints.icon_mask);
+    }
+    if (wmPtr->leaderName != NULL) {
+	ckfree(wmPtr->leaderName);
+    }
+    if (wmPtr->icon != NULL) {
+	wmPtr2 = ((TkWindow *) wmPtr->icon)->wmInfoPtr;
+	wmPtr2->iconFor = NULL;
+    }
+    if (wmPtr->iconFor != NULL) {
+	wmPtr2 = ((TkWindow *) wmPtr->iconFor)->wmInfoPtr;
+	wmPtr2->icon = NULL;
+	wmPtr2->hints.flags &= ~IconWindowHint;
+    }
+    while (wmPtr->protPtr != NULL) {
+	ProtocolHandler *protPtr;
+
+	protPtr = wmPtr->protPtr;
+	wmPtr->protPtr = protPtr->nextPtr;
+	Tcl_EventuallyFree((ClientData) protPtr, TCL_DYNAMIC);
+    }
+    if (wmPtr->cmdArgv != NULL) {
+	ckfree((char *) wmPtr->cmdArgv);
+    }
+    if (wmPtr->clientMachine != NULL) {
+	ckfree((char *) wmPtr->clientMachine);
+    }
+    if (wmPtr->flags & WM_UPDATE_PENDING) {
+	Tcl_CancelIdleCall(UpdateGeometryInfo, (ClientData) winPtr);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Destroy the decorative frame window.
+     */
+
+    if (!(winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED)) {
+	if (wmPtr->wrapper != NULL) {
+	    DestroyWindow(wmPtr->wrapper);
+	} else {
+	    DestroyWindow(Tk_GetHWND(winPtr->window));
+	}
+    }
+    ckfree((char *) wmPtr);
+    winPtr->wmInfoPtr = NULL;
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWmSetClass --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked whenever a top-level window's
+ *	class is changed.  If the window has been mapped then this
+ *	procedure updates the window manager property for the
+ *	class.  If the window hasn't been mapped, the update is
+ *	deferred until just before the first mapping.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	A window property may get updated.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkWmSetClass(winPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Newly-created top-level window. */
+{
+    return;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_WmCmd --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked to process the "wm" Tcl command.
+ *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	A standard Tcl result.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	See the user documentation.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+	/* ARGSUSED */
+int
+Tk_WmCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with
+				 * interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int argc;			/* Number of arguments. */
+    char **argv;		/* Argument strings. */
+{
+    Tk_Window tkwin = (Tk_Window) clientData;
+    TkWindow *winPtr;
+    register WmInfo *wmPtr;
+    int c;
+    size_t length;
+
+    if (argc < 2) {
+	wrongNumArgs:
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
+		argv[0], " option window ?arg ...?\"", (char *) NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    c = argv[1][0];
+    length = strlen(argv[1]);
+    if ((c == 't') && (strncmp(argv[1], "tracing", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 3)) {
+	if ((argc != 2) && (argc != 3)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " tracing ?boolean?\"", (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 2) {
+	    interp->result = (wmTracing) ? "on" : "off";
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	return Tcl_GetBoolean(interp, argv[2], &wmTracing);
+    }
+
+    if (argc < 3) {
+	goto wrongNumArgs;
+    }
+    winPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_NameToWindow(interp, argv[2], tkwin);
+    if (winPtr == NULL) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (!(winPtr->flags & TK_TOP_LEVEL)) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "window \"", winPtr->pathName,
+		"\" isn't a top-level window", (char *) NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
+    if ((c == 'a') && (strncmp(argv[1], "aspect", length) == 0)) {
+	int numer1, denom1, numer2, denom2;
+
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 7)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " aspect window ?minNumer minDenom ",
+		    "maxNumer maxDenom?\"", (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    if (wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags & PAspect) {
+		sprintf(interp->result, "%d %d %d %d", wmPtr->minAspect.x,
+			wmPtr->minAspect.y, wmPtr->maxAspect.x,
+			wmPtr->maxAspect.y);
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (*argv[3] == '\0') {
+	    wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags &= ~PAspect;
+	} else {
+	    if ((Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[3], &numer1) != TCL_OK)
+		    || (Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[4], &denom1) != TCL_OK)
+		    || (Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[5], &numer2) != TCL_OK)
+		    || (Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[6], &denom2) != TCL_OK)) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if ((numer1 <= 0) || (denom1 <= 0) || (numer2 <= 0) ||
+		    (denom2 <= 0)) {
+		interp->result = "aspect number can't be <= 0";
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    wmPtr->minAspect.x = numer1;
+	    wmPtr->minAspect.y = denom1;
+	    wmPtr->maxAspect.x = numer2;
+	    wmPtr->maxAspect.y = denom2;
+	    wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags |= PAspect;
+	}
+	goto updateGeom;
+    } else if ((c == 'c') && (strncmp(argv[1], "client", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 2)) {
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 4)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " client window ?name?\"",
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    if (wmPtr->clientMachine != NULL) {
+		interp->result = wmPtr->clientMachine;
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (argv[3][0] == 0) {
+	    if (wmPtr->clientMachine != NULL) {
+		ckfree((char *) wmPtr->clientMachine);
+		wmPtr->clientMachine = NULL;
+		if (!(wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED)) {
+		    XDeleteProperty(winPtr->display, winPtr->window,
+			    Tk_InternAtom((Tk_Window) winPtr,
+			    "WM_CLIENT_MACHINE"));
+		}
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (wmPtr->clientMachine != NULL) {
+	    ckfree((char *) wmPtr->clientMachine);
+	}
+	wmPtr->clientMachine = (char *)
+		ckalloc((unsigned) (strlen(argv[3]) + 1));
+	strcpy(wmPtr->clientMachine, argv[3]);
+	if (!(wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED)) {
+	    XTextProperty textProp;
+	    if (XStringListToTextProperty(&wmPtr->clientMachine, 1, &textProp)
+		    != 0) {
+		XSetWMClientMachine(winPtr->display, winPtr->window,
+			&textProp);
+		XFree((char *) textProp.value);
+	    }
+	}
+    } else if ((c == 'c') && (strncmp(argv[1], "colormapwindows", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 3)) {
+	TkWindow **cmapList;
+	TkWindow *winPtr2;
+	int i, windowArgc, gotToplevel;
+	char **windowArgv;
+
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 4)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " colormapwindows window ?windowList?\"",
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    Tk_MakeWindowExist((Tk_Window) winPtr);
+	    for (i = 0; i < wmPtr->cmapCount; i++) {
+		if ((i == (wmPtr->cmapCount-1))
+			&& (wmPtr->flags & WM_ADDED_TOPLEVEL_COLORMAP)) {
+		    break;
+		}
+		Tcl_AppendElement(interp, wmPtr->cmapList[i]->pathName);
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (Tcl_SplitList(interp, argv[3], &windowArgc, &windowArgv)
+		!= TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	cmapList = (TkWindow **) ckalloc((unsigned)
+		((windowArgc+1)*sizeof(TkWindow*)));
+	for (i = 0; i < windowArgc; i++) {
+	    winPtr2 = (TkWindow *) Tk_NameToWindow(interp, windowArgv[i],
+		    tkwin);
+	    if (winPtr2 == NULL) {
+		ckfree((char *) cmapList);
+		ckfree((char *) windowArgv);
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (winPtr2 == winPtr) {
+		gotToplevel = 1;
+	    }
+	    if (winPtr2->window == None) {
+		Tk_MakeWindowExist((Tk_Window) winPtr2);
+	    }
+	    cmapList[i] = winPtr2;
+	}
+	if (!gotToplevel) {
+	    wmPtr->flags |= WM_ADDED_TOPLEVEL_COLORMAP;
+	    cmapList[windowArgc] = winPtr;
+	    windowArgc++;
+	} else {
+	    wmPtr->flags &= ~WM_ADDED_TOPLEVEL_COLORMAP;
+	}
+	wmPtr->flags |= WM_COLORMAPS_EXPLICIT;
+	if (wmPtr->cmapList != NULL) {
+	    ckfree((char *)wmPtr->cmapList);
+	}
+	wmPtr->cmapList = cmapList;
+	wmPtr->cmapCount = windowArgc;
+	ckfree((char *) windowArgv);
+
+	/*
+	 * Now we need to force the updated colormaps to be installed.
+	 */
+
+	if (wmPtr == foregroundWmPtr) {
+	    InstallColormaps(wmPtr->wrapper, WM_QUERYNEWPALETTE, 1);
+	} else {
+	    InstallColormaps(wmPtr->wrapper, WM_PALETTECHANGED, 0);
+	}
+	return TCL_OK;
+    } else if ((c == 'c') && (strncmp(argv[1], "command", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 3)) {
+	int cmdArgc;
+	char **cmdArgv;
+
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 4)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " command window ?value?\"",
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    if (wmPtr->cmdArgv != NULL) {
+		interp->result = Tcl_Merge(wmPtr->cmdArgc, wmPtr->cmdArgv);
+		interp->freeProc = TCL_DYNAMIC;
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (argv[3][0] == 0) {
+	    if (wmPtr->cmdArgv != NULL) {
+		ckfree((char *) wmPtr->cmdArgv);
+		wmPtr->cmdArgv = NULL;
+		if (!(wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED)) {
+		    XDeleteProperty(winPtr->display, winPtr->window,
+			    Tk_InternAtom((Tk_Window) winPtr, "WM_COMMAND"));
+		}
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (Tcl_SplitList(interp, argv[3], &cmdArgc, &cmdArgv) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (wmPtr->cmdArgv != NULL) {
+	    ckfree((char *) wmPtr->cmdArgv);
+	}
+	wmPtr->cmdArgc = cmdArgc;
+	wmPtr->cmdArgv = cmdArgv;
+	if (!(wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED)) {
+	    XSetCommand(winPtr->display, winPtr->window, cmdArgv, cmdArgc);
+	}
+    } else if ((c == 'd') && (strncmp(argv[1], "deiconify", length) == 0)) {
+	if (argc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " deiconify window\"", (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (wmPtr->iconFor != NULL) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't deiconify ", argv[2],
+		    ": it is an icon for ", winPtr->pathName, (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+        if (winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED) {
+            Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't deiconify ", winPtr->pathName,
+                    ": it is an embedded window", (char *) NULL);
+            return TCL_ERROR;
+        }
+	TkpWmSetState(winPtr, NormalState);
+    } else if ((c == 'f') && (strncmp(argv[1], "focusmodel", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 2)) {
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 4)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " focusmodel window ?active|passive?\"",
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    interp->result = wmPtr->hints.input ? "passive" : "active";
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	c = argv[3][0];
+	length = strlen(argv[3]);
+	if ((c == 'a') && (strncmp(argv[3], "active", length) == 0)) {
+	    wmPtr->hints.input = False;
+	} else if ((c == 'p') && (strncmp(argv[3], "passive", length) == 0)) {
+	    wmPtr->hints.input = True;
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad argument \"", argv[3],
+		    "\": must be active or passive", (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+    } else if ((c == 'f') && (strncmp(argv[1], "frame", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 2)) {
+	HWND hwnd;
+
+	if (argc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " frame window\"", (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	hwnd = wmPtr->wrapper;
+	if (hwnd == NULL) {
+	    hwnd = Tk_GetHWND(Tk_WindowId((Tk_Window) winPtr));
+	}
+	sprintf(interp->result, "0x%x", (unsigned int) hwnd);
+    } else if ((c == 'g') && (strncmp(argv[1], "geometry", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 2)) {
+	char xSign, ySign;
+	int width, height;
+
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 4)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " geometry window ?newGeometry?\"",
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    xSign = (wmPtr->flags & WM_NEGATIVE_X) ? '-' : '+';
+	    ySign = (wmPtr->flags & WM_NEGATIVE_Y) ? '-' : '+';
+	    if (wmPtr->gridWin != NULL) {
+		width = wmPtr->reqGridWidth + (winPtr->changes.width
+			- winPtr->reqWidth)/wmPtr->widthInc;
+		height = wmPtr->reqGridHeight + (winPtr->changes.height
+			- winPtr->reqHeight)/wmPtr->heightInc;
+	    } else {
+		width = winPtr->changes.width;
+		height = winPtr->changes.height;
+	    }
+	    sprintf(interp->result, "%dx%d%c%d%c%d", width, height,
+		    xSign, wmPtr->x, ySign, wmPtr->y);
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (*argv[3] == '\0') {
+	    wmPtr->width = -1;
+	    wmPtr->height = -1;
+	    goto updateGeom;
+	}
+	return ParseGeometry(interp, argv[3], winPtr);
+    } else if ((c == 'g') && (strncmp(argv[1], "grid", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 3)) {
+	int reqWidth, reqHeight, widthInc, heightInc;
+
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 7)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " grid window ?baseWidth baseHeight ",
+		    "widthInc heightInc?\"", (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    if (wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags & PBaseSize) {
+		sprintf(interp->result, "%d %d %d %d", wmPtr->reqGridWidth,
+			wmPtr->reqGridHeight, wmPtr->widthInc,
+			wmPtr->heightInc);
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (*argv[3] == '\0') {
+	    /*
+	     * Turn off gridding and reset the width and height
+	     * to make sense as ungridded numbers.
+	     */
+
+	    wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags &= ~(PBaseSize|PResizeInc);
+	    if (wmPtr->width != -1) {
+		wmPtr->width = winPtr->reqWidth + (wmPtr->width
+			- wmPtr->reqGridWidth)*wmPtr->widthInc;
+		wmPtr->height = winPtr->reqHeight + (wmPtr->height
+			- wmPtr->reqGridHeight)*wmPtr->heightInc;
+	    }
+	    wmPtr->widthInc = 1;
+	    wmPtr->heightInc = 1;
+	} else {
+	    if ((Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[3], &reqWidth) != TCL_OK)
+		    || (Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[4], &reqHeight) != TCL_OK)
+		    || (Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[5], &widthInc) != TCL_OK)
+		    || (Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[6], &heightInc) != TCL_OK)) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (reqWidth < 0) {
+		interp->result = "baseWidth can't be < 0";
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (reqHeight < 0) {
+		interp->result = "baseHeight can't be < 0";
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (widthInc < 0) {
+		interp->result = "widthInc can't be < 0";
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (heightInc < 0) {
+		interp->result = "heightInc can't be < 0";
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    Tk_SetGrid((Tk_Window) winPtr, reqWidth, reqHeight, widthInc,
+		    heightInc);
+	}
+	goto updateGeom;
+    } else if ((c == 'g') && (strncmp(argv[1], "group", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 3)) {
+	Tk_Window tkwin2;
+
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 4)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " group window ?pathName?\"",
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    if (wmPtr->hints.flags & WindowGroupHint) {
+		interp->result = wmPtr->leaderName;
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (*argv[3] == '\0') {
+	    wmPtr->hints.flags &= ~WindowGroupHint;
+	    if (wmPtr->leaderName != NULL) {
+		ckfree(wmPtr->leaderName);
+	    }
+	    wmPtr->leaderName = NULL;
+	} else {
+	    tkwin2 = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, argv[3], tkwin);
+	    if (tkwin2 == NULL) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    Tk_MakeWindowExist(tkwin2);
+	    wmPtr->hints.window_group = Tk_WindowId(tkwin2);
+	    wmPtr->hints.flags |= WindowGroupHint;
+	    wmPtr->leaderName = ckalloc((unsigned) (strlen(argv[3])+1));
+	    strcpy(wmPtr->leaderName, argv[3]);
+	}
+    } else if ((c == 'i') && (strncmp(argv[1], "iconbitmap", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 5)) {
+	Pixmap pixmap;
+
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 4)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " iconbitmap window ?bitmap?\"",
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    if (wmPtr->hints.flags & IconPixmapHint) {
+		interp->result = Tk_NameOfBitmap(winPtr->display,
+			wmPtr->hints.icon_pixmap);
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (*argv[3] == '\0') {
+	    if (wmPtr->hints.icon_pixmap != None) {
+		Tk_FreeBitmap(winPtr->display, wmPtr->hints.icon_pixmap);
+	    }
+	    wmPtr->hints.flags &= ~IconPixmapHint;
+	} else {
+	    pixmap = Tk_GetBitmap(interp, (Tk_Window) winPtr,
+		    Tk_GetUid(argv[3]));
+	    if (pixmap == None) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    wmPtr->hints.icon_pixmap = pixmap;
+	    wmPtr->hints.flags |= IconPixmapHint;
+	}
+    } else if ((c == 'i') && (strncmp(argv[1], "iconify", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 5)) {
+	if (argc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " iconify window\"", (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (Tk_Attributes((Tk_Window) winPtr)->override_redirect) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't iconify \"", winPtr->pathName,
+		    "\": override-redirect flag is set", (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (wmPtr->masterPtr != NULL) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't iconify \"", winPtr->pathName,
+		    "\": it is a transient", (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (wmPtr->iconFor != NULL) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't iconify ", argv[2],
+		    ": it is an icon for ", winPtr->pathName, (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+        if (winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED) {
+            Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't iconify ", winPtr->pathName,
+                    ": it is an embedded window", (char *) NULL);
+            return TCL_ERROR;
+        }
+	TkpWmSetState(winPtr, IconicState);
+    } else if ((c == 'i') && (strncmp(argv[1], "iconmask", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 5)) {
+	Pixmap pixmap;
+
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 4)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " iconmask window ?bitmap?\"",
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    if (wmPtr->hints.flags & IconMaskHint) {
+		interp->result = Tk_NameOfBitmap(winPtr->display,
+			wmPtr->hints.icon_mask);
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (*argv[3] == '\0') {
+	    if (wmPtr->hints.icon_mask != None) {
+		Tk_FreeBitmap(winPtr->display, wmPtr->hints.icon_mask);
+	    }
+	    wmPtr->hints.flags &= ~IconMaskHint;
+	} else {
+	    pixmap = Tk_GetBitmap(interp, tkwin, Tk_GetUid(argv[3]));
+	    if (pixmap == None) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    wmPtr->hints.icon_mask = pixmap;
+	    wmPtr->hints.flags |= IconMaskHint;
+	}
+    } else if ((c == 'i') && (strncmp(argv[1], "iconname", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 5)) {
+	if (argc > 4) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " iconname window ?newName?\"", (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    interp->result = (wmPtr->iconName != NULL) ? wmPtr->iconName : "";
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	} else {
+	    wmPtr->iconName = Tk_GetUid(argv[3]);
+	    if (!(wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED)) {
+		XSetIconName(winPtr->display, winPtr->window, wmPtr->iconName);
+	    }
+	}
+    } else if ((c == 'i') && (strncmp(argv[1], "iconposition", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 5)) {
+	int x, y;
+
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 5)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " iconposition window ?x y?\"",
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    if (wmPtr->hints.flags & IconPositionHint) {
+		sprintf(interp->result, "%d %d", wmPtr->hints.icon_x,
+			wmPtr->hints.icon_y);
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (*argv[3] == '\0') {
+	    wmPtr->hints.flags &= ~IconPositionHint;
+	} else {
+	    if ((Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[3], &x) != TCL_OK)
+		    || (Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[4], &y) != TCL_OK)){
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    wmPtr->hints.icon_x = x;
+	    wmPtr->hints.icon_y = y;
+	    wmPtr->hints.flags |= IconPositionHint;
+	}
+    } else if ((c == 'i') && (strncmp(argv[1], "iconwindow", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 5)) {
+	Tk_Window tkwin2;
+	WmInfo *wmPtr2;
+	XSetWindowAttributes atts;
+
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 4)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " iconwindow window ?pathName?\"",
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    if (wmPtr->icon != NULL) {
+		interp->result = Tk_PathName(wmPtr->icon);
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (*argv[3] == '\0') {
+	    wmPtr->hints.flags &= ~IconWindowHint;
+	    if (wmPtr->icon != NULL) {
+		/*
+		 * Let the window use button events again, then remove
+		 * it as icon window.
+		 */
+
+		atts.event_mask = Tk_Attributes(wmPtr->icon)->event_mask
+			| ButtonPressMask;
+		Tk_ChangeWindowAttributes(wmPtr->icon, CWEventMask, &atts);
+		wmPtr2 = ((TkWindow *) wmPtr->icon)->wmInfoPtr;
+		wmPtr2->iconFor = NULL;
+		wmPtr2->hints.initial_state = WithdrawnState;
+	    }
+	    wmPtr->icon = NULL;
+	} else {
+	    tkwin2 = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, argv[3], tkwin);
+	    if (tkwin2 == NULL) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (!Tk_IsTopLevel(tkwin2)) {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't use ", argv[3],
+			" as icon window: not at top level", (char *) NULL);
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    wmPtr2 = ((TkWindow *) tkwin2)->wmInfoPtr;
+	    if (wmPtr2->iconFor != NULL) {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, argv[3], " is already an icon for ",
+			Tk_PathName(wmPtr2->iconFor), (char *) NULL);
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (wmPtr->icon != NULL) {
+		WmInfo *wmPtr3 = ((TkWindow *) wmPtr->icon)->wmInfoPtr;
+		wmPtr3->iconFor = NULL;
+
+		/*
+		 * Let the window use button events again.
+		 */
+
+		atts.event_mask = Tk_Attributes(wmPtr->icon)->event_mask
+			| ButtonPressMask;
+		Tk_ChangeWindowAttributes(wmPtr->icon, CWEventMask, &atts);
+	    }
+
+	    /*
+	     * Disable button events in the icon window:  some window
+	     * managers (like olvwm) want to get the events themselves,
+	     * but X only allows one application at a time to receive
+	     * button events for a window.
+	     */
+
+	    atts.event_mask = Tk_Attributes(tkwin2)->event_mask
+		    & ~ButtonPressMask;
+	    Tk_ChangeWindowAttributes(tkwin2, CWEventMask, &atts);
+	    Tk_MakeWindowExist(tkwin2);
+	    wmPtr->hints.icon_window = Tk_WindowId(tkwin2);
+	    wmPtr->hints.flags |= IconWindowHint;
+	    wmPtr->icon = tkwin2;
+	    wmPtr2->iconFor = (Tk_Window) winPtr;
+	    if (!(wmPtr2->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED)) {
+		if (XWithdrawWindow(Tk_Display(tkwin2), Tk_WindowId(tkwin2),
+			Tk_ScreenNumber(tkwin2)) == 0) {
+		    interp->result =
+			    "couldn't send withdraw message to window manager";
+		    return TCL_ERROR;
+		}
+	    }
+	}
+    } else if ((c == 'm') && (strncmp(argv[1], "maxsize", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 2)) {
+	int width, height;
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 5)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " maxsize window ?width height?\"",
+                    (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    GetMaxSize(wmPtr, &width, &height);
+	    sprintf(interp->result, "%d %d", width, height);
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if ((Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[3], &width) != TCL_OK)
+		|| (Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[4], &height) != TCL_OK)) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	wmPtr->maxWidth = width;
+	wmPtr->maxHeight = height;
+	goto updateGeom;
+    } else if ((c == 'm') && (strncmp(argv[1], "minsize", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 2)) {
+	int width, height;
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 5)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " minsize window ?width height?\"",
+                    (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    GetMinSize(wmPtr, &width, &height);
+	    sprintf(interp->result, "%d %d", width, height);
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if ((Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[3], &width) != TCL_OK)
+		|| (Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[4], &height) != TCL_OK)) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	wmPtr->minWidth = width;
+	wmPtr->minHeight = height;
+	goto updateGeom;
+    } else if ((c == 'o')
+	    && (strncmp(argv[1], "overrideredirect", length) == 0)) {
+	int boolean;
+	XSetWindowAttributes atts;
+
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 4)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " overrideredirect window ?boolean?\"",
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    if (Tk_Attributes((Tk_Window) winPtr)->override_redirect) {
+		interp->result = "1";
+	    } else {
+		interp->result = "0";
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (Tcl_GetBoolean(interp, argv[3], &boolean) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	atts.override_redirect = (boolean) ? True : False;
+	Tk_ChangeWindowAttributes((Tk_Window) winPtr, CWOverrideRedirect,
+		&atts);
+	if (!(wmPtr->flags & (WM_NEVER_MAPPED)
+		&& !(winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED))) {
+	    UpdateWrapper(winPtr);
+	}
+    } else if ((c == 'p') && (strncmp(argv[1], "positionfrom", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 2)) {
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 4)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " positionfrom window ?user/program?\"",
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    if (wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags & USPosition) {
+		interp->result = "user";
+	    } else if (wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags & PPosition) {
+		interp->result = "program";
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (*argv[3] == '\0') {
+	    wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags &= ~(USPosition|PPosition);
+	} else {
+	    c = argv[3][0];
+	    length = strlen(argv[3]);
+	    if ((c == 'u') && (strncmp(argv[3], "user", length) == 0)) {
+		wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags &= ~PPosition;
+		wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags |= USPosition;
+	    } else if ((c == 'p')
+                    && (strncmp(argv[3], "program", length) == 0)) {
+		wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags &= ~USPosition;
+		wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags |= PPosition;
+	    } else {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad argument \"", argv[3],
+			"\": must be program or user", (char *) NULL);
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	}
+	goto updateGeom;
+    } else if ((c == 'p') && (strncmp(argv[1], "protocol", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 2)) {
+	register ProtocolHandler *protPtr, *prevPtr;
+	Atom protocol;
+	int cmdLength;
+
+	if ((argc < 3) || (argc > 5)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " protocol window ?name? ?command?\"",
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    /*
+	     * Return a list of all defined protocols for the window.
+	     */
+	    for (protPtr = wmPtr->protPtr; protPtr != NULL;
+		    protPtr = protPtr->nextPtr) {
+		Tcl_AppendElement(interp,
+			Tk_GetAtomName((Tk_Window) winPtr, protPtr->protocol));
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	protocol = Tk_InternAtom((Tk_Window) winPtr, argv[3]);
+	if (argc == 4) {
+	    /*
+	     * Return the command to handle a given protocol.
+	     */
+	    for (protPtr = wmPtr->protPtr; protPtr != NULL;
+		    protPtr = protPtr->nextPtr) {
+		if (protPtr->protocol == protocol) {
+		    interp->result = protPtr->command;
+		    return TCL_OK;
+		}
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Delete any current protocol handler, then create a new
+	 * one with the specified command, unless the command is
+	 * empty.
+	 */
+
+	for (protPtr = wmPtr->protPtr, prevPtr = NULL; protPtr != NULL;
+		prevPtr = protPtr, protPtr = protPtr->nextPtr) {
+	    if (protPtr->protocol == protocol) {
+		if (prevPtr == NULL) {
+		    wmPtr->protPtr = protPtr->nextPtr;
+		} else {
+		    prevPtr->nextPtr = protPtr->nextPtr;
+		}
+		Tcl_EventuallyFree((ClientData) protPtr, TCL_DYNAMIC);
+		break;
+	    }
+	}
+	cmdLength = strlen(argv[4]);
+	if (cmdLength > 0) {
+	    protPtr = (ProtocolHandler *) ckalloc(HANDLER_SIZE(cmdLength));
+	    protPtr->protocol = protocol;
+	    protPtr->nextPtr = wmPtr->protPtr;
+	    wmPtr->protPtr = protPtr;
+	    protPtr->interp = interp;
+	    strcpy(protPtr->command, argv[4]);
+	}
+    } else if ((c == 'r') && (strncmp(argv[1], "resizable", length) == 0)) {
+	int width, height;
+
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 5)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " resizable window ?width height?\"",
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    sprintf(interp->result, "%d %d",
+		    (wmPtr->flags  & WM_WIDTH_NOT_RESIZABLE) ? 0 : 1,
+		    (wmPtr->flags  & WM_HEIGHT_NOT_RESIZABLE) ? 0 : 1);
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if ((Tcl_GetBoolean(interp, argv[3], &width) != TCL_OK)
+		|| (Tcl_GetBoolean(interp, argv[4], &height) != TCL_OK)) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (width) {
+	    wmPtr->flags &= ~WM_WIDTH_NOT_RESIZABLE;
+	} else {
+	    wmPtr->flags |= WM_WIDTH_NOT_RESIZABLE;
+	}
+	if (height) {
+	    wmPtr->flags &= ~WM_HEIGHT_NOT_RESIZABLE;
+	} else {
+	    wmPtr->flags |= WM_HEIGHT_NOT_RESIZABLE;
+	}
+	wmPtr->flags |= WM_UPDATE_SIZE_HINTS;
+	goto updateGeom;
+    } else if ((c == 's') && (strncmp(argv[1], "sizefrom", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 2)) {
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 4)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " sizefrom window ?user|program?\"",
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    if (wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags & USSize) {
+		interp->result = "user";
+	    } else if (wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags & PSize) {
+		interp->result = "program";
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (*argv[3] == '\0') {
+	    wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags &= ~(USSize|PSize);
+	} else {
+	    c = argv[3][0];
+	    length = strlen(argv[3]);
+	    if ((c == 'u') && (strncmp(argv[3], "user", length) == 0)) {
+		wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags &= ~PSize;
+		wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags |= USSize;
+	    } else if ((c == 'p')
+		    && (strncmp(argv[3], "program", length) == 0)) {
+		wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags &= ~USSize;
+		wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags |= PSize;
+	    } else {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad argument \"", argv[3],
+			"\": must be program or user", (char *) NULL);
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	}
+	goto updateGeom;
+    } else if ((c == 's') && (strncmp(argv[1], "state", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 2)) {
+	if (argc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " state window\"", (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (wmPtr->iconFor != NULL) {
+	    interp->result = "icon";
+	} else {
+	    switch (wmPtr->hints.initial_state) {
+		case NormalState:
+		    interp->result = "normal";
+		    break;
+		case IconicState:
+		    interp->result = "iconic";
+		    break;
+		case WithdrawnState:
+		    interp->result = "withdrawn";
+		    break;
+		case ZoomState:
+		    interp->result = "zoomed";
+		    break;
+	    }
+	}
+    } else if ((c == 't') && (strncmp(argv[1], "title", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 2)) {
+	if (argc > 4) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " title window ?newTitle?\"", (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    interp->result = (wmPtr->titleUid != NULL) ? wmPtr->titleUid
+		    : winPtr->nameUid;
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	} else {
+	    wmPtr->titleUid = Tk_GetUid(argv[3]);
+	    if (!(wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED) && wmPtr->wrapper != NULL) {
+		SetWindowText(wmPtr->wrapper, wmPtr->titleUid);
+	    }
+	}
+    } else if ((c == 't') && (strncmp(argv[1], "transient", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 3)) {
+	TkWindow *masterPtr;
+
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 4)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " transient window ?master?\"", (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    if (wmPtr->masterPtr != NULL) {
+		Tcl_SetResult(interp, Tk_PathName(wmPtr->masterPtr),
+			TCL_STATIC);
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (argv[3][0] == '\0') {
+	    wmPtr->masterPtr = NULL;
+	} else {
+	    masterPtr = (TkWindow*) Tk_NameToWindow(interp, argv[3], tkwin);
+	    if (masterPtr == NULL) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (masterPtr == winPtr) {
+		wmPtr->masterPtr = NULL;
+	    } else {
+		Tk_MakeWindowExist((Tk_Window)masterPtr);
+
+		/*
+		 * Ensure that the master window is actually a Tk toplevel.
+		 */
+
+		while (!(masterPtr->flags & TK_TOP_LEVEL)) {
+		    masterPtr = masterPtr->parentPtr;
+		}
+		wmPtr->masterPtr = masterPtr;
+
+		/*
+		 * Ensure that the transient window is either mapped or 
+		 * unmapped like its master.
+		 */
+
+		TkpWmSetState(winPtr, NormalState);
+	    }
+	}
+	if (!(wmPtr->flags & (WM_NEVER_MAPPED)
+		&& !(winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED))) {
+	    UpdateWrapper(winPtr);
+	}
+    } else if ((c == 'w') && (strncmp(argv[1], "withdraw", length) == 0)) {
+	if (argc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " withdraw window\"", (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (wmPtr->iconFor != NULL) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't withdraw ", argv[2],
+		    ": it is an icon for ", Tk_PathName(wmPtr->iconFor),
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	TkpWmSetState(winPtr, WithdrawnState);
+    } else {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unknown or ambiguous option \"", argv[1],
+		"\": must be aspect, client, command, deiconify, ",
+		"focusmodel, frame, geometry, grid, group, iconbitmap, ",
+		"iconify, iconmask, iconname, iconposition, ",
+		"iconwindow, maxsize, minsize, overrideredirect, ",
+		"positionfrom, protocol, resizable, sizefrom, state, title, ",
+		"transient, or withdraw",
+		(char *) NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+    updateGeom:
+    if (!(wmPtr->flags & (WM_UPDATE_PENDING|WM_NEVER_MAPPED))) {
+	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(UpdateGeometryInfo, (ClientData) winPtr);
+	wmPtr->flags |= WM_UPDATE_PENDING;
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_SetGrid --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked by a widget when it wishes to set a grid
+ *	coordinate system that controls the size of a top-level window.
+ *	It provides a C interface equivalent to the "wm grid" command and
+ *	is usually asscoiated with the -setgrid option.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Grid-related information will be passed to the window manager, so
+ *	that the top-level window associated with tkwin will resize on
+ *	even grid units.  If some other window already controls gridding
+ *	for the top-level window then this procedure call has no effect.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+Tk_SetGrid(tkwin, reqWidth, reqHeight, widthInc, heightInc)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window.  New window mgr info
+				 * will be posted for the top-level window
+				 * associated with this window. */
+    int reqWidth;		/* Width (in grid units) corresponding to
+				 * the requested geometry for tkwin. */
+    int reqHeight;		/* Height (in grid units) corresponding to
+				 * the requested geometry for tkwin. */
+    int widthInc, heightInc;	/* Pixel increments corresponding to a
+				 * change of one grid unit. */
+{
+    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
+    register WmInfo *wmPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * Find the top-level window for tkwin, plus the window manager
+     * information.
+     */
+
+    while (!(winPtr->flags & TK_TOP_LEVEL)) {
+	winPtr = winPtr->parentPtr;
+    }
+    wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
+
+    if ((wmPtr->gridWin != NULL) && (wmPtr->gridWin != tkwin)) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    if ((wmPtr->reqGridWidth == reqWidth)
+	    && (wmPtr->reqGridHeight == reqHeight)
+	    && (wmPtr->widthInc == widthInc)
+	    && (wmPtr->heightInc == heightInc)
+	    && ((wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags & (PBaseSize|PResizeInc))
+		    == PBaseSize|PResizeInc)) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * If gridding was previously off, then forget about any window
+     * size requests made by the user or via "wm geometry":  these are
+     * in pixel units and there's no easy way to translate them to
+     * grid units since the new requested size of the top-level window in
+     * pixels may not yet have been registered yet (it may filter up
+     * the hierarchy in DoWhenIdle handlers).  However, if the window
+     * has never been mapped yet then just leave the window size alone:
+     * assume that it is intended to be in grid units but just happened
+     * to have been specified before this procedure was called.
+     */
+
+    if ((wmPtr->gridWin == NULL) && !(wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED)) {
+	wmPtr->width = -1;
+	wmPtr->height = -1;
+    }
+
+    /* 
+     * Set the new gridding information, and start the process of passing
+     * all of this information to the window manager.
+     */
+
+    wmPtr->gridWin = tkwin;
+    wmPtr->reqGridWidth = reqWidth;
+    wmPtr->reqGridHeight = reqHeight;
+    wmPtr->widthInc = widthInc;
+    wmPtr->heightInc = heightInc;
+    wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags |= PBaseSize|PResizeInc;
+    if (!(wmPtr->flags & (WM_UPDATE_PENDING|WM_NEVER_MAPPED))) {
+	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(UpdateGeometryInfo, (ClientData) winPtr);
+	wmPtr->flags |= WM_UPDATE_PENDING;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_UnsetGrid --
+ *
+ *	This procedure cancels the effect of a previous call
+ *	to Tk_SetGrid.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	If tkwin currently controls gridding for its top-level window,
+ *	gridding is cancelled for that top-level window;  if some other
+ *	window controls gridding then this procedure has no effect.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+Tk_UnsetGrid(tkwin)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window that is currently
+				 * controlling gridding. */
+{
+    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
+    register WmInfo *wmPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * Find the top-level window for tkwin, plus the window manager
+     * information.
+     */
+
+    while (!(winPtr->flags & TK_TOP_LEVEL)) {
+	winPtr = winPtr->parentPtr;
+    }
+    wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
+    if (tkwin != wmPtr->gridWin) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    wmPtr->gridWin = NULL;
+    wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags &= ~(PBaseSize|PResizeInc);
+    if (wmPtr->width != -1) {
+	wmPtr->width = winPtr->reqWidth + (wmPtr->width
+		- wmPtr->reqGridWidth)*wmPtr->widthInc;
+	wmPtr->height = winPtr->reqHeight + (wmPtr->height
+		- wmPtr->reqGridHeight)*wmPtr->heightInc;
+    }
+    wmPtr->widthInc = 1;
+    wmPtr->heightInc = 1;
+
+    if (!(wmPtr->flags & (WM_UPDATE_PENDING|WM_NEVER_MAPPED))) {
+	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(UpdateGeometryInfo, (ClientData) winPtr);
+	wmPtr->flags |= WM_UPDATE_PENDING;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TopLevelEventProc --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked when a top-level (or other externally-
+ *	managed window) is restructured in any way.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Tk's internal data structures for the window get modified to
+ *	reflect the structural change.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+TopLevelEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
+    ClientData clientData;		/* Window for which event occurred. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr;			/* Event that just happened. */
+{
+    register TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) clientData;
+
+    if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) {
+	Tk_ErrorHandler handler;
+
+	if (!(winPtr->flags & TK_ALREADY_DEAD)) {
+	    /*
+	     * A top-level window was deleted externally (e.g., by the window
+	     * manager).  This is probably not a good thing, but cleanup as
+	     * best we can.  The error handler is needed because
+	     * Tk_DestroyWindow will try to destroy the window, but of course
+	     * it's already gone.
+	     */
+    
+	    handler = Tk_CreateErrorHandler(winPtr->display, -1, -1, -1,
+		    (Tk_ErrorProc *) NULL, (ClientData) NULL);
+	    Tk_DestroyWindow((Tk_Window) winPtr);
+	    Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(handler);
+	}
+    }
+    else if (eventPtr->type == ConfigureNotify) {
+	WmInfo *wmPtr;
+	wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
+
+	if (winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED) {
+	    Tk_Window tkwin = (Tk_Window)winPtr;
+	    SendMessage(wmPtr->wrapper, TK_GEOMETRYREQ, Tk_ReqWidth(tkwin),
+	        Tk_ReqHeight(tkwin));
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TopLevelReqProc --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked by the geometry manager whenever
+ *	the requested size for a top-level window is changed.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Arrange for the window to be resized to satisfy the request
+ *	(this happens as a when-idle action).
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+	/* ARGSUSED */
+static void
+TopLevelReqProc(dummy, tkwin)
+    ClientData dummy;			/* Not used. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Information about window. */
+{
+    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
+    WmInfo *wmPtr;
+
+    wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
+    if (winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED) {
+	SendMessage(wmPtr->wrapper, TK_GEOMETRYREQ, Tk_ReqWidth(tkwin),
+	    Tk_ReqHeight(tkwin));
+    }
+    if (!(wmPtr->flags & (WM_UPDATE_PENDING|WM_NEVER_MAPPED))) {
+	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(UpdateGeometryInfo, (ClientData) winPtr);
+	wmPtr->flags |= WM_UPDATE_PENDING;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * UpdateGeometryInfo --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked when a top-level window is first
+ *	mapped, and also as a when-idle procedure, to bring the
+ *	geometry and/or position of a top-level window back into
+ *	line with what has been requested by the user and/or widgets.
+ *	This procedure doesn't return until the system has
+ *	responded to the geometry change.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The window's size and location may change, unless the WM prevents
+ *	that from happening.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+UpdateGeometryInfo(clientData)
+    ClientData clientData;		/* Pointer to the window's record. */
+{
+    int x, y;			/* Position of border on desktop. */
+    int width, height;		/* Size of client area. */
+    RECT rect;
+    register TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) clientData;
+    register WmInfo *wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
+
+    wmPtr->flags &= ~WM_UPDATE_PENDING;
+
+    /*
+     * If the window is minimized or maximized, we should not update
+     * our geometry since it will end up with the wrong values.
+     * ConfigureToplevel will reschedule UpdateGeometryInfo when the
+     * state of the window changes.
+     */
+
+    if (IsIconic(wmPtr->wrapper) || IsZoomed(wmPtr->wrapper)) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Compute the border size for the current window style.  This
+     * size will include the resize handles, the title bar and the
+     * menubar.  Note that this size will not be correct if the
+     * menubar spans multiple lines.  The height will be off by a
+     * multiple of the menubar height.  It really only measures the
+     * minimum size of the border.
+     */
+
+    rect.left = rect.right = rect.top = rect.bottom = 0;
+    AdjustWindowRectEx(&rect, wmPtr->style, wmPtr->hMenu != NULL,
+	    wmPtr->exStyle);
+    wmPtr->borderWidth = rect.right - rect.left;
+    wmPtr->borderHeight = rect.bottom - rect.top;
+
+    /*
+     * Compute the new size for the top-level window.  See the
+     * user documentation for details on this, but the size
+     * requested depends on (a) the size requested internally
+     * by the window's widgets, (b) the size requested by the
+     * user in a "wm geometry" command or via wm-based interactive
+     * resizing (if any), and (c) whether or not the window is
+     * gridded.  Don't permit sizes <= 0 because this upsets
+     * the X server.
+     */
+
+    if (wmPtr->width == -1) {
+	width = winPtr->reqWidth;
+    } else if (wmPtr->gridWin != NULL) {
+	width = winPtr->reqWidth
+		+ (wmPtr->width - wmPtr->reqGridWidth)*wmPtr->widthInc;
+    } else {
+	width = wmPtr->width;
+    }
+    if (width <= 0) {
+	width = 1;
+    }
+    if (wmPtr->height == -1) {
+	height = winPtr->reqHeight;
+    } else if (wmPtr->gridWin != NULL) {
+	height = winPtr->reqHeight
+		+ (wmPtr->height - wmPtr->reqGridHeight)*wmPtr->heightInc;
+    } else {
+	height = wmPtr->height;
+    }
+    if (height <= 0) {
+	height = 1;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Compute the new position for the upper-left pixel of the window's
+     * decorative frame.  This is tricky, because we need to include the
+     * border widths supplied by a reparented parent in this calculation,
+     * but can't use the parent's current overall size since that may
+     * change as a result of this code.
+     */
+
+    if (wmPtr->flags & WM_NEGATIVE_X) {
+	x = DisplayWidth(winPtr->display, winPtr->screenNum) - wmPtr->x
+		- (width + wmPtr->borderWidth);
+    } else {
+	x =  wmPtr->x;
+    }
+    if (wmPtr->flags & WM_NEGATIVE_Y) {
+	y = DisplayHeight(winPtr->display, winPtr->screenNum) - wmPtr->y
+		- (height + wmPtr->borderHeight);
+    } else {
+	y =  wmPtr->y;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * If this window is embedded and the container is also in this
+     * process, we don't need to do anything special about the
+     * geometry, except to make sure that the desired size is known
+     * by the container.  Also, zero out any position information,
+     * since embedded windows are not allowed to move.
+     */
+
+    if (winPtr->flags & TK_BOTH_HALVES) {
+	wmPtr->x = wmPtr->y = 0;
+	wmPtr->flags &= ~(WM_NEGATIVE_X|WM_NEGATIVE_Y);
+	Tk_GeometryRequest((Tk_Window) TkpGetOtherWindow(winPtr),
+		width, height);
+	return;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Reconfigure the window if it isn't already configured correctly.  Base
+     * the size check on what we *asked for* last time, not what we got.
+     * Return immediately if there have been no changes in the requested
+     * geometry of the toplevel.
+     */
+    /* TODO: need to add flag for possible menu size change */
+
+    if (!((wmPtr->flags & WM_MOVE_PENDING)
+	    || (width != wmPtr->configWidth)
+	    || (height != wmPtr->configHeight))) {
+	return;
+    }
+    wmPtr->flags &= ~WM_MOVE_PENDING;
+
+    wmPtr->configWidth = width;
+    wmPtr->configHeight = height;
+	    
+    /*
+     * Don't bother moving the window if we are in the process of
+     * creating it.  Just update the geometry info based on what
+     * we asked for.
+     */
+
+    if (wmPtr->flags & WM_CREATE_PENDING) {
+	winPtr->changes.x = x;
+	winPtr->changes.y = y;
+	winPtr->changes.width = width;
+	winPtr->changes.height = height;
+	return;
+    }
+
+    wmPtr->flags |= WM_SYNC_PENDING;
+    if (winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED) {
+	/*
+	 * The wrapper window is in a different process, so we need
+	 * to send it a geometry request.  This protocol assumes that
+	 * the other process understands this Tk message, otherwise
+	 * our requested geometry will be ignored.
+	 */
+
+	SendMessage(wmPtr->wrapper, TK_GEOMETRYREQ, width, height);
+    } else {
+	int reqHeight, reqWidth;
+	RECT windowRect;
+	int menuInc = GetSystemMetrics(SM_CYMENU);
+	int newHeight;
+
+	/*
+	 * We have to keep resizing the window until we get the
+	 * requested height in the client area. If the client
+	 * area has zero height, then the window rect is too
+	 * small by definition. Try increasing the border height
+	 * and try again. Once we have a positive size, then
+	 * we can adjust the height exactly. If the window
+	 * rect comes back smaller than we requested, we have
+	 * hit the maximum constraints that Windows imposes.
+	 * Once we find a positive client size, the next size
+	 * is the one we try no matter what.
+	 */
+
+	reqHeight = height + wmPtr->borderHeight;
+	reqWidth = width + wmPtr->borderWidth;
+
+	while (1) {
+	    MoveWindow(wmPtr->wrapper, x, y, reqWidth, reqHeight, TRUE);
+	    GetWindowRect(wmPtr->wrapper, &windowRect);
+	    newHeight = windowRect.bottom - windowRect.top;
+
+	    /*
+	     * If the request wasn't satisfied, we have hit an external
+	     * constraint and must stop.
+	     */
+
+	    if (newHeight < reqHeight) {
+		break;
+	    }
+
+	    /*
+	     * Now check the size of the client area against our ideal.
+	     */
+
+	    GetClientRect(wmPtr->wrapper, &windowRect);
+	    newHeight = windowRect.bottom - windowRect.top;
+	    
+	    if (newHeight == height) {
+		/*
+		 * We're done.
+		 */
+		break;
+	    } else if (newHeight > height) {
+		/*
+		 * One last resize to get rid of the extra space.
+		 */
+		menuInc = newHeight - height;
+		reqHeight -= menuInc;
+		if (wmPtr->flags & WM_NEGATIVE_Y) {
+		    y += menuInc;
+		}
+		MoveWindow(wmPtr->wrapper, x, y, reqWidth, reqHeight, TRUE);
+		break;
+	    }
+
+	    /*
+	     * We didn't get enough space to satisfy our requested
+	     * height, so the menu must have wrapped.  Increase the
+	     * size of the window by one menu height and move the
+	     * window if it is positioned relative to the lower right
+	     * corner of the screen.
+	     */
+
+	    reqHeight += menuInc;
+	    if (wmPtr->flags & WM_NEGATIVE_Y) {
+		y -= menuInc;
+	    }
+	}
+	if (!(wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED)) {
+	    DrawMenuBar(wmPtr->wrapper);
+	}
+    }
+    wmPtr->flags &= ~WM_SYNC_PENDING;
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * ParseGeometry --
+ *
+ *	This procedure parses a geometry string and updates
+ *	information used to control the geometry of a top-level
+ *	window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	A standard Tcl return value, plus an error message in
+ *	interp->result if an error occurs.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The size and/or location of winPtr may change.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+ParseGeometry(interp, string, winPtr)
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    char *string;		/* String containing new geometry.  Has the
+				 * standard form "=wxh+x+y". */
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Pointer to top-level window whose
+				 * geometry is to be changed. */
+{
+    register WmInfo *wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
+    int x, y, width, height, flags;
+    char *end;
+    register char *p = string;
+
+    /*
+     * The leading "=" is optional.
+     */
+
+    if (*p == '=') {
+	p++;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Parse the width and height, if they are present.  Don't
+     * actually update any of the fields of wmPtr until we've
+     * successfully parsed the entire geometry string.
+     */
+
+    width = wmPtr->width;
+    height = wmPtr->height;
+    x = wmPtr->x;
+    y = wmPtr->y;
+    flags = wmPtr->flags;
+    if (isdigit(UCHAR(*p))) {
+	width = strtoul(p, &end, 10);
+	p = end;
+	if (*p != 'x') {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	p++;
+	if (!isdigit(UCHAR(*p))) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	height = strtoul(p, &end, 10);
+	p = end;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Parse the X and Y coordinates, if they are present.
+     */
+
+    if (*p != '\0') {
+	flags &= ~(WM_NEGATIVE_X | WM_NEGATIVE_Y);
+	if (*p == '-') {
+	    flags |= WM_NEGATIVE_X;
+	} else if (*p != '+') {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	p++;
+	if (!isdigit(UCHAR(*p)) && (*p != '-')) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	x = strtol(p, &end, 10);
+	p = end;
+	if (*p == '-') {
+	    flags |= WM_NEGATIVE_Y;
+	} else if (*p != '+') {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	p++;
+	if (!isdigit(UCHAR(*p)) && (*p != '-')) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	y = strtol(p, &end, 10);
+	if (*end != '\0') {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Assume that the geometry information came from the user,
+	 * unless an explicit source has been specified.  Otherwise
+	 * most window managers assume that the size hints were
+	 * program-specified and they ignore them.
+	 */
+
+	if ((wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags & (USPosition|PPosition)) == 0) {
+	    wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags |= USPosition;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Everything was parsed OK.  Update the fields of *wmPtr and
+     * arrange for the appropriate information to be percolated out
+     * to the window manager at the next idle moment.
+     */
+
+    wmPtr->width = width;
+    wmPtr->height = height;
+    wmPtr->x = x;
+    wmPtr->y = y;
+    flags |= WM_MOVE_PENDING;
+    wmPtr->flags = flags;
+
+    if (!(wmPtr->flags & (WM_UPDATE_PENDING|WM_NEVER_MAPPED))) {
+	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(UpdateGeometryInfo, (ClientData) winPtr);
+	wmPtr->flags |= WM_UPDATE_PENDING;
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+    error:
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad geometry specifier \"",
+	    string, "\"", (char *) NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_GetRootCoords --
+ *
+ *	Given a token for a window, this procedure traces through the
+ *	window's lineage to find the (virtual) root-window coordinates
+ *	corresponding to point (0,0) in the window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The locations pointed to by xPtr and yPtr are filled in with
+ *	the root coordinates of the (0,0) point in tkwin.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+Tk_GetRootCoords(tkwin, xPtr, yPtr)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window. */
+    int *xPtr;			/* Where to store x-displacement of (0,0). */
+    int *yPtr;			/* Where to store y-displacement of (0,0). */
+{
+    register TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
+
+    /*
+     * If the window is mapped, let Windows figure out the translation.
+     */
+
+    if (winPtr->window != None) {
+	HWND hwnd = Tk_GetHWND(winPtr->window);
+	POINT point;
+
+	point.x = 0;
+	point.y = 0;
+
+	ClientToScreen(hwnd, &point);
+
+	*xPtr = point.x;
+	*yPtr = point.y;
+    } else {
+	*xPtr = 0;
+	*yPtr = 0;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_CoordsToWindow --
+ *
+ *	Given the (virtual) root coordinates of a point, this procedure
+ *	returns the token for the top-most window covering that point,
+ *	if there exists such a window in this application.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The return result is either a token for the window corresponding
+ *	to rootX and rootY, or else NULL to indicate that there is no such
+ *	window.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+Tk_Window
+Tk_CoordsToWindow(rootX, rootY, tkwin)
+    int rootX, rootY;		/* Coordinates of point in root window.  If
+				 * a virtual-root window manager is in use,
+				 * these coordinates refer to the virtual
+				 * root, not the real root. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for any window in application;
+				 * used to identify the display. */
+{
+    POINT pos;
+    HWND hwnd;
+    TkWindow *winPtr;
+
+    pos.x = rootX;
+    pos.y = rootY;
+    hwnd = WindowFromPoint(pos);
+
+    winPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_HWNDToWindow(hwnd);
+    if (winPtr && (winPtr->mainPtr == ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr)) {
+	return (Tk_Window) winPtr;
+    }
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_GetVRootGeometry --
+ *
+ *	This procedure returns information about the virtual root
+ *	window corresponding to a particular Tk window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The values at xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, and heightPtr are set
+ *	with the offset and dimensions of the root window corresponding
+ *	to tkwin.  If tkwin is being managed by a virtual root window
+ *	manager these values correspond to the virtual root window being
+ *	used for tkwin;  otherwise the offsets will be 0 and the
+ *	dimensions will be those of the screen.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Vroot window information is refreshed if it is out of date.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+Tk_GetVRootGeometry(tkwin, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window whose virtual root is to be
+				 * queried. */
+    int *xPtr, *yPtr;		/* Store x and y offsets of virtual root
+				 * here. */
+    int *widthPtr, *heightPtr;	/* Store dimensions of virtual root here. */
+{
+    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
+
+    *xPtr = 0;
+    *yPtr = 0;
+    *widthPtr = DisplayWidth(winPtr->display, winPtr->screenNum);
+    *heightPtr = DisplayHeight(winPtr->display, winPtr->screenNum);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_MoveToplevelWindow --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is called instead of Tk_MoveWindow to adjust
+ *	the x-y location of a top-level window.  It delays the actual
+ *	move to a later time and keeps window-manager information
+ *	up-to-date with the move
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The window is eventually moved so that its upper-left corner
+ *	(actually, the upper-left corner of the window's decorative
+ *	frame, if there is one) is at (x,y).
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+Tk_MoveToplevelWindow(tkwin, x, y)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window to move. */
+    int x, y;			/* New location for window (within
+				 * parent). */
+{
+    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
+    register WmInfo *wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
+
+    if (!(winPtr->flags & TK_TOP_LEVEL)) {
+	panic("Tk_MoveToplevelWindow called with non-toplevel window");
+    }
+    wmPtr->x = x;
+    wmPtr->y = y;
+    wmPtr->flags |= WM_MOVE_PENDING;
+    wmPtr->flags &= ~(WM_NEGATIVE_X|WM_NEGATIVE_Y);
+    if ((wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags & (USPosition|PPosition)) == 0) {
+	wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags |= USPosition;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * If the window has already been mapped, must bring its geometry
+     * up-to-date immediately, otherwise an event might arrive from the
+     * server that would overwrite wmPtr->x and wmPtr->y and lose the
+     * new position.
+     */
+
+    if (!(wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED)) {
+	if (wmPtr->flags & WM_UPDATE_PENDING) {
+	    Tcl_CancelIdleCall(UpdateGeometryInfo, (ClientData) winPtr);
+	}
+	UpdateGeometryInfo((ClientData) winPtr);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWmProtocolEventProc --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is called by the Tk_HandleEvent whenever a
+ *	ClientMessage event arrives whose type is "WM_PROTOCOLS".
+ *	This procedure handles the message from the window manager
+ *	in an appropriate fashion.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Depends on what sort of handler, if any, was set up for the
+ *	protocol.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkWmProtocolEventProc(winPtr, eventPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window to which the event was sent. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* X event. */
+{
+    WmInfo *wmPtr;
+    register ProtocolHandler *protPtr;
+    Atom protocol;
+    int result;
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;
+
+    wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
+    if (wmPtr == NULL) {
+	return;
+    }
+    protocol = (Atom) eventPtr->xclient.data.l[0];
+    for (protPtr = wmPtr->protPtr; protPtr != NULL;
+	    protPtr = protPtr->nextPtr) {
+	if (protocol == protPtr->protocol) {
+	    Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) protPtr);
+            interp = protPtr->interp;
+            Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) interp);
+	    result = Tcl_GlobalEval(interp, protPtr->command);
+	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
+		Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, "\n    (command for \"");
+		Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp,
+			Tk_GetAtomName((Tk_Window) winPtr, protocol));
+		Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, "\" window manager protocol)");
+		Tcl_BackgroundError(interp);
+	    }
+            Tcl_Release((ClientData) interp);
+	    Tcl_Release((ClientData) protPtr);
+	    return;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * No handler was present for this protocol.  If this is a
+     * WM_DELETE_WINDOW message then just destroy the window.
+     */
+
+    if (protocol == Tk_InternAtom((Tk_Window) winPtr, "WM_DELETE_WINDOW")) {
+	Tk_DestroyWindow((Tk_Window) winPtr);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWmRestackToplevel --
+ *
+ *	This procedure restacks a top-level window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	WinPtr gets restacked  as specified by aboveBelow and otherPtr.
+ *	This procedure doesn't return until the restack has taken
+ *	effect and the ConfigureNotify event for it has been received.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkWmRestackToplevel(winPtr, aboveBelow, otherPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window to restack. */
+    int aboveBelow;		/* Gives relative position for restacking;
+				 * must be Above or Below. */
+    TkWindow *otherPtr;		/* Window relative to which to restack;
+				 * if NULL, then winPtr gets restacked
+				 * above or below *all* siblings. */
+{
+    HWND hwnd, insertAfter;
+
+    /*
+     * Can't set stacking order properly until the window is on the
+     * screen (mapping it may give it a reparent window).
+     */
+
+    if (winPtr->window == None) {
+	Tk_MakeWindowExist((Tk_Window) winPtr);
+    }
+    if (winPtr->wmInfoPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED) {
+	TkWmMapWindow(winPtr);
+    }
+    hwnd = (winPtr->wmInfoPtr->wrapper != NULL)
+	? winPtr->wmInfoPtr->wrapper : Tk_GetHWND(winPtr->window);
+
+    
+    if (otherPtr != NULL) {
+	if (otherPtr->window == None) {
+	    Tk_MakeWindowExist((Tk_Window) otherPtr);
+	}
+	if (otherPtr->wmInfoPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED) {
+	    TkWmMapWindow(otherPtr);
+	}
+	insertAfter = (otherPtr->wmInfoPtr->wrapper != NULL)
+	    ? otherPtr->wmInfoPtr->wrapper : Tk_GetHWND(otherPtr->window);
+    } else {
+	insertAfter = NULL;
+    }
+
+    TkWinSetWindowPos(hwnd, insertAfter, aboveBelow);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWmAddToColormapWindows --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is called to add a given window to the
+ *	WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS property for its top-level, if it
+ *	isn't already there.  It is invoked by the Tk code that
+ *	creates a new colormap, in order to make sure that colormap
+ *	information is propagated to the window manager by default.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	WinPtr's window gets added to the WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS
+ *	property of its nearest top-level ancestor, unless the
+ *	colormaps have been set explicitly with the
+ *	"wm colormapwindows" command.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkWmAddToColormapWindows(winPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window with a non-default colormap.
+				 * Should not be a top-level window. */
+{
+    TkWindow *topPtr;
+    TkWindow **oldPtr, **newPtr;
+    int count, i;
+
+    if (winPtr->window == None) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    for (topPtr = winPtr->parentPtr; ; topPtr = topPtr->parentPtr) {
+	if (topPtr == NULL) {
+	    /*
+	     * Window is being deleted.  Skip the whole operation.
+	     */
+
+	    return;
+	}
+	if (topPtr->flags & TK_TOP_LEVEL) {
+	    break;
+	}
+    }
+    if (topPtr->wmInfoPtr->flags & WM_COLORMAPS_EXPLICIT) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Make sure that the window isn't already in the list.
+     */
+
+    count = topPtr->wmInfoPtr->cmapCount;
+    oldPtr = topPtr->wmInfoPtr->cmapList;
+
+    for (i = 0; i < count; i++) {
+	if (oldPtr[i] == winPtr) {
+	    return;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Make a new bigger array and use it to reset the property.
+     * Automatically add the toplevel itself as the last element
+     * of the list.
+     */
+
+    newPtr = (TkWindow **) ckalloc((unsigned) ((count+2)*sizeof(TkWindow*)));
+    if (count > 0) {
+	memcpy(newPtr, oldPtr, count * sizeof(TkWindow*));
+    }
+    if (count == 0) {
+	count++;
+    }
+    newPtr[count-1] = winPtr;
+    newPtr[count] = topPtr;
+    if (oldPtr != NULL) {
+	ckfree((char *) oldPtr);
+    }
+
+    topPtr->wmInfoPtr->cmapList = newPtr;
+    topPtr->wmInfoPtr->cmapCount = count+1;
+
+    /*
+     * Now we need to force the updated colormaps to be installed.
+     */
+
+    if (topPtr->wmInfoPtr == foregroundWmPtr) {
+	InstallColormaps(topPtr->wmInfoPtr->wrapper, WM_QUERYNEWPALETTE, 1);
+    } else {
+	InstallColormaps(topPtr->wmInfoPtr->wrapper, WM_PALETTECHANGED, 0);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWmRemoveFromColormapWindows --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is called to remove a given window from the
+ *	WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS property for its top-level.  It is invoked
+ *	when windows are deleted.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	WinPtr's window gets removed from the WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS
+ *	property of its nearest top-level ancestor, unless the
+ *	top-level itself is being deleted too.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkWmRemoveFromColormapWindows(winPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window that may be present in
+				 * WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS property for its
+				 * top-level.  Should not be a top-level
+				 * window. */
+{
+    TkWindow *topPtr;
+    TkWindow **oldPtr;
+    int count, i, j;
+
+    for (topPtr = winPtr->parentPtr; ; topPtr = topPtr->parentPtr) {
+	if (topPtr == NULL) {
+	    /*
+	     * Ancestors have been deleted, so skip the whole operation.
+	     * Seems like this can't ever happen?
+	     */
+
+	    return;
+	}
+	if (topPtr->flags & TK_TOP_LEVEL) {
+	    break;
+	}
+    }
+    if (topPtr->flags & TK_ALREADY_DEAD) {
+	/*
+	 * Top-level is being deleted, so there's no need to cleanup
+	 * the WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS property.
+	 */
+
+	return;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Find the window and slide the following ones down to cover
+     * it up.
+     */
+
+    count = topPtr->wmInfoPtr->cmapCount;
+    oldPtr = topPtr->wmInfoPtr->cmapList;
+    for (i = 0; i < count; i++) {
+	if (oldPtr[i] == winPtr) {
+	    for (j = i ; j < count-1; j++) {
+		oldPtr[j] = oldPtr[j+1];
+	    }
+	    topPtr->wmInfoPtr->cmapCount = count-1;
+	    break;
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWinSetMenu--
+ *
+ *	Associcates a given HMENU to a window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The menu will end up being drawn in the window, and the geometry
+ *	of the window will have to be changed.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkWinSetMenu(tkwin, hMenu)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* the window to put the menu in */
+    HMENU hMenu;		/* the menu to set */
+{
+    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
+    WmInfo *wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
+
+    wmPtr->hMenu = hMenu;
+
+    if (!(wmPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED)) {
+	if (!(wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED)) {
+	    int syncPending = wmPtr->flags & WM_SYNC_PENDING;
+
+	    wmPtr->flags |= WM_SYNC_PENDING;
+	    SetMenu(wmPtr->wrapper, hMenu);
+	    if (!syncPending) {
+		wmPtr->flags &= ~WM_SYNC_PENDING;
+	    }
+	}
+	if (!(wmPtr->flags & (WM_UPDATE_PENDING|WM_NEVER_MAPPED))) {
+	    Tcl_DoWhenIdle(UpdateGeometryInfo, (ClientData) winPtr);
+	    wmPtr->flags |= WM_UPDATE_PENDING|WM_MOVE_PENDING;
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * ConfigureTopLevel --
+ *
+ *	Generate a ConfigureNotify event based on the current position
+ *	information.  This procedure is called by TopLevelProc.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Queues a new event.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+ConfigureTopLevel(pos)
+    WINDOWPOS *pos;
+{
+    TkWindow *winPtr = GetTopLevel(pos->hwnd);
+    WmInfo *wmPtr;
+    int state;			/* Current window state. */
+    RECT rect;
+    WINDOWPLACEMENT windowPos;
+    
+    if (winPtr == NULL) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * Determine the current window state.
+     */
+
+    if (!IsWindowVisible(wmPtr->wrapper)) {
+	state = WithdrawnState;
+    } else {
+	windowPos.length = sizeof(WINDOWPLACEMENT);
+	GetWindowPlacement(wmPtr->wrapper, &windowPos);
+	switch (windowPos.showCmd) {
+	    case SW_SHOWMAXIMIZED:
+		state = ZoomState;
+		break;
+	    case SW_SHOWMINIMIZED:
+		state = IconicState;
+		break;
+	    case SW_SHOWNORMAL:
+		state = NormalState;
+		break;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * If the state of the window just changed, be sure to update the
+     * child window information.
+     */
+
+    if (wmPtr->hints.initial_state != state) {
+	wmPtr->hints.initial_state = state;
+	switch (state) {
+	    case WithdrawnState:
+	    case IconicState:
+		XUnmapWindow(winPtr->display, winPtr->window);
+		break;
+
+	    case NormalState:
+		/*
+		 * Schedule a geometry update.  Since we ignore geometry
+		 * requests while in any other state, the geometry info
+		 * may be stale.
+		 */
+
+		if (!(wmPtr->flags & WM_UPDATE_PENDING)) {
+		    Tcl_DoWhenIdle(UpdateGeometryInfo,
+			    (ClientData) winPtr);
+		    wmPtr->flags |= WM_UPDATE_PENDING;
+		}
+		/* fall through */
+	    case ZoomState:
+		XMapWindow(winPtr->display, winPtr->window);
+		pos->flags |= SWP_NOMOVE | SWP_NOSIZE;
+		break;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Don't report geometry changes in the Iconic or Withdrawn states.
+     */
+
+    if (state == WithdrawnState || state == IconicState) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+
+    /*
+     * Compute the current geometry of the client area, reshape the
+     * Tk window and generate a ConfigureNotify event.
+     */
+
+    GetClientRect(wmPtr->wrapper, &rect);
+    winPtr->changes.x = pos->x;
+    winPtr->changes.y = pos->y;
+    winPtr->changes.width = rect.right - rect.left;
+    winPtr->changes.height = rect.bottom - rect.top;
+    wmPtr->borderHeight = pos->cy - winPtr->changes.height;
+    MoveWindow(Tk_GetHWND(winPtr->window), 0, 0,
+	    winPtr->changes.width, winPtr->changes.height, TRUE);
+    GenerateConfigureNotify(winPtr);
+
+    /*
+     * Update window manager geometry info if needed.
+     */
+
+    if (state == NormalState) {
+
+	/* 
+	 * Update size information from the event.  There are a couple of
+	 * tricky points here:
+	 *
+	 * 1. If the user changed the size externally then set wmPtr->width
+	 *    and wmPtr->height just as if a "wm geometry" command had been
+	 *    invoked with the same information.
+	 * 2. However, if the size is changing in response to a request
+	 *    coming from us (sync is set), then don't set
+	 *    wmPtr->width or wmPtr->height (otherwise the window will stop
+	 *    tracking geometry manager requests).
+	 */
+
+	if (!(wmPtr->flags & WM_SYNC_PENDING)) {
+	    if (!(pos->flags & SWP_NOSIZE)) {
+		if ((wmPtr->width == -1)
+			&& (winPtr->changes.width == winPtr->reqWidth)) {
+		    /*
+		     * Don't set external width, since the user didn't
+		     * change it from what the widgets asked for.
+		     */
+		} else {
+		    if (wmPtr->gridWin != NULL) {
+			wmPtr->width = wmPtr->reqGridWidth
+			    + (winPtr->changes.width - winPtr->reqWidth)
+			    / wmPtr->widthInc;
+			if (wmPtr->width < 0) {
+			    wmPtr->width = 0;
+			}
+		    } else {
+			wmPtr->width = winPtr->changes.width;
+		    }
+		}
+		if ((wmPtr->height == -1)
+			&& (winPtr->changes.height == winPtr->reqHeight)) {
+		    /*
+		     * Don't set external height, since the user didn't change
+		     * it from what the widgets asked for.
+		     */
+		} else {
+		    if (wmPtr->gridWin != NULL) {
+			wmPtr->height = wmPtr->reqGridHeight
+			    + (winPtr->changes.height - winPtr->reqHeight)
+			    / wmPtr->heightInc;
+			if (wmPtr->height < 0) {
+			    wmPtr->height = 0;
+			}
+		    } else {
+			wmPtr->height = winPtr->changes.height;
+		    }
+		}
+		wmPtr->configWidth = winPtr->changes.width;
+		wmPtr->configHeight = winPtr->changes.height;
+	    }
+	    /*
+	     * If the user moved the window, we should switch back
+	     * to normal coordinates.
+	     */
+
+	    if (!(pos->flags & SWP_NOMOVE)) {
+		wmPtr->flags &= ~(WM_NEGATIVE_X | WM_NEGATIVE_Y);
+	    }
+	}
+   
+	/*
+	 * Update the wrapper window location information. 
+	 */
+
+	if (wmPtr->flags & WM_NEGATIVE_X) {
+	    wmPtr->x = DisplayWidth(winPtr->display, winPtr->screenNum)
+		- winPtr->changes.x - (winPtr->changes.width
+			+ wmPtr->borderWidth);
+	} else {
+	    wmPtr->x = winPtr->changes.x;
+	}
+	if (wmPtr->flags & WM_NEGATIVE_Y) {
+	    wmPtr->y = DisplayHeight(winPtr->display, winPtr->screenNum)
+		- winPtr->changes.y - (winPtr->changes.height
+			+ wmPtr->borderHeight);
+	} else {
+	    wmPtr->y = winPtr->changes.y;
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * GenerateConfigureNotify --
+ *
+ *	Generate a ConfigureNotify event from the current geometry
+ *	information for the specified toplevel window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Sends an X event.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+GenerateConfigureNotify(winPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;
+{
+    XEvent event;
+
+    /*
+     * Generate a ConfigureNotify event.
+     */
+
+    event.type = ConfigureNotify;
+    event.xconfigure.serial = winPtr->display->request;
+    event.xconfigure.send_event = False;
+    event.xconfigure.display = winPtr->display;
+    event.xconfigure.event = winPtr->window;
+    event.xconfigure.window = winPtr->window;
+    event.xconfigure.border_width = winPtr->changes.border_width;
+    event.xconfigure.override_redirect = winPtr->atts.override_redirect;
+    event.xconfigure.x = winPtr->changes.x;
+    event.xconfigure.y = winPtr->changes.y;
+    event.xconfigure.width = winPtr->changes.width;
+    event.xconfigure.height = winPtr->changes.height;
+    event.xconfigure.above = None;
+    Tk_QueueWindowEvent(&event, TCL_QUEUE_TAIL);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * InstallColormaps --
+ *
+ *	Installs the colormaps associated with the toplevel which is
+ *	currently active.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	May change the system palette and generate damage.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+InstallColormaps(hwnd, message, isForemost)
+    HWND hwnd;			/* Toplevel wrapper window whose colormaps
+				 * should be installed. */
+    int message;		/* Either WM_PALETTECHANGED or
+				 * WM_QUERYNEWPALETTE */
+    int isForemost;		/* 1 if window is foremost, else 0 */
+{
+    int i;
+    HDC dc;
+    HPALETTE oldPalette;
+    TkWindow *winPtr = GetTopLevel(hwnd);
+    WmInfo *wmPtr;
+	    
+    if (winPtr == NULL) {
+	return 0;
+    }
+
+    wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
+
+    if (message == WM_QUERYNEWPALETTE) {
+	/*
+	 * Case 1: This window is about to become the foreground window, so we
+	 * need to install the primary palette. If the system palette was
+	 * updated, then Windows will generate a WM_PALETTECHANGED message.
+	 * Otherwise, we have to synthesize one in order to ensure that the
+	 * secondary palettes are installed properly.
+	 */
+
+	foregroundWmPtr = wmPtr;
+
+	if (wmPtr->cmapCount > 0) {
+	    winPtr = wmPtr->cmapList[0];
+	}
+
+	systemPalette = TkWinGetPalette(winPtr->atts.colormap);
+	dc = GetDC(hwnd);
+	oldPalette = SelectPalette(dc, systemPalette, FALSE);
+	if (RealizePalette(dc)) {
+	    RefreshColormap(winPtr->atts.colormap);
+	} else if (wmPtr->cmapCount > 1) {
+	    SelectPalette(dc, oldPalette, TRUE);
+	    RealizePalette(dc);
+	    ReleaseDC(hwnd, dc);
+	    SendMessage(hwnd, WM_PALETTECHANGED, (WPARAM)hwnd,
+		    (LPARAM)NULL);
+	    return TRUE;
+	}
+
+    } else {
+	/*
+	 * Window is being notified of a change in the system palette.
+	 * If this window is the foreground window, then we should only
+	 * install the secondary palettes, since the primary was installed
+	 * in response to the WM_QUERYPALETTE message.  Otherwise, install
+	 * all of the palettes.
+	 */
+
+
+	if (!isForemost) {
+	    if (wmPtr->cmapCount > 0) {
+		winPtr = wmPtr->cmapList[0];
+	    }
+	    i = 1;
+	} else {
+	    if (wmPtr->cmapCount <= 1) {
+		return TRUE;
+	    }
+	    winPtr = wmPtr->cmapList[1];
+	    i = 2;
+	}
+	dc = GetDC(hwnd);
+	oldPalette = SelectPalette(dc,
+		TkWinGetPalette(winPtr->atts.colormap), TRUE);
+	if (RealizePalette(dc)) {
+	    RefreshColormap(winPtr->atts.colormap);
+	}
+	for (; i < wmPtr->cmapCount; i++) {
+	    winPtr = wmPtr->cmapList[i];
+	    SelectPalette(dc, TkWinGetPalette(winPtr->atts.colormap), TRUE);
+	    if (RealizePalette(dc)) {
+		RefreshColormap(winPtr->atts.colormap);
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+
+    SelectPalette(dc, oldPalette, TRUE);
+    RealizePalette(dc);
+    ReleaseDC(hwnd, dc);
+    return TRUE;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * RefreshColormap --
+ *
+ *	This function is called to force all of the windows that use
+ *	a given colormap to redraw themselves.  The quickest way to
+ *	do this is to iterate over the toplevels, looking in the
+ *	cmapList for matches.  This will quickly eliminate subtrees
+ *	that don't use a given colormap.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Causes damage events to be generated.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+RefreshColormap(colormap)
+    Colormap colormap;
+{
+    WmInfo *wmPtr;
+    int i;
+
+    for (wmPtr = firstWmPtr; wmPtr != NULL; wmPtr = wmPtr->nextPtr) {
+	if (wmPtr->cmapCount > 0) {
+	    for (i = 0; i < wmPtr->cmapCount; i++) {
+		if ((wmPtr->cmapList[i]->atts.colormap == colormap)
+			&& Tk_IsMapped(wmPtr->cmapList[i])) {
+		    InvalidateSubTree(wmPtr->cmapList[i], colormap);
+		}
+	    }
+	} else if ((wmPtr->winPtr->atts.colormap == colormap)
+		&& Tk_IsMapped(wmPtr->winPtr)) {
+	    InvalidateSubTree(wmPtr->winPtr, colormap);
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * InvalidateSubTree --
+ *
+ *	This function recursively generates damage for a window and
+ *	all of its mapped children that belong to the same toplevel and
+ *	are using the specified colormap.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Generates damage for the specified subtree.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+InvalidateSubTree(winPtr, colormap)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;
+    Colormap colormap;
+{
+    TkWindow *childPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * Generate damage for the current window if it is using the
+     * specified colormap.
+     */
+
+    if (winPtr->atts.colormap == colormap) {
+	InvalidateRect(Tk_GetHWND(winPtr->window), NULL, FALSE);
+    }
+
+    for (childPtr = winPtr->childList; childPtr != NULL;
+	    childPtr = childPtr->nextPtr) {
+	/*
+	 * We can stop the descent when we hit an unmapped or
+	 * toplevel window.  
+	 */
+
+	if (!Tk_IsTopLevel(childPtr) && Tk_IsMapped(childPtr)) {
+	    InvalidateSubTree(childPtr, colormap);
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWinGetSystemPalette --
+ *
+ *	Retrieves the currently installed foreground palette.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns the global foreground palette, if there is one.
+ *	Otherwise, returns NULL.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+HPALETTE
+TkWinGetSystemPalette()
+{
+    return systemPalette;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * GetMinSize --
+ *
+ *	This procedure computes the current minWidth and minHeight
+ *	values for a window, taking into account the possibility
+ *	that they may be defaulted.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The values at *minWidthPtr and *minHeightPtr are filled
+ *	in with the minimum allowable dimensions of wmPtr's window,
+ *	in grid units.  If the requested minimum is smaller than the
+ *	system required minimum, then this procedure computes the
+ *	smallest size that will satisfy both the system and the
+ *	grid constraints.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+GetMinSize(wmPtr, minWidthPtr, minHeightPtr)
+    WmInfo *wmPtr;		/* Window manager information for the
+				 * window. */
+    int *minWidthPtr;		/* Where to store the current minimum
+				 * width of the window. */
+    int *minHeightPtr;		/* Where to store the current minimum
+				 * height of the window. */
+{
+    int tmp, base;
+    TkWindow *winPtr = wmPtr->winPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * Compute the minimum width by taking the default client size
+     * and rounding it up to the nearest grid unit.  Return the greater
+     * of the default minimum and the specified minimum.
+     */
+
+    tmp = wmPtr->defMinWidth - wmPtr->borderWidth;
+    if (tmp < 0) {
+	tmp = 0;
+    }
+    if (wmPtr->gridWin != NULL) {
+	base = winPtr->reqWidth - (wmPtr->reqGridWidth * wmPtr->widthInc);
+	if (base < 0) {
+	    base = 0;
+	}
+	tmp = ((tmp - base) + wmPtr->widthInc - 1)/wmPtr->widthInc;
+    }
+    if (tmp < wmPtr->minWidth) {
+	tmp = wmPtr->minWidth;
+    }
+    *minWidthPtr = tmp;
+
+    /*
+     * Compute the minimum height in a similar fashion.
+     */
+
+    tmp = wmPtr->defMinHeight - wmPtr->borderHeight;
+    if (tmp < 0) {
+	tmp = 0;
+    }
+    if (wmPtr->gridWin != NULL) {
+	base = winPtr->reqHeight - (wmPtr->reqGridHeight * wmPtr->heightInc);
+	if (base < 0) {
+	    base = 0;
+	}
+	tmp = ((tmp - base) + wmPtr->heightInc - 1)/wmPtr->heightInc;
+    }
+    if (tmp < wmPtr->minHeight) {
+	tmp = wmPtr->minHeight;
+    }
+    *minHeightPtr = tmp;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * GetMaxSize --
+ *
+ *	This procedure computes the current maxWidth and maxHeight
+ *	values for a window, taking into account the possibility
+ *	that they may be defaulted.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The values at *maxWidthPtr and *maxHeightPtr are filled
+ *	in with the maximum allowable dimensions of wmPtr's window,
+ *	in grid units.  If no maximum has been specified for the
+ *	window, then this procedure computes the largest sizes that
+ *	will fit on the screen.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+GetMaxSize(wmPtr, maxWidthPtr, maxHeightPtr)
+    WmInfo *wmPtr;		/* Window manager information for the
+				 * window. */
+    int *maxWidthPtr;		/* Where to store the current maximum
+				 * width of the window. */
+    int *maxHeightPtr;		/* Where to store the current maximum
+				 * height of the window. */
+{
+    int tmp;
+
+    if (wmPtr->maxWidth > 0) {
+	*maxWidthPtr = wmPtr->maxWidth;
+    } else {
+	/*
+	 * Must compute a default width.  Fill up the display, leaving a
+	 * bit of extra space for the window manager's borders.
+	 */
+
+	tmp = wmPtr->defMaxWidth - wmPtr->borderWidth;
+	if (wmPtr->gridWin != NULL) {
+	    /*
+	     * Gridding is turned on;  convert from pixels to grid units.
+	     */
+
+	    tmp = wmPtr->reqGridWidth
+		    + (tmp - wmPtr->winPtr->reqWidth)/wmPtr->widthInc;
+	}
+	*maxWidthPtr = tmp;
+    }
+    if (wmPtr->maxHeight > 0) {
+	*maxHeightPtr = wmPtr->maxHeight;
+    } else {
+	tmp = wmPtr->defMaxHeight - wmPtr->borderHeight;
+	if (wmPtr->gridWin != NULL) {
+	    tmp = wmPtr->reqGridHeight
+		    + (tmp - wmPtr->winPtr->reqHeight)/wmPtr->heightInc;
+	}
+	*maxHeightPtr = tmp;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TopLevelProc --
+ *
+ *	Callback from Windows whenever an event occurs on a top level
+ *	window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Standard Windows return value.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Default window behavior.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static LRESULT CALLBACK
+TopLevelProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
+    HWND hwnd;
+    UINT message;
+    WPARAM wParam;
+    LPARAM lParam;
+{
+    if (message == WM_WINDOWPOSCHANGED) {
+	WINDOWPOS *pos = (WINDOWPOS *) lParam;
+	TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_HWNDToWindow(pos->hwnd);
+    
+	if (winPtr == NULL) {
+	    return 0;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Update the shape of the contained window.
+	 */
+
+	if (!(pos->flags & SWP_NOSIZE)) {
+	    winPtr->changes.width = pos->cx;
+	    winPtr->changes.height = pos->cy;
+	}
+	if (!(pos->flags & SWP_NOMOVE)) {
+	    winPtr->changes.x = pos->x;
+	    winPtr->changes.y = pos->y;
+	}
+
+	GenerateConfigureNotify(winPtr);
+
+	Tcl_ServiceAll();
+	return 0;
+    }
+    return TkWinChildProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * WmProc --
+ *
+ *	Callback from Windows whenever an event occurs on the decorative
+ *	frame.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Standard Windows return value.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Default window behavior.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static LRESULT CALLBACK
+WmProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
+    HWND hwnd;
+    UINT message;
+    WPARAM wParam;
+    LPARAM lParam;
+{
+    static int inMoveSize = 0;
+    static oldMode;	/* This static is set upon entering move/size mode
+			 * and is used to reset the service mode after
+			 * leaving move/size mode.  Note that this mechanism
+			 * assumes move/size is only one level deep. */
+    LRESULT result;
+    TkWindow *winPtr;
+	
+    if (TkWinHandleMenuEvent(&hwnd, &message, &wParam, &lParam, &result)) {
+	goto done;
+    }
+
+    switch (message) {
+	case WM_KILLFOCUS:
+	case WM_ERASEBKGND:
+	    result = 0;
+	    goto done;
+
+	case WM_ENTERSIZEMOVE:
+	    inMoveSize = 1;
+	    oldMode = Tcl_SetServiceMode(TCL_SERVICE_ALL);
+	    break;
+
+	case WM_ACTIVATE:
+	case WM_EXITSIZEMOVE:
+	    if (inMoveSize) {
+		inMoveSize = 0;
+		Tcl_SetServiceMode(oldMode);
+	    }
+	    break;
+
+	case WM_GETMINMAXINFO: 
+	    SetLimits(hwnd, (MINMAXINFO *) lParam);
+	    result = 0;
+	    goto done;
+
+	case WM_PALETTECHANGED:
+	    result = InstallColormaps(hwnd, WM_PALETTECHANGED,
+		    hwnd == (HWND)wParam);
+	    goto done;
+
+	case WM_QUERYNEWPALETTE:
+	    result = InstallColormaps(hwnd, WM_QUERYNEWPALETTE, TRUE);
+	    goto done;
+	    
+	case WM_WINDOWPOSCHANGED:
+	    ConfigureTopLevel((WINDOWPOS *) lParam);
+	    result = 0;
+	    goto done;
+
+	default:
+	    break;
+    }
+
+    winPtr = GetTopLevel(hwnd);
+    if (winPtr && winPtr->window) {
+	HWND child = Tk_GetHWND(winPtr->window);
+	if (message == WM_SETFOCUS) {
+	    SetFocus(child);
+	    result = 0;
+	} else if (!Tk_TranslateWinEvent(child, message, wParam, lParam,
+		&result)) {
+	    result = DefWindowProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam);
+	}
+    } else {
+	result = DefWindowProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam);
+    }
+
+    done:
+    Tcl_ServiceAll();
+    return result;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpMakeMenuWindow --
+ *
+ *	Configure the window to be either a pull-down (or pop-up)
+ *	menu, or as a toplevel (torn-off) menu or palette.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Changes the style bit used to create a new Mac toplevel.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpMakeMenuWindow(tkwin, transient)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* New window. */
+    int transient;		/* 1 means menu is only posted briefly as
+				 * a popup or pulldown or cascade.  0 means
+				 * menu is always visible, e.g. as a torn-off
+				 * menu.  Determines whether save_under and
+				 * override_redirect should be set. */
+{
+    XSetWindowAttributes atts;
+
+    if (transient) {
+	atts.override_redirect = True;
+	atts.save_under = True;
+    } else {
+	atts.override_redirect = False;
+	atts.save_under = False;
+    }
+	
+    if ((atts.override_redirect != Tk_Attributes(tkwin)->override_redirect)
+	    || (atts.save_under != Tk_Attributes(tkwin)->save_under)) {
+	Tk_ChangeWindowAttributes(tkwin,
+		CWOverrideRedirect|CWSaveUnder, &atts);
+    }
+	
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWinGetWrapperWindow --
+ *
+ *	Gets the Windows HWND for a given window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns the wrapper window for a Tk window.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+HWND
+TkWinGetWrapperWindow(
+    Tk_Window tkwin)		/* The window we need the wrapper from */
+{
+    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *)tkwin;
+    return (winPtr->wmInfoPtr->wrapper);
+}
+
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWmFocusToplevel --
+ *
+ *	This is a utility procedure invoked by focus-management code. It
+ *	exists because of the extra wrapper windows that exist under
+ *	Unix; its job is to map from wrapper windows to the
+ *	corresponding toplevel windows.  On PCs and Macs there are no
+ *	wrapper windows so no mapping is necessary;  this procedure just
+ *	determines whether a window is a toplevel or not.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	If winPtr is a toplevel window, returns the pointer to the
+ *	window; otherwise returns NULL.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+TkWindow *
+TkWmFocusToplevel(winPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window that received a focus-related
+				 * event. */
+{
+    if (!(winPtr->flags & TK_TOP_LEVEL)) {
+	return NULL;
+    }
+    return winPtr;
+}
+ 
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpGetWrapperWindow --
+ *
+ *	This is a utility procedure invoked by focus-management code. It
+ *	maps to the wrapper for a top-level, which is just the same
+ *	as the top-level on Macs and PCs.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	If winPtr is a toplevel window, returns the pointer to the
+ *	window; otherwise returns NULL.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+TkWindow *
+TkpGetWrapperWindow(
+    TkWindow *winPtr)		/* Window that received a focus-related
+				 * event. */
+{
+    if (!(winPtr->flags & TK_TOP_LEVEL)) {
+	return NULL;
+    }
+    return winPtr;
+}
diff --git a/win/tkWinX.c b/win/tkWinX.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0b00186
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/tkWinX.c
@@ -0,0 +1,1020 @@
+/* 
+ * tkWinX.c --
+ *
+ *	This file contains Windows emulation procedures for X routines. 
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ * Copyright (c) 1994 Software Research Associates, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkWinX.c 1.51 97/09/02 13:06:57
+ */
+
+#include "tkInt.h"
+#include "tkWinInt.h"
+
+/*
+ * Definitions of extern variables supplied by this file.
+ */
+
+int tkpIsWin32s = -1;
+
+/*
+ * Declarations of static variables used in this file.
+ */
+
+static HINSTANCE tkInstance = (HINSTANCE) NULL;
+				/* Global application instance handle. */
+static TkDisplay *winDisplay;	/* Display that represents Windows screen. */
+static char winScreenName[] = ":0";
+				/* Default name of windows display. */
+static WNDCLASS childClass;	/* Window class for child windows. */
+static childClassInitialized = 0; /* Registered child class? */
+
+/*
+ * Forward declarations of procedures used in this file.
+ */
+
+static void		GenerateXEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd, UINT message,
+			    WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam));
+static unsigned int	GetState _ANSI_ARGS_((UINT message, WPARAM wParam,
+			    LPARAM lParam));
+static void 		GetTranslatedKey _ANSI_ARGS_((XKeyEvent *xkey));
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkGetServerInfo --
+ *
+ *	Given a window, this procedure returns information about
+ *	the window server for that window.  This procedure provides
+ *	the guts of the "winfo server" command.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkGetServerInfo(interp, tkwin)
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* The server information is returned in
+				 * this interpreter's result. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window;  this selects a
+				 * particular display and server. */
+{
+    char buffer[50];
+    OSVERSIONINFO info;
+
+    info.dwOSVersionInfoSize = sizeof(OSVERSIONINFO);
+    GetVersionEx(&info);
+    sprintf(buffer, "Windows %d.%d %d ", info.dwMajorVersion,
+	    info.dwMinorVersion, info.dwBuildNumber);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer,
+	    (info.dwPlatformId == VER_PLATFORM_WIN32s) ? "Win32s" : "Win32",
+	    (char *) NULL);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_GetHINSTANCE --
+ *
+ *	Retrieves the global instance handle used by the Tk library.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns the global instance handle.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+HINSTANCE
+Tk_GetHINSTANCE()
+{
+    return tkInstance;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWinXInit --
+ *
+ *	Initialize Xlib emulation layer.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Sets up various data structures.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkWinXInit(hInstance)
+    HINSTANCE hInstance;
+{
+    OSVERSIONINFO info;
+
+    info.dwOSVersionInfoSize = sizeof(OSVERSIONINFO);
+    GetVersionEx(&info);
+    tkpIsWin32s = (info.dwPlatformId == VER_PLATFORM_WIN32s);
+
+    if (childClassInitialized != 0) {
+	return;
+    }
+    childClassInitialized = 1;
+
+    tkInstance = hInstance;
+
+    childClass.style = CS_HREDRAW | CS_VREDRAW | CS_CLASSDC;
+    childClass.cbClsExtra = 0;
+    childClass.cbWndExtra = 0;
+    childClass.hInstance = hInstance;
+    childClass.hbrBackground = NULL;
+    childClass.lpszMenuName = NULL;
+
+    /*
+     * Register the Child window class.
+     */
+
+    childClass.lpszClassName = TK_WIN_CHILD_CLASS_NAME;
+    childClass.lpfnWndProc = TkWinChildProc;
+    childClass.hIcon = NULL;
+    childClass.hCursor = NULL;
+
+    if (!RegisterClass(&childClass)) {
+	panic("Unable to register TkChild class");
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWinXCleanup --
+ *
+ *	Removes the registered classes for Tk.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Removes window classes from the system.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkWinXCleanup(hInstance)
+    HINSTANCE hInstance;
+{
+    /*
+     * Clean up our own class.
+     */
+    
+    if (childClassInitialized) {
+        childClassInitialized = 0;
+        UnregisterClass(TK_WIN_CHILD_CLASS_NAME, hInstance);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * And let the window manager clean up its own class(es).
+     */
+    
+    TkWinWmCleanup(hInstance);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkGetDefaultScreenName --
+ *
+ *	Returns the name of the screen that Tk should use during
+ *	initialization.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns a statically allocated string.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+char *
+TkGetDefaultScreenName(interp, screenName)
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Not used. */
+    char *screenName;		/* If NULL, use default string. */
+{
+    if ((screenName == NULL) || (screenName[0] == '\0')) {
+	screenName = winScreenName;
+    }
+    return screenName;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpOpenDisplay --
+ *
+ *	Create the Display structure and fill it with device
+ *	specific information.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns a Display structure on success or NULL on failure.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Allocates a new Display structure.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+TkDisplay *
+TkpOpenDisplay(display_name)
+    char *display_name;
+{
+    Screen *screen;
+    HDC dc;
+    TkWinDrawable *twdPtr;
+    Display *display;
+
+    if (winDisplay != NULL) {
+	if (strcmp(winDisplay->display->display_name, display_name) == 0) {
+	    return winDisplay;
+	} else {
+	    return NULL;
+	}
+    }
+
+    display = (Display *) ckalloc(sizeof(Display));
+    display->display_name = (char *) ckalloc(strlen(display_name)+1);
+    strcpy(display->display_name, display_name);
+
+    display->cursor_font = 1;
+    display->nscreens = 1;
+    display->request = 1;
+    display->qlen = 0;
+
+    screen = (Screen *) ckalloc(sizeof(Screen));
+    screen->display = display;
+
+    dc = GetDC(NULL);
+    screen->width = GetDeviceCaps(dc, HORZRES);
+    screen->height = GetDeviceCaps(dc, VERTRES);
+    screen->mwidth = MulDiv(screen->width, 254,
+	    GetDeviceCaps(dc, LOGPIXELSX) * 10);
+    screen->mheight = MulDiv(screen->height, 254,
+	    GetDeviceCaps(dc, LOGPIXELSY) * 10);
+    
+    /*
+     * Set up the root window.
+     */
+
+    twdPtr = (TkWinDrawable*) ckalloc(sizeof(TkWinDrawable));
+    if (twdPtr == NULL) {
+	return None;
+    }
+    twdPtr->type = TWD_WINDOW;
+    twdPtr->window.winPtr = NULL;
+    twdPtr->window.handle = NULL;
+    screen->root = (Window)twdPtr;
+ 
+    /*
+     * On windows, when creating a color bitmap, need two pieces of 
+     * information: the number of color planes and the number of 
+     * pixels per plane.  Need to remember both quantities so that
+     * when constructing an HBITMAP for offscreen rendering, we can
+     * specify the correct value for the number of planes.  Otherwise
+     * the HBITMAP won't be compatible with the HWND and we'll just
+     * get blank spots copied onto the screen.
+     */
+
+    screen->ext_data = (XExtData *) GetDeviceCaps(dc, PLANES);
+    screen->root_depth = GetDeviceCaps(dc, BITSPIXEL) * (int) screen->ext_data;
+
+    screen->root_visual = (Visual *) ckalloc(sizeof(Visual));
+    screen->root_visual->visualid = 0;
+    if (GetDeviceCaps(dc, RASTERCAPS) & RC_PALETTE) {
+	screen->root_visual->map_entries = GetDeviceCaps(dc, SIZEPALETTE);
+	screen->root_visual->class = PseudoColor;
+	screen->root_visual->red_mask = 0x0;
+	screen->root_visual->green_mask = 0x0;
+	screen->root_visual->blue_mask = 0x0;
+    } else {
+	if (screen->root_depth == 4) {
+	    screen->root_visual->class = StaticColor;
+	    screen->root_visual->map_entries = 16;
+	} else if (screen->root_depth == 8) {
+	    screen->root_visual->class = StaticColor;
+	    screen->root_visual->map_entries = 256;
+	} else if (screen->root_depth == 12) {
+	    screen->root_visual->class = TrueColor;
+	    screen->root_visual->map_entries = 32;
+	    screen->root_visual->red_mask = 0xf0;
+	    screen->root_visual->green_mask = 0xf000;
+	    screen->root_visual->blue_mask = 0xf00000;
+	} else if (screen->root_depth == 16) {
+	    screen->root_visual->class = TrueColor;
+	    screen->root_visual->map_entries = 64;
+	    screen->root_visual->red_mask = 0xf8;
+	    screen->root_visual->green_mask = 0xfc00;
+	    screen->root_visual->blue_mask = 0xf80000;
+	} else if (screen->root_depth >= 24) {
+	    screen->root_visual->class = TrueColor;
+	    screen->root_visual->map_entries = 256;
+	    screen->root_visual->red_mask = 0xff;
+	    screen->root_visual->green_mask = 0xff00;
+	    screen->root_visual->blue_mask = 0xff0000;
+	}
+    }
+    screen->root_visual->bits_per_rgb = screen->root_depth;
+    ReleaseDC(NULL, dc);
+
+    /*
+     * Note that these pixel values are not palette relative.
+     */
+
+    screen->white_pixel = RGB(255, 255, 255);
+    screen->black_pixel = RGB(0, 0, 0);
+
+    display->screens = screen;
+    display->nscreens = 1;
+    display->default_screen = 0;
+    screen->cmap = XCreateColormap(display, None, screen->root_visual,
+	    AllocNone);
+    winDisplay = (TkDisplay *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkDisplay));
+    winDisplay->display = display;
+    return winDisplay;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpCloseDisplay --
+ *
+ *	Closes and deallocates a Display structure created with the
+ *	TkpOpenDisplay function.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Frees up memory.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpCloseDisplay(dispPtr)
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr;
+{
+    Display *display = dispPtr->display;
+    HWND hwnd;
+
+    if (dispPtr != winDisplay) {
+        panic("TkpCloseDisplay: tried to call TkpCloseDisplay on another display");
+        return;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Force the clipboard to be rendered if we are the clipboard owner.
+     */
+    
+    if (dispPtr->clipWindow) {
+	hwnd = Tk_GetHWND(Tk_WindowId(dispPtr->clipWindow));
+	if (GetClipboardOwner() == hwnd) {
+	    OpenClipboard(hwnd);
+	    EmptyClipboard();
+	    TkWinClipboardRender(dispPtr, CF_TEXT);
+	    CloseClipboard();
+	}
+    }
+
+    winDisplay = NULL;
+
+    if (display->display_name != (char *) NULL) {
+        ckfree(display->display_name);
+    }
+    if (display->screens != (Screen *) NULL) {
+        if (display->screens->root_visual != NULL) {
+            ckfree((char *) display->screens->root_visual);
+        }
+        if (display->screens->root != None) {
+            ckfree((char *) display->screens->root);
+        }
+        if (display->screens->cmap != None) {
+            XFreeColormap(display, display->screens->cmap);
+        }
+        ckfree((char *) display->screens);
+    }
+    ckfree((char *) display);
+    ckfree((char *) dispPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * XBell --
+ *
+ *	Generate a beep.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Plays a sounds out the system speakers.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+XBell(display, percent)
+    Display* display;
+    int percent;
+{
+    MessageBeep(MB_OK);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWinChildProc --
+ *
+ *	Callback from Windows whenever an event occurs on a child
+ *	window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Standard Windows return value.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	May process events off the Tk event queue.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+LRESULT CALLBACK
+TkWinChildProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
+    HWND hwnd;
+    UINT message;
+    WPARAM wParam;
+    LPARAM lParam;
+{
+    LRESULT result;
+
+    switch (message) {
+	case WM_SETCURSOR:
+	    /*
+	     * Short circuit the WM_SETCURSOR message since we set
+	     * the cursor elsewhere.
+	     */
+
+	    result = TRUE;
+	    break;
+
+	case WM_CREATE:
+	case WM_ERASEBKGND:
+	case WM_WINDOWPOSCHANGED:
+	    result = 0;
+	    break;
+
+	case WM_PAINT:
+	    GenerateXEvent(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam);
+	    result = DefWindowProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam);
+	    break;
+
+        case TK_CLAIMFOCUS:
+	case TK_GEOMETRYREQ:
+	case TK_ATTACHWINDOW:
+	case TK_DETACHWINDOW:
+	    result =  TkWinEmbeddedEventProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam);
+	    break;
+
+	default:
+	    if (!Tk_TranslateWinEvent(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam,
+		    &result)) {
+		result = DefWindowProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam);
+	    }
+	    break;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Handle any newly queued events before returning control to Windows.
+     */
+
+    Tcl_ServiceAll();
+    return result;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_TranslateWinEvent --
+ *
+ *	This function is called by widget window procedures to handle
+ *	the translation from Win32 events to Tk events.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns 1 if the event was handled, else 0.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Depends on the event.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+Tk_TranslateWinEvent(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam, resultPtr)
+    HWND hwnd;
+    UINT message;
+    WPARAM wParam;
+    LPARAM lParam;
+    LRESULT *resultPtr;
+{
+    *resultPtr = 0;
+    switch (message) {
+	case WM_RENDERFORMAT: {
+	    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_HWNDToWindow(hwnd);
+	    if (winPtr) {
+		TkWinClipboardRender(winPtr->dispPtr, wParam);
+	    }
+	    return 1;
+	}
+
+	case WM_COMMAND:
+	case WM_NOTIFY:
+	case WM_VSCROLL:
+	case WM_HSCROLL: {
+	    /*
+	     * Reflect these messages back to the sender so that they
+	     * can be handled by the window proc for the control.  Note
+	     * that we need to be careful not to reflect a message that
+	     * is targeted to this window, or we will loop.
+	     */
+
+	    HWND target = (message == WM_NOTIFY)
+		? ((NMHDR*)lParam)->hwndFrom : (HWND) lParam;
+	    if (target && target != hwnd) {
+		*resultPtr = SendMessage(target, message, wParam, lParam);
+		return 1;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	}
+
+	case WM_LBUTTONDOWN:
+	case WM_LBUTTONDBLCLK:
+	case WM_MBUTTONDOWN:
+	case WM_MBUTTONDBLCLK:
+	case WM_RBUTTONDOWN:
+	case WM_RBUTTONDBLCLK:
+	case WM_LBUTTONUP:
+	case WM_MBUTTONUP:
+	case WM_RBUTTONUP:
+	case WM_MOUSEMOVE:
+	    Tk_PointerEvent(hwnd, (short) LOWORD(lParam),
+		    (short) HIWORD(lParam));
+	    return 1;
+
+	case WM_CLOSE:
+	case WM_SETFOCUS:
+	case WM_KILLFOCUS:
+	case WM_DESTROYCLIPBOARD:
+	case WM_CHAR:
+	case WM_SYSKEYDOWN:
+	case WM_SYSKEYUP:
+	case WM_KEYDOWN:
+	case WM_KEYUP:
+ 	    GenerateXEvent(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam);
+	    return 1;
+    }
+    return 0;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * GenerateXEvent --
+ *
+ *	This routine generates an X event from the corresponding
+ * 	Windows event.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Queues one or more X events.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+GenerateXEvent(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
+    HWND hwnd;
+    UINT message;
+    WPARAM wParam;
+    LPARAM lParam;
+{
+    XEvent event;
+    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *)Tk_HWNDToWindow(hwnd);
+
+    if (!winPtr || winPtr->window == None) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    event.xany.serial = winPtr->display->request++;
+    event.xany.send_event = False;
+    event.xany.display = winPtr->display;
+    event.xany.window = winPtr->window;
+
+    switch (message) {
+	case WM_PAINT: {
+	    PAINTSTRUCT ps;
+
+	    event.type = Expose;
+	    BeginPaint(hwnd, &ps);
+	    event.xexpose.x = ps.rcPaint.left;
+	    event.xexpose.y = ps.rcPaint.top;
+	    event.xexpose.width = ps.rcPaint.right - ps.rcPaint.left;
+	    event.xexpose.height = ps.rcPaint.bottom - ps.rcPaint.top;
+	    EndPaint(hwnd, &ps);
+	    event.xexpose.count = 0;
+	    break;
+	}
+
+	case WM_CLOSE:
+	    event.type = ClientMessage;
+	    event.xclient.message_type =
+		Tk_InternAtom((Tk_Window) winPtr, "WM_PROTOCOLS");
+	    event.xclient.format = 32;
+	    event.xclient.data.l[0] =
+		Tk_InternAtom((Tk_Window) winPtr, "WM_DELETE_WINDOW");
+	    break;
+
+	case WM_SETFOCUS:
+	case WM_KILLFOCUS: {
+	    TkWindow *otherWinPtr = (TkWindow *)Tk_HWNDToWindow((HWND) wParam);
+	    
+	    /*
+	     * Compare toplevel windows to avoid reporting focus
+	     * changes within the same toplevel.
+	     */
+
+	    while (!(winPtr->flags & TK_TOP_LEVEL)) {
+		winPtr = winPtr->parentPtr;
+		if (winPtr == NULL) {
+		    return;
+		}
+	    }
+	    while (otherWinPtr && !(otherWinPtr->flags & TK_TOP_LEVEL)) {
+		otherWinPtr = otherWinPtr->parentPtr;
+	    }
+	    if (otherWinPtr == winPtr) {
+		return;
+	    }
+
+	    event.xany.window = winPtr->window;
+	    event.type = (message == WM_SETFOCUS) ? FocusIn : FocusOut;
+	    event.xfocus.mode = NotifyNormal;
+	    event.xfocus.detail = NotifyNonlinear;
+	    break;
+	}
+
+	case WM_DESTROYCLIPBOARD:
+	    event.type = SelectionClear;
+	    event.xselectionclear.selection =
+		Tk_InternAtom((Tk_Window)winPtr, "CLIPBOARD");
+	    event.xselectionclear.time = TkpGetMS();
+	    break;
+	    
+	case WM_CHAR:
+	case WM_SYSKEYDOWN:
+	case WM_SYSKEYUP:
+	case WM_KEYDOWN:
+	case WM_KEYUP: {
+	    unsigned int state = GetState(message, wParam, lParam);
+	    Time time = TkpGetMS();
+	    POINT clientPoint;
+	    POINTS rootPoint;	/* Note: POINT and POINTS are different */
+	    DWORD msgPos;
+
+	    /*
+	     * Compute the screen and window coordinates of the event.
+	     */
+	    
+	    msgPos = GetMessagePos();
+	    rootPoint = MAKEPOINTS(msgPos);
+	    clientPoint.x = rootPoint.x;
+	    clientPoint.y = rootPoint.y;
+	    ScreenToClient(hwnd, &clientPoint);
+
+	    /*
+	     * Set up the common event fields.
+	     */
+
+	    event.xbutton.root = RootWindow(winPtr->display,
+		    winPtr->screenNum);
+	    event.xbutton.subwindow = None;
+	    event.xbutton.x = clientPoint.x;
+	    event.xbutton.y = clientPoint.y;
+	    event.xbutton.x_root = rootPoint.x;
+	    event.xbutton.y_root = rootPoint.y;
+	    event.xbutton.state = state;
+	    event.xbutton.time = time;
+	    event.xbutton.same_screen = True;
+
+	    /*
+	     * Now set up event specific fields.
+	     */
+
+	    switch (message) {
+		case WM_SYSKEYDOWN:
+		case WM_KEYDOWN:
+		    /*
+		     * Check for translated characters in the event queue.
+		     * Setting xany.send_event to -1 indicates to the
+		     * Windows implementation of XLookupString that this
+		     * event was generated by windows and that the Windows
+		     * extension xkey.trans_chars is filled with the
+		     * characters that came from the TranslateMessage
+		     * call.  If it is not -1, xkey.keycode is the
+		     * virtual key being sent programmatically by generic
+		     * code.
+		     */
+
+		    event.type = KeyPress;
+		    event.xany.send_event = -1;
+		    event.xkey.keycode = wParam;
+		    GetTranslatedKey(&event.xkey);
+		    break;
+
+		case WM_SYSKEYUP:
+		case WM_KEYUP:
+		    /*
+		     * We don't check for translated characters on keyup
+		     * because Tk won't know what to do with them.  Instead, we
+		     * wait for the WM_CHAR messages which will follow.
+		     */
+		    event.type = KeyRelease;
+		    event.xkey.keycode = wParam;
+		    event.xkey.nchars = 0;
+		    break;
+
+		case WM_CHAR:
+		    /*
+		     * Synthesize both a KeyPress and a KeyRelease.
+		     */
+
+		    event.type = KeyPress;
+		    event.xany.send_event = -1;
+		    event.xkey.keycode = 0;
+		    event.xkey.nchars = 1;
+		    event.xkey.trans_chars[0] = (char) wParam;
+		    Tk_QueueWindowEvent(&event, TCL_QUEUE_TAIL);
+		    event.type = KeyRelease;
+		    break;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	}
+
+	default:
+	    return;
+    }
+    Tk_QueueWindowEvent(&event, TCL_QUEUE_TAIL);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * GetState --
+ *
+ *	This function constructs a state mask for the mouse buttons 
+ *	and modifier keys as they were before the event occured.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns a composite value of all the modifier and button state
+ *	flags that were set at the time the event occurred.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static unsigned int
+GetState(message, wParam, lParam)
+    UINT message;		/* Win32 message type */
+    WPARAM wParam;		/* wParam of message, used if key message */
+    LPARAM lParam;		/* lParam of message, used if key message */
+{
+    int mask;
+    int prevState;		/* 1 if key was previously down */
+    unsigned int state = TkWinGetModifierState();
+
+    /*
+     * If the event is a key press or release, we check for modifier
+     * keys so we can report the state of the world before the event.
+     */
+
+    if (message == WM_SYSKEYDOWN || message == WM_KEYDOWN
+	    || message == WM_SYSKEYUP || message == WM_KEYUP) {
+	mask = 0;
+	prevState = HIWORD(lParam) & KF_REPEAT;
+	switch(wParam) {
+	    case VK_SHIFT:
+		mask = ShiftMask;
+		break;
+	    case VK_CONTROL:
+		mask = ControlMask;
+		break;
+	    case VK_MENU:
+		mask = Mod2Mask;
+		break;
+	    case VK_CAPITAL:
+		if (message == WM_SYSKEYDOWN || message == WM_KEYDOWN) {
+		    mask = LockMask;
+		    prevState = ((state & mask) ^ prevState) ? 0 : 1;
+		}
+		break;
+	    case VK_NUMLOCK:
+		if (message == WM_SYSKEYDOWN || message == WM_KEYDOWN) {
+		    mask = Mod1Mask;
+		    prevState = ((state & mask) ^ prevState) ? 0 : 1;
+		}
+		break;
+	    case VK_SCROLL:
+		if (message == WM_SYSKEYDOWN || message == WM_KEYDOWN) {
+		    mask = Mod3Mask;
+		    prevState = ((state & mask) ^ prevState) ? 0 : 1;
+		}
+		break;
+	}
+	if (prevState) {
+	    state |= mask;
+	} else {
+	    state &= ~mask;
+	}
+    }
+    return state;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * GetTranslatedKey --
+ *
+ *	Retrieves WM_CHAR messages that are placed on the system queue
+ *	by the TranslateMessage system call and places them in the
+ *	given KeyPress event.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Sets the trans_chars and nchars member of the key event.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Removes any WM_CHAR messages waiting on the top of the system
+ *	event queue.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+GetTranslatedKey(xkey)
+    XKeyEvent *xkey;
+{
+    MSG msg;
+    
+    xkey->nchars = 0;
+
+    while (xkey->nchars < XMaxTransChars
+	    && PeekMessage(&msg, NULL, 0, 0, PM_NOREMOVE)) {
+	if (msg.message == WM_CHAR) {
+	    xkey->trans_chars[xkey->nchars] = (char) msg.wParam;
+	    xkey->nchars++;
+	    GetMessage(&msg, NULL, 0, 0);
+	    if ((msg.message == WM_CHAR) && (msg.lParam & 0x20000000)) {
+		xkey->state = 0;
+	    }
+	} else {
+	    break;
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_FreeXId --
+ *
+ *	This inteface is not needed under Windows.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+Tk_FreeXId(display, xid)
+    Display *display;
+    XID xid;
+{
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWinResendEvent --
+ *
+ *	This function converts an X event into a Windows event and
+ *	invokes the specified windo procedure.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	A standard Windows result.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Invokes the window procedure
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+LRESULT
+TkWinResendEvent(wndproc, hwnd, eventPtr)
+    WNDPROC wndproc;
+    HWND hwnd;
+    XEvent *eventPtr;
+{
+    UINT msg;
+    WPARAM wparam;
+    LPARAM lparam;
+
+    if (eventPtr->type == ButtonPress) {
+	switch (eventPtr->xbutton.button) {
+	    case Button1:
+		msg = WM_LBUTTONDOWN;
+		wparam = MK_LBUTTON;
+		break;
+	    case Button2:
+		msg = WM_MBUTTONDOWN;
+		wparam = MK_MBUTTON;
+		break;
+	    case Button3:
+		msg = WM_RBUTTONDOWN;
+		wparam = MK_RBUTTON;
+		break;
+	    default:
+		return 0;
+	}
+	if (eventPtr->xbutton.state & Button1Mask) {
+	    wparam |= MK_LBUTTON;
+	}
+	if (eventPtr->xbutton.state & Button2Mask) {
+	    wparam |= MK_MBUTTON;
+	}
+	if (eventPtr->xbutton.state & Button3Mask) {
+	    wparam |= MK_RBUTTON;
+	}
+	if (eventPtr->xbutton.state & ShiftMask) {
+	    wparam |= MK_SHIFT;
+	}
+	if (eventPtr->xbutton.state & ControlMask) {
+	    wparam |= MK_CONTROL;
+	}
+	lparam = MAKELPARAM((short) eventPtr->xbutton.x,
+		(short) eventPtr->xbutton.y);
+    } else {
+	return 0;
+    }
+    return CallWindowProc(wndproc, hwnd, msg, wparam, lparam);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpGetMS --
+ *
+ *	Return a relative time in milliseconds.  It doesn't matter
+ *	when the epoch was.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Number of milliseconds.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+unsigned long
+TkpGetMS()
+{
+    return GetCurrentTime();
+}
diff --git a/win/winMain.c b/win/winMain.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f263339
--- /dev/null
+++ b/win/winMain.c
@@ -0,0 +1,323 @@
+/* 
+ * winMain.c --
+ *
+ *	Main entry point for wish and other Tk-based applications.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) winMain.c 1.33 96/12/17 12:56:14
+ */
+
+#include <tk.h>
+#define WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN
+#include <windows.h>
+#undef WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN
+#include <malloc.h>
+#include <locale.h>
+
+/*
+ * The following declarations refer to internal Tk routines.  These
+ * interfaces are available for use, but are not supported.
+ */
+
+EXTERN void		TkConsoleCreate(void);
+EXTERN int		TkConsoleInit(Tcl_Interp *interp);
+
+/*
+ * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ */
+
+static void		setargv _ANSI_ARGS_((int *argcPtr, char ***argvPtr));
+static void		WishPanic _ANSI_ARGS_(TCL_VARARGS(char *,format));
+
+#ifdef TK_TEST
+EXTERN int		Tktest_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp);
+#endif /* TK_TEST */
+
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * WinMain --
+ *
+ *	Main entry point from Windows.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns false if initialization fails, otherwise it never
+ *	returns. 
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Just about anything, since from here we call arbitrary Tcl code.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int APIENTRY
+WinMain(hInstance, hPrevInstance, lpszCmdLine, nCmdShow)
+    HINSTANCE hInstance;
+    HINSTANCE hPrevInstance;
+    LPSTR lpszCmdLine;
+    int nCmdShow;
+{
+    char **argv, *p;
+    int argc;
+    char buffer[MAX_PATH];
+
+    Tcl_SetPanicProc(WishPanic);
+
+    /*
+     * Set up the default locale to be standard "C" locale so parsing
+     * is performed correctly.
+     */
+
+    setlocale(LC_ALL, "C");
+
+
+    /*
+     * Increase the application queue size from default value of 8.
+     * At the default value, cross application SendMessage of WM_KILLFOCUS
+     * will fail because the handler will not be able to do a PostMessage!
+     * This is only needed for Windows 3.x, since NT dynamically expands
+     * the queue.
+     */
+    SetMessageQueue(64);
+
+    /*
+     * Create the console channels and install them as the standard
+     * channels.  All I/O will be discarded until TkConsoleInit is
+     * called to attach the console to a text widget.
+     */
+
+    TkConsoleCreate();
+
+    setargv(&argc, &argv);
+
+    /*
+     * Replace argv[0] with full pathname of executable, and forward
+     * slashes substituted for backslashes.
+     */
+
+    GetModuleFileName(NULL, buffer, sizeof(buffer));
+    argv[0] = buffer;
+    for (p = buffer; *p != '\0'; p++) {
+	if (*p == '\\') {
+	    *p = '/';
+	}
+    }
+
+    Tk_Main(argc, argv, Tcl_AppInit);
+    return 1;
+}
+
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tcl_AppInit --
+ *
+ *	This procedure performs application-specific initialization.
+ *	Most applications, especially those that incorporate additional
+ *	packages, will have their own version of this procedure.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns a standard Tcl completion code, and leaves an error
+ *	message in interp->result if an error occurs.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Depends on the startup script.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+Tcl_AppInit(interp)
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for application. */
+{
+    if (Tcl_Init(interp) == TCL_ERROR) {
+	goto error;
+    }
+    if (Tk_Init(interp) == TCL_ERROR) {
+	goto error;
+    }
+    Tcl_StaticPackage(interp, "Tk", Tk_Init, Tk_SafeInit);
+
+    /*
+     * Initialize the console only if we are running as an interactive
+     * application.
+     */
+
+    if (TkConsoleInit(interp) == TCL_ERROR) {
+	goto error;
+    }
+
+#ifdef TK_TEST
+    if (Tktest_Init(interp) == TCL_ERROR) {
+	goto error;
+    }
+    Tcl_StaticPackage(interp, "Tktest", Tktest_Init,
+            (Tcl_PackageInitProc *) NULL);
+#endif /* TK_TEST */
+
+    Tcl_SetVar(interp, "tcl_rcFileName", "~/wishrc.tcl", TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+error:
+    WishPanic(interp->result);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * WishPanic --
+ *
+ *	Display a message and exit.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Exits the program.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+WishPanic TCL_VARARGS_DEF(char *,arg1)
+{
+    va_list argList;
+    char buf[1024];
+    char *format;
+    
+    format = TCL_VARARGS_START(char *,arg1,argList);
+    vsprintf(buf, format, argList);
+
+    MessageBeep(MB_ICONEXCLAMATION);
+    MessageBox(NULL, buf, "Fatal Error in Wish",
+	    MB_ICONSTOP | MB_OK | MB_TASKMODAL | MB_SETFOREGROUND);
+#ifdef _MSC_VER
+    _asm {
+        int 3
+    }
+#endif
+    ExitProcess(1);
+}
+/*
+ *-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * setargv --
+ *
+ *	Parse the Windows command line string into argc/argv.  Done here
+ *	because we don't trust the builtin argument parser in crt0.  
+ *	Windows applications are responsible for breaking their command
+ *	line into arguments.
+ *
+ *	2N backslashes + quote -> N backslashes + begin quoted string
+ *	2N + 1 backslashes + quote -> literal
+ *	N backslashes + non-quote -> literal
+ *	quote + quote in a quoted string -> single quote
+ *	quote + quote not in quoted string -> empty string
+ *	quote -> begin quoted string
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Fills argcPtr with the number of arguments and argvPtr with the
+ *	array of arguments.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Memory allocated.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+setargv(argcPtr, argvPtr)
+    int *argcPtr;		/* Filled with number of argument strings. */
+    char ***argvPtr;		/* Filled with argument strings (malloc'd). */
+{
+    char *cmdLine, *p, *arg, *argSpace;
+    char **argv;
+    int argc, size, inquote, copy, slashes;
+    
+    cmdLine = GetCommandLine();
+
+    /*
+     * Precompute an overly pessimistic guess at the number of arguments
+     * in the command line by counting non-space spans.
+     */
+
+    size = 2;
+    for (p = cmdLine; *p != '\0'; p++) {
+	if (isspace(*p)) {
+	    size++;
+	    while (isspace(*p)) {
+		p++;
+	    }
+	    if (*p == '\0') {
+		break;
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+    argSpace = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) (size * sizeof(char *) 
+	    + strlen(cmdLine) + 1));
+    argv = (char **) argSpace;
+    argSpace += size * sizeof(char *);
+    size--;
+
+    p = cmdLine;
+    for (argc = 0; argc < size; argc++) {
+	argv[argc] = arg = argSpace;
+	while (isspace(*p)) {
+	    p++;
+	}
+	if (*p == '\0') {
+	    break;
+	}
+
+	inquote = 0;
+	slashes = 0;
+	while (1) {
+	    copy = 1;
+	    while (*p == '\\') {
+		slashes++;
+		p++;
+	    }
+	    if (*p == '"') {
+		if ((slashes & 1) == 0) {
+		    copy = 0;
+		    if ((inquote) && (p[1] == '"')) {
+			p++;
+			copy = 1;
+		    } else {
+			inquote = !inquote;
+		    }
+                }
+                slashes >>= 1;
+            }
+
+            while (slashes) {
+		*arg = '\\';
+		arg++;
+		slashes--;
+	    }
+
+	    if ((*p == '\0') || (!inquote && isspace(*p))) {
+		break;
+	    }
+	    if (copy != 0) {
+		*arg = *p;
+		arg++;
+	    }
+	    p++;
+        }
+	*arg = '\0';
+	argSpace = arg + 1;
+    }
+    argv[argc] = NULL;
+
+    *argcPtr = argc;
+    *argvPtr = argv;
+}
+